Service Guide

Agilent Technologies 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC Spectrum Analyzers

Manufacturing Part Number: 08564-90040 Printed in USA

March 2001
Supersedes: December 1999 Copyright 1995 2001 Agilent Technologies, Inc.

Notice
Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and tness for a particular purpose. Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

Certication
Agilent Technologies certies that this product met its published specications at the time of shipment from the factory. Agilent Technologies further certies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology, to the extent allowed by the Institute's calibration facility, and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members.

General Safety Considerations

The following safety notes are used throughout this manual. Familiarize yourself with these notes before operating this instrument.
WARNING

Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss of life. Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met. Always use the three-prong AC power cord supplied with this product. Failure to ensure adequate grounding may cause product damage.

CAUTION

CAUTION

Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met. This is a Safety Class 1 Product (provided with a protective earth ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall be inserted only in a socket outlet provided with a protected earth contact. Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside of the product is likely to make the product dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited. No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualied personnel. To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers. Before this instrument is switched on, make sure it has been properly grounded through the protective conductor of the ac power cable to a socket outlet provided with protective earth contact. Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor, inside or outside the instrument, or disconnection of the protective earth terminal can result in personal injury. If this instrument is used in a manner not specied by Agilent Technologies, the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired. There are many points in the instrument which can, if contacted, cause personal injury. Be extremely careful. Any adjustments or service procedures that require operation of the instrument with protective covers removed should be performed only by trained service personnel.

WARNING

WARNING

WARNING

CAUTION

Before this instrument is switched on, make sure its primary power circuitry has been adapted to the voltage of the ac power source. Failure to set the ac power input to the correct voltage could cause damage to the instrument when the ac power cable is plugged in. This product conforms to Enclosure Protection IP 2 0 according to IEC-529. The enclosure protects against nger access to hazardous parts within the enclosure; the enclosure does not protect against the entrance of water.

Warranty
This Agilent Technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment. During the warranty period, Agilent Technologies will, at its option, either repair or replace products that prove to be defective. For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country. Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and rmware designated by Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument. Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of the instrument, or software, or rmware will be uninterrupted or error-free.

LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unauthorized modication or misuse, operation outside of the environmental specications for the product, or improper site preparation or maintenance. NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYERS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.

Contents

1. General Information Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Use this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conventions Used in this Guide: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documentation Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differences Between 8560 EC-Series and E-Series Spectrum Analyzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Numbers and Repair Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reducing Potential for ESD Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static-Safe Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning Instruments for Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Original Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales and Service Ofces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Adjustment/Diagnostic Software Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Which Adjustments Should Be Performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustment Tools Table 2-1 on page 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument Service Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spectrum Analyzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller (Computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warm-up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Adjustment/Diagnostic Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Load the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Use the Adjustment Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automated Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Initial Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. LO Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. YTO FM Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. LOMA Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Fast Zero Span (E-Series, Non-Option 007) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26 27 27 27 28 29 30 32 33 34 34 35 35 35 35 37 44

48 49 50 50 51 54 54 54 55 55 57 58 58 59 62 63 64 64 64 64 66 66 66 66 68 68 68 68 69

Contents

Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 6. 3rd Amp/2nd IF Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 7. Cal Out Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 8. Front End Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Related Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 9. IF Bandpass Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 10. IF Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Related Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 11. DC Log Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Related Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 12. Sampling Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 To Use the Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 DAC Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Latch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Display IF CAL Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Cal Oscillator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 IF Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 RF Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 3. Manual Adjustment Procedures Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Which Adjustments Should Be Performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Adjustable and Factory-Selected Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Adjustment Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Instrument Service Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 1. High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment (8564E and 8565E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Contents

Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 2. Display Adjustment (8564E and 8565E). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Preliminary Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Cutoff Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Deection Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Intensity Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Fast Zero Span Adjustments (Non-Option 007, E-series Instruments Only) . . . . . . . . . . 108 3. IF Bandpass Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 LC Bandpass Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 XTAL Bandpass Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 4. IF Amplitude Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Related Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 A5 Reference Attenuator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 A5 Adjustment Verication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 5. DC Log Amplier Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Related Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 A4 Limiter Phase Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 A4 Linear Fidelity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 A4 LOG Fidelity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 6. Sampling Oscillator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Sampling Oscillator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Sampler Match Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 7. YTO Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Contents

Related Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 YTO Main Coil Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 YTO FM Coil Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 8. Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 9. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment OCXO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 10. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment TCXO (Option 103) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 11. Demodulator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 12. External Mixer Bias Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 13. External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 14. Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment (serial prex 3517A and below) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 15. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Contents

Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16. 600 MHz Reference Adjustment (serial prex 3406A and above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3a. Manual Adjustment Procedures: 3335A Source not Available What You'll Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4a. IF Amplitude Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 Reference Attenuator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 Adjustment Verication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5a. DC Log Amplier Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4 Limiter Phase Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4 Linear Fidelity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4 LOG Fidelity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Assembly Replacement Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access to Internal Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal of the Front Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal of the Display Driver Board, Inverter Board, and LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal of the Backlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal of the Line Switch from the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal of the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement of the Front Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement of the Display Driver Board, Inverter Board, and LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Backlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement of the Line Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

155 155 155 156 156 159 159 159 159 159 159

162 163 164 164 164 164 165 165 167 167 169 169 169 169 170 171 172 173

176 177 178 179 179 180 180 182 183 183 185 185 187 189 189

Contents

Replacement of the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Procedure 3. A1A1 Keyboard/Front Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Procedure 4. A1A2 RPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Procedure 6A. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8564EC and 8565EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Procedure 6B. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8564E and 8565E). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Procedure 7. A6A1 High Voltage Assembly (8564E and 8565E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 A7 LO Multiplier/Amplier (LOMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 A8 Low Band Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 A9 Input Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 A11 YTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 A13 Second Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Procedure 10. A16 Fast ADC and A17 CRT Driver (8564E and 8565E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Procedure 11. B1 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

10

Contents

Procedure 12. BT1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8564E and 8565E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement (Using Contact Removal Tool, part number 8710-1791) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement (without Contact Removal Tool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 15. EEROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 16. A21 OCXO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Replaceable Parts Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Mail-Order System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Phone-Order System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts List Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

238 238 239 239 241 244 244 250 251 254 254 256 256 258

260 261 261 262 263 264 270

6. Major Assembly and Cable Locations Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 7. General Troubleshooting Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Level Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ribbon Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Cal Data Softkey Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting to a Functional Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Multiple Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Message Elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADC Errors (200 to 299) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LO and RF Hardware/Firmware Failures (300 to 399) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic IF Errors (400 to 599) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Errors (600 to 651) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital and Checksum Errors (700 to 799) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Problem (718) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model/Option Number Errors (719 to 720) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM Check Error (721) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Errors (750 to 759) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

316 316 316 317 317 322 324 326 327 327 327 329 330 334 346 346 348 348 349 349

11

Contents

Fast ADC Error (760) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Option Module Errors (800 to 899) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 User-Generated Errors (900 to 999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Block Diagram Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 RF Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Synthesizer Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 IF Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 ADC/Interface Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Controller Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Display/Power Supply Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 8. ADC/Interface Section Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Keyboard/RPG Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 RPG Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Triggering or Video Gating Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Preselector Peaking Control (Real Time DAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 Flatness Control (RF Gain DACs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 A3 Assembly Video Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Log Offset/Log Expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Video MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Video Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Video Filter Buffer Amplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Positive/Negative Peak Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Peak Detector Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Rosenfell Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 ADC MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Variable Gain Amplier (VGA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Track and Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 A3 Assembly ADC Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 ADC Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 ADC Start/Stop Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 ADC ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 Ramp Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 A3 Assembly Control Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Analog Bus Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Analog Bus Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Interface Strobe Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 A16 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments) . . . . . . .411 Video Input Scaling Ampliers and Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 8-Bit Flash ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Peak/Pit Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 32 K-Byte Static RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments) 415 CPU Interface and Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Reference Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 Clock and Sample Rate Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418

12

Contents

Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-Bit Post-Trigger Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-Bit (32 K) Circular Address Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Trigger Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. IF Section Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting the Cal Oscillator on A4 Using Diagnostic Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting A5 Using Diagnostic Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic IF Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance Test Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF Gain Uncertainty Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scale Fidelity Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolution Bandwidths Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Log Amplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear Ampliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency Counter Prescaler/Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/FM Demodulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 kHz IF Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 MHz IF Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 kHz and 10.7 MHz IF Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6952 MHz VCXO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LO Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronous Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Log Offset/Gain Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 IF Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common IF Signature Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 kHz and 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Gains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cal Oscillator Unlock at Beginning of IF Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inadequate CAL OSC AMPTD Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Hz to 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Out of Specication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low-Pass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sweep Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/FM Demodulation, Audio Amplier, and Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

419 420 420 421

428 430 431 435 437 438 439 441 441 442 442 443 443 444 447 447 448 448 449 450 450 451 451 452 452 453 454 455 456 462 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 478 479 479

13

Contents

10. Controller Section Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Digital Signature Analysis (8564E and 8565E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 Display Problems (8564E and 8565E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Line Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Blanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Display Jumbled or Trace Off Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 Bad Characters or Graticule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Long Lines Dimmer than Short Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Analog Zero Span Problems (8564E and 8565E, Non-Option 007) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Frequency-Count Marker Problems (8564EC and 8565EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Frequency-Count Marker Problems (8564E and 8565E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Frequency Counter (8564EC and 8565EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 Frequency Counter (8564E and 8565E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Video Input Scaling Ampliers and Limiter (8564EC and 8565EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 12-Bit Flash ADC (8564EC and 8565EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 32 K-Byte Static RAM (8564EC and 8565EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Reference Clock (8564EC and 8565EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 16 MHz Harmonic Filter (8564EC and 8565EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 State- and Trace-Storage Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 Keyboard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 11. Synthesizer Section Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Test Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Troubleshooting Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 General PLL Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 PLL Locked at Wrong Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Unlocked PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Operation (100 MHz VCXO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Troubleshooting (100 MHz VCXO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Third LO Driver Amplier (100 MHz VCXO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 Operation (600 MHz SAWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 Troubleshooting (600 MHz SAWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 Third LO Driver Amplier (600 MHz SAWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Unlocked Offset Lock Loop (Sampling Oscillator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Unlocked YTO PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Troubleshooting an Unlocked YTO PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Unlocked Fractional N PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Conrming an Unlocked Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Fractional N PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561

14

Contents

Frequency Span Accuracy Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determining the 1st LO Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conrming Span Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YTO Main Coil Span Problems (LO Spans >20 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YTO FM Coil Span Problems (LO Spans 2.01 MHz to 20 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fractional N Span Problems (LO Spans 2 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1st LO Span Problems (All Spans) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1st LO Span Problems (Multiband Sweeps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phase Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phase Noise in Locked versus Unlocked Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference versus Reference PLL Phase Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fractional N versus Offset PLL or YTO PLL Phase Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fractional N PLL Phase Noise (08564-60007 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sampler and Sampler IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sweep Generator Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A21 OCXO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. RF Section Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Band Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Band Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low and High Band Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7 LO Multiplier and Distribution Amplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8 Low Band Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A9 Input Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A10 YIG-Tuned Filter/Mixer (RYTHM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A12 Switched Barium-Tuned Mixer (SBTX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A13 Second Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A14 Frequency Control Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LO Multiplier/Amplier Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Latch for Band-Switch Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YTF Driver Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A15 RF Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conrming a Faulty Third Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conrming Third Converter Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Third Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flatness Compensation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIN Switch Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIG ID Oscillator (Option 008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 MHz Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. Display/Power Supply Section Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCD Display (8564EC and 8565EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of A17 Display Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blank Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

568 568 569 570 570 572 572 573 575 575 576 576 576 577 579 585

594 595 599 600 601 602 604 605 608 609 610 612 612 615 615 621 621 621 622 624 624 625 626

634 635 636 637 637

15

Contents

Dim Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 Troubleshooting Using the VGA Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 Troubleshooting Using Part Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 CRT Display (8564E and 8565E ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641 Troubleshooting Using the TAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Blank Display (Using the TAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 Blank Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 Blanking Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 Display Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 Focus Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 Intensity Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654 Troubleshooting Using the TAM (8564E and 8565E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 A6 Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 Dead Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 Line Fuse Blowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 Supply Restarting Every 1.5 Seconds (Kick Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 Low Voltage Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 High Voltage Supplies (8564E and 8565E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662 CRT Supply Dropping Out (8564E and 8565E). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 Blanking Signal (8564E and 8565E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 Buck Regulator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 DC-DC Converter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 14. Component-Level Information Packets Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672

16

Figures

Figure 1-1 . Serial Number Label Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Figure 1-2 . Earlier Serial Number Label Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Figure 1-3 . Example of a Static-Safe Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Figure 1-4 . Spectrum Analyzer Shipping Container and Cushioning Materials . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Figure 2-1 . LO Frequency Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Figure 2-2 . LO Frequency Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Figure 2-3 . YTO FM Coil Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Figure 2-4 . A14J18 and A14J15 Pin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Figure 2-5 . A2 Fast Zero Span Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Figure 2-6 . IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Figure 2-7 . DC Log Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Figure 2-8 . DC Log Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Figure 2-9 . CAL Oscillator Swept Output, 20 kHz Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Figure 2-10 . Diagnostic Software Connection Locations, A14 and A15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Figure 2-11 . Diagnostic Software Connection Locations, RF Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Figure 3-1 . High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Figure 3-2 . Display Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Figure 3-3 . CRT Adjust Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Figure 3-4 . A2 Display Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Figure 3-5 . IF Bandpass Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Figure 3-6 . A5J6 Pin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Figure 3-7 . IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Figure 3-8 . IF Amplitude Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Figure 3-9 . DC Log Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Figure 3-10 . DC Log Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Figure 3-11 . Sampler Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Figure 3-12 . A15J200 Pin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Figure 3-13 . YTO Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Figure 3-14 . YTO Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Figure 3-15 . Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Figure 3-16 . 10 MHz Reference Adjustment Setup and Adjustment Location . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Figure 3-17 . 10 MHz Reference Adjustment Setup TCXO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Figure 3-18 . Demodulator Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Figure 3-19 . Demodulator Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Figure 3-20 . External Mixer Bias Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Figure 3-21 . External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Figure 3-22 . Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Figure 3-23 . Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment Jumper Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Figure 3-24 . 16 MHz PLL Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Figure 3-25 . 16 MHz PLL Adjustment Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Figure 3a-1 . IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Figure 3a-2 . IF Amplitude Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Figure 3a-3 . DC Log Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Figure 3a-4 . DC Log Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Figure 4-1 . Hinged Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

17

Figures

Figure 4-2 . LCD Assembly - Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-3 . Discharging High Voltage on the CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-4 . A18 and Line Switch Assembly Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-5 . Front-Frame Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-6 . Installing the CRT and Front-Frame Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-7 . Placing the CRT into the Front Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-8 . A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-9 . Assembly Cables (1 of 3) EC- Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-10 . Assembly Cables (2 of 3) EC-series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-11 . Assembly Cables (3 of 3) E-series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-12 . Coaxial Cable Clip EC-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-13 . Coaxial Cable Clip E-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-14 . GPIB and A1A1 W1 Cable Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-15 . Power Supply Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-16 . Power Supply Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-17 . A6 Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-18 . Power Supply Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-19 . A16 Fast ADC and A17 CRT Driver Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-20 . 8564E/ECand 8565E/EC Assembly Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-21 . A9 Attenuator Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-22 . A9 and A10/A12 Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-23 . A11 Mounting Screws at Right Side Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-24 . A14 and A15 Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-25 . A14 and A15 Assembly Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-26 . A16 and A17 Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-27 . A16 Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-28 . Main Deck Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-29 . A6 Power Supply Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-30 . W3 Dress and Connection to A6 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-31 . Line Switch Mounting Screw and Cable Dress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-32 . W3 Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-33 . Side Frame Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-34 . A21 OCXO Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-1 . Assembly Screw Mounting Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-2 . Parts Identification, Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-3 . Parts Identification, Main Chassis (8564E and 8565E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-4 . Parts Identification, RF Section (8564E and 8565E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-5 . Parts Identification, Front Frame (8564E and 8565E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-6 . Parts Identification, Rear Frame (8564E and 8565E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-7 . Parts Identification, Chassis (8564EC and 8565EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-8 . Parts Identification, Front Frame (8564EC and 8565EC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-9 . Parts Identification, Rear Frame (8564EC and 8565EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-1 . Hinged Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-2 . Top View (A2 and A3 Unfolded) EC-Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-3 . Top View (A2, A3, A4, and A5 Unfolded) EC-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

184 193 194 195 196 198 203 204 205 205 206 207 208 210 211 214 215 218 221 224 226 229 231 233 235 236 241 243 246 248 249 252 257 279 287 289 291 293 295 297 299 301 306 307 308

18

Figures
Figure 6-4 . Top View (A2, A3, A4, and A5 Unfolded) E-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Figure 6-5 . Bottom View (A15 Unfolded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Figure 6-6 . Bottom View (A15 and A14 Unfolded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Figure 6-7 . A16 Fast ADC (Option 007) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Figure 6-8 . 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC Front End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Figure 6-9 . Rear View EC-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Figure 6-10 . Rear View E-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Figure 7-1 . Assembly Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Figure 7-2 . Ribbon Cable Connections (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Figure 7-3 . Ribbon Cable Connections (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Figure 7-4 . Ribbon Cable Connections (3 of 3) EC-Series Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Figure 7-5 . Service Cal Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Figure 7-6 . Functional Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Figure 7-7 . Phase Lock Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Figure 7-8 . Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Figure 7-9 . Overall Block Diagram (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Figure 7-9 . Overall Block Diagram (2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Figure 7-9 . Overall Block Diagram (3 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Figure 7-9 . Overall Block Diagram (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Figure 7-9 . Overall Block Diagram (5 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Figure 8-1 . A3 Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Figure 8-2 . A3 Test Connector Pin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Figure 8-3 . A3 Interface Assembly Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Figure 8-4 . Fast ADC (Option 007) Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Figure 9-1 . A4 and A5 Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Figure 9-2 . A4 and A5 Test Connector Pin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Figure 9-3 . CAL Oscillator Swept Output, 20 kHz Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Figure 9-4 . CAL Oscillator Swept Output, 10 kHz Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Figure 9-5 . CAL Oscillator Swept Output, 4 kHz Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Figure 9-6 . CAL Oscillator Swept Output, 2 kHz Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Figure 9-7 . IF Section Troubleshooting Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Figure 9-8 . IF Adjust Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Figure 9-9 . Detailed IF Adjust Signature (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Figure 9-10 . Detailed IF Adjust Signature (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Figure 9-11 . Detailed IF Adjust Signature (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Figure 9-12 . Detailed IF Adjust Signature (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Figure 9-13 . Detailed IF Adjust Signature (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Figure 9-14 . Noisy Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Figure 9-15 . Noise with Correct Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Figure 9-16 . Region B Amplitude Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Figure 9-17 . Region B Amplitude Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Figure 9-18 . Faulty Crystal Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Figure 9-19 . Faulty LC Pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Figure 9-20 . Faulty Crystal Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Figure 9-21 . Output Waveform, 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

19

Figures

Figure 9-22 . Output Waveform, 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9-23 . Output Waveform, 1 kHz Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9-24 . Output Waveform, 300 Hz Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9-25 . Failed Crystal Set Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9-26 . A4 Log Amplifier/Cal Oscillator Block Diagram (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9-26 . A4 Log Amplifier/Cal Oscillator Block Diagram (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9-27 . A5 IF Assembly Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-1 . A2 Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-2 . A2 Test Connector Pin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-3 . Line Generator Output Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-4 . Blanking Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-5 . Expanded Blanking Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-6 . Switch Driver Waveform LCHAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-7 . Distorted X/Y Line Generator Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-8 . Expanded X/Y Line Generator Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-9 . Normal X/Y Line Generator Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-10 . Delta X Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-11 . Delta Y Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-12 . DEF1 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-13 . A2 Controller Block Diagram (E-Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-14 . A2 Controller Block Diagram (EC-Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-1 . A14 and A15 Assembly Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-2 . Test Connector Pin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-3 . YTO Loop Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-4 . Sampler and Sampling Oscillator Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-5 . PLL Locked at Wrong Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-6 . Unlocked PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-7 . Troubleshooting an Unlocked YTO PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-8 . VCO Bias Voltages for A14 Assemblies 08564-60014 and Above . . . . . . . . Figure 11-8a . VCO Bias Voltages for A14 Assembly 08564-60007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-9 . 8564E/EC Sweep and Scan Ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-10 . 8565E/EC Sweep and Scan Ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-11 . Simplified Synthesizer Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-12 . Simplified A14 Assembly Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-13 . Simplified A15 Assembly Block Diagram (100 MHz PLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-13a . Simplified A15 Assembly Block Diagram (600 MHz PLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-14 . Frequency Control Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-15 . RF Block Diagram For A15 08563-60054, 08563-60055, or 08563-60056 . Figure 11-16 . RF Block Diagram For A15 <08563-60054, 08563-60055, or 08563-60056 Figure 12-1 . Diagnostic Software Connection Locations, A14 and A15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12-2 . Diagnostic Software Connection Locations, RF Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12-3 . A14J10, Solder Side of A14 (Ignore Pin Numbers on Mating Connector) . . . Figure 12-4 . A7 LO Multiplier/Amplifier Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12-5 . 8564E/EC Rear Panel SWP Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12-6 . 8565E/EC Rear Panel SWP Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

475 476 477 478 481 483 485 489 489 492 493 494 495 497 497 498 500 501 502 517 519 524 525 531 532 535 536 554 564 565 574 574 581 582 583 584 587 589 591 596 597 602 614 617 617

20

Figures

Figure 12-7 . 8564E/EC Signal at A14J15 Pin 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 Figure 12-8 . 8565E/EC Signal at A14J15 Pin 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 Figure 12-9 . 10 MHz Reference at A15J302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Figure 12-10 . 10 MHz TTL Reference at U304 Pin 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 Figure 12-11 . RF Section, Troubleshooting Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 Figure 13-1 . Simplified LCD Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 Figure 13-2 . Probe Power Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 Figure 13-3 . Location of +5V supply pins on J1 of A17 and J8 of A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 Figure 13-4 . Power Supply and CRT Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 Figure 13-5 . A17 Test Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 Figure 13-6 . Probe Power Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 Figure 13-7 . Simplified Power Supply Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 Figure 13-8 . Buck Regulator Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 Figure 13-9 . A6 Power Supply Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 Figure 13-10 . A17 CRT Driver Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 Figure 14-1 . 8564/65 EC-Series Interconnect Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Figure 14-2 . 8564/65 E-Series Interconnect Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

21

Tables

Table 1-1 . Instrument Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Table 1-2 . Service Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Table 1-3 . Static-Safe Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Table 1-4 . Recommended Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Table 1-5 . Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Offices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Table 2-1 . Related Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Table 2-2 . Test Equipment Required for Automated Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Table 2-3 . DAC Control Recommended Instrument State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Table 2-4 . Latch Control Recommended Instrument State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Table 3-1 . Related Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Table 3-2 . Adjustable Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Table 3-3 . Factory Selected Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Table 3-4 . Factory-Selected LC Filter Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Table 3-5 . LC Factory-Selected Capacitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Table 3-6 . Factory-Selected XTAL Filter Capacitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Table 3-7 . XTAL Factory-Selected Capacitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Table 3-8 . Capacitor Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Table 3-9 . Sampling Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Table 3-10 . Conversion Loss Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Table 3a-1 . Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Table 4-1 . Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Table 5-1 . Reference Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Table 5-2 . Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Table 5-3 . Reference Designations, Abbreviations, and Multipliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Table 5-4 . Replaceable Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Table 5-5 . Replaceable Parts 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Table 5-6 . Parts List, Cover Assembly 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC (see Figure 5-2) . . . . . . 280 Table 5-7 . Parts List, Main Chassis 8564EC and 8565EC (see Figure 5-7) . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Table 5-8 . Parts List, Main Chassis 8564E and 8565E (See Figure 5-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Table 5-9 . Parts List, RF Section 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC (See Figure 5-4) . . . . . . . . . . 282 Table 5-10 . Parts List, Front Frame 8564EC and 8565EC (see Figure 5-8) . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Table 5-11 . Parts List, Front Frame 8564E and 8565E (See Figure 5-5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Table 5-12 . Parts List, Rear Frame 8564EC and 8565EC (See Figure 5-9). . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Table 5-13 . Parts List, Rear Frame 8564E and 8565E (See Figure 5-6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Table 7-1 . Location of Assembly Troubleshooting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Table 8-1 . W2 Control Cable Connections (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Table 8-2 . Table 8-1. W2 Control Cable Connections (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Table 8-3 . Keyboard Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Table 8-4 . Counter Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Table 8-5 . Trigger MUX Truth Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Table 8-6 . A3U102 Latch Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Table 8-7 . HMUX_SELO/1 versus Detector Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Table 8-8 . Logic Levels at A3U108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Table 8-9 . Demultiplexer A3U410 Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Table 8-10 . Demultiplexer A3U500 Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

23

Tables

Table 8-11 . LP/Q Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Table 8-12 . Control Word at Primary Address (U3 and U4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Table 9-1 . Sweep Width Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Table 9-2 . IF Gain Application Guidelines (ATTEN=10 dB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Table 10-1 . Gate Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Table 10-2 . Gate Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Table 11-1 . Troubleshooting Suspected Faulty Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Table 11-2 . Center Frequency Tuning Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Table 11-3 . Sampling Oscillator Test Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 Table 11-4 . Sampling Oscillator PLL Divide Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 Table 11-5 . Amplifier Polarities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 Table 11-6 . Voltages in FM Coil and Main Loop Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 Table 11-7 . Main Coil Coarse and Fine DACs Voltages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 Table 11-8 . Postscaler Divide Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 Table 11-9 . Unlocked Fractional N Troubleshooting Areas (08564-60014 and Above) . . . 562 Table 11-10 . Table 11-9a. Unlocked Fractional N Troubleshooting Areas (08564-60007) . 562 Table 11-11 . Divider and Integrator Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 Table 11-12 . Sweep Signal Destination versus Span. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 Table 11-13 . Harmonic Mixing Number versus Center Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 Table 11-14 . Settings of Sweep Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 Table 11-15 . Settings of Sweep Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Table 12-1 . Procedures To Use For Isolating Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 Table 12-2 . Attenuator Control Truth Table (W11 connected to A14J6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 Table 12-3 . Attenuator Control Truth Table (W11 connected or disconnected from A14J6) 606 Table 12-4 . Attenuator Control Truth Table (W11 connected or disconnected from A14J6) 607 Table 12-5 . Sweep + Tune Multiplier Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Table 12-6 . RF Section Mnemonic Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 Table 13-1 . Automatic Fault Isolation References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 Table 13-2 . TAM Tests versus Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 Table 13-3 . W1 Power-Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656 Table 13-4 . Automatic Fault Isolation References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 Table 14-1 . CLIPs Available for the 8564E, 8564EC, 8565E, and 8565EC Spectrum Analyzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

24

General Information

25

General Information Introduction

Introduction
This 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC Spectrum Analyzers Service Guide contains information required to adjust and service the 8561E, 8561EC, 8563E, and 8563EC to the assembly level. How to Use this Guide ....................................................... page Differences Between E-series and EC-series Analyzers .. page Instrument Variations ....................................................... page Serial Number and Repair Information............................ page Service Kit .......................................................................... page Electrostatic Discharge...................................................... page Returning Instrument for Service..................................... page Recommended Test Equipment......................................... page 27 28 29 30 32 33 35 37

26

Chapter 1

General Information Introduction

How to Use this Guide

Chapters 1 through 5 contain adjustments and parts information that can be used to adjust your spectrum analyzer and to help you x problems. Chapter 6, General Troubleshooting, can be used to identify the location of a problem to a board or functional area in the spectrum analyzer. Chapters 7 through 13, which cover functional areas, can then be used to help you localize the problem further.

Conventions Used in this Guide:

Screen Text
Key

This font indicates text displayed on the screen This font indicates a softkey or a hardkey These terms are used to refer to both E-series and EC-series instruments

8564E/EC, 8565E/EC

Documentation Outline
8560 E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide Tells you how to run verication software. Tells you what your spectrum analyzers specications are. Tells you how to test your spectrum analyzer. 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzer Users Guide Tells you how to make measurements with your spectrum analyzer. Tells you how to install your spectrum analyzer. Tells you how to program your spectrum analyzer. 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzer Quick Reference Guide Is an abbreviated version of the 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzers Users Guide. Provides you with a listing of all remote programming commands. 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information Provides schematics and parts lists for the instrument.

Chapter 1

27

General Information Differences Between 8560 EC-Series and E-Series Spectrum Analyzers

Differences Between 8560 EC-Series and E-Series Spectrum Analyzers

Features Display 8560 EC-Series LCD display color display not adjustable backlight bulbs are replaceable (replace both bulbs when display is dim) requires A17 LCD driver board 8560 E-Series CRT display monochrome display adjustable for intensity, focus, and quadrature requires high voltage module (HVM), which is istcated in the A6 power supply requires A17 CRT driver board FADC is available as an option (Option 007) separate A16 FADC board required

Fast ADC sweep times (FADC) enables sweep times of 30 ms to 50 s VGA port

FADC is standard FADC circuitry integrated into A2 controller board

located on rear panel always active does not require user interface

Not available

In all other operational respects the EC-series and E-series are identical. Unless otherwise noted, the information in this manual applies to all 8564EC, 8565EC, 8564E and 8565E instruments.

NOTE

FADC is a standard feature, and not an option in 8560 EC-series instruments. However, it is still necessary that option 007 be in the instruments serial ID string. For this reason, if you press the Datecode &Options key, the message shown on the display will indicate that option 007 is present. In addition, a statement on the rear panel of the instrument reads Option 007 must be in serial ID string. Diagrams that illustrate features common to E-series and EC-series instruments are shown with E-series instruments. Where there are differences between E-series and EC-series features, separate diagrams are provided for E-series and for EC-series instruments.

NOTE

28

Chapter 1

General Information Instrument Variations

Instrument Variations
There are options available to the 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC. The following table lists these options and identies the assemblies which are unique to them. Table 1-1 Instrument Variations
Option 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC Option 001 (2nd IF Output) 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC Option 005 (add Alternative Sweep Output) 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC Option 006 (Frequency Coverage Down to 30 Hz) 8564E and 8565E Option 007 (Fast ADC) -Fast ADC is available as an option for 8564E and 8565E instruments -Fast ADC is a standard feature on 8564EC and 8565EC instruments which does not require additional assemblies 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC Option 008 (SIG ID) 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC Option 103 (Delete OCXO) Added W19 Cable Assembly Rear-Panel J10 W58 Cable Assembly Deleted

A8 Low Band Mixer (Opt 006)

A8 Low Band Mixer (Std) A3 Interface Assembly (Std) W20 Cable Assembly (Std)

A16 Fast ADC Assembly A3 Interface Assembly (Opt 007) W20 Cable Assembly (Opt 007) W59 Cable Assembly

A15 RF Assembly (Opt 008) A15 RF Assembly (Opt 103)

A15 RF Assembly (Std)

A15 RF Assembly (Std) W49 Cable Assembly W50 Cable Assembly A21 OCXO

Chapter 1

29

General Information Serial Numbers and Repair Information

Serial Numbers and Repair Information

Agilent Technologies makes frequent improvements to its products to enhance performance, usability, or reliability. Agilent Technologies service personnel have access to complete records of design changes to each type of equipment, based on the equipment's serial number. Whenever you contact Agilent Technologies about a product, have the complete serial number available to ensure obtaining the most complete and accurate information possible. The serial number label is usually attached to the rear of the product. The serial number has two parts: the prex (two letters and the rst four numbers), and the sufx (the last four numbers). Figure 1-1 Serial Number Label Example

The two letters identify the country in which the unit was manufactured. The four numbers of the prex are a code identifying the date of the last major design change incorporated in your Agilent Technologies product. The four-digit sufx is a sequential number and, coupled with the prex, provides a unique identication for each unit produced. Whenever you list the serial number or refer to it in obtaining information about your Agilent Technologies product, be sure to use the complete number, including the full prex and the sufx. Units which were produced before the serial number format was changed may also be covered by this documentation. On earlier serial number labels, the prex consists of the rst four numbers and a single letter. The sufx is a ve-digit sequential number.

30

Chapter 1

General Information Serial Numbers and Repair Information

Figure 1-2

Earlier Serial Number Label Example

It is important that you realize that the new serial number format (US00000000) is always considered "above" the earlier format (0000A00000) when you encounter change information such as ".serial prex 3425A and above" or ".serial number 3425A00564 and above."

Chapter 1

31

General Information Service Kit

Service Kit
The spectrum analyzer service kit (part number 08562-60021) contains service tools required to repair the instrument. Refer to Table 1-2 for a list of items in the service kit. Table 1-2
Description Cable Puller PC Board Prop Line Filter Assembly Line Switch Cable Extender Cable BNC to SMB (snap-on) Cable Connector Extractor Tool Kit

Service Kit Contents

Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 Part Number 5021-6773 5021-7459 5061-9032 5062-0728 5062-0737 85680-60093 8710-1791

32

Chapter 1

General Information Electrostatic Discharge

Electrostatic Discharge
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage or destroy electronic components. Therefore, all work performed on assemblies consisting of electronic components should be done at a static-free workstation. Figure 1-3 is an example of a static-safe workstation using two kinds of ESD protection: Conductive table mat and wrist-strap combination Conductive oor mat and heel-strap combination These methods may be used together or separately. Figure 1-3 Example of a Static-Safe Workstation

Chapter 1

33

General Information Electrostatic Discharge

Reducing Potential for ESD Damage

The suggestions that follow may help reduce ESD damage that occurs during instrument testing and servicing. Before connecting any coaxial cable to an spectrum analyzer connector for the rst time each day, momentarily ground the center and outer connectors of the cable. Personnel should be grounded with a resistor-isolated wrist strap before touching the center pin of any connector and before removing any assembly from the unit. Be sure all instruments are properly earth-grounded to prevent build-up of static discharge.

Static-Safe Accessories
Table 1-3
Part Number 9300-0797

Static-Safe Accessories
Description Set includes: 3M static control mat 0.6 m 1.2 m (2 ft 4 ft) and 4.6 cm (15 ft) ground wire. (The wrist-strap and wrist-strap cord are not included. They must be ordered separately.) Wrist-strap cord, 1.5 m (5 ft) Wrist-strap, color black, stainless steel, without cord, four adjustable links and 7 mm post-type connection. ESD heel-strap (reusable 6 to 12 months).

9300-0980 9300-1383 9300-1169

34

Chapter 1

General Information Returning Instruments for Service

Returning Instruments for Service

Service Tag
If you are returning the instrument to Agilent Technologies for servicing, ll in and attach a blue service tag. Service tags are supplied in the back of this chapter. Please be as specic as possible about the nature of the problem. If you have recorded any error messages that appeared on the screen, or have completed a performance test record, or have any other specic data on the performance of the spectrum analyzer, please send a copy of this information with the unit.

Original Packaging
Before shipping, pack the unit in the original factory packaging materials if they are available. If the original materials are unavailable, identical packaging materials may be acquired through any Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Ofce. Descriptions of the packaging materials are listed in Figure 1-4 on page 36.

Other Packaging
CAUTION

Spectrum analyzer damage can result from using packaging materials other than those specied. Never use styrene pellets in any shape as packaging materials. They do not adequately cushion the equipment or prevent it from shifting in the carton. They cause equipment damage by generating static electricity and by lodging in the spectrum analyzer fan. Repackage the spectrum analyzer in the original packaging materials or with commercially available materials described in steps 4 and 5, below. 1. Attach a completed service tag to the instrument. 2. Install the front-panel cover on the instrument. 3. Wrap the instrument in antistatic plastic to reduce the possibility of damage caused by electrostatic discharge. 4. Use the original materials or a strong shipping container that is double-walled, corrugated cardboard carton with 159 kg (350 lb) bursting strength. The carton must be both large enough and strong enough to accommodate the spectrum analyzer and allow at least 3 to 4 inches on all sides of the spectrum analyzer for packing material.

Chapter 1

35

General Information Returning Instruments for Service

5. Surround the equipment with at least 3 to 4 inches of packing material, or enough to prevent the equipment from moving in the carton. If packing foam is unavailable, the best alternative is SD-240 Air Cap from Sealed Air Corporation (Commerce, CA 90001). Air Cap looks like a plastic sheet covered with 1-1/4 inch air-lled bubbles. Use the pink-colored Air Cap to reduce static electricity. Wrap the equipment several times in this material to both protect the equipment and prevent it from moving in the carton. 6. Seal the shipping container securely with strong nylon adhesive tape. 7. Mark the shipping container "FRAGILE, HANDLE WITH CARE" to assure careful handling. 8. Retain copies of all shipping papers. Figure 1-4 Spectrum Analyzer Shipping Container and Cushioning Materials

Item 1 2 3

Part Number 9211-6969 9220-5073 9220-5072

Description Outer Carton Pads (2) Top Tray

36

Chapter 1

General Information Recommended Test Equipment

Recommended Test Equipment

Table 1-4 lists the recommended test equipment required for operation verication, performance tests, adjustments, troubleshooting, and the Test and Adjustment Module. Any equipment that meets the critical specications given in the table can be substituted for the recommended model(s). Operation verication, and the performance tests, are located in the calibration guide. Table 1-4
Instrument Sources Synthesized sweeper (two required for 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC and 8563E/EC) (one required for 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC) Synthesized sweeper (for 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC)

Recommended Test Equipment

Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Frequency range: 8560E/EC, 10 MHz to 12.0 GHz 8561E/EC, 10 MHz to 12.0 GHz 8563E/EC, 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz Frequency accuracy (CW): 1 109/day Leveling modes: Internal &External Modulation modes: AM &Pulse Power level range: 80 to +16 dBm Frequency range: 8564E/EC, 10 MHz to 40.0 GHz 8565E/EC, 10 MHz to 50.0 GHz Frequency accuracy (CW): 1 109/day Leveling mode: Internal Power level range: 35 to +16 dBm Frequency range: 200 Hz to 80 MHz Frequency accuracy: 1 Flatness: 0.15 dB Attenuator accuracy: <0.09 dB External 10 MHz reference input Frequency resolution: 1 Hz Frequency range: 100 kHz to 2.5 GHz Residual SSB phase noise at 1 GHz: <73 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz offset <107 dBc/Hz at 1 kHz offset <124 dBc/Hz at 10 kHz offset <124 dBc/Hz at 100 kHz offset Frequency range: 10 kHz to 50 MHz Pulse width: 200 ns; Output amplitude: 5 V peak-to-peak Functions: pulse &triangle Pulse rise time: <100 ns TTL sync output 107/month 83650A Option 001, 008 P,A,T, V Recommended Model 8340A/B* 83630A Option 001, 008 Use

P,A,T, M,V

Synthesizer/ level generator

3335A*,

P,A,T, M,V

Synthesized signal generator

8663A

P,V

Pulse/function generator

8116A

P,A

Chapter 1

37

General Information Recommended Test Equipment

Table 1-4
Instrument AM/FM signal generator

Recommended Test Equipment

Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Frequency range: 1 MHz to 200 MHz Frequency modulation mode Modulation oscillator frequency: 1 kHz FM peak deviation: 5 kHz Output frequency: 10 MHz Accuracy: <1 10 Frequency range: 9 MHz to 26.5 GHz Timebase accuracy (aging): <5 1010/day External frequency reference input Modes: TI AB, frequency count Time interval measurement range: 100 ns to 120 s Frequency count range: 400 Hz to 11 MHz Frequency resolution: 1 mHz Timebase accuracy (aging): <3 107/month External 10 MHz reference input
10

Recommended Model 8640B 8642A

Use A

Counters Frequency standard Microwave frequency counter Universal counter

5061B 5343A* Option 001 5334A/B

P,A P,A,M,V

Receivers Spectrum analyzer (for 8560E/EC Option 002)

Spectrum analyzer Measuring receiver

Frequency range: 300 kHz to 7 GHz Relative amplitude accuracy: 300 kHz to 2.7 GHz: <1.8 dB 300 kHz to 7 GHz: <4.0 dB Absolute amplitude accuracy: 3.9 GHz to 6.9 GHz: <2.7 dB Frequency accuracy: <10 kHz at 7 GHz Frequency range: 300 kHz to 7 GHz Amplitude range: 70 dBm to +20 dBm Compatible w/power sensors dB relative mode Resolution: 0.01 dB Reference accuracy: <1.2% Frequency range: 10 MHz to 12 GHz Maximum SWR: 1.40 (10 to 30 MHz) 1.18 (30 to 50 MHz) 1.10 (50 MHz to 2 GHz) 1.18 (2 to 12.4 GHz) Frequency range: 250 MHz to 350 MHz Power range: 100 nW to 10 W Maximum SWR: 1.15 (250 to 350 MHz)

8566B*

P,A,T

8566B* 8902A*

A,T P,A,T, M,V

Sensors Power sensor (for 8560E/EC or 8561E/EC)

8481A*

P,A,T, M,V

Power sensor

8481D

P,A

38

Chapter 1

General Information Recommended Test Equipment

Table 1-4
Instrument Power sensor

Recommended Test Equipment

Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Frequency range: 100 kHz to 2.9 GHz Maximum SWR: 1.1 (1 MHz to 2.0 GHz) 1.30 (2.0 GHz to 2.9 GHz) Frequency range: 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz Maximum SWR: 1.15 (50 to 100 MHz) 1.10 (100 MHz to 2 GHz) 1.15 (2.0 to 12.4 GHz) 1.20 (12.4 to 18 GHz) 1.25 (18 to 26.5 GHz) Frequency range: 50 MHz to 50 GHz Maximum SWR: 1.15 (50 to 100 MHz) 1.10 (100 MHz to 2 GHz) 1.15 (2.0 to 12.4 GHz) 1.20 (12.4 to 18 GHz) 1.25 (18 to 26.5 GHz) 1.30 (26.5 to 40 GHz) 1.50 (40 to 50 GHz) Required to run operation verication software and adjustment/diagnostic software (8564E/EC and 8565E/EC) Bandwidth (3 dB): dc to 100 MHz Two channels Minimum vertical deection factor: 5 mV/div Minimum timebase setting: <100 ns Digitizing display with time cursors Delta-t cursor accuracy in 500 ns/Div: <0.1 s Frequency range: 8560E/EC, 2.0 to 2.9 GHz 8561E/EC, 2.0 to 6.5 GHz 8563E/EC, 2.0 to 8.0 GHz 8564E/EC, 2.0 to 8.0 GHz 8565E/EC, 2.0 to 8.0 GHz Minimum output power (leveled) 2.0 to 8.0 GHz: +16 dBm Output SWR (leveled): <1.7 Output voltage: 24 Vdc Output voltage accuracy: <0.2 V Clock frequency >10 MHz Time interval function Recommended Model 8482A* Use P,A,T, M,V

Power sensor (for 8563E/EC)

8485A*

P,A,T, M,V

Power sensor (for 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC)

8487A

P,V

Other Equipment Controller

Oscilloscope

9816A, 9836A/C, 310, 320 332, 360 54501A*

P,A,T

Amplier

11975

Power supply Signature multimeter

6114A 5005A/B

A T

Chapter 1

39

General Information Recommended Test Equipment

Table 1-4
Instrument Digital voltmeter

Recommended Test Equipment

Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Range: 15 Vdc to +120 Vdc Accuracy: <1 mV on 10 V range Input impedance: 1 M 36 inches, alligator clips, probe tips No substitute Voltage division ratio: 1000:1 Frequency range: 1 to 80 MHz Coupling: 6 dB (nominal) Maximum coupling deviation: <1 dB (nominal) Directivity: 40 dB minimum Impedance: 50 (nominal) Frequency range: 2.0 to 6.5 GHz Coupling: 16.0 dB (nominal) Maximum coupling deviation: 1 dB (nominal) Directivity: 14 dB minimum Flatness: 0.75 dB maximum VSWR: <1.45 Insertion loss: <1.3 dB Frequency range: 2.0 to 8.1 GHz Coupling: 16.0 dB (nominal) Maximum coupling deviation: 1 dB (nominal) Directivity: 14 dB minimum Flatness: 0.75 dB maximum VSWR: <1.45 Insertion loss: <1.3 dB Attenuation range: 30 dB Frequency range: dc to 80 MHz Connectors: BNC (f) Attenuation range: 12 dB Frequency range: dc to 80 MHz Connectors: BNC (f) Frequency range: dc to 18 GHz Attenuation accuracy: <1 dB Maximum SWR: 1.2 (dc to 2.9 GHz) Frequency range: dc to 18 GHz Attenuation accuracy: <0.6 dB Maximum SWR: 1.2 (dc to 2.9 GHz) Connector: APC 3.5 Frequency range: dc to 50 GHz Impedance: 50 Maximum SWR: <1.22 Connector: 2.4 mm (f) Recommended Model 3456A* Use A,T

Probes DVM test leads High-frequency probe High-voltage probe Accessories Directional bridge

34118A 85024A 34111A 8721A

A,T T T P

Directional coupler (for 8561E/EC) (two required)

0955-0098

Directional coupler (for 8563E/EC, 8564E/EC, and 8565E/EC) (two required) 10 dB step attenuator 1 dB step attenuator 20 dB xed attenuator 10 dB xed attenuator

0955-0098

355D

P,V

355C

P,V

8491B Option 020 8491B Option 010

P,V

P,V

Termination (for 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC)

85138B

P,V

40

Chapter 1

General Information Recommended Test Equipment

Table 1-4
Instrument Low-pass lter

Recommended Test Equipment

Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Cutoff frequency: 50 MHz Rejection at 65 MHz: >40 dB Rejection at 75 MHz: >60 dB Cutoff frequency: 1.8 GHz Rejection at >3 GHz: >45 dB 0.1 dB ripple Recommended Model 0955-0306 Use P,M,V

Low-pass lter (for 8563E/EC, 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC) (two required) Low-pass lter (for 8561E/EC 8563E/EC, 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC) (two required) Power splitter (for 8560E/EC or 8561E/EC) Power splitter (for 8563E/EC)

0955-0491

Cutoff frequency: 4.4 GHz Rejection at 5.5 GHz: >40 dB

11689A

Frequency range: 1 kHz to 12 GHz Insertion loss: 6 dB (nominal) Output tracking: <0.25 dB Equivalent output SWR: <1.22 Frequency range: 1 kHz to 26.5 GHz Insertion loss: 6 dB (nominal) Output tracking: <0.25 dB, <18 GHz Equivalent output SWR: <1.22

11667A

P,A,M,V

11667B

P,A,M,V

Power splitter (for 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC)

Service accessory kit Tuning tool Cables Test cable Cable, RG-214/U Cable Cable, 50 coaxial (ve required)

Frequency range: 30 Hz to 50 GHz Insertion loss: 6 dB (nominal) Output tracking: <0.35 dB, <26.5 GHz <0.40 dB, <50 GHz Equivalent output SWR: 1.29, <26.5 GHz 1.50, <40 GHz 1.65, <50 GHz No substitute No substitute Connectors: BNC (m)-to-SMB (f) Length: 61 cm (24 in.) Connectors: Type N (m) Length: 91 cm (36 in.) Connectors: SMA (m) Length: 24 to 36 inches Connectors: BNC (m) Length: 122 cm (48 in.)

11667C

P,A,V,T

08562-60021 8710-1010 85680-60093 11500A 8120-1578 10503A

A,T A A,M P,V P P,A,V

Chapter 1

41

General Information Recommended Test Equipment

Table 1-4
Instrument Cable (two required)

Recommended Test Equipment

Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Frequency range: 30 Hz to 26.5 GHz Maximum SWR: <1.4 at 26.5 GHz Maximum insertion loss: 3 dB Connectors: APC 3.5 (m), both ends Length: 61 cm (24 in.) Frequency range: 30 Hz to 50 GHz Maximum SWR: <1.55 at 50 GHz Maximum insertion loss: 5.75 dB Connectors: 2.4 mm (f) to 2.4 mm (m) Length: 1 m (39 in.) Required w/operation verication software Required w/85629B test & adjustment module Length: 2 m (6.6 ft.) Type N (f)-to-BNC (m) Type N (m)-to-BNC (f) Type N (f)-to-BNC (f) Type N (m)-to-N (m) Type N (f)-to-APC 3.5 (m) Type N (m)-to-APC 3.5 (m) Type N (m)-to-APC 3.5 (f) Type N (m)-to-BNC (m) Type N (m)-to-N (f) Type N (f)-to-APC 3.5 (f) Type N (m)-to-SMA (f) Type N (f)-to-SMA (f) BNC (f)-to-BNC (f) BNC tee (f) (m) (f) BNC (f)-to-SMA (m) BNC (f)-to-dual banana plug APC 3.5 (f)-to-APC 3.5 (f) APC 3.5 (m)-to-APC 3.5 (m) 2.4 mm (f)-to-2.4 mm (f) APC 3.5 (f)-to-2.4 mm (f) Recommended Model 8120-4921 Use P,A,M,V

Cable (for 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC)

8120-6164

P,A,V,T

Cable, GPIB (eight required)

10833B

P,A,M

Adapters Adapter Adapter (three required) Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter(two required) Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter (two required) Adapter (two required) Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter (two required) Adapter (two required) Adapter Adapter

1250-1477 1250-1476 1250-1474 1250-1475 1250-1750 1250-1743 1250-1744 1250-1473 1250-1472 1250-1745 1250-1250 1250-1772 1250-0059 1250-0781 1250-1200 1251-2816 5061-5311 1250-1748 11900B 11901B

P,A P,A,V P,V P A P,M,V P,V P P P,V P,V P A P,A,M,V P,A,V A,T P,M,V P,V P,A,T,V P

42

Chapter 1

General Information Recommended Test Equipment

Table 1-4
Instrument

Recommended Test Equipment

Recommended Model 11901D 11903B 11903C Use P P,A,T,V P

Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Adapter APC 3.5 (m)-to-2.4 mm (f) Adapter Type N (f)-to-2.4 mm (f) Adapter Type N (f)-to-2.4 mm (m) * Part of microwave workstation P = performance tests A = adjustments M= test & adjustment module T = troubleshooting V = operation verication

Chapter 1

43

General Information Sales and Service Ofces

Sales and Service Ofces

Agilent Technologies has sales and service ofces around the world providing complete support for Agilent Technologies products. To obtain servicing information, or to order replacement parts, contact the nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Ofce listed in Table 1-5 on page 45. In any correspondence, be sure to include the pertinent information about model numbers, serial numbers, and assembly part numbers.
NOTE

Within the USA, a toll-free phone number is available for ordering replacement parts. Refer to the section entitled, "Ordering Information" in Chapter 4 , Assembly Replacement, for the phone number and more information.

44

Chapter 1

General Information Sales and Service Ofces

Table 1-5

Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Ofces

UNITED STATES

Instrument Support Center Agilent Technologies (800) 403-0801

EUROPEAN FIELD OPERATIONS

Headquarters Agilent Technologies S.A. 150, Route du Nant-dAvril 1217 Meyrin 2/ Geneva Switzerland (41 22) 780.8111 France Agilent Technologies France 1 Avenue Du Canada Zone DActivite De Courtaboeuf F-91947 Les Ulis Cedex France (33 1) 69 82 60 60 Germany Agilent Technologies GmbH Agilent Technologies Strasse 61352 Bad Homburg v.d.H Germany (49 6172) 16-0

Great Britain Agilent Technologies Ltd. Eskdale Road, Winnersh Triangle Wokingham, Berkshire RG41 5DZ England (44 118) 9696622

INTERCON FIELD OPERATIONS

Headquarters Agilent Technologies 3495 Deer Creek Rd. Palo Alto, CA 94304-1316 USA (415) 857-5027 Australia Agilent Technologies Australia Ltd. 31-41 Joseph Street Blackburn, Victoria 3130 (61 3) 895-2895 Canada Agilent Technologies (Canada) Ltd. 17500 South Service Road Trans-Canada Highway Kirkland, Quebec H9J 2X8 Canada (514) 697-4232 Taiwan Agilent Technologies Taiwan 8th Floor, H-P Building 337 Fu Hsing North Road Taipei, Taiwan (886 2) 712-0404

Japan Agilent Technologies Japan, Ltd. Measurement Assistance Center 9-1, Takakura-Cho, Hachioji-Shi, Tokyo 192-8510, Japan TEL (81) -426-56-7832 FAX (81) -426-56-7840 China China Agilent Technologies 38 Bei San Huan X1 Road Shuang Yu Shu Hai Dian District Beijing, China (86 1) 256-6888

Singapore Agilent Technologies Singapore (Pte.) Ltd. 150 Beach Road #29-00 Gateway West Singapore 0718 (65) 291-9088

Chapter 1

45

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software

47

Introduction
Automated adjustment and diagnostic software is required to provide some of the spectrum analyzer adjustments. The software also provides automated diagnostics for troubleshooting. Instructions for using these programs are included in this chapter. The 8564E/8565E Adjustment/Diagnostic Software is essential for proper adjustment of an 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer. Never perform adjustments as routine maintenance. Adjustments should be performed after a repair or performance test failure. For information on which adjustments to perform, see Table 2-1 on page 51. Where both a manual and an automated adjustment number are shown for a given adjustment, either the manual OR the automated adjustment may be performed. Some of the adjustments must be done manually. The manual adjustment procedures can be found in Chapter 3 of this service guide. The following lists identify all of the automated and manual adjustment procedures: Automated Adjustments 1. Initial Information )...................................................... page 63 2. LO Frequency ............................................................. page 64 3. YTO FM Coil ................................................................ page 66 4. LOMA Adjustments .................................................... page 68 5. Fast Zero Span ........................................................... page 69 6. 3rd Amp/2nd IF Align .................................................. page 71 7. Cal Out Adjustment .................................................... page 72 8. Front End Cal ............................................................. page 73 9. IF Bandpass Poles ....................................................... page 74 10. IF Amplitude .............................................................. page 75 11. DC Log Adjustments ................................................. page 76 12. Sampling Oscillator .................................................... page 78 Manual Adjustments 1. High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment 2. Display Adjustment 3. IF Bandpass Adjustment 4. IF Amplitude Adjustments 5. DC Log Amplifier Adjustments 6. Sampling Oscillator Adjustment 7. YTO Adjustment 8. Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment 9. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment OCXO 10. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment TCXO (Option 103) 11. Demodulator Adjustment 12. External Mixer Bias Adjustment

48

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software Introduction

13. External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment 14. Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment 15. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment 16. 600 MHz Reference Adjustment (serial prex 3406A and above)

Safety Considerations
Although this instrument has been designed in accordance with international safety standards, this manual contains information, cautions, and warnings which must be followed to ensure safe operation and to prevent damage to the instrument. Service and adjustments should be performed only by qualied service personnel.
WARNING

Adjustments in this section are performed with power supplied to the instrument and protective covers removed. There are voltages at many points in the instrument which can, if contacted, cause personal injury. Be extremely careful. Adjustments should be performed only by trained service personnel. Power is still applied to this instrument with the LINE switch in the off position. Before removing or installing any assembly or printed circuit board, remove the line-power cord. Capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged, even if the instrument has been disconnected from its source of supply. Use a nonmetallic adjustment tool whenever possible.

Chapter 2

49

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software Introduction

Which Adjustments Should Be Performed?

Table 2-1 on page 51 lists the adjustments that should be performed when an assembly is repaired or changed. It is important to perform the adjustments in the order indicated to ensure that the instrument meets its specications.

Adjustment Tools Table 2-1 on page 51

For adjustments requiring a nonmetallic tuning tool, use ber tuning tool, part number 8710-0033. Two different tuning tools may be necessary for IF bandpass adjustments, depending upon the type of tuning slug used in the slug-tuned inductors. If the tuning slug requires a slotted tuning tool, use part number 8710-1010. If the tuning slug requires a forked tuning tool, use part number 8710-0772. Never try to force an adjustment control. This is especially critical when tuning variable capacitors or slug-tuned inductors. Required service accessories, with part numbers, are listed under Service Kit in Chapter 1 .

50

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software Introduction

Instrument Service Position

Refer to Chapter 4 for information on removing the spectrum analyzer cover assembly and accessing all internal assemblies. Table 2-1 Assembly Changed or Repaired A1A1 keyboard A1A2 RPG A2 controller Related Adjustments Perform the following related adjustments in the order listed Adjustment Number Manual Automated*

No related adjustment No related adjustment 16 MHz PLL adjustment

15

2 Display adjustment (8564E and 8565E only) If EEROM from old A2 controller could not be used in new A2 or if EEROM must be replaced, also perform the following adjustments: LOMA adjustments External mixer amplitude adjustment or 13 3rd amp/2nd IF align Front end cal A3 interface Display adjustment -fast zero span(8564E and 2
8565E only)

4 6 8 5 8 5

Front end cal A4 log amp/cal osc Display adjustment -fast zero span(8564E and 2
8565E only)

Demodulator adjustment IF amplitude adjustment DC log amplier adjustment A5 IF IF bandpass adjustment

11 4 5 3

10 11 9

4 10 IF amplitude adjustment A6 power High voltage power supply adjustment 1 supply (8564E and 8565E only) Display adjustment (8564E and 8565E only) 2 A6A1 HV High voltage power supply adjustment 1 module (8564E and 8565E only) Display adjustment (8564E and 8565E only) 2 *If any automated adjustment is required, you must rst perform automated adjustment 1. Initial Information on page 63.

Chapter 2

51

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software Introduction

Table 2-1 Assembly Changed or Repaired A7 LOMA

Related Adjustments Perform the following related adjustments in the order listed Adjustment Number Manual Automated* 4 8

LOMA adjustments Front end cal (or perform the frequency response performance test in the 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide. The adjustment must be performed if the performance test fails). A8 low band Front end cal mixer A9 input Front end cal (or perform the frequency response attenuator performance test in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide. The adjustment must be performed if the performance test fails). A10/A12 Front end cal RYTHM/SB TX A11 YTO 7 YTO adjustment LO frequency A13 2nd converter A14 frequency control YTO FM coil Front end cal Display adjustment -fast zero span (8564E and 2
8565E only)

8 8

2 3 8 5

YTO adjustment LO frequency

7 2

3 YTO FM cal Front end cal 8 *If any automated adjustment is required, you must rst perform automated adjustment 1. Initial Information
Either

the manual or the automated adjustment may be performed.

52

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software Introduction

Table 2-1 Assembly Changed or Repaired A15 RF

Related Adjustments Perform the following related adjustments in the order listed Adjustment Number Manual Automated*

10 MHz reference adjustment (TCXO, Option 103) or CAL OUT adjustment 15 Calibrator amplitude adjustment or CAL OUT adjustment External mixer bias adjustment Sampling oscillator adjustment Signal ID oscillator adjustment External mixer amplitude adjustment or 3rd amp/2nd IF align Front end cal 8 12 6 14 13 7 12 6 8 12 7

A15U100 6 Sampling oscillator adjustment sampler A17 CRT Display adjustment (8564E and 8565E only) 2 driver A18V1 CRT Display adjustment (8564E and 8565E only) 2 A19 GPIB No related adjustment A21 OCXO 10 MHz reference adjustment (OCXO) 9 *If any automated adjustment is required, you must rst perform automated adjustment 1. Initial Information

Either the manual or the automated adjustment may be performed. and

Perform either the manual "YTO adjustment" (7) or the automated "LO frequency"

"YTO FM coil" adjustments (2 and 3)

Chapter 2

53

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software Getting Started

Getting Started
First, make sure you have a compatible controller (computer) and the proper test equipment. The following paragraphs describe requirements for controllers and test equipment. Once the proper equipment is identied, proceed to Equipment Connections

Spectrum Analyzers
The 8564E/8565E Adjustment/Diagnostic Software can be used to adjust or troubleshoot ONLY an 8564E/EC or an 8565E/EC. Errors will occur if this software is used to test spectrum analyzers other than the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC.

Controller (Computer)
The 8564E/8565E Adjustment/Diagnostic Software requires using one of the following HP controllers and the HP BASIC operating system:
Controller HP 9000 model 236 (HP 9836) HP 9000 model 310 HP 9000 model 320 HP 9000 model 350 Operating System HP BASIC 5.13 or later, and all BIN les

NOTE

When using an HP 9000 model 236 (HP 9836) controller, the graphics in the IF diagnostics program will be very distorted and difcult to read. The tabular data printed at the end of the IF diagnostics program (which contains the same text information as the graphics) is clearly readable. Other HP 9000 Series 300 controllers are compatible with the adjustment/diagnostic software; however, the graph printouts might not be full width. This is especially true with medium- and high-resolution displays. The 8564E/8565E Adjustment/Diagnostic Software requires at least 4 Megabytes of free memory.

54

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software Getting Started

Test Equipment
Table 2-2 on page 56 lists the test equipment required to perform the automated adjustments. Test equipment which is not listed here is not compatible with the adjustment/diagnostic software. You do not need all the test equipment connected to perform the adjustments. You need only connect the equipment specied in each adjustment to run that adjustment.

Warm-up Time
Test Equipment Warm-up Allow sufcient warm-up time for test equipment. Refer to their individual operating and service manuals for warm-up specications.

Chapter 2

55

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software Getting Started

Spectrum Analyzer Warm-up Warm the spectrum analyzer up for at least 30 minutes before performing the rst adjustment. Table 2-2 Test Equipment Required for Automated Adjustments
Description Controller* Model Number HP 9000 model 236 (HP 9836) or HP 9000 model 310 or HP 9000 model 320 or HP 9000 model 350 Synthesizer/level generator Synthesized sweeper Spectrum analyzer 3335A 83650A 8566B (preferred) or 8563E (2nd choice) or 8563A or 8562A Power meter 4.2 GHz power sensor 50 GHz power sensor Frequency counter Digital multimeter Power splitter Test and Adjustment Module (TAM) Cable, 50 GHz coax Cable, BNC-to-SMB (2 required) Cable, BNC-to-BNC (3 required) Cable, 36 inch SMA Cable, GPIB (8 required) 438A 8482A 8487A 5342A 3478A 11667C 85629B 8120-6164 85680-60093 10503A 8120-1578 10833A/B

* 4 megabytes of free memory is required for the adjustment program.

The software menu shows the 8340 as the synthesized sweeper, but it drives

the required 83650A (programming language set to "analyzer" mode).

The software menu shows the 8566 as the spectrum analyzer, but it will drive the other three spectrum analyzers listed. If an 8566 is used, it must be an 8566B, not 8566A.

Must have calibration factors down to 10 MHz; a standard 8487A is only calibrated down to 50 MHz.

56

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software Getting Started

Equipment Connections
Computer (Controller) Setup For HP 9000 model 236 computers, setup instructions are provided in Chapter 1, "Computer Installation," of the BASIC Operating Manual. For HP 9000 model 310, 320, or 350 computers, setup information is provided in the Conguration Reference Manual for the Series 300 computers. GPIB Cables All GPIB controlled test equipment should be connected to the internal GPIB of the controller (select code 7).

Chapter 2

57

Using the Adjustment/Diagnostic Software

To Load the Program
NOTE

The 8564E/8565E Adjustment/Diagnostic Software needs to be installed on either an HFS formatted hard disk system or an SRM system. It cannot be used with only a flexible disk drive. 1. If necessary, load HP BASIC into the computer memory. See the documentation for your computer for more information about loading HP BASIC. 2. Create a new directory on your hard disk drive or SRM node. For example, 8564eadj. 3. Download the 8564E/EC & 8565E/EC Adjustment/Diagnostics software from www.agilent.com/find/8560_software. 4. Unzip the download file to the directory created in step 2. 5. Use the MSI command to change to the mass storage device where the new directory (created in step 2) is located. For example, MSI ":,700,0" for an HFS system or MSI ":,21.0" for an SRM system. 6. Access the directory (created in step 2) using the MSI command, then type MSI "MANAGER/CAL_DATA/SENSOR_DATA". Press RETURN (or ENTER). 7. Type LOAD "PS_EDITOR",1 and press RETURN (or ENTER). 8. Press New Sensor.

Go to step 14

58

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software Using the Adjustment/Diagnostic Software

14.At the prompt "Enter power sensor model #. Example, 8487", enter the rst 4 digits of the model number of the power sensor for which you are entering calibration data. Do not enter any alpha characters; the power sensor model must be 4 digits. You will then be prompted to enter the last four digits of the power sensor serial number. For example, if the serial number is 2937A00564, enter 0564. 15.Press Edit Sensor.
NOTE

When entering the power sensor calibration data, be sure to enter the 50 MHz calibration factor. The 50 MHz calibration factor is not always explicitly listed in the table included with the power sensor, but is referred to as the "REF CF" (reference calibration factor). When entering the power sensor calibration data for the 8487A, be sure to also enter a 10 MHz calibration factor. The standard 8487A is calibrated only down to 50 MHz, but the software uses it down to 10 MHz. The calibration data does not have to be entered in frequency order. Frequencies may be entered in any order. When editing, use the arrow keys (v, w) to get to the entry that you want to edit. Use the Backspace key to delete characters, then enter new characters. 16.Enter the frequency (in MHz) and press RETURN (or ENTER). 17.Enter the calibration factor (for the corresponding frequency) and press RETURN (or ENTER). 18.Repeat steps 17 and 18 for all calibration points. Press "Q" when done. 19.Press Store Sensor when nished entering data for each power sensor. 20.Repeat steps 13 through 19 for any other power sensors that will be used. 21.Press quit.

To Use the Adjustment Program

1. MSI to the parent directory (created in "To Load the Program", step 2). 2. Type LOAD "MANAGER/MANAGER",1 and press RETURN (or EXECUTE). 3. Press Set inst addr.

Chapter 2

59

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software Using the Adjustment/Diagnostic Software

4. At the prompt ENTER STATION NUMBER WHERE THE ADDRESS WILL BE USED, type 7, then RETURN (or ENTER). 5. Verify that the default GPIB addresses are the addresses actually set on all of the instruments.
NOTE

If you change any of the GPIB addresses, press RECORD ADR before continuing. 6. Press EXIT-NO RECORD. 7. Press Test Dut.

CAUTION

Be sure power to the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC (DUT) is turned off before connecting the 85629B TAM to the DUT. Failure to do so may cause damage to the DUT or the TAM. Initial Information must always be run rst The WR PROT/WR ENA on the A2 controller must be in the WR PROT (write protect) position. 8. Press Select, then CONTINUE. 9. Enter the power sensor "RP" numbers (last 4 digits of each serial number) for the 8482A and 8487A (shows 8485A POWER SENSOR on controller screen). 10.Enter employee number (or any number; an entry here is required to continue). 11.Press DONE. 12.Select Initial Information. 13.Enter the serial numbers (up to 5 digits) for the "tower" (A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX) and the LOMA (A7 LO Multiplier/Amplier). Entering these serial numbers is optional. 14.Enter the voltages printed on the microcircuits. Be sure to enter the proper polarity, plus (+) or minus ().

NOTE

60

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software Using the Adjustment/Diagnostic Software

NOTE

All but two of the microcircuit entries required (M4 and M5) are voltages listed on the A7 LOMA. Although the label on A7 lists "Int B4, Int B5, SBTX B4, and SBTX B5", the software requires that you enter only "Int B4" (Int4) and "SBTX B4" (SBTX4). M4 and M5 values are listed on the tower (A10/A12). If the program is interrupted (power failure or the like) before DONE is pressed, none of the previously entered values under Initial Information will be saved. If this occurs, rerun Initial Information from the start. 15.When the last value required has been entered, press DONE. 16.Any of the listed adjustments can be selected next (Initial Information must always be run rst).

NOTE

The 83650A must be in "Analyzer" mode. Check the 83650A user documentation for the correct setting of the rear panel switch. For some adjustments, the user prompts are displayed on the spectrum analyzer display (DUT), not the controller display. Use the 10 MHz reference out of the 83650A wherever a 10 MHz reference input to another instrument in the setup is required, except for adjustments using the 3335A. (The spectrum analyzer provides the 10 MHz reference to the 3335A.) The program calls out an 8566, but an 8562A, 8563A, or 8563E can be used to make spectrum analyzer measurements. The 8566B or an 8560 E-Series spectrum analyzer is recommended for speed of measurement.

Chapter 2

61

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software Automated Adjustments

Automated Adjustments
The following automated adjustments can be performed in any order, EXCEPT number one (1) Initial Information. This initial information routine must ALWAYS be run rst.

62

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 1. Initial Information

1. Initial Information
This Initial Information routine must ALWAYS be run rst. Carefully follow the instructions and prompts that the software program displays. Any of the listed adjustments may be selected next.

Chapter 2

63

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 2. LO Frequency

2. LO Frequency
Assembly Adjusted
A14 frequency control assembly

Related Performance Tests

Frequency Readout Accuracy and Frequency Count Marker Accuracy

Procedure
Figure 2-1 LO Frequency Adjustment Setup

1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-1 on page 64 and carefully follow the instructions issued by the software program. See Figure 2-2 on page 65 for adjustment locations. 2. Observe the upper right-hand corner of the spectrum analyzer display while making adjustments. Prompts will appear to let you know when the LO frequency is correctly adjusted. 3. Whenever this adjustment is performed, the YTO FM Coil (3) automated adjustment must also be performed.

64

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 2. LO Frequency

Figure 2-2

LO Frequency Adjustment Locations

Chapter 2

65

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 3. YTO FM Coil

3. YTO FM Coil
Assembly Adjusted
A14 frequency control assembly

Related Performance Tests

Frequency Span Accuracy, Frequency Readout Accuracy, and Frequency Count Marker Accuracy

Procedure
1. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 on the spectrum analyzer being adjusted. See Figure 2-3 on page 67 for adjustment locations. 2. Carefully follow the instructions issued by the software program.

66

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 3. YTO FM Coil

Figure 2-3

YTO FM Coil Adjustment Locations

Chapter 2

67

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 4. LOMA Adjustments

4. LOMA Adjustments
Assembly Adjusted
A14 frequency control assembly

Related Performance Test

1ST LO OUTPUT Amplitude

Procedure
CAUTION

When connecting the 8587A power sensor to the 1 ST LO OUTPUT, be sure to use proper adapters. Failure to do so will result in damage to the expensive connector of the power sensor. On the DVM, "Front terminals" must be selected or the adjustment program will not run. Carefully follow the instructions issued by the software program. See Figure 2-4 on page 68 for test connector pin locations.

NOTE

Figure 2-4

A14J18 and A14J15 Pin Locations

68

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 5. Fast Zero Span (E-Series, Non-Option 007)

5. Fast Zero Span (E-Series, Non-Option 007)

Assembly Adjusted
A2 controller assembly

Related Performance Test

Sweep Time Accuracy (Sweep Times <30 ms)

Procedure
1. Carefully follow the instructions issued by the software program. Use an 11667C where the power splitter is called out. See Figure 2-5 on page 70 for adjustment locations.
CAUTION

When connecting the 11667C power splitter, be sure to use proper adapters where necessary. Failure to do so will result in damage to the expensive connectors of the power splitter.

Chapter 2

69

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 5. Fast Zero Span (E-Series, Non-Option 007)

Figure 2-5

A2 Fast Zero Span Adjustment Locations

70

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 6. 3rd Amp/2nd IF Align

6. 3rd Amp/2nd IF Align

Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembly

Related Performance Test

IF Input Amplitude Accuracy

Procedure
CAUTION

When connecting the 11667C power splitter, be sure to use proper adapters where necessary. Failure to do so will result in damage to the expensive connectors of the power splitter. 1. Connect the input port of an 11667C power splitter to the 85650A output. 2. Connect one output port of the power splitter, through a 20-dB pad, to the front panel IF INPUT on the spectrum analyzer. 3. Carefully follow the instructions issued by the software program.

Chapter 2

71

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 7. Cal Out Adjustment

7. Cal Out Adjustment

Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembly

Related Performance Test

Calibrator Amplitude and Frequency Accuracy

Procedure
1. Connect the 8482A power sensor (through adapter) to the front panel CAL OUTPUT on the spectrum analyzer. 2. Carefully follow the instructions issued by the software program. 3. If the spectrum analyzer has Option 103, TCXO frequency reference, the TCXO will also be adjusted.

72

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 8. Front End Cal

8. Front End Cal

Assembly Adjusted
A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX (tower) A14 frequency control assembly A15 RF assembly

Related Performance Tests

Displayed Average Noise Level Frequency Response

Procedure
1. Carefully follow the instructions issued by the software program.
NOTE

This test requires long waiting periods between adjustments. Total time required to complete the entire Front End Cal is approximately two (2) hours. Make sure that the 10 MHz reference output from the 83650A is connected to the rear panel 10 MHz IN/OUT on the spectrum analyzer being adjusted. The software program will tell you, "Waiting for instrument to warm up." If the spectrum analyzer being adjusted has already been on for more than 30 minutes, press CONTINUE on the controller.

Chapter 2

73

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 9. IF Bandpass Poles

9. IF Bandpass Poles
Assembly Adjusted
A5 IF assembly

Related Performance Test

Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity

Procedure
NOTE

Use special tuning tool, part number 8710-1010. 1. Carefully follow the instructions issued by the software program. 2. After each adjustment of a component, press RECHECK POLE (on controller) to determine the current DAC value.

74

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 10. IF Amplitude

10. IF Amplitude
Assembly Adjusted
A4 log amp/cal oscillator assembly A5 IF assembly

Related Performance Tests

IF Gain Uncertainty Scale Fidelity

Procedure
Figure 2-6 IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup

1. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-6 on page 75 and carefully follow the instructions issued by the software program.

Chapter 2

75

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 11. DC Log Adjustment

11. DC Log Adjustment

Assembly Adjusted
A4 log amp/cal oscillator assembly

Related Performance Tests

IF Gain Uncertainty Scale Fidelity

Procedure
NOTE

These adjustments need only be done under the following conditions:

Limiter phase Only if a repair is made to blocks F, G, H, I, or J. Linear delity Only if a repair is made to blocks C, D, F, G, H, I, J, K, O, IF gain accuracy, RBW switching, or log delity. Log delity Only if a repair is made to blocks D, F, H, K, IF gain accuracy, RBW switching, or log delity.

Figure 2-7

DC Log Adjustment Setup

76

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 11. DC Log Adjustment

1. Connect the 3335A to the INPUT 50 of the spectrum analyzer being adjusted. 2. Carefully follow the instructions issued by the software program. See Figure 2-8, DC Log Adjustment Locations, for adjustment locations. Figure 2-8 DC Log Adjustment Locations

Chapter 2

77

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software 12. Sampling Oscillator

12. Sampling Oscillator

Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembly

Related Performance Test

There is no related performance test for this adjustment.

Procedure
1. Carefully follow the instructions issued by the software program.

78

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software To Use the Diagnostics

To Use the Diagnostics

NOTE

When performing DAC/LATCH Control or Cal Osc Control, freeze the spectrum analyzer by pressing TRIG, EXTERNAL, SGL SWP, CAL, then IF ADJ OFF. (Do not provide a trigger.) When it is necessary to observe the effects of changes on the display, set the spectrum analyzer for a long sweep time (> 10 seconds) and make changes during a sweep. The program calls out an 8566, but an 8562A, 8563A, or 8563E can be used to make measurements that require using another spectrum analyzer. The 8566B or an 8560 E-Series spectrum analyzer is recommended for speed of measurement. Cycle the DUT spectrum analyzer power when you are done doing diagnostics.

DAC Control
The DAC control program supplies the current DAC value and allows you to set some of the DACs in the spectrum analyzer. The recommended instrument state for the spectrum analyzer under test may differ, depending on which DAC is selected. See Table 2-3 on page 80 for the recommended instrument state. 1. To preset state 1, set the spectrum analyzer as follows: Center frequency ............................................................. any Span ............................................................................... any Trigger ......................... External (with no trigger applied) IF ADJ ........................................................................... OFF Sweep ......................................................................... Single 2. Press SAVE, SAVE STATE, STATE 1. 3. To preset state 2, set the spectrum analyzer as follows: Center frequency ........................................................... any Span ............................................................................... any Reference level ............................................................... any Resolution bandwidth ................................................... any Sweep time ....................................................... >10 seconds Sweep ................................................................. CONTinue Trigger .............................................................. FREE RUN 4. Press SAVE, SAVE STATE, STATE 2. 5. See Table 2-3 on page 80 to set the recommended instrument state (RECALL, RECALL STATE, STATE 1 or STATE 2) for each DAC selection.

Chapter 2

79

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software To Use the Diagnostics

6. Select the PC board that includes the DAC of interest, then select the DAC. 7. Use SELECT to set single values. (The default for entries is decimal, but hexidecimal or binary can entered by appending either an "H" or a "B", respectively. For example, "A2H" or "10100010B".) 8. Use ADJUST for continuous changing of the DAC value. Position the arrow-tipped cursor to select the digit to be changed. 9. The UP, DOWN, and RAMP keys can also be used to exercise the DAC. Table 2-3 DAC Control Recommended Instrument State
DAC Reference Designator A2U212A A2U212B A14U601A A14U601B A14U601C A14U601D A14U301A A14U301B A14U409A A14U409B A14U424A A14U424B A14U314 Recommended Instrument State* State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 Refer to Check main coil tune DAC (steps 47-49) under Unlocked YTO PLL in Chapter 11 .. State 2 State 2 State 2 Refer to Flatness Control (RF Gain DACs) in Chapter 8 .

Intensity DAC Focus DAC LOMA Power DAC LOMA Gate Bias DAC LOMA Sampler Power DAC LOMA SBTX Power DAC YTO Fine DAC YTO Coarse DAC YTF Slope DAC YTF Offset DAC SBTX Bias DAC Sampler Amplier Gate Bias DAC Main Coil Tune DAC

Scan Ramp DAC Span DAC Sweep Generator DAC RF Gain A DAC

A14U316 A14U315 A14U307 A3U417A

*Refer to steps 1 and 3 of DAC Control for spectrum analyzer state settings, unless otherwise noted.

80

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software To Use the Diagnostics

Table 2-3

DAC Control Recommended Instrument State

DAC Reference Designator A3U417B Recommended Instrument State* Refer to Flatness Control (RF Gain DACs) in Chapter 8 . State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1

RF Gain B DAC

RT DAC 1 Video Trigger DAC Crystal 1 Center Frequency DAC Crystal 2 Center Frequency DAC Crystal 3 Center Frequency DAC Crystal 4 Center Frequency DAC Crystal 1 Bandwidth DAC Crystal 2 Bandwidth DAC Crystal 3 Bandwidth DAC Crystal 4 Bandwidth DAC Crystal 1 Symmetry DAC Crystal 2 Symmetry DAC Crystal 3 Symmetry DAC Crystal 4 Symmetry DAC LC 1 Center Frequency DAC LC 2 Center Frequency DAC LC 3 Center Frequency DAC LC 4 Center Frequency DAC LC 1 Bandwidth DAC LC 2 Bandwidth DAC LC 3 Bandwidth DAC LC 4 Bandwidth DAC Step Gain 1 DAC Step Gain 2 DAC Step Gain 3 DAC Fine Attenuation DAC Video Offset DAC

A3U409B A3U409A A5U812B A5U813B A5U809B A5U807B A5U812C A5U813C A5U809C A5U807C A5U812D A5U813D A5U809D A5U807D A5U810B A5U810D A5U806B A5U806D A5U810A A5U810C A5U806A A5U806C A5U812A A5U813A A5U809A A5U807A A4U102A

*Refer to steps 1 and 3 of DAC Control for spectrum analyzer state settings, unless

otherwise noted.

Chapter 2

81

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software To Use the Diagnostics

Table 2-3

DAC Control Recommended Instrument State

DAC Reference Designator A4U102B A4U102C A4U102D Recommended Instrument State* State 1 State 1 State 1

Log Offset Coarse DAC Log Offset Fine DAC Local Oscillator Tune DAC

*Refer to steps 1 and 3 of DAC Control for spectrum analyzer state settings, unless

otherwise noted.

82

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software To Use the Diagnostics

Latch Control
Latch control is very similar to the DAC control diagnostics except you can control individual bits. Use state 1 setup (refer to step 1 in DAC Control). Table 2-4 Latch Control Recommended Instrument State
Latch IF Latch 1 IF latch 2 Log Latch 1 Log Latch 2 Log Latch 3 Control 1 Latch Control 2 Latch Scan Time Range Latch Span Attenuator Latch RF Attenuator Latch PIN Switch Latch Offset Lock Loop Latch RF Latch Reference Designator A5U808 A5U811 A4U103 A4U104 A4U105 A14U313 A14U417 A14U309 A14U310 A14U406 A14U425 A15U904 A15U903 Recommended Instrument State* State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1 State 1

*Refer to steps 1 and 3 of DAC Control for spectrum analyzer state settings, unless otherwise noted.

Display IF CAL Data

With the IF CAL data displayed, you can check for control problems using a logic probe on the latches. You can also check the DAC values. The DAC values for each lter pole should be within a 32 DAC-count range.
NOTE

When you change the spectrum analyzer state, you need to EXIT the "Display IF CAL Data" program and SELECT it again.

Chapter 2

83

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software To Use the Diagnostics

Cal Oscillator Control

1. Using another spectrum analyzer, look at the output of the cal oscillator. Refer to the A4 schematic diagram in the 8560 EC-Series
Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information and 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The display on the test

spectrum analyzer should be similar to that shown in Figure 2-9 on page 84. Figure 2-9 CAL Oscillator Swept Output, 20 kHz Width

2. Use the up/down arrows (v, w) on the controller keyboard to select CF, Sweep Width, or RF On/Off for the cal oscillator. 3. Use the left/right arrows (v, w) to change parameters within each selection.
NOTE

You can select sweep width only when CF is at 10.7 MHz.

84

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software To Use the Diagnostics

IF Diagnostics
CAUTION

Be sure power to the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC is turned off before connecting the 85629B TAM to the DUT. Failure to do so may cause damage to the DUT or the TAM. Connect the 85629B test and adjustment module. Follow the program instructions, using the TAM's dc probe. An asterisk will appear at points of failure.

NOTE

When performing IF Diagnostics, the values without MIN or MAX limits are for information only. The individual lter poles may also be measured using an 3335A synthesizer and a spectrum analyzer (an 8566B or 8563E is preferred). Step gains can also be checked using the synthesizer and the spectrum analyzer.

RF Diagnostics
CAUTION

Be sure power to the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC is turned off before connecting the 85629B TAM to the DUT. Failure to do so may cause damage to the DUT or the TAM. Be sure power to the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC is turned off before connecting the test board, part number 08564-69201. Failure to do so may cause damage to the A14 frequency control assembly or some very expensive microcircuits (A7, A10 and A12).

NOTE

Be sure there is a jumper connecting the two pins on J3, and a jumper connecting the two pins on J20 of the test board. This program assumes a loss of 0.1 dB/GHz to avoid having to monitor the input power with a splitter and a power meter. It is therefore IMPORTANT to use a high-quality, low-loss cable from the source to the input of the spectrum analyzer under test. Part number 8120-6164 is recommended for this purpose.

Chapter 2

85

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software To Use the Diagnostics

1. Using the 8564E and 8565E adjustment/diagnostic software, select the RF diagnostics. 2. Connect the test board (P/N 08564-69201) between the A14 frequency control assembly and the microcircuits (A7 LOMA and A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX). The test board is labeled CKT and INSTR SIDE. a. Disconnect W16 from A14J9 and W12 from A14J10. b. Connect W16 to J4 on the test board and W12 to J5 on the test board. c. Connect J2 on the test board to A14J10 (use 24-conductor ribbon cable, part number 08564-60012). d. Connect J1 on the test board to A14J9 (use 20-conductor ribbon cable, part number 8120-5526). 3. You will then be prompted to make different connections to the 85629B Test and Adjustment Module (TAM), a source or spectrum analyzer. Connection locations are shown in Figure 2-10 on page 87 and Figure 2-11 on page 88. Carefully follow the instructions on the controller display. Read the prompts VERY carefully! If a wrong connection is inadvertently made, the result could lead to a wrong determination of the fault. (The software could tell you that the SBTX/RYTHM is faulty, when in fact the real fault is in the A8 low band mixer, a much less expensive component.) 4. If a failure occurs, the diagnostic software indicates what failed, for example: Low Band, and then prompts you to perform the test(s) that exercises that function or area ("Low Band Check").

86

Chapter 2

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software To Use the Diagnostics

Figure 2-10

Diagnostic Software Connection Locations, A14 and A15

Chapter 2

87

Adjustment/Diagnostic Software To Use the Diagnostics

Figure 2-11

Diagnostic Software Connection Locations, RF Section

88

Chapter 2

3 Manual Adjustment Procedures

89

Manual Adjustment Procedures Introduction

Introduction
This chapter contains information on manual adjustment procedures. Never perform adjustments as routine maintenance. Adjustments should be performed after a repair or performance test failure. For information on which adjustments to perform, refer to Table 3-1 on page 93. Information on automated adjustments can be found in Chapter 2 of this service guide. Following is a list of the automated adjustments: Automated Adjustments 1. Initial Information 2. LO Frequency 3. YTO FM Coil 4. LOMA Adjustments 5. Fast Zero Span 6. 3rd Amp/2nd IF Align 7. Cal Out Adjustment 8. Front End Cal 9. IF Bandpass Poles 10. IF Amplitude 11. DC Log Adjustments 12. Sampling Oscillator
Manual Adjustments 1. High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment (8561E and 8563E).....page 99

2. Display Adjustment (8561E and 8563E)........................... page 3. IF Bandpass Adjustment .................................................. page 4. IF Amplitude Adjustments ............................................... page 5. DC Log Amplier Adjustments ........................................ page 6. Sampling Oscillator Adjustment ...................................... page 7. YTO Adjustment ............................................................... page 8. Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment ................................... page 9. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment OCXO ........................ page 10. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment TCXO (Option 103) . page 11. Demodulator Adjustment ............................................... page 12. External Mixer Bias Adjustment ................................... page 13. External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment ......................... page 14. Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment (serial prex 3517A and below) ........................................... page 15. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment ................................................ page 16. 600 MHz Reference Adjustment ..................................... page

102 110 116 121 126 130 134 136 140 142 145 147 151 155 159

90

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures Introduction

NOTE

Before performing any adjustments, allow the spectrum analyzer to warm up for at least 5 minutes.

Safety Considerations
Although this instrument has been designed in accordance with international safety standards, this manual contains information, cautions, and warnings which must be followed to ensure safe operation and to prevent damage to the instrument. Service and adjustments should be performed only by qualied service personnel.
WARNING

Adjustments in this section are performed with power supplied to the instrument and protective covers removed. There are voltages at many points in the instrument which can, if contacted, cause personal injury. Be extremely careful. Adjustments should be performed only by trained service personnel. Power is still applied to this instrument with the LINE switch in the off position. Before removing or installing any assembly or printed circuit board, remove the line-power cord. Capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged, even if the instrument has been disconnected from its source of supply. Use a nonmetallic adjustment tool whenever possible.

Which Adjustments Should Be Performed?

Table 3-1 on page 93 lists the manual adjustments that should be performed when an assembly is repaired or changed. It is important to perform the adjustments in the order indicated to ensure that the instrument meets its specications.

Test Equipment
The equipment required for the manual adjustment procedures is listed in Table 1-5, "Recommended Test Equipment." Any equipment that satises the critical specications given in the table may be substituted for the preferred test equipment. If an 3335A is not available for performance tests, tests using alternate test equipment are available. See Chapter 3a, Manual Adjustment Procedures: 3335A Source not Available, on page 161.

Chapter 3

91

Manual Adjustment Procedures Introduction

Adjustable and Factory-Selected Components

Table 3-2 on page 96 lists the adjustable components by reference designation and name. For each component, the table provides a description and lists the adjustment number. Refer to Table 3-3 on page 98 for a complete list of factory-selected components used in the instrument along with their functions. Factory-selected components are identied with an asterisk on the schematic diagrams.

Adjustment Tools
For adjustments requiring a nonmetallic tuning tool, use ber tuning tool, part number 8710-0033. Two different tuning tools may be necessary for IF bandpass adjustments, depending upon the type of tuning slug used in the slug-tuned inductors. If the tuning slug requires a slotted tuning tool, use part number 8710-1010. If the tuning slug requires a forked tuning tool, use part number 8710-0772. Never try to force an adjustment control. This is especially critical when tuning variable capacitors or slug-tuned inductors. Required service accessories, with part numbers, are listed under Service Kit, in Chapter 1 , General Information.

Instrument Service Position

Refer to Chapter 4 for information on removing the spectrum analyzer cover assembly and accessing all internal assemblies.

92

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures Introduction

Table 3-1
Assembly Changed or Repaired A1A2 RPG A2 controller

Related Adjustments Perform the following related adjustments in the order listed Adjustment Number Manual
Automated*

A1A1 keyboard No related adjustment

A3 interface

No related adjustment 16 MHz PLL adjustment 15 Display adjustment 2 (8564E and 8565E only) If EEROM from old A2 controller could not be used in new A2 or if EEROM must be replaced, also perform the following adjustments: LOMA adjustments External mixer amplitude adjustment or 3rd amp/2nd IF align 13 Front end cal Display adjustment -fast zero span (8564E 2
and 8565E only)

6 8 5 8 5

Front end cal

A4 log amp/cal osc

Display adjustment -fast zero

and 8565E only)

span (8564E

2 11 4 5 3 4 1 2 1 2

Demodulator adjustment IF amplitude

A5 IF

adjustment

10 11 9 10

DC log amplier adjustment IF bandpass adjustment IF amplitude adjustment High voltage power supply adjustment (8564E and 8565E only) Display adjustment (8564E and 8565E only) High voltage power supply adjustment (8564E and 8565E only) Display adjustment (8564E and 8565E only)

A6 power supply

A6A1 HV module

*If any automated adjustment is required, you must rst perform automated adjustment 1. Initial Information on page 63.
Either

the manual or the automated adjustment may be performed.

Chapter 3

93

Manual Adjustment Procedures Introduction

Table 3-1
Assembly Changed or Repaired A7 LOMA

Related Adjustments Perform the following related adjustments in the order listed LOMA adjustments Front end cal (or perform the frequency response performance test in the 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide. The adjustment must be performed if the performance test
fails).

Adjustment Number Manual

Automated*

4 8

A8 low band mixer A9 input attenuator

Front end cal Front end cal (or perform the frequency response performance test in the 8560
E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide. The adjustment must be performed if the performance test fails.)

8 8

A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX A11 YTO

Front end cal YTO adjustment LO frequency YTO FM coil Front end cal Display adjustment -fast zero span(E-series only) YTO adjustment LO frequency YTO FM cal Front end cal 2 7 7

2 3 8 5

A13 2nd converter A14 frequency control

2 3 8

*If any automated adjustment is required, you must rst perform automated adjustment 1. Initial Information on page 63.
Either

the manual or the automated adjustment may be performed.

Perform

either the manual "YTO adjustment" (7) or the automated "LO frequency" and "YTO FM coil" adjustments (2 and 3).

94

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures Introduction

Table 3-1
Assembly Changed or Repaired A15 RF

Related Adjustments Perform the following related adjustments in the order listed 10 MHz reference adjustment (TCXO, Option 103) or CAL OUT adjustment Calibrator amplitude adjustment or CAL OUT adjustment External mixer bias adjustment Sampling oscillator adjustment Signal ID oscillator adjustment External mixer amplitude adjustment or 3rd amp/2nd IF align Front end cal Adjustment Number Manual 15 8 12 6 14 13 6 2 2
Automated*

7 7

12

A15U100 Sampling oscillator adjustment sampler A17 CRT driver Display adjustment A18V1 CRT A19 GPIB A21 OCXO

6 8 12

(8564E and 8565E only) Display adjustment (8564E and 8565E only) No related adjustment 10 MHz reference adjustment (OCXO)

*If any automated adjustment is required, you must rst perform automated adjustment1. Initial Information on page 63.
Either

the manual or the automated adjustment may be performed.

Perform

either the manual "YTO adjustment" (7) or the automated "LO frequency" and "YTO FM coil" adjustments (2 and 3).

Chapter 3

95

Manual Adjustment Procedures Introduction

Table 3-2
Reference Designator A2R152 A2R206 A2R209

Adjustable Components
Adjustment Name 16 MHz PLL ADJ SWEEP OFFSET Adjustment Number 22 Description Adjusts the free-running frequency of the 16 MHz CPU clock Adjusts the horizontal gain in the X line generator. Adjusts the beginning of the trace to the leftmost vertical graticule line in fast-analog zero-span mode. Adjusts the vertical gain in the Y line generator. Adjusts the vertical position in fast-analog zero span to match the digital zero-span input. Adjusts the blanking at the end of a vector on the display. Adjusts the blanking at the start of a vector on the display. Adjusts the vertical gain in fast-analog zero span to match with the digital zero-span input. Adjusts the end of the trace to the rightmost vertical-graticule line in fast-analog zero-span mode. Adjusts the FM demodulation for a peak response. Adjusts Limiter Phase for peak response. Minimizes error to Top of Screen. Minimizes Linearity Fidelity error.

DGTL X GAIN 2 2

A2R215 A2R218

DGTL Y GAIN 2 VIDEO OFFSET STOP BLANK START BLANK VIDEO GAIN SWEEP GAIN 2

A2R262 A2R263 A2R268 A2R271

2 2 2 2

A4C707 A4R445 A4R531 A4R544

FM DEMOD LIMITER PHASE LOG AMP TOS LIN FIDELITY BOW CAL OSC AMPTD

16 5 5 5

A4R826

Sets calibration oscillator output power (nominally 35 dBm). This power is injected into the IF

during the AUTO IF ADJUST routines.

A5L300 A5L301 A5L700 LC CTR 1 LC CTR 2 LC CTR 3 3 3 3 Adjusts center frequency of rst stage of LC bandwidth lter to 10.7 MHz. Adjusts center frequency of second stage of LC bandwidth lter to 10.7 MHz. Adjusts center frequency of third stage of LC bandwidth lter to 10.7 MHz.

A5L702 A5R343

LC CTR 4 15 DB ATT

3 4

Adjusts center frequency of fourth stage of LC bandwidth lter to 10.7 MHz. Adjusts the attenuation of the reference 15 dB attenuator for 15 db between minimum and

maximum attenuation.

96

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures Introduction

Table 3-2
Reference Designator A5T200 A5T202 A5T500 A5T502 A6R410

Adjustable Components
Adjustment Name XTAL CTR 1 XTAL CTR 2 XTAL CTR 3 XTAL CTR 4 HV ADJ Adjustment Number 3 3 3 3 1 Description Adjusts center frequency of rst stage of crystal bandwidth lter to 10.7 MHz. Adjusts center frequency of second stage of crystal bandwidth lter to 10.7 MHz. Adjusts center frequency of third stage of crystal bandwidth lter to 10.7 MHz. Adjusts center frequency of fourth stage of crystal bandwidth lter to 10.7 MHz. Adjusts the voltage between A6TP405 and A6TP401 to the voltage marked on the A6A1 high voltage module. Adjusts the main coil tune driver current at a YTO frequency of 6.01 GHz (near the upper YTO

A14R42

6.01 GHz

frequency limit).
A14R76 A14R93 FM SPAN 3.2 GHz 7 7 Adjusts the FM span accuracy by affecting the sensitivity of the FM coil driver. Adjusts the main coil xed driver current at a YTO frequency of 3.2 GHz (near the lower YTO

frequency limit).
A15C100 A15C210 A15C629 A15U302 A15R561 A15R926 A17R4 A17R11 A17R21 A17R26 A17R34 A17R55 A17R57 A17R75 A17R77 SMPL MATCH 6 VCO RANGE SIG ID 10 MHz ADJ CAL AMPTD EXT BIAS ZERO Z GAIN CUTOFF Z FOCUS X FOCUS COARSE FOCUS X GAIN X POSN Y GAIN Y POSN 6 19 15 13 17 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Transforms the sampler input impedance to 50 ohms over the 285 to 297.2 MHz range. Adjusts the VCO tank capacitance so that 21V on the VCO tune line equals 298 MHz VCO frequency. Fine adjusts the 298 MHz SIG ID oscillator frequency to optimize its performance. Adjusts frequency of the temperature compensated crystal oscillator (TCXO) to 10 MHz. Adjusts amplitude of the 300 MHz calibrator signal to 10.0 dBm. Adjusts zero bias point of external mixer bias. Adjusts maximum intensity. Adjusts intensity to turn off blanked lines. Adjusts focus for lines of different brightness. Adjusts focus at the left and right corners of the display. Adjusts focus at the center of the display. Adjusts the horizontal-deection amplier gain. Adjusts the CRT horizontal position. Adjusts the vertical-deection amplier gain. Adjusts the CRT vertical position.

Chapter 3

97

Manual Adjustment Procedures Introduction

Table 3-2
Reference Designator A17R90 A17R92 A17R93

Adjustable Components
Adjustment Name TRACE ALIGN DDD ASTIG Adjustment Number 2 2 2 Description Adjusts the display axis rotation. Adjusts focus of the center of the display. Adjusts for the spot roundness on the CRT display.

Table 3-3

Factory Selected Components

Reference Adjustment Basis of Selection Designator Number A5C204 A5C216 A5C326 A5C327 A5C505 A5C516 A5C717 A5C718 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Selected to optimize center frequency of LC tank that loads the crystal. Selected to optimize center frequency of LC tank that loads the crystal. Selected to optimize LC pole center frequency. Selected to optimize LC pole center frequency. Selected to optimize center frequency of LC tank that loads the crystal. Selected to optimize center frequency of LC tank that loads the crystal. Selected to optimize LC pole center frequency. Selected to optimize LC pole center frequency.

98

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 1. High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment (8564E and 8565E)

1. High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment (8564E and 8565E)

Assembly Adjusted
A6 power supply

Related Performance Test

There is no related performance test for this adjustment.

Description
The high voltage power supply is adjusted to the voltage marked on the A6A1 HV module. The A6A1 HV module is characterized in the factory to ensure that the display lament voltage is set to 6.0 V rms when the +110 Vdc (nominal) supply is set to the voltage marked on the HV module.
WARNING

To minimize shock hazard, use a nonmetallic adjustment tool when adjusting the A6 power supply. The following procedure probes voltages that, if contacted, could cause personal injury or death.

NOTE

Adjustment of the high voltage power supply should not be a routine maintenance procedure. Any adjustments should be done only if the A6 power supply, A6A1 HV module, or A18V1 CRT (display) is repaired or replaced. You must perform the display adjustments after this adjustment if either the display or HV module has been replaced.

Chapter 3

99

Manual Adjustment Procedures 1. High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 3-1

High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment Setup

Equipment
Digital multimeter ......................................................... 3456A DVM test leads ............................................................. 34118A

Procedure
WARNING

After disconnecting the ac power cord, allow capacitors in the high voltage supply to discharge for at least 30 seconds before removing the protective cover from the A6 power supply. 1. Turn the spectrum analyzer off by pressing LINE. Disconnect the power cord and remove the spectrum analyzer cover. Fold down the A2 controller, A3 interface, A4 log amplier/cal oscillator, and A5 IF assemblies. Remove the A6 power supply cover. 2. Position the spectrum analyzer as shown in Figure 3-1 on page 100. Connect the negative DVM lead to A6TP401 and the positive DVM lead to A6TP405 ( you will place the positive DVM lead on the inductor (L401) lead which is adjacent to the label that reads "U401"; a white square outlines the area on the PC board where this lead is inserted into the A6 board). 3. Set the 3456A controls as follows: Function ............................................................. DC VOLTS Range .............................................................. 1000 VOLTS 4. Reconnect the power cord to the spectrum analyzer and press LINE to the on position. 5. Record the voltage marked on the A6A1 HV module.
Voltage marked on A6A1 HV Module = ____________________Vdc

100

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 1. High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment (8564E and 8565E)

6. Adjust A6R410 HV ADJ for a voltage equal to the voltage recorded in step 5. 7. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off and disconnect the power cord. Wait at least 30 seconds for the high voltage power supply capacitors to discharge. 8. Disconnect the DVM test leads from A6TP401 and A6TP405. Reinstall the power supply cover.

Chapter 3

101

Manual Adjustment Procedures 2. Display Adjustment (8564E and 8565E)

2. Display Adjustment (8564E and 8565E)

Assembly Adjusted
A2 controller A17 CRT driver

Related Performance Test

Sweep Time Accuracy (Sweep Times <30 ms)

Description
Coarse adjustment of the deection ampliers, Z-axis ampliers, and line generators is done using the CRT adjust pattern. Fine adjustments use the graticule. The fast zero-span amplitude adjustments correct for differences between analog and digital display modes. The displayed sweep time accuracy is adjusted in the fast zero-span sweep adjustments. Figure 3-2 Display Adjustment Setup

Equipment
10 dB VHF step attenuator .................................................. 355D Adapters Type N (m) to BNC (f) ................................................... 1250-1476 Cables BNC, 122 cm (2 required) .................................................. 10503A

102

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 2. Display Adjustment (8564E and 8565E)

Procedure
NOTE

Perform the 16 MHz PLL Adjustment in this chapter before proceeding with this adjustment. 1. Turn the spectrum analyzer off by pressing LINE. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and fold out the A2 controller and A3 interface assemblies as illustrated in Figure 3-2 on page 102. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT. Adjustment locations are shown on the CRT neck for A17 adjustments and in Figure 3-4 on page 107 for the A2 adjustments.

Preliminary Adjustments
2. Set A17R55 X GAIN, A17R75 Y GAIN, A17R92 DDD, A17R93 ASTIG, A2R206 DGTL X GAIN, A2R215 DGTL Y GAIN, A2R262 STOP BLANK, and A2R263 START BLANK to midrange. Also set the rear panel X POSN, Y POSN, and TRACE ALIGN to midrange. 3. Set A17R21 Z FOCUS, A17R26 X FOCUS, and A17R11 CUTOFF to midrange. 4. Set A17R4 Z GAIN fully clockwise. 5. Turn the spectrum analyzer on and allow it to warm up for at least 3 minutes. Adjust A17R11 CUTOFF until the display is visible and A17R34 COARSE FOCUS for best possible focus.

Cutoff Adjustment
6. Press PRESET, DISPLAY, INTENSITY, 255 ENTER, STORE INTENSITY, MORE 1 of 2, FOCUS, 127 ENTER, STORE FOCUS, then GRAT ON OFF (OFF). Adjust A17R11 CUTOFF until the retrace line between the bottom of trace A and the annunciators at the bottom of the display just disappears.

Deection Adjustments
7. Press GRAT ON OFF (ON), MORE 2 of 2, INTENSITY, 80 ENTER, STORE INTENSITY, CAL, MORE 1 of 2, and CRT ADJ PATTERN. Fold up the A3 interface assembly to access the adjustments on the A2 controller assembly. 8. Refer to Figure 3-3 on page 105 for locating the lines used for adjusting DGTL X GAIN and DGTL Y GAIN. Each of these lines is actually two lines adjusted for coincidence. The two lines will form an "X" if they are not adjusted properly. 9. Adjust A2R206 DGTL X GAIN until the two vertical lines near the left edge of the display converge to one single line.

Chapter 3

103

Manual Adjustment Procedures 2. Display Adjustment (8564E and 8565E)

10.Adjust A2R215 DGTL Y GAIN until the two horizontal lines near the top edge of the display converge to one single line. 11.Adjust A2R262 STOP BLANK and A2R263 START BLANK for the sharpest corners of the outer box in the test pattern. The intensity of the corners should be the same as the middle of the lines between the corners. 12.Adjust the rear panel TRACE ALIGN until the leftmost line of the test pattern is parallel with the CRT bezel. See Figure 3-3 on page 105. 13.Adjust the rear panel X POSN and A17R55 X GAIN until the leftmost "@" characters and the softkey labels appear just inside the left and right edges of the CRT bezel. 14.Adjust the rear panel Y POSN and A17R75 Y GAIN until the softkey labels align with their appropriate softkeys. 15.Press PRESET. If necessary, readjust STOP BLANK and START BLANK for the best-looking intersection of the graticule lines. This will be most noticeable along the center vertical and horizontal graticule lines.

104

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 2. Display Adjustment (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 3-3

CRT Adjust Pattern

Chapter 3

105

Manual Adjustment Procedures 2. Display Adjustment (8564E and 8565E)

Intensity Adjustments
16.Press AMPLITUDE then set the REF LVL to 70 dB and the LOG dB/DIV to 1. This should almost completely ll the screen with the noise oor. Press SGL SWP. Adjust A17R4 Z GAIN until the intensity at the center of the screen is about medium. It should be fully illuminated, but not so bright that it burns the screen (15 NITs on a photometer/radiometer). 17.Press CAL, MORE 1 of 2, and CRT ADJ PATTERN. Locate the dot just underneath the HP logo. Adjust A17R93 ASTIG for the smallest round dot possible. 18.Adjust A17R34 COARSE FOCUS and A17R92 DDD for the best focus of the characters at the center of the screen. 19.Adjust A17R21 Z FOCUS for the best focus of the outside box of the test pattern. 20.Adjust A17R26 X FOCUS for best focus of the "@" characters at the corners of the test pattern. 21.Repeat steps 17 through 20 to obtain the best overall focus quality.

106

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 2. Display Adjustment (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 3-4

A2 Display Adjustment Locations

Chapter 3

107

Manual Adjustment Procedures 2. Display Adjustment (8564E and 8565E)

Fast Zero Span Adjustments (Non-Option 007, E-series Instruments Only)

22.Set A2R209 SWEEP OFFSET, A2R218 VIDEO OFFSET, and A2R268 VIDEO GAIN to midrange. Adjustment locations are shown in Figure 3-4 on page 107 for these A2 adjustments. 23.Set the 355D to 30 dB attenuation. 24.Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer, and connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-2 on page 102. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Center frequency ...................................................... 300MHz Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Reference level ......................................................... 40 dBm Resolution bandwidth .................................................. 1 kHz Video bandwidth .......................................................... 300 Hz Sweep time ................................................................... 50 ms 25.Press MKR, MKR, MARKER REFLVL. If the marker is not at the top graticule, press MARKER REF LVL again. 26.Press SAVE, SAVE STATE, and STATE 0. 27.Set the sweep time to 10 ms. 28.Press SAVE, SAVE STATE, and STATE 1. 29.Adjust A2R209 SWEEP OFFSET to place the beginning of the trace at the leftmost vertical graticule line. 30.Adjust A2R271 SWEEP GAIN to place the end of the trace at the tenth vertical graticule line (one division from the right edge of the graticule). 31.Press AMPLITUDE and press the key seven times. 32.Press SAVE, SAVE STATE, and STATE 2. 33.Set the sweep time to 50 ms. Press SAVE, SAVE STATE, and STATE 3. 34.Press RECALL, RECALL STATE, and STATE 1. 35.Switch between STATE 1 and STATE 2. Adjust A2R268 and A2R218 so that the trace in state 1 is lined up with the top line of the graticule and the state 2 trace is lined up with the eighth graticule down from the top (counting the top line). Repeat until the traces align to within 0.2 divisions. 36.Adjust A2R209 and A2R271 until the start of sweep is aligned to the leftmost vertical graticule line and the end of the sweep is aligned with the right most vertical graticule line. 37.Press STATE 2 and STATE 3. The two traces should be aligned within 0.1 divisions.

108

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 2. Display Adjustment (8564E and 8565E)

38.Press STATE 0 and STATE 1. The two traces should be aligned within 0.1 divisions.

Chapter 3

109

Manual Adjustment Procedures 3. IF Bandpass Adjustment

3. IF Bandpass Adjustment
Assembly Adjusted
A5 IF assembly

Related Performance Test

Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity

Description
The center frequency of each IF bandpass lter pole is adjusted by DAC-controlled varactor diodes and an inductor (for the LC poles) or a transformer (for the crystal poles). The inductors and transformers are for coarse tuning and the varactors are for ne tuning by the microprocessor. The inductors and transformers are adjusted such that the varactor diodes are biased near the middle of their capacitance range. The varactor diode bias is measured with the DVM.

NOTE

This procedure is not a routine adjustment. It should be performed only if repairs to the A5 IF assembly are made. If the entire A5 IF assembly is replaced, the assembly arrives pre-adjusted from the factory and requires no further adjustment. IF Bandpass Adjustment Setup

Figure 3-5

110

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 3. IF Bandpass Adjustment

Equipment
Digital voltmeter ......................................................... 3456A DVM test leads ............................................................ 34118A Special tuning tool (use with slotted tuning slugs) ........................................ 8710-1010 Special tuning tool (use with forked tuning slugs) .......................................... 8710-0772

Procedure
1. Turn the spectrum analyzer off by pressing LINE. Disconnect the power cord. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and fold down the A2 controller, A3 interface, A4 log amp, and A5 IF assemblies. Reconnect the power cord. Turn the spectrum analyzer on and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes. 2. Connect the negative DVM lead to pin 6 of A5J6. See Figure 3-5 on page 110 and Figure 3-6 on page 112. Set the 3456A controls as follows: Function ............................................................. DC VOLTS Range .................................................................. 10 VOLTS 3. On the spectrum analyzer press PRESET, SPAN, 2, MHz, CAL, and IF ADJ ON OFF so OFF is underlined.

Chapter 3

111

Manual Adjustment Procedures 3. IF Bandpass Adjustment

Figure 3-6

A5J6 Pin Locations

LC Bandpass Adjustments
4. On the spectrum analyzer, press ADJ CURR IF STATE. Wait for the IF ADJUST STATUS message to disappear before continuing with the next step. 5. Read the voltage on A5TP5 (this is an empty-hole type of test point). If the voltage is less than +6.06 Vdc, turn A5L300 LC CTR 1 clockwise. If the voltage is greater than +6.26 Vdc, turn LC CTR 1 counterclockwise. 6. Repeat steps 1and 2until the voltage reads +6.16 Vdc 100 mV.
NOTE

If the range for the LC CTR adjustment is insufcient, replace the appropriate factory-selected capacitor as listed in Table 3-4 on page 113. To determine the correct replacement value, center the LC CTR adjustment and press ADJ CURR IF STATE. After the IF ADJUST STATUS message disappears, read the DVM display. Choose a capacitor value from Table 3-5 on page 113, based on the DVM reading and the presently loaded capacitor value. Table 3-8 on page 115 lists a few capacitor part numbers. Turn the spectrum analyzer off by pressing LINE to the off position before removing or replacing any shield. 7. Move the positive DVM lead to A5TP6. 8. Adjust A5L301 LC CTR 2 by repeating steps 4 through 6.

CAUTION

112

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 3. IF Bandpass Adjustment

9. Move the positive DVM test lead to A5TP2 (this is a resistor-lead type of test point). 10.Adjust A5L700 LC CTR 3 by repeating steps 4 through 6. 11.Move the positive DVM test lead to A5TP1 (this is a resistor-lead type of test point). 12.Adjust A5L702 LC CTR 4 using the procedure in steps 4 through 6. Table 3-4 Factory-Selected LC Filter Capacitors
LC CTR Adjustment A5L300 LC CTR 1 A5L301 LC CTR 2 A5L700 LC CTR 3 A5L702 LC CTR 4 Fixed Factory Select Capacitor A5C326 A5C327 A5C717 A5C718

Table 3-5

LC Factory-Selected Capacitor Selection

DVM Reading (V) Currently Loaded Capacitor Value (pF) Replace 20 with: * * * * * No change No change 18 18 15

Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace 6.8 with: 8.2 with: 10 with: 12 with: 15 with: 18 with: 0 to 1.5 * * * * * * 1.5 to 2.5 18 18 * * * * 2.5 to 3.5 15 15 18 18 * * 3.5 to 4.5 10 12 15 15 18 * 4.5 to 5.5 8.2 10 12 15 18 * 5.5 to 6.5 No No No No No No change change change change change change 6.5 to 7.5 No No No No No No change change change change change change 7.5 to 8.5 * 6.8 8.2 10 12 15 8.5 to 9.5 * * 6.8 8.2 12 15 9.5 to 10 * * 6.8 8.2 10 12 * Indicates a condition that should not exist; suspect broken hardware.

Chapter 3

113

Manual Adjustment Procedures 3. IF Bandpass Adjustment

XTAL Bandpass Adjustments

13.On the spectrum analyzer, press SPAN, 1, MHz, and CAL. 14.Move the positive DVM test lead to A5TP7. 15.On the spectrum analyzer, press ADJ CURR IF STATE. Wait for the IF ADJUST STATUS message to disappear before continuing to the next step. 16.Read the voltage displayed on the DVM. If the voltage is less than +6.06 Vdc, turn A5T200 XTAL CTR 1 clockwise. If the voltage is greater than +6.26 Vdc, turn XTAL CTR 1 counterclockwise. 17.Repeat steps 15 and 16 until the voltage reads +6.16 Vdc 100 mV.
NOTE

If the range for the XTAL CTR adjustment is insufcient, replace the appropriate factory-selected capacitor as listed in Table 3-6 on page 114. To determine the correct replacement value, center the XTAL CTR adjustment, and press ADJ CURR IF STATE. After the IF ADJUST STATUS message disappears, read the DVM display. Choose a capacitor value from Table 3-7 on page 115, based on the DVM reading and the presently loaded capacitor value. Table 3-8 on page 115 lists a few capacitor part numbers. Turn the spectrum analyzer off by pressing LINE to the off position before removing or replacing any shield. 18.Move the positive DVM test lead to A5TP8. 19.Adjust A5T202 XTAL CTR 2 using the procedure in steps 15 through 17. 20.Move the positive DVM test lead to A5TP3. 21.Adjust A5T500 XTAL CTR 3 using the procedure in steps 15 through 17. 22.Move the positive DVM test lead to A5TP4. 23.Adjust A5T502 XTAL CTR 4 using the procedure in steps 15 through 17.

CAUTION

Table 3-6

Factory-Selected XTAL Filter Capacitors

Fixed Factory Select Capacitor A5C204 A5C216 A5C505 A5C516

XTAL CTR Adjustment A5T200 XTAL CTR 1 A5T202 XTAL CTR 2 A5T500 XTAL CTR 3 A5T502 XTAL CTR 4

114

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 3. IF Bandpass Adjustment

Table 3-7
DVM Reading (V)

XTAL Factory-Selected Capacitor Selection

Currently Loaded Capacitor Value (pF) Replace 27 with: * * * * * No change No change 24 24 24

Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace 15 with: 18 with: 20 with: 22 with: 24 with: 0 to 1.5 * * * * * 1.5 to 2.5 27 * * * * 2.5 to 3.5 22 27 27 * * 3.5 to 4.5 18 22 24 27 27 4.5 to 5.5 18 20 22 24 27 5.5 to 6.5 No change No change No change No change No change 6.5 to 7.5 No change No change No change No change No change 7.5 to 8.5 * 15 18 18 22 8.5 to 9.5 * 15 15 18 20 9.5 to 10 * * 15 18 20 * Indicates a condition that should not exist; suspect broken hardware.

Table 3-8

Capacitor Part Numbers Capacitor Value (pF) 6.8 8.2 10 12 15 18 20 22 24 27 Part Number 0160-4793 0160-4792 0160-4791 0160-4790 0160-4789 0160-4788 0160-5699 0160-4787 0160-5903 0160-4786

Chapter 3

115

Manual Adjustment Procedures 4. IF Amplitude Adjustments

4. IF Amplitude Adjustments
The IF amplitude adjustments consist of the cal oscillator amplitude adjustment and the reference 15 dB attenuator adjustment.

Assembly Adjusted
A4 log amp/cal oscillator A5 IF assembly

Related Performance Tests

IF Gain Uncertainty Scale Fidelity

Description
This adjustment sets the output amplitude of the A4 log amp/cal oscillator and the absolute amplitude of the reference 15 dB attenuator. The output of the A4 log amp/cal oscillator is adjusted so that a 55 dBm signal applied to the 10.7 MHz IF input on the A5 IF assembly (A5J3) causes a displayed signal of 60 dBm. The effect of this adjustment is visible only after the ADJ CURR IF STATE sequence is complete. ADJ CURR IF STATE causes the IF gain adjustment to use the "new" output amplitude from the A4 log amp/cal oscillator. This procedure also sets the attenuator of the reference 15 dB attenuator so that a source amplitude change of 50 dB combined with a spectrum analyzer reference level change of 50 dB displays an amplitude difference of 50 dB.

116

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 4. IF Amplitude Adjustments

Figure 3-7

IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup

Equipment
Frequency synthesizer ................................................ 3335A Adapters Type N (m) to BNC (f) ................................................. 1250-1476 Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) ...................................................... 11903B Cables BNC, 122 cm (48 in) 10503A Test cable 85680-60093

Chapter 3

117

Manual Adjustment Procedures 4. IF Amplitude Adjustments

Figure 3-8

IF Amplitude Adjustment Locations

NOTE

The 15 dB reference attenuator adjustment is preset at the factory and need not be done if the entire A5 IF assembly is replaced.

Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and place the spectrum analyzer in the service position as illustrated in Figure 3-7IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup, on page 117. 2. Disconnect W29, violet coax cable, from A5J3. Connect the test cable between A5J3 and the 50 output of the 3335A. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. 3. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR, CAL, and IF ADJ ON OFF so OFF is underlined. 4. Set the 3335A controls as follows: Frequency ............................................................... 10.7 MHz Amplitude ................................................................ 55 dBm 5. Note the marker value. Ideally it should read 60 dBm 0.1 dB.

118

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 4. IF Amplitude Adjustments

6. If the marker reads less than 60.1 dBm, rotate A4R826 CAL OSC AMPTD one-third turn clockwise for every 0.1 dB less than 60 dBm. If the marker reads greater than 59.9 dBm, rotate A4R826 CAL OSC AMPTD one-third turn counter clockwise for every 0.1 dB greater than 60 dBm. See Figure 3-8 on page 118 for the location of A4R826. A change in the displayed amplitude will not be seen until ADJ CURR IF STATE is pressed.
NOTE

If A4R826 has inadequate range, refer to "Inadequate CAL OSC AMPTD Range" in Chapter 9. 7. Press ADJ CURR IF STATE. After allowing the analyzer time to complete the adjustments, the displayed amplitude and marker reading should change. 8. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until the marker reads 60 dBm 0.1 dB. 9. Disconnect the test cable from A5J3 and reconnect W29 to A5J3.

A5 Reference Attenuator Adjustment

10.Set the spectrum analyzer reference level to 60 dBm. If markers are displayed, press MKR and MARKERS OFF. 11.Set the 3335A AMPLITUDE to 60 dBm. 12.Connect a BNC cable between the 50 output of the 3335A and the spectrum analyzer INPUT 50 . 13.On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL and REF LVL ADJ. Use the front panel knob or step keys to place the peak of the displayed signal 3 dB to 5 dB below the reference level. 14.Press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA on the spectrum analyzer. Set the spectrum analyzer reference level to 10 dBm. 15.Change the 3335A AMPLITUDE to 10 dBm. 16.Press CAL on the spectrum analyzer. 17.Note the MKR amplitude. Ideally, it should read 50.00 dB 0.1 dB. 18.If the MKR amplitude is less than 49.9 dB, rotate A5R343 15 dB ATTEN one-half turn counterclockwise for each 0.1 dB less than 50.00 dB. If the MKR amplitude is greater than 50.1 dB, rotate A5R343 15 dB ATTEN one-half turn clockwise for each 0.1 dB greater than 50.00 dB. Do not adjust A5R343 more than ve turns before continuing with the next step. 19.Press ADJ CURR IF STATE on the spectrum analyzer. Note the MKR amplitude reading. 20.Repeat steps 11 through 20 until the MKR amplitude reading is 50.00 dB 0.1 dB.

Chapter 3

119

Manual Adjustment Procedures 4. IF Amplitude Adjustments

A5 Adjustment Verication
21.On the spectrum analyzer, disconnect W29 from A5J3. Connect the test cable between A5J3 and the 50 output of the 3335A. 22.Set the spectrum analyzer reference level to 10 dBm. 23.Set the 3335A AMPLITUDE to 5 dBm. 24.Press MKR and MARKER NORMAL on the spectrum analyzer. 25.The MARKER amplitude should read 10 dBm 0.13 dB. If the reading is outside of this range, repeat steps 4 through 21. 26.On the spectrum analyzer, reconnect W29 to A5J3. Press PRESET and set the controls as follows: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Reference level ......................................................... 10 dBm Resolution bandwidth .............................................. 300 kHz 27.Connect a BNC cable between the 8563E CAL OUTPUT and INPUT 50 . 28.On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR CAL and REF LVL ADJ. 29.Use the knob or step keys to adjust the REF LEVEL CAL setting until the MKR reads 10.00 dBm 0.1 dB. 30.On the spectrum analyzer, press STORE REF LVL.

120

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 5. DC Log Amplier Adjustments

5. DC Log Amplier Adjustments

There are three DC log adjustments; limiter phase, linear delity, and log delity.

Assembly Adjusted
A4 log amp/cal oscillator

Related Performance Tests

IF Gain Uncertainty Scale Fidelity

Description
These three adjustment need only be done under the following conditions: Limiter phase Only if a repair is made to blocks F, G, H, I, or J. Linear delity Only if a repair is made to blocks C, D, F, G, H, I, J, K, O, IF gain accuracy, RBW switching, or log delity. Log delity Only if a repair is made to blocks D, F, H, K, IF gain accuracy, RBW switching, or log delity.

If multiple adjustments are required they should be done in the following order: 1. Limiter Phase 2. Linear Fidelity 3. Log Fidelity

Chapter 3

121

Manual Adjustment Procedures 5. DC Log Amplier Adjustments

Figure 3-9

DC Log Adjustment Setup

Equipment
Frequency synthesizer ................................................... 3335A Adapters Type N (m) to BNC (f) .................................................... 1250-1476 Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) .................................................. 11903B Cables BNC, 122 cm (48 in) .................................................... 10503A Test cable ...................................................................... 85680-60093

122

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 5. DC Log Amplier Adjustments

Figure 3-10

DC Log Adjustment Locations

NOTE

Adjustments should be made with all of the shields on and only after allowing at least a 20 minute warmup.

A4 Limiter Phase Adjustment

1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and place the spectrum analyzer in the service position as illustrated in Figure 3-9 on page 122. See Figure 3-10 on page 123 for adjustment location. 2. Connect the 3335A 50 output to the spectrum analyzer 50 input. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. 3. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Center frequency ................................................... 15 MHz Span ................................................................................... 0 Reference level ...................................................... 10 dBm dB/division ............................................................ 1 dB/DIV Resolution bandwidth ........................................... 300 kHz IF ADJ ........................................................................... OFF

Chapter 3

123

Manual Adjustment Procedures 5. DC Log Amplier Adjustments

4. Set up an 3335A as follows: Frequency ..................................................................... 15 MHz Amplitude ................................................................... 18 dBm 5. Press CAL, ADJ CURR IF STATE, wait for the analyzer to complete adjustments then press MKR. 6. Adjust A4R445 for maximum on-screen amplitude. Refer to Figure 3-10 on page 123 for the location of A4R445.

A4 Linear Fidelity Adjustment

1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and place the spectrum analyzer in the service position as illustrated in Figure 3-9 on page 122. See Figure 3-10 on page 123 for adjustment location. 2. Connect the 3335A 50 output to the spectrum analyzer 50 input. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. 3. Press PRESET AMPLITUDE, LINEAR, MORE 1 of 3, AMPTD UNITS, dBm, CAL, IF ADJ ON OFF (OFF). 4. Press PEAK SEARCH, MARKER DELTA. 5. Reduce the 3335A input power to 58 dBm. 6. If the delta marker amplitude reads 40 dB 2 dB, no adjustment is necessary. 7. If the signal is lower on the screen than expected ( delta marker amplitude reads less than 42dB) then adjust A4R544 (see Figure 3-10 on page 123) for an even lower level and press CAL, ADJ CURR IF STATE. Allow sufcient time for the analyzer to complete the adjustment. 8. If the signal is higher on the screen than expected ( delta marker amplitude reads greater than 38 dB) then adjust A4R544 for an even higher level signal and press CAL, ADJ CURR IF STATE. Allow sufcient time for the analyzer to complete the adjustment. 9. Repeat steps 5 through 10.

A4 LOG Fidelity Adjustment

1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and place the spectrum analyzer in the service position as illustrated in Figure 3-9 on page 122. See Figure 3-10, DC Log Adjustment Locations, for adjustment location. 2. Connect the 3335 50 output to the spectrum analyzer 50 input. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on.

124

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 5. DC Log Amplier Adjustments

3. Press PRESET, CAL, IF ADJ ON OFF (OFF), ADJ CURR IF STATE. 4. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Center frequency .................................................... 15 MHz Span ................................................................................... 0 Resolution bandwidth ........................................... 300 kHz Reference level ...................................................... 10 dBm 5. Set up an 3335A as follows: Frequency ............................................................... 15 MHz Amplitude ............................................................. 10 dBm 6. Press MKR, MARKER DELTA on the spectrum analyzer. 7. Decrease the 3335A power to 26 dBm. 8. Calculate the error: EQUATION {\rm Error} = {\rm delta\ marker\ reading}-{\rm 16\ dB} EQUATION. 9. If the error is less than 0.2 dB, no adjustment is necessary. 10.Set the 3335A power to 10 dBm. 11.Adjust A4R531 (see Figure 3-10, DC Log Adjustment Locations,) to read two times the error. For example, if the calculated error is +0.75 dB, adjust A4R531 for a delta marker amplitude reading of +1.5 dB. Press CAL, ADJ CURR IF STATE. 12.Repeat steps 7 through 11.

Chapter 3

125

Manual Adjustment Procedures 6. Sampling Oscillator Adjustment

6. Sampling Oscillator Adjustment

Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembly

Related Performance Test

There is no related performance test for this adjustment procedure.

Description
The sampling oscillator tank circuit is adjusted for a tuning voltage of 5.05 V dc when the sampling oscillator is set to 297.222 MHz. The voltage monitored is actually the tuning voltage divided by 4.05. The setting is then checked at other frequencies for the full tuning range of the sampling oscillator. Figure 3-11 Sampler Adjustment Setup

Equipment
Digital voltmeter ............................................................... 3456A DVM test leads ................................................................ 34118A

126

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 6. Sampling Oscillator Adjustment

Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off and disconnect the line power cord. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and fold down the A15 RF and A14 frequency control assemblies. Prop up the A14 frequency control assembly. Reconnect the line power cord and press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. Connect the equipment as illustrated in Figure 3-11 on page 126. 2. Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows: Center frequency ................................................ 2126 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz 3. Set the 3456A controls as follows: Function ............................................................. DC VOLTS Range .......................................................... 10V, MANUAL

Sampling Oscillator Adjustment

1. Connect the negative DVM test lead to A15J200 pin 6. Connect the positive DVM lead to A15J200 pin 13. 2. Adjust A15C210 VCO RANGE for a DVM reading of 5.05 V 0.05 V. Figure 3-12 A15J200 Pin Locations

Chapter 3

127

Manual Adjustment Procedures 6. Sampling Oscillator Adjustment

Sampler Match Adjustment

1. Connect the negative DVM test lead to A15J400 pin 6, and the positive DVM test lead to A15J400 pin 1. 2. Press FREQUENCY and set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to 2302.3 MHz. This sets the sampling oscillator to 291.667 MHz. 3. Adjust A15C100 SMPL MATCH to peak the voltage displayed on the DVM. 4. Record the displayed voltage in Table 3-9 on page 128 as the displayed voltage for the sampling oscillator frequency of 291.667 MHz. 5. Press FREQUENCY on the spectrum analyzer. Use the keypad to set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to the frequencies listed in Table 3-9 on page 128. At each listed frequency, record the displayed voltage in the table. 6. If the difference between the maximum and minimum voltages is less than 0.50 V, and all voltage readings are between +0.5 and +2.5 Vdc, proceed to step 15. 7. Locate the center frequency at which the voltage is lowest. Use the keypad to set the spectrum analyzer to this frequency. 8. Readjust SMPL MATCH to set the displayed voltage to 0.8 0.1 Vdc. 9. Set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to 2302.3 MHz and repeat steps 9 through 13. 10.Move the positive DVM test lead to A15J400 pin 3. Check that the measured voltage is the negative of the voltage at pin 1, within 0.1 Vdc. 11.Disconnect the DVM probes from A15J400. Table 3-9
Center Frequency (MHz)

Sampling Adjustments
Sampling Oscillator (MHz) 1st Trial Displayed Voltage (Vdc)

2nd Trial

3rd Trial

4th Trial

5th Trial

2156.3 2176.3 2230.3 2263.3 2302.3 2158.3

285.000 286.364 288.462 290.000 291.667 293.478

128

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 6. Sampling Oscillator Adjustment

Table 3-9
Center Frequency (MHz) 2196.3 2378.3 2422.3

Sampling Adjustments
Sampling Oscillator (MHz) 295.000 296.471 297.222 Displayed Voltage (Vdc)

Chapter 3

129

Manual Adjustment Procedures 7. YTO Adjustment

7. YTO Adjustment
Assembly Adjusted
A14 frequency control assembly

Related Performance Tests

Frequency Span Accuracy Frequency Readout Accuracy and Frequency Count Marker Accuracy

Description
The YTO main coil adjustments are made with the phase-lock loops disabled. The YTO endpoints are adjusted to bring these points within the capture range of the main loop. The YTO FM coil is adjusted to place the 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal at the center vertical graticule in a 20 MHz span. Figure 3-13 YTO Adjustment Setup

130

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 7. YTO Adjustment

Equipment
Microwave frequency counter ....................... 5343A Option 001 Adapters Type N (m) to BNC (f) ................................................... 1250-1476 Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) ...................................................... 11903B APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f) .............................................. 5061-5311 Cables BNC, 122 cm (48 in) ........................................................... 10503A SMA, 61 cm (24 in) ........................................................ 8120-1578

Procedure
NOTE

This adjustment cannot be performed if preselected external mixer mode is selected. The SAVELOCK ON OFF function must be OFF.

YTO Main Coil Adjustments

1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and fold down the A15 RF and A14 frequency control assemblies. 2. Disconnect the 50 termination from the 1ST LO OUTPUT. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-13 on page 130. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. 3. Move the jumper on A14J23 from the NORM position (pins 1 and 2 jumpered) to the TEST position (pins 2 and 3 jumpered). See Figure 3-14YTO Adjustment Locations, on page 132 for the location on the A14 frequency control assemblies. 4. On the spectrum analyzer, press the following keys:
CONFIG, EXT MXR PRE UNPR, (UNPR) AUX CTRL, EXTERNAL MIXER, LOCK HARMONIC, 6 Hz SPAN, ZERO SPAN FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 18.8893 GHz, SGL SWP SAVE, SAVE STATE, STATE 0 FREQUENCY, 35.7493 GHz SAVE, SAVE STATE, STATE 1 RECALL, RECALL STATE, STATE 0.

5. On the 5343A, press SHIFT 7 and set the controls as follows: Sample rate .......................................... Fully counterclockwise 10 Hz500 MHz/500 MHz26.5 GHz switch ...... 500 MHz-26.5 GHz

Chapter 3

131

Manual Adjustment Procedures 7. YTO Adjustment

6. Adjust A14R93 3.2 GHz for the appropriate frequency counter reading of 3.200 GHz 1 MHz. 7. On the spectrum analyzer, press STATE 1. 8. Adjust A14R42 6.01 GHz for a frequency counter reading of 6.010 GHz 1 MHz. 9. On the spectrum analyzer, press STATE 0. 10.Repeat steps 6 through 9 until both of these interacting adjustments meet their tolerances. Figure 3-14 YTO Adjustment Locations

132

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 7. YTO Adjustment

11.Place the jumper on A14J23 in the NORM position (pins 1 and 2 jumpered). 12.Disconnect the SMA cable from the 1ST LO OUTPUT jack and reconnect the 50 termination on the 1ST LO OUTPUT.

YTO FM Coil Adjustments

13.On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET and set the controls as follows: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ........................................................................... 20 MHz 14.Adjust A14R76 FM SPAN until the 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT SIGNAL is aligned with the center vertical graticule line.

Chapter 3

133

Manual Adjustment Procedures 8. Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment

8. Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment

Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembly

Related Performance Test

Calibrator Amplitude and Frequency Accuracy

Description
The CAL OUTPUT amplitude is adjusted for 10.00 dBm measured directly at the front panel CAL OUTPUT connector. Figure 3-15 Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment Setup

Equipment
Measuring receiver ........................................................... 8902A Power sensor ...................................................................... 8482A Adapters Type N (f) to BNC (m) ................................................ 1250-1477

134

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 8. Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment

Procedure
NOTE

The spectrum analyzer should be allowed to warm up for at least 30 minutes before performing this adjustment. 1. Place the spectrum analyzer in the service position shown in Figure 3-15 on page 134. Prop the A14 frequency control board assembly in the service position. 2. Zero and calibrate the 8902A/8482A combination in log display mode. Enter the power sensor 300 MHz cal factor into the 8902A. 3. Connect the 8482A through an adapter directly to the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT connector. 4. Adjust A15R561 CAL AMPTD for a 10.00 dBm reading on the 8902A display.

Chapter 3

135

Manual Adjustment Procedures 9. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment OCXO

9. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment OCXO

Assembly Adjusted
A21 OCXO assembly
NOTE

Replacement oscillators are factory adjusted after a complete warmup and after the specied aging rate has been achieved. Thus, readjustment should typically not be necessary after oscillator replacement and is generally not recommended.

Related Performance Test

10 MHz Reference Accuracy

Description
The frequency of the internal 10 MHz frequency reference is compared to a known frequency standard and adjusted for minimum frequency error. This procedure does not adjust the short-term stability or long-term stability of the A21 10 MHz ovenized crystal oscillator (OCXO). Stability is determined by the characteristics of the particular oscillator and the environmental and warmup conditions to which it has been recently exposed. The spectrum analyzer must be on continuously for at least 24 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment to allow both the temperature and frequency of the oscillator to stabilize.

136

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 9. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment OCXO

Figure 3-16

10 MHz Reference Adjustment Setup and Adjustment Location

Equipment
Frequency counter ............................................................ 5334A/B
Frequency standard ................. 5061B Cesium Beam Standard Cable

BNC, 122 cm (2 required).................................................... 10503A

Chapter 3

137

Manual Adjustment Procedures 9. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment OCXO

Procedure
NOTE

Failure to allow a 24 hour minimum warmup time for OCXO frequency and temperature stabilization may result in oscillator misadjustment. 1. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 3-16 on page 137 as follows: a. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. After the automatic power-on adjustment sequence is complete, press PRESET to ensure that the frequency reference is set to internal. b. Allow the spectrum analyzer to remain powered on continuously for at least 24 hours to ensure that the A21 OCXO temperature and frequency stabilize.

NOTE

If the reference is set to 10 MHz EXT, press 10 MHz INT. Allow the 24 hour warmup for the OCXO before continuing. When the 10 MHz reference is set to 10 MHz EXT, the OCXO is not operating or warmed up. c. Connect the frequency standard to the frequency counter rear panel TIMEBASE IN/OUT connector. d. Connect a BNC cable between the spectrum analyzer rear panel 10 MHz REF IN/OUT connector and INPUT A on the frequency counter. 2. Set the frequency counter controls as follows: Function/data .............................................................. FREQ A Input ........................................................................................ A 10 Attenuator ................................................................. OFF AC ............................................................... OFF (DC coupled) 50Z . ..................................... ..OFF (1 M input impedance) Auto Trigger ......................................................................... ON 100 kHz lter A .................................................................. OFF INT/EXT switch (rear panel) ............................................. EXT 3. Select a 1 second gate time on the 5334A/B frequency counter by pressing GATE TIME, 1, GATE TIME. 4. To offset the displayed frequency by 10.0 MHz, press MATH, SELECT/ENTER, CHX/EEX, 10, CHS/EEX, 6, SELECT/ENTER, SELECT/ENTER. The frequency counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal and 10.0 MHz with a displayed resolution of 0.010 Hz (10 MHz). 5. Locate the FREQ ADJ control on the spectrum analyzer. This control is accessible through the center deck of the spectrum analyzer. See Figure 3-16 on page 137. 6. Remove the dust-cap screw.

138

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 9. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment OCXO

7. Use a nonconductive adjustment tool to adjust the FREQ ADJ control on the A21 OCXO for a frequency counter reading of 0.00 Hz. 8. On the 5334A/B frequency counter, select a 10-second gate time by pressing GATE TIME, 10, GATE TIME. The frequency counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal and 10.0 MHz with a resolution of 0.001 Hz (1 mHz). 9. Wait at least two gate periods for the frequency counter to stabilize, then adjust the FREQ ADJ control on A21 OCXO for a stable frequency counter reading of 0.000 Hz 0.010 Hz. 10.Replace the dust-cap screw to A21 OCXO.

Chapter 3

139

Manual Adjustment Procedures 10. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment TCXO (Option 103)

10. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment TCXO (Option 103)

Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembly

Related Performance Test

10 MHz Reference Output Accuracy (Option 103)

Description
The frequency counter is connected to the analyzer CAL OUTPUT. The CAL OUTPUT is locked to the 10 MHz frequency reference which yields better effective resolution. The temperature-compensated crystal oscillator (TCXO) is adjusted for a frequency counter reading of 300 MHz. Figure 3-17 10 MHz Reference Adjustment Setup TCXO

140

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 10. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment TCXO (Option 103)

Equipment
Microwave frequency counter .......................... 5343A Option 001 Frequency standard .................... 5061B Cesium Beam Standard (or any 10 MHz frequency standard with accuracy <1 X 1010) Cables BNC, 122 cm (2 required) ................................................... 10503A

Procedure
NOTE

Allow the spectrum analyzer to warm up for at least 30 minutes before performing this adjustment. 1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-1710 MHz Reference Adjustment Setup TCXO, on page 140. Prop up the A14 frequency control assembly. 2. Set the frequency counter controls as follows: Sample rate ............................................................. Midrange 501 M switch ............................................................ 50 10 Hz500 MHz/500 MHz26.5 GHz switch .. 10 Hz 500 MHz 3. Press AUX CTRL REAR PANEL. Verify that the 10 MHz reference is set to 10 MHz INT.

NOTE

When the 10 MHz reference is set to 10 MHz EXT, the TCXO is not operating and warmed up. If the reference is set to 10 MHz EXT, set the reference to 10 MHz INT and allow 30 minutes for the TCXO to warm up. 4. Remove dust cap from A15U302, TCXO. The dust cap is toward the rear of the spectrum analyzer. 5. Adjust 10 MHz ADJ on A15U302 for a frequency counter reading of 300.000000 MHz 30 Hz. 6. Replace the dustcap on A15U302.

Chapter 3

141

Manual Adjustment Procedures 11. Demodulator Adjustment

11. Demodulator Adjustment

Assembly Adjusted
A4 log amplier/cal oscillator assembly

Related Performance Test

There is no related performance test for this adjustment.

Description
A 5 kHz peak-deviation FM signal is applied to the INPUT 50 . The detected audio is monitored by an oscilloscope. FM DEMOD is adjusted to peak the response displayed on the oscilloscope. Figure 3-18 Demodulator Adjustment Setup

142

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 11. Demodulator Adjustment

Equipment
AM/FM signal generator ................................................... 8640B Oscilloscope ...................................................................... 54501A

Adapters Type N (m) to BNC (f) (2 required) ............................ 1250-1476 Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) ................................................... 11903B

Cables BNC, 122 cm (48 in) ........................................................ 10503A Oscilloscope probe ........................................................... 10432A

Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Place the spectrum analyzer in the service position as illustrated in Figure 3-18 on page 142. 2. Connect the oscilloscope probe from the oscilloscope channel 1 input to probe A4C723 (the end closest to A4U707) as in Figure 3-19 on page 144. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. Connect the 8640B RF OUTPUT to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 50 . 3. Set the 8640B controls as follows: Range MHz .............................................................. 61 to 128 Frequency ............................................................ 100.000 MHz Output level ......................................................................10dBm RF ....................................................................................... ON AM .................................................................................... OFF FM .................................................................................... INT Modulation frequency ............................................... 1000 Hz Peak deviation .............................................................. 5 kHz Scale FM ......................................................................(k/MHz) 4. Adjust the 8640B FM deviation vernier for a full-scale reading on the meter. Set the FM to off.

Chapter 3

143

Manual Adjustment Procedures 11. Demodulator Adjustment

5. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows: Channel 1 ......................................................................... on Channel 2 ......................................................................... off Channel 1 ..................................................... 50 mV/division Channel 1 .......................................................................... ac Channel 1 ................................................................. BW lim Time base .................................................... 1.0 ms/division Trigger .......................................................................... auto Trigger source .................................................................... 1 Trigger level ................................................................. 0.0 V 6. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, then set the controls as follows: Center frequency .................................................. 100 MHz Span .......................................................................... 5 MHz Reference level ....................................................... 10 dBm Resolution bandwidth ............................................ 100 kHz 7. On the spectrum analyzer press: PEAK SEARCH, MARKER CF SPAN, ZERO SPAN AUX CTRL, AM/FM DEMOD, FM DEMOD ON OFF(ON) CAL, IF ADJ ON OFF (OFF) TRIG, and SWEEP CONT SGL (SGL). Set the volume control to midrange. 8. A 1 kHz sine wave should be observed on the oscilloscope. Rotate the volume knob on the front panel of the spectrum analyzer until the amplitude of the 1 kHz signal is at about 150 mV (3 divisions on the oscilloscope). 9. Adjust A4C707 FM DEMOD for a maximum peak-to-peak response on the oscilloscope. 10.Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Disconnect the test cable from A4C723. Figure 3-19 Demodulator Adjustment Locations

144

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 12. External Mixer Bias Adjustment

12. External Mixer Bias Adjustment

Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembly

Related Performance Test

There is no related performance test for this adjustment.

Description
A voltmeter is connected to the spectrum analyzer IF INPUT with the external mixer bias set to off. The bias is adjusted for a 0 Vdc output. Figure 3-20 External Mixer Bias Adjustment Setup

Equipment
DVM ...................................................................................... 3456A

Adapters Type BNC (f) to SMA (m) .............................................. 1250-1200 Type BNC (f) to dual banana plug ............................... 1251-2816

Cables BNC, 122 cm (48 in) ........................................................... 10503A

Chapter 3

145

Manual Adjustment Procedures 12. External Mixer Bias Adjustment

Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off, and disconnect the ac power cord. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and connect the equipment as illustrated in Figure 3-20 on page 145. Fold down the A15 RF assembly. Reconnect the power cord and set the LINE switch to on. 2. Set the 3456A controls as follows: Function ............................................................. DC VOLTS Range ........................................................................... 0.1 V Resolution ................................................................ 100 mV 3. On the spectrum analyzer press AUX CTRL, EXTERNAL MIXER, BIAS, then BIAS OFF. 4. Adjust A15R926 EXT BIAS ZERO for a DVM reading of 0.000 Vdc 12.5 mV.

146

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 13. External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment

13. External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment

Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembly

Related Performance Test

IF Input Amplitude Accuracy

Description
The slope of the atness compensation ampliers is determined. The user-loaded conversion losses for K-band are recorded and reset to 30 dB. A 310.7 MHz signal is applied to the power sensor and the power level of the source is adjusted for a 30 dBm reading. The signal is then applied to the IF INPUT. The atness compensation ampliers are then adjusted (via DACs) to place the displayed signal at the reference level. Figure 3-21 External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment Setup

Chapter 3

147

Manual Adjustment Procedures 13. External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment

Equipment
Synthesized sweeper ..................................................... 8340A/B Measuring receiver ........................................................... 8902A Power sensor ...................................................................... 8481D 50 MHz reference attenuator ......................................... 11708A (supplied with 8481D)

Adapters Type N (f) to SMA (f) ................................................... 1250-1772 Type N (m) to BNC (f) ................................................. 1250-1476 Type APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f) .................................. 5061-5311 Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f).................................................... 11903B

Cables BNC, 122 cm (48 in) ......................................................... 10503A SMA, 61 cm (24 in) ...................................................... 8120-1578

Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off and disconnect the power cord. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and reconnect the power cord. 2. Set up the equipment as illustrated in Figure 3-21 on page 147. Do not connect the SMA cable to the spectrum analyzer. 3. Move the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly to the WR ENA position. The jumper is on the edge of the A2 board assembly and can be moved without folding the board down. 4. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. On the spectrum analyzer, press CONFIG, EXT MXR PRE UNPR (UNPR), AUX CTRL, EXTERNAL MIXER, AMPTD CORRECT, then CNV LOSS VS FREQ. 5. Press or to display the conversion loss value for each frequency listed in Table 3-10 on page 149. Record any conversion loss reading not equal to 30 dB in Table 3-10 on page 149 at the appropriate frequency.

148

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 13. External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment

6. If all conversion loss values equal 30 dB, skip to step 7, otherwise continue to step a. a. Refer to Table 3-10 on page 149 and press or to select a frequency at which the conversion loss value does not equal 30 dB. b. Use the spectrum analyzer front panel keys to set the conversion loss value to 30 dB. c. Repeat steps a and b for all frequencies having a conversion loss value other than 30 dB. 7. Press INSTR PRESET on the 8340A/B and set the controls as follows: CW frequency ....................................................... 310.7 MHz Power level ............................................................... 30 dBm Table 3-10 Conversion Loss Data
Frequency (GHz) 18 20 22 24 26 27 Conversion Loss (dB) (30 dB)

8. Connect the 8481D to the 11708A attenuator already connected to the 8902A RF power connector. Zero and calibrate the 8902A/8481D combination in log mode. Enter the power sensor 50 MHz cal factor into the 8902A. Connect the power sensor, through an adapter, to the SMA cable. 9. Adjust the 8340A/B POWER LEVEL until the power displayed on the 8902A reads 30 dBm 0.05 dB. 10.On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, SERVICE CAL DATA, 3RD IF AMP, then CAL 3RD AMP GAIN. 11.Wait until the message ADJUSTMENT DONE appears in the active function block and press EXT MXR REF CAL. 12.Disconnect the SMA cable from the power-sensor/adapter and connect the cable to the spectrum analyzer IF INPUT. 13.Use the spectrum analyzer front panel knob, step keys, or keypad to change the amplitude of the displayed signal until the marker reads 0 dBm 0.17 dB. 14.Press PREV MENU, STORE DATA, and YES on the spectrum analyzer.

Chapter 3

149

Manual Adjustment Procedures 13. External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment

15.Place the WR PROT/ WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly in the WR PROT position.
NOTE

The following steps should only be performed if you need to replace the 30 dB conversion loss values to those recorded in Table 3-10 on page 149. 16.Press AUX CTRL, EXTERNAL MIXER, AMPTD CORRECT, then CNV LOSS VS FREQ on the spectrum analyzer. 17.Press or to select frequencies where the conversion loss value was recorded in Table 3-10 on page 149. 18.Use the spectrum analyzer front panel keys to enter the conversion loss values recorded for the frequency.

150

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 14. Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment (serial prex 3517A and below)

14. Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment (serial prex 3517A and below)

Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembly

Related Performance Test

There is no related performance test for this adjustment.

Description
NOTE

This adjustment applies only to spectrum analyzers with Option 008 with A15 RF assembly 08563-60083 or earlier (serial prex 3517A and below). Later A15 RF assemblies have no 298 MHz adjustment. The frequency range of the 298 MHz signal ID oscillator is determined by counting the 10.7 MHz IF as A15C629 is rotated through its range of adjustment. The SIG ID oscillator is then set to the frequency determined by the following equation:

Oscillator frequency range Oscillator frequency = 12.7MHz + -------------------------------------------------------------- 4

Figure 3-22 Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment Setup

Chapter 3

151

Manual Adjustment Procedures 14. Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment (serial prex 3517A and below)

Equipment
Microwave frequency counter .............................................. 5343A Spectrum analyzer 8566A/B

Adapters Type N (m) to BNC (f) (2 required) ............................... 1250-1476 BNC tee (f, m, f) ............................................................. 1250-0781 Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) ...................................................... 11903B

Cables BNC, 122 cm (48 in) (2 required) ....................................... 10503A Test cable, BNC (m) to SMB (f) ...................................................... 85680-60093

Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Disconnect the power cord, and remove the spectrum analyzer cover. Fold down the A15 RF and A14 frequency control assemblies. Prop up the A14 frequency control assembly. 2. Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 using an adapter. Disconnect the W29 cable from A15J601 (10.7 MHz IF out) and connect the SMB end of the test cable to A15J601. Connect the rest of the equipment as shown in Figure 3-22 on page 151. 3. Remove the four screws holding the brace on the A15 RF assembly (near J2). 4. Connect a jumper between the leads of A15R914 and A15C904 (the ends near U908). See Figure 3-23 on page 153 for the location of the components. 5. Reconnect the power cord and press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. After the power-on sequence is complete, set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz 6. Press CAL, IF ADJ ON OFF so OFF is underlined, and SGL SWP.

152

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 14. Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment (serial prex 3517A and below)

Figure 3-23

Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment Jumper Location

7. Press INSTR PRESET on the 8566A/B and set the controls as follows: Center frequency .................................................... 12.7 MHz Span .......................................................................... 500 kHz 8. Set the 5343A controls as follows: Sample rate ....................................... Fully counterclockwise 50 1 M switch .......................................................... 50 10 Hz500 MHz/500 MHz26.5 GHz switch .. 10 Hz 500 MHz 9. If no signal is displayed on the 8566A/B, adjust A15C629 SIG ID until a signal is displayed.
NOTE

If the 298 MHz SIG ID oscillator is severely mistuned, it might be necessary to widen the span on the 8566A/B to see the IF signal. 10.Rotate A15C629 SIG ID slightly while observing the 8566A/B display.

NOTE

The nominal counted frequency should be 12.7 MHz, not 10.7 MHz. 11.While observing the 8566A/B display, adjust A15C629 SIG ID for the highest obtainable frequency, with less than 3 dB decrease in amplitude from maximum. Read this frequency from the frequency counter and record as F3 dB HIGH.
F3 dB HIGH =_______________________________MHz

Chapter 3

153

Manual Adjustment Procedures 14. Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment (serial prex 3517A and below)

12.Observe the 8566A/B display as you adjust A15C629 SIG ID for the lowest obtainable frequency, with less than 3 dB decrease in amplitude from maximum. Record the frequency counter reading as F3 dB LOW.
F3 dB LOW = _________________________________MHz

13.Calculate the difference between F3 dB HIGH and F3 dB LOW, then divide results by four. Enter the result as FOFFSET.
FOFFSET =_________________________________kHz

14.Add FOFFSET to F3 dB LOW recorded in step 10 and record the result as FSIGID.
FSIGID = ____________________________________MHz

15.Adjust A15C629 for a frequency counter reading equaling FSIGID. The nal adjusted frequency must equal 12.7 MHz 50 kHz.

154

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 15. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment

15. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment

Assembly Adjusted
A2 controller assembly

Related Performance Tests

Sweep Time Accuracy Gate Delay Accuracy and Gate Length Accuracy Delayed Sweep Accuracy Fast Sweep Time Accuracy (Option 007)

Description
The 16 MHz CPU clock is phase locked to the 10 MHz reference. The output of the 16 MHz PLL loop integrator is adjusted for a clock frequency of approximately 14.4 MHz with the loop unlocked. This ensures that the CPU will still function and the display annotation will be distorted but readable, even if the 10 MHz reference to A2 is absent.
NOTE

If necessary, perform the display adjustments after performing the following adjustment. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment Setup

Figure 3-24

Chapter 3

155

Manual Adjustment Procedures 15. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment

Equipment
Microwave frequency counter ............................ 5343A 10:1 probe ......................................................... 10432A

Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and fold out the A2 controller and A3 interface assemblies. Use a pc board prop to hold up the A3 interface assembly, as shown in Figure 3-24. 2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-24. The 10:1 probe ground lead connects to A2TP10 and the probe tip connects to A2TP101. 3. The 16 MHz PLL adjustment location is shown in Figure 3-25.

156

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 15. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment

Figure 3-25

16 MHz PLL Adjustment Location

Chapter 3

157

Manual Adjustment Procedures 15. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment

4. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. Wait until the spectrum analyzer power-on adjustments have completed. 5. Set the microwave frequency counter as follows: Sample rate ............................................ Fully counterclockwise 10 Hz500 MHz/500 MHz26.5 GHz switch ... 10 Hz 500 MHz 50 /1 M switch ................................................................ 1 M 6. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz EXT. 7. Disconnect W22 (10 MHz frequency counter) from A2J8. The display will probably appear distorted and error messages may appear. Ignore the error messages. 8. Adjust A2R152 (16 MHz PLL ADJ) until the microwave frequency counter reads 14.4 MHz 200 KHz. 9. Reconnect W22 to A2J8. The microwave frequency counter should read 16 MHz. If the counter reads 16 MHz and the display is still distorted, perform the display adjustments in 2. Display Adjustment (8564E and 8565E), in this chapter. 10.On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL, REALIGN LO and IF to clear any error messages.

158

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures 16. 600 MHz Reference Adjustment (serial prex 3406A and above)

16. 600 MHz Reference Adjustment (serial prex 3406A and above)
Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembly

Related Performance Test

There is no related performance test for this adjustment.

Description
The 100 MHz VCXO and the tripler are adjusted for a maximum signal level at 600 MHz. A spectrum analyzer is used to monitor the amplitude of the 600 MHz signal while performing these adjustments.

Equipment
Spectrum analyzer ......................................................... 8566A/B

Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off, disconnect the power cord, and remove the spectrum analyzer cover. Fold down the A15 RF and A14 frequency control assemblies. Prop up the A14 frequency control assembly. 2. Disconnect W33, gray/brown coax cable, from A15J701. 3. Connect the signal at A15J701 to the input of the 8566A/B spectrum analyzer. 4. Reconnect the power cord and press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. 5. Set the center frequency of the 8566A/B to 600 MHz and set the frequency span and resolution bandwidth of the 8566A/B for the best display of the 600 MHz signal. 6. Set the peak of the 600 MHz signal near the top graticule line on the 8566A/B display and set to 1 dB per division. 7. Adjust A15C750, VCXO Adjust, for maximum amplitude. 8. Adjust A15C751 Tripler Adjust, for maximum amplitude. The level, after proper adjustment, should be between 3 and +4.8 dBm (typically 0 to +1 dBm). 9. Reconnect W33 to A15J701.

Chapter 3

159

3a Manual Adjustment Procedures:

3335A Source not Available

161

Manual Adjustment Procedures: 3335A Source not Available What You'll Find in This Chapter

What You'll Find in This Chapter

This chapter provides alternative procedures for the adjustment of the spectrum analyzer that do not require the use of the 3335A Synthesizer Level Generator. The 3335A has been discontinued. Because of the unavailability of the 3335A, new adjustments procedures are required that use different signal sources. If the 3335A is not available, substitute these procedures for those of the same number found in Chapter 3 , Manual Adjustment Procedures.

162

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures: 3335A Source not Available Required Test Equipment

Required Test Equipment

The following table lists the test equipment required to execute the adjustments in this chapter. These adjustments originally required the use of the 3335A Synthesizer Level Generator. Table 3a-1 Recommended Test Equipment
Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Recommended Model

Instrument Sources

Synthesized Signal Generator Frequency range: 250 kHz to 3 GHz

Frequency resolution: 1 Hz Attenuator resolution: 0.02 dB Level accuracy: 0.5 dB External 10 MHz Ref. Input

E4421B or E4422B, E4432B, E4433B

Cables Cable, 50 coaxial (four required) Cable Adapters Adapter (four required) Adapter Adapter Adapter (Option 026 only) Adapter (Option 026 only) APC-3.5 (f) to BNC-3.5 (f) 1250-1200 Type N (f)-to-2.4 mm (f) 2.4 mm (f) to BNC (f) APC-3.5 (f) to APC-3.5 (f) 11903B 1250-2187 5061-5311 Type N (m)-to-BNC (f) 1250-1476 Connectors: BNC (m) Length: 122 cm (48 in.) Test Cable 85680-60043 10503A

Chapter 3

163

Manual Adjustment Procedures: 3335A Source not Available 4a. IF Amplitude Adjustments

4a. IF Amplitude Adjustments

The IF amplitude adjustments consist of the cal oscillator amplitude adjustment and the reference 15 dB attenuator adjustment.

Assembly Adjusted
A4 log amp/cal oscillator A5 IF assembly

Related Performance Tests

IF Gain Uncertainty Scale Fidelity

Description
This adjustment sets the output amplitude of the A4 log amp/cal oscillator and the absolute amplitude of the reference 15 dB attenuator. The output of the A4 log amp/cal oscillator is adjusted so that a 55 dBm signal applied to the 10.7 MHz IF input on the A5 IF assembly (A5J3) causes a displayed signal of 60 dBm. The effect of this adjustment is visible only after the ADJ CURR IF STATE sequence is complete. ADJ CURR IF STATE causes the IF gain adjustment to use the "new" output amplitude from the A4 log amp/cal oscillator. This procedure also sets the attenuator of the reference 15 dB attenuator so that a source amplitude change of 50 dB combined with a spectrum analyzer reference level change of 50 dB displays an amplitude difference of 50 dB. Figure 3a-1 IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup

164

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures: 3335A Source not Available 4a. IF Amplitude Adjustments

Equipment
Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E4421B Adapters Type N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476 Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11903B Cables BNC, 122 cm (48 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10503A Test cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85680-60093 Figure 3a-2 IF Amplitude Adjustment Locations

NOTE

The 15 dB reference attenuator adjustment is preset at the factory and need not be done if the entire A5 IF assembly is replaced.

Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and place the spectrum analyzer in the service position as illustrated in Figure 3a-1. 2. Disconnect W29, violet coax cable, from A5J3. Connect the test cable between A5J3 and the RF output of the E4421B. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on.

Chapter 3

165

Manual Adjustment Procedures: 3335A Source not Available 4a. IF Amplitude Adjustments

3. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Center Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 MHz Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 kHz Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 dBm Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 dB dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB/DIV Resolution bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 kHz Video bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hz 4. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR, CAL, and IF ADJ ON OFF so OFF is underlined. 5. Set the E4421B controls as follows: Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 MHz Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 dBm Mod On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off 6. Note the marker value. Ideally it should read 60 dBm 0.1 dB. 7. If the marker reads less than 60.1 dBm, rotate A4R826 CAL OSC AMPTD one-third turn clockwise for every 0.1 dB less than 60 dBm. See Figure 3a-2 for the location of A4R826. A change in the displayed amplitude will not be seen until ADJ CURR IF STATE is pressed. 8. If the marker reads greater than 59.9 dBm, rotate A4R826 CAL OSC AMPTD one-third turn counter clockwise for every 0.1 dB greater than 60 dBm. See Figure 3a-2 for the location of A4R826. A change in the displayed amplitude will not be seen until ADJ CURR IF STATE is pressed.
NOTE

If A4R826 has inadequate range, refer to Inadequate CAL OSC AMPTD Range in Chapter 9 . 9. On the spectrum analyzer, press ADJ CURR IF STATE. After allowing the analyzer time to complete the adjustments, the displayed amplitude and marker reading should change. 10.Repeat step 7 and step 9 until the marker reads 60 dBm 0.1 dB. 11.Disconnect the test cable from A5J3 and reconnect W29 to A5J3.

166

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures: 3335A Source not Available 4a. IF Amplitude Adjustments

A5 Reference Attenuator Adjustment

1. Set the spectrum analyzer reference level to 60 dBm. If markers are displayed, press MKR and MARKERS OFF. 2. Set the E4421B AMPLITUDE to 60 dBm. 3. Connect a BNC cable between the RF output of the E4421B and the spectrum analyzer INPUT 50 . 4. On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL and REF LVL ADJ. Use the front panel knob or step keys to place the peak of the displayed signal 3 dB to 5 dB below the reference level. 5. On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA. Set the spectrum analyzer reference level to 10 dBm. 6. Change the 4421B Amplitude to 10 dBm. 7. On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL. 8. Note the MKR amplitude. Ideally, it should read 50.00 dB 0.1 dB. 9. If the MKR amplitude is less than 49.9 dB, rotate A5R343 15 dB ATTEN one-half turn counterclockwise for each 0.1 dB less than 50.00 dB. Do not adjust A5R343 more than ve turns before continuing with the next step. 10.If the MKR amplitude is greater than 50.1 dB, rotate A5R343 15 dB ATTEN one-half turn clockwise for each 0.1 dB greater than 50.00 dB. Do not adjust A5R343 more than ve turns before continuing with the next step. 11.On the spectrum analyzer, press ADJ CURR IF STATE. Note the MKR amplitude reading. 12.Repeat step 1 through step 11 until the MKR amplitude reading is 50.00 dB 0.1 dB.

A5 Adjustment Verication
1. On the spectrum analyzer, disconnect W29 from A5J3. Connect the test cable between A5J3 and the RF output of the E4421B. 2. Set the spectrum analyzer reference level to 10 dBm. 3. Set the E4421B Amplitude to 5 dBm. 4. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR and MARKER NORMAL. 5. The MARKER amplitude should read 10 dBm 0.13 dB. If the reading is outside of this range, repeat step 4 of Procedure on page 165 through A5 Reference Attenuator Adjustment step 12.

Chapter 3

167

Manual Adjustment Procedures: 3335A Source not Available 4a. IF Amplitude Adjustments

6. On the spectrum analyzer, reconnect W29 to A5J3. Press PRESET and set the controls as follows: Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 MHz Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Hz Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 dBm Resolution bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 kHz 7. Connect a BNC cable between the 8563E CAL OUTPUT and INPUT 50 . 8. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR CAL and REF LVL ADJ. 9. Use the knob or step keys to adjust the REF LEVEL CAL setting until the MKR reads 10.00 dBm 0.1 dB. 10.On the spectrum analyzer, press STORE REF LVL.

168

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures: 3335A Source not Available 5a. DC Log Amplier Adjustments

5a. DC Log Amplier Adjustments

There are three DC log adjustments; limiter phase, linear delity, and log delity.

Assembly Adjusted
A4 log amp/cal oscillator

Related Performance Tests

IF Gain Uncertainty Scale Fidelity

Description
These three adjustment need only be done under the following conditions:

Limiter phase Only if a repair is made to blocks F, G, H, I, or J. Linear delity Only if a repair is made to blocks C, D, F, G, H, I, J, K, O, IF gain accuracy, RBW switching, or log delity. Log delity Only if a repair is made to blocks D, F, H, K, IF gain accuracy, RBW switching, or log delity.

If multiple adjustments are required they should be done in the following order: 1. Limiter Phase 2. Linear Fidelity 3. Log Fidelity

Chapter 3

169

Manual Adjustment Procedures: 3335A Source not Available 5a. DC Log Amplier Adjustments

Figure 3a-3 DC Log Adjustment Setup

Equipment
Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E4421B Adapters Type N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476 Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11903B Cables BNC, 122 cm (48 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10503A Test cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85680-60093

170

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures: 3335A Source not Available 5a. DC Log Amplier Adjustments

Figure 3a-4 DC Log Adjustment Locations

NOTE

Adjustments should be made with all of the shields on and only after allowing at least a 20 minute warmup.

A4 Limiter Phase Adjustment

1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and place the spectrum analyzer in the service position as illustrated in Figure 3a-3. See Figure 3a-4 for adjustment location. 2. Connect the E4421B RF output to the spectrum analyzer 50 input. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. 3. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 MHz Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Hz Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dBm dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB/DIV Resolution bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 kHz IF ADJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

Chapter 3

171

Manual Adjustment Procedures: 3335A Source not Available 5a. DC Log Amplier Adjustments

4. Set up an E4421B as follows: Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 MHz Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 dBm Mod On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off 5. On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL and ADJ CURR IF STATE, wait for the analyzer to complete adjustments then press MKR. 6. Adjust A4R445 for maximum on-screen amplitude. Refer to Figure 3a-4 for the location of A4R445.

A4 Linear Fidelity Adjustment

1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and place the spectrum analyzer in the service position as illustrated in Figure 3a-3. See Figure 3a-4 for adjustment location. 2. Connect the E4421B RF output to the spectrum analyzer 50 input. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. 3. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET AMPLITUDE, LINEAR, MORE 1 of 3, AMPTD UNITS, dBm, CAL, and IF ADJ ON OFF (OFF). 4. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 MHz Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 MHz Resolution bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 kHz Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 dBm 5. Set up an E4421B as follows: Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 MHz Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 dBm Mod On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off 6. On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA. 7. Reduce the E4421B input power to 58 dBm. 8. If the delta marker amplitude reads 40 dB 2 dB, no adjustment is necessary. 9. If the signal is lower on the screen than expected (delta marker amplitude reads less than 42dB) then adjust A4R544 (see Figure 3a-4) for an even lower level and press CAL and ADJ CURR IF STATE. Allow sufcient time for the analyzer to complete the adjustment.

172

Chapter 3

Manual Adjustment Procedures: 3335A Source not Available 5a. DC Log Amplier Adjustments

10.If the signal is higher than expected (delta marker amplitude reads greater than 38 dB) then adjust A4R544 for an even higher level signal and press CAL and ADJ CURR IF STATE. Allow sufcient time for the analyzer to complete the adjustment. 11.Repeat step 7 through step 10.

A4 LOG Fidelity Adjustment

1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and place the spectrum analyzer in the service position as illustrated in Figure 3a-3. See Figure 3a-4 for adjustment location. 2. Connect the E4421B RF output to the spectrum analyzer 50 input. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. 3. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, CAL, IF ADJ ON OFF (OFF), and ADJ CURR IF STATE. 4. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 MHz Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 MHz Resolution bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 kHz Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dBm 5. Set up an E4421B as follows: Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 MHz Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dBm Mod On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off 6. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR and MARKER DELTA. 7. Decrease the E4421B power to 26 dBm. 8. Calculate the error:

Error = delta marker reading 16 dB

9. If the error is less than 0.2 dB, no adjustment is necessary. 10.Set the E4421B power to 10 dBm. 11.Adjust A4R531 (see Figure 3a-4) to read two times the error. For example, if the calculated error is +0.75 dB, adjust A4R531 for a delta marker amplitude reading of +1.5 dB. Press CAL and ADJ CURR IF STATE. 12.Repeat step 7 through step 11.

Chapter 3

173

Assembly Replacement

175

Assembly Replacement Introduction

Introduction
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of all major assemblies. The following replacement procedures are provided:
Page Access to Internal Assemblies ....................................................... page Cable Color Code ............................................................................. page Required Tools ................................................................................. page Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover ......................................... page Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8565EC) . page Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8564E and 8565E) ..... page Procedure 3. A1A1 Keyboard/Front Panel Keys ............................ page Procedure 4. A1A2 RPG................................................................... page Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies ................................ page Procedure 6A. A6 Power Supply Assembly(8564EC and 8565EC) page Procedure 6B. A6 Power Supply Assembly(8564E and 8565E) .....page Procedure 7. A6A1 High Voltage Assembly(8564E and 8565E) ... page Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies ...................................... page A7 LO Multiplier/Amplier (LOMA) ............................................ page A8 Low Band Mixer ...................................................................... page A9 Input Attenuator ..................................................................... page A10/A12 (RYTHM/SBTX) ............................................................. page A11 YTO ........................................................................................ page A13 Second Converter ................................................................... page Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies ...................................page 231 Procedure 10. A16 FADC and A17 CRT Driver(8564E and 8565E) ...page Procedure 11. B1 Fan ...................................................................... page Procedure 12. BT1 Battery ............................................................. page Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel ................................ page Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8464E and 8456E) ............. page Procedure 15. EEROM..................................................................... page Procedure 16. A21 OCXO ............................................................... page

177 178 178 179 180 191 200 201 176 209 212 216 220 222 223 224 227 228 230 234 237 238 239 244 254 256

Tools required to perform the procedures are listed in Table 4-1 on page 178. The words right and left are used throughout the replacement procedures to indicate the side of the spectrum analyzer as viewed from the front panel. See Figure 4-1 on page 179. Numbers in parentheses are used throughout the replacement procedures to indicate numerical callouts on the gures.
CAUTION

The spectrum analyzer contains static-sensitive components. Read the section entitled, Electrostatic Discharge in Chapter 1 .

176

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Access to Internal Assemblies

Access to Internal Assemblies

Servicing the 8564E/EC or the 8565E/EC requires the removal of the spectrum analyzer cover assembly and the folding down of six board assemblies. Four of these assemblies lay at along the top of the spectrum analyzer and two lay at along the bottom of the spectrum analyzer. All six assemblies are attached to the spectrum analyzer right side frame using hinges and fold out of the spectrum analyzer allowing access to all major assemblies. See Figure 4-1 on page 179. To remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly, refer to Procedure 1.
Spectrum Analyzer Cover.

To access the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies, refer to Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies. To access the A14 and A15 assemblies, refer to Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies. To remove and replace the backlight cables, which illuminate the A18 LCD, refer to Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC). To remove the A17 LCD board, refer to Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC). To remove the A16 or A17 CRT board, refer to Procedure 10. A16 Fast ADC and A17 CRT Driver (8564E and 8565E).
NOTE

Diagrams that illustrate features common to E-series and EC-series instruments are shown with E-series instruments. Where there are differences between E-series and EC-series features, separate diagrams are provided for E-series and EC-series instruments.

Chapter 4

177

Assembly Replacement Cable Color Code

Cable Color Code

Coaxial cables and wires will be identied in the procedures by reference designation or name followed by a color code. The code is identical to the resistor color code. The rst number indicates the base color with second and third numbers indicating any colored stripes. For example, W23, coax 93, indicates a white cable with an orange stripe. Table 4-1 Required Tools
Description Part Number

5/16-inch open-end wrench 3-mm hex (Allen) wrench 4-mm hex (Allen) wrench 17-mm socket wrench No. 4 hex (Allen) wrench No. 6 hex (Allen) wrench 7 mm nut driver 3/8-inch nut driver 7/16-inch nut driver 9/16-inch nut driver (drilled out, end covered with heatshrink tubing) Small No. 1 pozidrive screwdriver Large No. 2 pozidrive screwdriver T-8 TORX screwdriver T-10 TORX screwdriver T-15 TORX screwdriver Long-nose pliers Wire cutters

8720-0015 8710-1366 8710-1164 T362609 5020-0288 5020-0289 8710-1217 8720-0005 8720-0006 8720-0008

8710-0899 8710-0900 8710-1614 8710-1623 8710-1622 8710-0030 8710-0012

178

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover

Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover

Removal/Replacement
1. Disconnect the line-power cord, remove any adapters from the front panel connectors, and place the spectrum analyzer on its front panel. 2. If an 85620A Mass Memory Module or 85629B Test and Adjustment Module is mounted on the rear panel, remove it. Loosen (but do not remove) the four rear-bumper screws, using a 4 mm hex wrench. Pull the cover assembly off towards the rear of the instrument.
CAUTION

When replacing the spectrum analyzer cover, use caution to avoid damaging any cables. 3. When installing the cover assembly, be sure to locate the cover air vent holes on the bottom side of the spectrum analyzer. Attach with the four screws loosened in step 2, and tighten the four screws gradually to ensure that the cover is seated in the front frame gasket groove. 4. Torque each screw to 40 to 50 inch-pounds to ensure proper gasket compression to minimize EMI.

Figure 4-1

Hinged Assemblies

NOTE

Figure 4-1 shows an 8560 E-series instrument. In the assembly removal and replacement procedures the words left and right assume you are facing the front panel of the instrument, as shown in Figure 4-1, with A14 and A15 to your left, and A2 through A5 on your right. The 8560 EC-series instrument is identical except the A2 board is smaller.

Chapter 4

179

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC)

Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC)

Removal of the Front Frame
1. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly as described in "Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover." Place the instrument on its side, with the display section upper-most, as shown in Figure 4-1 on page 179. 2. Fold out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies as described in steps 2 through 6 under Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies. Facing the front panel, the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies will lay to your left. 3. Fold out the A14 and A15 assemblies as described in steps 3 through 4 under Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies. Facing the front panel, the A14 and A15 assemblies will lay to your right. 4. Disconnect ribbon cable A1A1W1, which connects HDR1 on the A1 front frame assembly and A3J602 on the A3 interface board. 5. Disconnect the following cables from the A2 controller board: a. Ribbon cable W60, which connects J8 on the A2 controller board with J1 on the A17 display driver board. b. W61, which connects J9 on the A2 controller board with J7 on the A17 display driver board. 6. Disconnect ribbon cable W64 from the J1 VGA port on the rear panel (do not disconnect W64 from the A17 display driver board). 7. Disconnect the W3 line switch cable from the power supply. a. Remove the power supply cover. Use a T-6 TORX driver to remove the 3 screws (0515-2309) that secure the power supply cover to the power supply. b. Remove the line switch connector from A6J2 on the power supply. c. Loosen FL 1. Remove the two screws (0515-2332) which are used to secure FL 1 to the right side of the chassis. d. After FL 1 has been loosened, route the W3 line switch cable through the opening behind FL 1, from the left to the right side of the instrument (if you still have difculty routing W3 through the opening, use an open ended 5/16-inch wrench to further loosen, or disconnect FL 1). To disconnect the line switch from the front panel, see Removal of the Front Frame on page 180.

180

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC)

8. Disconnect the following connectors which are attached to the inside of the A1 front panel assembly: a. INPUT 50 RF connector. Use a 5/16-inch open-end wrench to disconnect cable W41 from the front panel. Loosen the opposite end of cable W41, which is connected to the attenuator. b. RF OUT 50 connector for Option 002 spectrum analyzers. Use a 5/16-inch wrench to disconnect cable W47 from the front panel. c. 1ST LO OUTPUT connector. Disconnect cable W42 from A7J3 and from the front panel 1st LO OUTPUT connector. To remove the 1st LO OUTPUT connector use a 5/16 socket and thread pliers. Use the pliers to hold the 1st LO connector in place, while loosening the connector inside the instrument with the 5/16-inch socket. d. 1ST LO OUTPUT connector For Option 002 spectrum analyzers. Disconnect W46 from the front panel. e. IF INPUT connector. Disconnect W36 from the front panel. 9. Remove the following from the face of the front panel: a. VOLUME knob. Use a 0.050 Allen wrench to remove the two screws (3030-0007) that secure the volume knob to the face of the front panel. If necessary, use a 5/16-inch nut driver to drill out the nut which secures the VOLUME potentiometer assembly. Cover the tip with heatshrink tubing or tape to avoid scratching the enameled front panel. b. CAL OUTPUT connector. Use a 9/16-inch nut driver to remove the dress nut that holds the front panel CAL OUTPUT connector to the front panel. If necessary, drill out the nut driver to t over the BNC connectors and cover the tip with heatshrink tubing or tape to avoid scratching the enameled front panel. 10.Remove the front frame from the chassis of the instrument. a. Remove the screw (0515-1227) that secures the top of the attenuator to the inside of the front frame of the instrument. b. Remove the three screws (0515-1101) that secure the A1 front frame assembly to the bottom of the spectrum analyzer. c. Remove the three screws (0515-1101) that secure the A1 front frame assembly to the top of the spectrum analyzer. d. Remove the A1 front frame assembly from the chassis. Note that the line switch cable is still attached to the front frame. To remove the line switch you must rst remove the display driver and LCD assembly. For instructions on removing the line switch, see Removal of the Line Switch from the Front Panel on page 183.

Chapter 4

181

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC)

Removal of the Display Driver Board, Inverter Board, and LCD

After the front panel has been removed, follow these steps to remove the display driver and LCD: 1. Disconnect the following cables from the A17 display driver board. These can be disconnected through openings in the display driver shield. See Figure 4-2 on page 184. a. W60, a ribbon cable that connects J1 on the A17 display driver board with J8 on the A2 controller board. b. W61, which connect J7 on the A17 display driver board with J9 on the A2 controller board. 2. Remove the four screws (0515-0665) that secure the display driver shield to the LCD backplate. Use a T-10 TORX driver set to 6 in./lbs. Remove the display driver shield. 3. Disconnect the following cables from the A17 display driver board: a. W64, the VGA ribbon cable, which connects J4 on the A17 display driver board to J1 on the rear panel. b. W63, a ribbon cable that connect J5 on the A17 display driver board with the LCD. 4. If you want to remove the A17A1 inverter board, proceed to step a. If you intend to keep the A17A1 inverter board secured to the A17 display driver board, proceed to step 4. a. Remove the two screws (0515-0430) which secure the A17A1 inverter board to standoffs on the A17 display driver board. b. Disconnect W62 from J6 on the A17 display driver board (do not disconnect W62 from the A17A1 inverter board, to which it is attached). 5. Remove the two backlight cables from the inverter board. 6. Remove the four screws (0515-0372) which secure the display driver board to the LCD backplate. Use a T-10 TORX driver. Remove the display driver board. 7. Remove four black cushions (0400-0333) from the inner-most posts on the LCD backplate. 8. Remove the two large screws (0515-0382) which secure the LCD backplate to the left side of the front panel chassis. Use a T-15 TORX driver. 9. Remove the four (0515-0430) screws which secure the LCD backplate to the right side of the front panel chassis. Use a T-8 TORX driver.

182

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC)

10.Carefully lift the display driver backplate over the two backlight cables and the W63 ribbon cable. 11.Remove the LCD assembly from the black rubber mount Take care not to damage the backlight cables or W63 ribbon cable. 12.To remove the glass plate, rst remove the LCD display from the display mount. Carefully remove the glass from the inside of the display mount.
NOTE

The LCD glass plate was originally placed in the LCD assembly in a clean room environment to ensure optimal performance of the LCD display. Take all possible precautions to ensure that the glass plate is clean before replacing it in the LCD assembly.

Removal of the Backlights

1. Remove the LCD assembly by following steps 1 through 12 in Removal of the Display Driver Board, Inverter Board, and LCD on page 182. 2. Remove each backlight cable assembly (2090-0380). Carefully grasp the end of the metal backlight assembly, which is connected to the backlight cable, and pull the backlight out from its slot. The backlight cable slots are located at the top and at the bottom of the LCD.
NOTE

Whenever there is a need to replace a single backlight, both backlights must be replaced.

Removal of the Line Switch from the Front Panel

After the A1 front frame assembly, the A17 display driver, and the A18 LCD have been removed, you can proceed to remove the line switch. Follow these steps: 1. Remove the green LED from the line switch assembly on the front frame, by gently pulling on the orange and black cables (wrapped in shrink tubing), to which the LED is connected. 2. Remove the two screws (0515-1521) that secure the line switch to the front frame. 3. Remove the screw (0515-0430) that secures the striped green and white ground cable to the line switch. 4. Remove the line switch from the front panel.

Chapter 4

183

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC)

Figure 4-2

LCD Assembly - Exploded View

184

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC)

Removal of the Keyboard

1. Disconnect cable A1A1W1 from HDR1 on the A1 front panel assembly and from A3J602 on the A3 interface board. 2. Disconnect the power probe cable from the probe power connector on the front frame PC board. 3. Unhook the RPG cable. 4. Remove the seven screws (0515-1934) that secure the front frame PC board to the front frame. Use a T-8 TORX driver set to 6-in/lbs.

Replacement of the Front Frame

1. Remove the cover assembly as described in Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover. Place the instrument on its side, with the display section upper-most, as shown in Figure 4-1 on page 179. 2. Fold out the A14 and A15 assemblies as described in steps 3 through 4 under Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies. Facing the front panel, the A14, and A15 assemblies will lie to your right. 3. Fold out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies as described in steps 2 through 6 under Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies. Facing the front panel, the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies will lie to your left. 4. Place the A1 front frame assembly in the chassis of the instrument. a. Position the A1 front frame assembly in the chassis. b. Insert the three screws (0515-1101) that secure the front frame chassis to the bottom of the spectrum analyzer. c. Insert the three screws (0515-1101) that secure the front frame chassis to the top of the spectrum analyzer d. Insert the screw (0515-1227) that secures the top of the attenuator to the inside of the A1 front frame assembly. 5. Secure the following connectors to the inside of the A1 front panel assembly. a. INPUT 50 RF connector. Use a 5/16-inch open-end wrench to connect cable W41 to the front panel from the attenuator. b. RF OUT 50 connector for Option 002 spectrum analyzers. Use a 5/16-inch open-end wrench to connect cable W47 to the front panel.

Chapter 4

185

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC)

c. 1ST LO OUTPUT connector. Connect cable W42 from A7J3 to the front panel 1st LO OUTPUT connector. To replace the 1st LO OUTPUT connector use a 5/16 socket and thread pliers. Use the pliers to hold the 1st LO connector in place, while tightening the connector inside the instrument with the 5/16-inch socket. d. 1ST LO OUTPUT connector for Option 002 spectrum analyzers. Connect W46 from the front panel. e. IF INPUT connector. Connect W36 from the front panel. 6. Replace the following from the face of the front panel. a. VOLUME knob and potentiometer. Use a 5/16-inch nut driver to secure the VOLUME potentiometer assembly. Use a 0.050 Allen wrench to replace the two screws (3030-0007) that secure the volume knob to the face of the front panel. b. CAL OUTPUT connector. Replace the dress nut that holds the CAL OUTPUT connector to the front panel. 7. If the line switch has been disconnected from the power supply you will have to route the W3 line switch cable from the right side of the instrument, through the opening behind FL 1, to the power supply on the left side of the instrument. a. Loosen the two screws (0515-2332) that secure FL 1 to the instruments chassis. b. Route the W3 line switch cable from the right side of the instrument to the left side, through the opening that can now be accessed, since FL 1 has been loosened. If the opening is still tight, loosen or remove FL 1 using a 5/16 -inch wrench. c. Secure the W3 line switch cable to the instrument chassis by routing it through the white collar, that is adjacent to the power supply assembly, on the chassis of the instrument. d. Route the W3 line switch cable through the notched opening on the right side of the power supply, and insert the line switch connector into A6J2. If the line switch has been disconnected from the front panel, see the instructions for its replacement on page 189. 8. Replace the power supply cover by inserting the 3 screws (0515-2309) that secure the power supply cover to the power supply. 9. If the LCD assemblies have not been removed from the front panel assembly, you will need to reconnect the following cables, which are routed through openings in the display driver shield.

186

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC)

a. W60, the large ribbon cable (80 lines) that goes to J8 on the A2 controller board. b. W61, a coax cable that connects to J10 on the A2 controller board. c. W64, the VGA ribbon cable (10 lines), that goes to J1 on the rear panel.

Replacement of the Display Driver Board, Inverter Board, and LCD

Follow these steps to replace the A18 LCD assembly, the A17 display driver, and the A17A1 inverter board.
NOTE

If the line switch assembly has been removed from the front panel, it must be replaced before you replace the display driver and LCD assemblies. 1. Place the front panel face down on your bench. The opening for the display will be on the right side of the front panel. 2. If the LCD glass place has been removed, carefully insert the glass plate into the brackets on the front side of the rubber display mount. Make sure that the side of the glass which has a broad silver border (the left side, when facing the front of the display) is inserted into the side of the mount that has larger brackets, into which the glass plate will slide.

NOTE

The glass plate was originally placed in the LCD assembly in a clean room environment to ensure optimal performance of the LCD display. Take all possible precautions to ensure that the glass plate is clean before placing it in the LCD assembly. 3. Insert the LCD into the display mount. The LCD is correctly oriented when the small ribbon cable from the LCD extends through an opening in the right side of the display mount, and the two backlight cables extend through openings on the left side of the mount. 4. Carefully lower the LCD bookplate onto the display mount. Ensure that the ribbon cable on the right, and the two backlight cables on the left, are inserted into the appropriate openings in the LCD backplate. 5. Lower the LCD backplate and LCD assembly, as a unit, into the display section on the right side of the A1 front frame chassis.

Chapter 4

187

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC)

6. Secure the LCD backplate to the chassis. a. Insert four (0515-0444) screws into the right side of the backplate. Use a T-8 TORX driver. b. Insert two large (0515-0382) screws into the left side of the LCD backplate. Use a T-15 TORX driver. 7. Place the four black cushions (0400-0333) on the four inner-most posts on the LCD backplate. 8. Place the A17 display driver board on the four black cushions. Insert the four screws (0515-0372) that secure the A17 display driver board to the LCD backplate, into the posts on which you have set the cushions. Use a T-10 TORX driver. 9. If the A17A1 inverter board has been removed from the driver board, proceed to step a. below. If the inverter board is attached to the A17 display driver, proceed to step 10. a. Connect the W62 cable from the A17A1 inverter board to J6 on the A17 display driver board. b. Insert 2 screws (0515-0430) that secure the A17A1 inverter board to the standoffs on the A17 display driver board. 10.Reconnect ribbon cable W63, which connects the A18 LCD with J5 on the A17 display driver board. 11.Connect the two backlight cables from the A18 LCD to the two slotted connectors on the A17A1 inverter board. 12.Route W64, the VGA cable, from J1 on the rear panel, through the rectangular opening in the display driver shield, to J7 on the A17 display driver board (the display driver shield has not yet been secured to the LCD backplate). 13.Lower the display driver shield onto the LCD backplate. Insert four screws (0515-0665) that secure the LCD backplate to the display driver board shield. Use a T-10 TORX driver. 14.Route cable W61 from J9 on the A2 controller board, through the circular opening in the display driver shield, to J7 on the A17 display driver board. 15.Route cable W60 from J8 on the A2 controller board, through the rectangular opening in the display driver shield, to J7 on the A17 display driver board. 16.Connect ribbon cable A1A1W1 from J602 on the A3 interface board to HDR1 on the A1 front panel assembly.

188

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC)

Replacing the Backlights

1. If the LCD or backlights have not been removed from the front frame, follow the procedures outlined in Removal of the Front Frame on page 180, Removal of the Display Driver Board, Inverter Board, and LCD on page 182, and Removal of the Backlights on page 183, as needed. 2. Carefully grasp the end of the replacement backlight cartridge (2090-0380), which is attached to the backlight cable, and insert the backlight into the backlight slot at the top of the LCD. Repeat for the backlight located at the bottom of the LCD.
NOTE

Whenever there is a need to replace a single backlight, both backlights must be replaced. 3. Insert the LCD into the display mount. The LCD assembly is correctly oriented when the small ribbon cable extends through an opening in the right side of the display mount. 4. Follow steps 4 through 17 of Replacement of the Display Driver Board, Inverter Board, and LCD on page 187, to complete replacement of the LCD into the front panel. Follow the instructions in Replacement of the Front Frame on page 185, to replace the front panel in the front frame.

Replacement of the Line Switch

After you have replaced the A1 front frame assembly you can replace the line switch by following these steps (note that the line switch must be replaced before the LCD and display driver can be replaced): 1. Insert the line switch into the A1 front frame assembly. Insert the two screws (0515-1521) that secure the line switch to the front frame. 2. Insert the screw (0515-0430) that secures the striped green and white ground cable for the line switch (this screw also secures the ground for the power probe; if the black cable from the power probe cable assembly is not secured to the ground, secure it also). 3. Carefully insert the green LED from the top-center of the line switch assembly into the LED opening in the A1 front frame assembly.

Replacement of the Keyboard

1. Insert the seven screws (0515-1934) that secure the front frame PC board to the A1 front frame assembly. Use a T-8 TORX driver. 2. Connect the RPG cable to the RPG connector on the front frame PC board.

Chapter 4

189

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC)

3. Connect the power probe cable to the connector that is labelled probe power on the front frame PC board. 4. Connect A1A1W1 from HDR1 on A1 front frame assembly to A3J602 on the A3 interface board.

190

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT

Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT

Removal
WARNING

The voltage potential at A6A1W3 is +9 kV. Disconnect at the CRT with caution! Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument. 1. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly as described in Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover. 2. Fold out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies as described in Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies, steps 2 through 6. 3. Disconnect A1A1W1 from A3J602. 4. Place the spectrum analyzer top-side-up on the work bench. 5. Connect the spectrum analyzer line-power cord to provide proper grounding while discharging the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable. Make sure that the spectrum analyzer line-power switch is in the off position. 6. Connect a high voltage probe (1000:1), such as the 34111A to a voltmeter with a 10 megohm input. 7. Connect the clip lead of the probe (ground) to the chassis of the spectrum analyzer. 8. Slip the tip of the high voltage probe under the rubber shroud of the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable to obtain a reading on the voltmeter. See Figure 4-3 on page 193. 9. Keep the high voltage probe on the post-accelerator connector until the voltage has dropped to a voltmeter reading of less than 5 mV (less than 5 V at the connector). This normally takes about 30 seconds. 10.Disconnect the line-power cord from the spectrum analyzer.

WARNING

To avoid possible electrical shock, in the next step, use a screwdriver having a conductive metal shank and tip, with an insulated handle.

Chapter 4

191

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT

11.Connect one end of a wire clip lead to a small screwdriver having a conductive shank and tip. Connect the other end of the clip lead to the CRT shield assembly as shown in Figure 4-3 on page 193. Hold the insulated screwdriver handle and slip the tip of the screwdriver under the rubber shroud of the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable, shorting the cable to ground through the CRT shield assembly. See Figure 4-3 on page 193. 12.Using a small screwdriver with the shank in contact with the CRT shield assembly, slip the tip of the screwdriver under the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable rubber shroud and short the cable to ground on the CRT shield assembly. 13.Pry out the black grommet protecting post-accelerator cable A6A1W3 from the CRT shield assembly. 14.Carefully unsnap the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable from the CRT and discharge it by shorting the cable to chassis ground on the CRT shield assembly. 15.Place the spectrum analyzer on its right side frame with the front frame assembly hanging over the front edge of the workbench. 16.Fold out the A14 and A15 assemblies as described in steps 3 and 4 under Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies.
WARNING

The voltage potential at A6A1W3 is +9 kV. Failure to discharge A6A1W3 correctly may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument.

192

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT

Figure 4-3

Discharging High Voltage on the CRT

Chapter 4

193

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT

Figure 4-4

A18 and Line Switch Assembly Mounting Screws

17.Use a 5/16-inch open-end wrench to disconnect W41 from the A9 input attenuator and the front panel INPUT 50 connector. 18.Disconnect W42 from A7 and the front panel 1ST LO OUTPUT connector. 19.Disconnect W36, coax 86, from the front panel IF INPUT connector. 20.Remove the VOLUME knob and potentiometer from the front panel. If necessary, drill out the nut driver used to remove the VOLUME potentiometer and cover the tip with heatshrink tubing or tape to avoid scratching the front dress panel.

194

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT

21.Use a 9/16-inch nut driver to remove the dress nut holding the front panel CAL OUTPUT connector to the front panel. If necessary, drill out the nut driver to t over the BNC connectors and cover the tip with heatshrink tubing or tape to avoid scratching the enameled front panel. 22.Loosen screw (2) securing the line switch assembly to the front frame. This is a captive screw and cannot be removed from the line switch assembly. See Figure 4-4 on page 194. 23.Gently remove the line switch assembly, using caution to avoid damaging A1W1 and power indicator LED A1W1DS1. 24.Remove A1W1 and A1W1DS1 from the line-power switch assembly. 25.Remove the three screws (1) securing the front-frame assembly to the spectrum analyzer right-side frame. See Figure 4-5. Figure 4-5 Front-Frame Mounting Screws

26.Remove the three screws securing the front-frame assembly to the spectrum analyzer left-side frame. 27.Remove the four screws (1) ( Figure 4-4 on page 194) securing the CRT mounts to the deck.

Chapter 4

195

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT

28.Pull the cable tie (1) to free W9. See Figure 4-6. Gently pry W9, the CRT cable, from the end of the CRT assembly. 29.Support the A18 CRT assembly while gently pulling the front frame and CRT out of the spectrum analyzer one or two inches. 30.Disconnect A18W1, the trace align wires, from A17J5. Remove the front-frame and CRT assemblies. 31.Gently pull the CRT assembly off of the front-frame assembly. Figure 4-6 Installing the CRT and Front-Frame Assemblies

196

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT

Replacement
NOTE

Use care when handling the glass CRT EMI shield. The glass may be cleaned using thin-lm cleaner (part number 8500-2163) and a lint-free cloth. When installing the glass shield, face the side of the glass with the silver coated edge towards the inside of the spectrum analyzer. 1. Place the spectrum analyzer on its right-side frame with the front end extending slightly over the front of the work bench. 2. Gently place the A18 CRT assembly into the A1 front-frame assembly as illustrated in Figure 4-7 on page 198. 3. Place the front-frame and CRT assemblies into the spectrum analyzer, using caution to avoid pinching any cables. 4. Dress the A18W1 trace-align wires between the CRT assembly mounts and the A6 power supply top shield.

Chapter 4

197

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT

Figure 4-7

Placing the CRT into the Front Frame

5. Connect A18W1 to A17J5. 6. Connect CRT cable W9 onto the end of the CRT assembly. Take care to avoid bending or damaging pins. 7. Fully seat the front frame and CRT assemblies into the spectrum analyzer.

198

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT

8. Secure the front frame to the spectrum analyzer side frames, using three athead screws per side. See Figure 4-5 on page 195. 9. Retighten the four screws securing the CRT mounts to the deck. 10.Place W9 between the CRT assembly and the A6 power supply assembly top shield so that the W9 wires are below the surface of the top shield. 11.Connect W42 to A7J5 and the front panel 1ST LO OUTPUT connector. 12.Use a 9/16-inch nut driver to reconnect CAL OUTPUT connector to the front panel. 13.Connect the VOLUME potentiometer and knob to the front panel. 14.Connect W36, coax 86, to the front panel IF INPUT connector. 15.Use a 5/16-inch wrench to connect W41 to the A9 input attenuator and the front panel INPUT 50 connector. 16.Place LED A1W1DS1 into the line-power switch assembly. 17.Attach the line switch assembly into the front-frame using one panhead screw. Be sure to connect the line-power switch ground lug with the screw. The screw is captive. 18.Fold up the A14 and A15 assemblies as described in Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies, steps 3 through 5. 19.Place the spectrum analyzer top-side-up on the work bench and connect A1A1W1 to A3J602. 20.Snap post-accelerator cable A6A1W3 to the A18 CRT assembly. 21.Snap the black grommet protecting the A6A1W3 into the CRT shield. 22.Fold up assemblies A2, A3, A4, and A5 as described in Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies, steps 6 through 12. 23.Replace the spectrum analyzer cover assembly. 24.Connect the line-power cord and switch on the spectrum analyzer power. If the display does not operate properly, turn off spectrum analyzer power, disconnect the line cord, and recheck the spectrum analyzer.

Chapter 4

199

Assembly Replacement Procedure 3. A1A1 Keyboard/Front Panel Keys

Procedure 3. A1A1 Keyboard/Front Panel Keys

Removal
1. Remove the front frame from the spectrum analyzer. Place the front frame face down on the bench. For 8564EC and 8565EC instruments, follow the instructions in Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC). For 8564E and 8565E instruments, follow the instructions in Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT. For 8564EC and 8565EC instruments, proceed to step 3. For 8564E and 8565E instruments, proceed to step 2. 2. Remove the front frame center support. 3. Disconnect A1W1 from A1A1J3 and the RPG cable from A1A1J2. 4. Remove the nine screws holding the A1A1 keyboard assembly to the front frame and remove the assembly. 5. Remove the rubber keypad.
NOTE

In 8564E and 8565E instruments, the front panel softkey actuators are part of the CRT bezel assembly and are not replaceable. Should the softkeys become damaged, replace the bezel assembly.

Replacement
1. Install the rubber keypad, ensuring that the screw holes are visible through the pad. 2. Place the A1A1 keyboard assembly over the rubber keypad. Secure with nine panhead screws. 3. Connect the RPG cable to A1A1J2, and A1W1 to A1A1J3. For 8564EC and 8565EC instruments, proceed to step 5. For 8564E and 8565E instruments, proceed to step 4. 4. Secure the center support to the front frame using two panhead screws. The arrow stamped on the center support should point to the top of the frame. 5. Install the front frame assembly. For 8564EC and 8565EC instruments, follow the instructions in Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC). For 8564E and 8565E instruments, follow the instructions in Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT.

200

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 4. A1A2 RPG

Procedure 4. A1A2 RPG

Removal
1. Remove the A9 input attenuator as described in Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies. 2. Disconnect the RPG cable from the A1A1 keyboard assembly. 3. If the serial number of your instrument is equal to or above 3738A00929 (8564E/EC) or 3738A00768 (8565E/EC) proceed to step a. If the serial number of your instrument is below 3738A00929 (8564E) or 3738A00768 (8565E) proceed to step b. a. Pull the front panel RPG knob off of the face of the front panel of the spectrum analyzer. Proceed to step 4. b. Remove the set screw from the front panel RPG knob using a number 6 hex (Allen) wrench. Proceed to step 4. 4. Use a 7/16-inch nut driver, set to 20-in./lbs., to remove the nut holding the RPG shaft to the front panel. 5. Remove the RPG.

Replacement
1. Place the RPG into the front frame with the cable facing the bottom of the spectrum analyzer. Place a lock washer and nut on the RPG shaft to hold it in the frame. If the serial number of your instrument is below 3738A00929 (8564E) or 3738A00768 (8565E) proceed to step a. Otherwise, proceed to step 2. a. Insert the set screw into the RPG knob using a number 6 hex (Allen) wrench. Proceed to step 2. 2. Use a 7/16-inch nut driver to secure the RPG assembly to the front frame. 3. Connect the RPG cable to A1A1J2. 4. Insert the RPG knob into the front panel assembly. 5. Replace the A9 input attenuator as described in Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies.

Chapter 4

201

Assembly Replacement Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies

Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies

Removal
1. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover. 2. Place the spectrum analyzer on its right side frame. 3. Remove the eight screws holding the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies to the top of the spectrum analyzer. These screws are labeled (2), (3), and (4) in Figure 4-8 on page 203. They are also labeled on the back of the A2 board assembly. 4. Remove ribbon cable W4 from A2J6. See Figure 4-8 on page 203.
CAUTION

Do not fold the board assemblies out of the spectrum analyzer one at a time. Always fold the A2 and A3 assemblies as a unit and the A4 and A5 assemblies as a unit. Folding out one assembly at a time binds the hinges attaching the assemblies and may damage an assembly and hinge. 5. The board assemblies are attached to the right side frame of the spectrum analyzer with two hinges. Fold both the A2 and A3 assemblies out of the spectrum analyzer as a unit. 6. Fold both the A4 and A5 assemblies out of the spectrum analyzer as a unit. 7. Remove the cables from the assembly being removed, as illustrated in Figure 4-9 on page 204. 8. Remove the two screws that attach the assembly being removed to its two mounting hinges.

CAUTION

Do not torque shield TORX screws to more than 8 inch-pounds. Applying excessive torque will cause the screws to stretch. Diagrams that illustrate features common to E-series and EC-series instruments are shown with E-series instruments. Where there are differences between E-series and EC-series features separate diagrams are provided.

NOTE

202

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies

Figure 4-8

A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembly Removal

Replacement
1. Place the spectrum analyzer on its right side on the work bench. 2. Attach the assembly being installed to the two chassis hinges with two panhead screws. 3. Leave the assembly in the folded-out position and attach ribbon cables W1 and W2. 4. Attach all cables to the assembly, as illustrated in Figure 4-9 on page 204. 5. Locate the cable clip on the inside of the right side frame. Make sure that the coaxial cables are routed properly on the clip as illustrated in Figure 4-12 on page 206 for EC-series instruments, and in Figure 4-13 on page 207 for E-series instruments.

Chapter 4

203

Assembly Replacement Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies

6. Lay the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies at against each other in the folded-out position. Make sure that no cables become pinched between the two assemblies. Figure 4-9 Assembly Cables (1 of 3) EC- Series

204

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies

Figure 4-10

Assembly Cables (2 of 3) EC-series

Figure 4-11

Assembly Cables (3 of 3) E-series

Chapter 4

205

Assembly Replacement Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies

Figure 4-12

Coaxial Cable Clip EC-Series

7. Check to ensure that no cables will become pinched under the hinges when folding up the A4 and A5 assemblies.

206

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies

8. Fold the A4 and A5 assemblies together as a unit into the spectrum analyzer. Use caution to avoid damaging any cable assemblies. The standoffs on the A5 assembly must t into the cups on the A6 power supply top shield. 9. Fold the A2 and A3 assemblies together as a unit into the spectrum analyzer. Be sure to fold GPIB cable A19W1 between the A3 and A4 assemblies, using the two sets of hook and loop (Velcro) fasteners. 10.Fold ribbon cable A1A1W1 between A3 and A4 assemblies. Take care to dress the protective tubing as close to A3J602 connector as possible, so that the tubing does not fold with the cable. See Figure 4-14 on page 208. 11.Attach ribbon cable W4 to A2J6 while folding up the assemblies. 12.Secure the assemblies using the eight screws removed in "Removal," step 3. See Figure 4-8 on page 203. Figure 4-13 Coaxial Cable Clip E-Series

Chapter 4

207

Assembly Replacement Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies

Figure 4-14

GPIB and A1A1 W1 Cable Placement

208

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 6A. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8564EC and 8565EC)

Procedure 6A. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8564EC and 8565EC)

Removal
WARNING

The A6 Power Supply assembly contains lethal voltages with lethal currents in all areas. Use extreme care when servicing this assembly. Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before beginning this replacement procedure. Failure to follow this precaution will represent a shock hazard which may result in personal injury. 1. Disconnect the power cord from the spectrum analyzer. 2. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly. Refer to Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover. 3. Fold out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies as described in steps 2 through 6 under Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies. 4. Place the spectrum analyzer on the workbench with A2, A3, A4, and A5 folded out to the right. 5. Remove the three screws securing the power supply shield to the power supply and remove the shield. See Figure 4-16 on page 211. 6. Disconnect all cables from the A6 power supply assembly. See Figure 4-17 on page 214. 7. Use a T-10 TORX driver to remove the screws from the shield wall, the heatsink, the base of the power supply (0515-1950) and the A6 power supply assembly. 8. Remove the A6 power supply assembly by lifting from the regulator heatsink toward the front of the spectrum analyzer.

Chapter 4

209

Assembly Replacement Procedure 6A. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8564EC and 8565EC)

Figure 4-15

Power Supply Cover

210

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 6A. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8564EC and 8565EC)

Replacement
1. Ensure that the bottom shield wall is in place before replacing the A6 power supply assembly. 2. Attach the A6 power supply assembly to the spectrum analyzer chassis and top shield wall using the four screws, torqued to 10-inch lbs. Attach all other screws, torqued to 6-inch lbs. 3. Connect W1 to A6J1, W3 to A6J2, fan power wires to A6J3, W8 to A6J4, and the line-power jack to A6J101. See Figure 4-17 on page 214. 4. Ensure that all cables are safely routed and will not be damaged when securing the A6 cover. 5. Secure the power supply cover shield to the power supply using three athead screws (1). See Figure 4-16 on page 211. One end of the cover ts into a slot provided in the rear frame assembly. Ensure that the extended portion of the cover shield is seated in the shield wall groove. 6. Fold the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as described in steps 6 through 12 under Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies. Figure 4-16 Power Supply Cover

Chapter 4

211

Assembly Replacement Procedure 6B. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8564E and 8565E)

Procedure 6B. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8564E and 8565E)

Removal
WARNING

The A6 power supply and A6A1 high voltage assemblies contain lethal voltages with lethal currents in all areas. Use extreme care when servicing these assemblies. Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before beginning this replacement procedure. Failure to follow this precaution will present a shock hazard which may result in personal injury. 1. Disconnect the power cord from the spectrum analyzer. 2. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly. Refer to Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover. 3. Fold out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies as described in Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies, steps 2 through 6. 4. Place the spectrum analyzer top-side-up on the work bench with A2, A3, A4, and A5 folded out to the right.

WARNING

The voltage potential at A6A1W3 is +9 kV. Disconnect at the CRT with caution! Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument. 5. Connect the spectrum analyzer line-power cord to provide proper grounding while discharging the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable. Make sure that the spectrum analyzer line-power switch is in the off position. 6. Connect a high voltage probe (1000:1), such as the 34111A to a voltmeter with a 10 megohm input. 7. Connect the clip lead of the probe (ground) to the chassis of the spectrum analyzer. 8. Slip the tip of the high voltage probe under the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable rubber shroud to obtain a reading on the voltmeter. See Figure 4-3 on page 193. 9. Keep the high voltage probe on the post-accelerator connector until the voltage has dropped to a voltmeter reading of less than 5 mV (less than 5 V at the connector). This normally takes about 30 seconds. 10.Disconnect the line-power cord from the spectrum analyzer.

212

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 6B. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8564E and 8565E)

11.Using a small screwdriver with the shank in contact with the CRT shield assembly, slip the tip of the screwdriver under the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable rubber shroud and short the cable to ground on the CRT shield assembly. See Figure 4-3 on page 193. 12.Remove the three screws (1) securing the power supply shield to the power supply and remove the shield. See Figure 4-18 on page 215. 13.Remove the three screws securing the A6A1 high voltage assembly to the A6 power supply assembly. 14.Disconnect ribbon cable A6A1W1 from A6J5 and lift the A6A1 assembly out of the way. See Figure 4-17 on page 214. 15.Disconnect all cables from the A6 power supply assembly. See Figure 4-17 on page 214. 16.Use a TORX screwdriver to remove the hardware from the shield wall, the heatsink, and the A6 power supply assembly. 17.Remove the A6 power supply assembly by lifting from the regulator heatsink toward front of spectrum analyzer.

Replacement
1. Ensure that the bottom shield wall is in place before replacing the A6 power supply assembly. 2. Attach the A6 power supply assembly to the spectrum analyzer chassis and top shield wall using the four screws. 3. Connect W1 to A6J1, W3 to A6J2, fan power wires to A6J3, W8 to A6J4, and the line-power jack to A6J101. See Figure 4-17 on page 214. 4. Secure the A6A1 high voltage assembly to the A6 power supply assembly, using three panhead screws. Connect ribbon cable A6A1W1 to A6J5. 5. Snap post-accelerator cable A6A1W3 to the CRT assembly.

Chapter 4

213

Assembly Replacement Procedure 6B. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 4-17

A6 Power Supply Connections

6. Ensure that all cables are safely routed and will not be damaged when securing the A6 cover.

214

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 6B. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8564E and 8565E)

7. Secure the power supply cover shield to the power supply using three athead screws (1). See Figure 4-18 on page 215. One end of the cover ts into a slot provided in the rear frame assembly. Ensure that the extended portion of the cover shield is seated in the shield wall groove. 8. Fold the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as described in Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies, steps 6 through 12. Figure 4-18 Power Supply Cover

Chapter 4

215

Assembly Replacement Procedure 7. A6A1 High Voltage Assembly (8564E and 8565E)

Procedure 7. A6A1 High Voltage Assembly (8564E and 8565E)

Removal
WARNING

The A6 power supply and A6A1 high voltage assemblies contain lethal voltages with lethal currents in all areas. Use extreme care when servicing these assemblies. Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before beginning this replacement procedure. Failure to follow this precaution can represent a shock hazard which may result in personal injury. 1. Disconnect the power cord from the spectrum analyzer. 2. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly as described in Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover. 3. Fold out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies as described in Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies. 4. Place the spectrum analyzer top-side-up on the work bench.

WARNING

The voltage potential at A6A1W3 is +9 kV. Disconnect at the CRT with caution! Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument. 5. Connect the spectrum analyzer line-power cord to provide proper grounding while discharging the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable. Make sure that the spectrum analyzer line-power switch is in the off position. 6. Connect a high voltage probe (1000:1), such as the 34111A to a voltmeter with a 10 megohm input. 7. Connect the clip lead of the probe (ground) to the chassis of the spectrum analyzer. 8. Slip the tip of the high voltage probe under the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable rubber shroud to obtain a reading on the voltmeter. See Figure 4-3 on page 193. 9. Keep the high voltage probe on the post-accelerator connector until the voltage has dropped to a voltmeter reading of less than 5 mV (less than 5 V at the connector). This normally takes about 30 seconds. 10.Disconnect the line-power cord from the spectrum analyzer.

216

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 7. A6A1 High Voltage Assembly (8564E and 8565E)

11.Using a small screwdriver with the shank in contact with the CRT shield assembly, slip the tip of the screwdriver under the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable rubber shroud and short the cable to ground on the CRT shield assembly. See Figure 4-3 on page 193. 12.Pry out the black grommet protecting post-accelerator cable A6A1W3 from the CRT shield assembly. 13.Carefully unsnap the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable from the CRT and discharge it by shorting the cable to chassis ground on the CRT shield assembly. 14.Remove the three screws (1) securing the power supply shield to the power supply and remove the shield. See Figure 4-18 on page 215. 15.Remove the three screws securing the A6A1 high voltage assembly to the A6 power supply assembly. 16.Disconnect ribbon cable A6A1W1 from A6J5. See Figure 4-17 on page 214. 17.For Option 007 spectrum analyzers: Remove the two screws (1) securing two board-mounting posts to the left side frame and remove the posts. See Figure 4-19 on page 218. 18.Remove the two left side frame screws (2) securing the A17 assembly (and A16 assembly in Option 007). For Option 007 spectrum analyzers: Lift up the A16 FADC assembly and swing it out of the spectrum analyzer. Do not remove any cables. 19.Lift up the A17 CRT driver assembly and disconnect A6A1W2 from A17J6. Do not remove any other cables from the A17 assembly. 20.Disconnect the tie wraps from the A6A1 assembly cables and remove the A6A1 high voltage assembly from the spectrum analyzer.

Chapter 4

217

Assembly Replacement Procedure 7. A6A1 High Voltage Assembly (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 4-19

A16 Fast ADC and A17 CRT Driver Mounting Screws

Replacement
1. Secure the A6A1 high voltage assembly to the A6 power supply using three panhead screws. Connect ribbon cable A6A1W1 to A6J5. 2. Snap post-accelerator cable A6A1W3 to the CRT assembly. 3. Place the black grommet protecting the post-accelerator cable into the CRT shield. 4. Ensure that all cables are safely routed and will not be damaged when securing the A6 cover. 5. Secure the power supply cover shield to the power supply using three athead screws (1). See Figure 4-18 on page 215. One end of the cover ts into a slot provided in the rear frame assembly. Ensure that the extended portion of the cover shield is seated in the shield wall groove. 6. Connect A6A1W2 to A17J6. 7. Place the A17 CRT Driver assembly into the center-deck mounting slot nearest the CRT. Use caution when routing cables to avoid damage.

218

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 7. A6A1 High Voltage Assembly (8564E and 8565E)

8. For Option 007 spectrum analyzers: Place the A16 FADC assembly into the center-deck mounting slot nearest the left side frame. Ensure that the A16 FADC assembly is properly seated in the right end of the slot. 9. Secure the A17 assembly (and A16 assembly in Option 007) with the two athead screws removed in step 18 under "Removal." See Figure 4-19 on page 218 (2). 10.For Option 007 spectrum analyzers: Connect the two mounting posts to the left-side frame using the two screws removed in step 17 under "Removal." See Figure 4-19 on page 218 (1). 11.Fold the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer and secure the spectrum analyzer cover assembly as described in Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies.

Chapter 4

219

Assembly Replacement Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies

Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies

A separate replacement procedure is supplied for each assembly listed below: * A7 LO Multiplier/Amplier (LOMA) A8 Low Band Mixer A9 Input Attenuator A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX A11 YTO A13 Second Converter Before beginning a procedure, do the following: 1. Fold out the A14 and A15 assemblies as described in Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies. 2. If the A9 input attenuator, A11 YTO, or A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX assembly is being removed, also fold down the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies as described in Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies. Use Figure 4-20 on page 221 to locate the assemblies and cables called out in this procedure.
NOTE

Use a torque wrench to tighten all SMA connectors to 113 Ncm (10 in-lb). part number 8710-1655 can be used for this purpose. The style of torque wrench may vary, but in all cases do not tighten the connectors beyond the point at which the torque wrench "clicks" or "breaks-away."

220

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies

Figure 4-20

8564E/ECand 8565E/EC Assembly Locations

Chapter 4

221

Assembly Replacement A7 LO Multiplier/Amplier (LOMA)

A7 LO Multiplier/Amplier (LOMA)
Removal
1. Remove the two screws securing the A7 assembly to the spectrum analyzer center deck. 2. Use a 5/16-inch wrench to disconnect W46, W28, W39, W42, W30, and W38 from the A7 assembly. 3. Remove W12 from the A7 assembly (two ribbon cable connectors and ground lug). 4. Remove the A7 assembly.

Replacement
1. Use a 5/16-inch wrench to attach W46, W28, W39, W42, W30, and W38 to the A7 assembly. 2. Connect cable W12 (both ribbon cable connectors) to the A7 assembly. 3. Use two panhead screws to secure A7 to the center deck. Be sure to attach the ground lug on the screw near the J5 SAMPLER connector of A7. 4. Torque all RF cable connections to 113 Ncm (10 in-lb).

222

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement A8 Low Band Mixer

A8 Low Band Mixer

Removal
1. Place the spectrum analyzer upside-down on the work bench with A14 and A15 folded out to the left. 2. For analyzers having serial number prex <3641A: Use a 5/16-inch wrench to remove W45 between FL1 and A8J1. For analyzers having serial number prex 3641A, or Option H13: Use a 5/16-inch wrench to remove W45 between FL1 and AT1. (For Option 006, remove W45 between FL1 and A8J1.) 3. Loosen W47 and W39 at A8J2, and A8J3. 4. Remove the two screws securing A8 to the center deck. 5. Remove W47 and W39 from the A8 assembly. 6. Remove AT1 from A8J1, if present. 7. For analyzers having serial number prex 3641A, or Option H13: disconnect W15 from A8.

Replacement
1. For analyzers having Option H13, or serial number prex 3641A without Option 006: connect AT1 to A8J1. 2. Place A8 on the center deck and attach W56 and W39, using caution to avoid damaging any of the center conductor pins in the cable. 3. Use two panhead screws to secure A8 to the center deck. Reconnect W45 to FL1 and A8J1, or AT1. 4. Torque all semirigid coax connections on A8, FL1, and AT1 (if present) to 113 Ncm (10 in-lb). Ensure that all cable connections are tight. 5. For analyzers having serial number prex 3641A, or Option H13: connect W15 to A8.

Chapter 4

223

Assembly Replacement A9 Input Attenuator

A9 Input Attenuator
Removal
1. Place the spectrum analyzer upside-down on the work bench. 2. Disconnect W16 ribbon cable from the A10/A12 assembly and move it out of the way. 3. Remove screw (1) and the cable clamp securing FL3 to the attenuator mounting bracket. See Figure 4-21 on page 224. Figure 4-21 A9 Attenuator Removal

224

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement A9 Input Attenuator

4. Disconnect W30 from A7 and move this cable/lter out of the way. 5. Remove the three screws (2) securing the A9 input attenuator mounting bracket to the center deck. See Figure 4-22 on page 226. 6. Loosen W43 from the attenuator connector, then disconnect the other end of W43 from A12J3 with a slight downward pressure to prevent damage to the center conductor pin. 7. Disconnect W41 from the front panel INPUT 50 connector, swinging the attenuator assembly upward to free the connection. 8. Remove the attenuator and disconnect the attenuator ribbon cable (W11), and the 2 semirigid coax cables (W41 and W43). 9. Remove the attenuator from the attenuator mounting bracket.

Replacement
1. Ensure that the bracket that secures the attenuator to the center deck is attached to the attenuator. For proper orientation of the attenuator when mounting the bracket, refer to Figure 5-4 in chapter 5. 2. Connect the attenuator-control ribbon cable to the A9 input attenuator. 3. Loosely connect semirigid cable W43 to the attenuator assembly. See Figure 4-21 on page 224. 4. Loosely connect semirigid cable W41 to the front panel RF INPUT connector. 5. Loosely connect the other end of W41 to the attenuator and swing the attenuator down into place. 6. Connect semirigid cable W43 to A12J3 and torque all semirigid cable connections to 113 Ncm (10 in-lb). 7. Attach the attenuator to the center deck with three panhead screws (2). See Figure 4-22 on page 226. 8. Connect W30 to A7 and attach FL3 to the attenuator mounting bracket using a small cable clamp and one panhead screw (1). See Figure 4-21 on page 224. Torque the connections to W30 and FL3 to 113 Ncm (10 in-lb). 9. Connect W16 ribbon cable to the A10/A12 assembly.

Chapter 4

225

Assembly Replacement A9 Input Attenuator

Figure 4-22

A9 and A10/A12 Mounting Screws

226

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX

A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX
Removal
CAUTION

Do NOT remove the brackets from the A10/A12 assembly. If these brackets are removed and reinstalled, the performance of the spectrum analyzer will be altered. A new or rebuilt A10/A12 assembly includes new mounting brackets already attached to it. 1. Disconnect W16 ribbon cable from the A10/A12 assembly. 2. Use a 5/16-inch wrench to remove W43, W44, W46, and W47 from the A10/A12 assembly. See Figure 4-20 on page 221. 3. Remove W56/FL2/W57 (as a unit) and set it aside. 4. Remove W28 from the A10/A12 assembly (beneath where W56/FL2/W57 was connected to the A10/A12 assembly). 5. Remove four screws (1) securing A10/A12 to the center deck. These screws are located on the top-side of the center deck as illustrated in Figure 4-22, A9 and A10/A12 Mounting Screws. 6. Carefully remove the A10/A12 assembly and disconnect W48 (gray cable).

Replacement
1. Orient the A10/A12 assembly for the proper cable connections. 2. Connect W48 (gray cable) to the A10/A12 assembly (beneath where W46 connects to the A10/A12 assembly). See Figure 4-20 on page 221. 3. Connect W28 to the A10/A12 assembly (beneath where W56 connects to the A10/A12 assembly). See Figure 4-20 on page 221. 4. Connect W43, W44, W46, and W47 to the A10/A12 assembly. 5. Connect W16 ribbon cable to the A10/A12 assembly. 6. Install W56/FL2/W57 and torque all RF cable connections to 113 Ncm (10 in-lb). 7. Secure the A10/A12 assembly to the spectrum analyzer center deck using four screws.

Chapter 4

227

Assembly Replacement A11 YTO

A11 YTO
Removal
1. Carefully disconnect W43 semirigid cable from A9J2 and A12J3 and move it out of the way. 2. Remove W56/FL2/W57 (as a unit) and disconnect W38 at the A11 assembly. 3. Remove four screws (1) securing A11 to the right-side frame. See Figure 4-23, A11 Mounting Screws at Right Side Frame. Remove the screws while holding onto A11. 4. Disconnect W10 ribbon cable from the A11 YTO assembly.

Replacement
1. Connect W10 ribbon cable to the A11 YTO assembly. 2. Orient the A11 assembly in the spectrum analyzer so its four mounting holes line up with the holes in the right side frame and the output connector is lined up with W38. 3. Secure the A11 assembly to the right side frame using four screws. 4. Connect W38 to A11. 5. Install W56/FL2/W57 between A12J1 and A13J1. 6. Reconnect W43 semirigid cable to A9J2 and A12J3 and torque all RF cable connections to 113 Ncm (10 in-lb).

228

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement A11 YTO

Figure 4-23

A11 Mounting Screws at Right Side Frame

Chapter 4

229

Assembly Replacement A13 Second Converter

A13 Second Converter

CAUTION

Turn off the spectrum analyzer power when replacing the A13 second converter assembly. Failure to turn off the power may result in damage to the assembly.

Removal
1. Place the spectrum analyzer upside-down on the work bench. 2. Disconnect W33, coax 81, and W35, coax 92, from the A13 assembly. 3. Disconnect W48, coax 8, from A13J3. 4. Disconnect W56/FL2/W57 (as a unit) and set it aside. 5. Remove the four screws securing A13 to the main deck and remove the assembly. 6. Disconnect ribbon cable W13 from the A13 assembly.

Replacement
1. Connect ribbon cable W13 to the A13 assembly. 2. Secure A13 to the spectrum analyzer main deck, using four panhead screws. 3. Connect W33, coax 81, to A13J4 600 MHz IN jack. 4. Connect W35, coax 92, to A13J2 310.7 MHz OUT jack. 5. Connect W48, coax 8, to A13J3. Route W48 under W35, coax 92. 6. Install W56/FL2/W57 and ensure that all of the connections on W56/FL2/W57 and on W48 are torqued to 113 Ncm (10 in-lb).

230

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies

Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies

Removal
1. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover as described in "Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover." 2. Place the spectrum analyzer on its right side frame. 3. Remove the eight screws (1) holding the A14 and A15 assemblies to the bottom of the spectrum analyzer. See Figure 4-24 on page 231. Figure 4-24 A14 and A15 Assembly Removal

Chapter 4

231

Assembly Replacement Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies

CAUTION

DO NOT fold the board assemblies out of the spectrum analyzer one at a time. Always fold the A14 and A15 assemblies as a unit. Folding out one assembly at a time binds the hinges attaching the assemblies and may damage an assembly and hinge. 4. The board assemblies are attached to the spectrum analyzer right side frame with two hinges. Fold both the A14 and A15 assemblies out of the spectrum analyzer as a unit. 5. Remove all cables from the assembly being removed. 6. Remove the two screws that attach the assembly being removed to its two mounting hinges.

CAUTION

DO NOT torque shield screws to more than 5 inch-pounds. Applying excessive torque will cause the screws to stretch.

Replacement
1. Attach the removed assembly to the two chassis hinges with two panhead screws. 2. Attach all cables to the assembly as illustrated in Figure 4-25 on page 233. When connecting W34 to A15, torque the SMA connector to 113 Ncm (10 in-lb). 3. Lay the A14 and A15 assemblies at against each other in the folded out position. Make sure that no cables become pinched between the two assemblies. Ensure that all coaxial cables are clear of hinges and standoffs before continuing onto the next step. 4. Fold both board assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as a unit. Use caution to avoid damaging any cable assemblies. 5. Secure the assemblies using the eight screws removed in "Removal" step 3. See Figure 4-24 on page 231. 6. Secure the spectrum analyzer cover assembly as described in "Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover."

232

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies

Figure 4-25

A14 and A15 Assembly Cables

Chapter 4

233

Assembly Replacement Procedure 10. A16 Fast ADC and A17 CRT Driver (8564E and 8565E)

Procedure 10. A16 Fast ADC and A17 CRT Driver (8564E and 8565E)
Removal
1. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly and fold out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies as described in steps 3 through 6 under Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies. 2. Place the spectrum analyzer top-side-up on the work bench with A2, A3, A4, and A5 folded out to the right. 3. For Option 007 spectrum analyzers: Remove two screws (1) securing the two board-mounting posts to the left side frame, and remove the posts. See Figure 4-26, A16 and A17 Mounting Screws. 4. Remove two screws (2) securing the A17 assembly (and A16 assembly in Option 007) to the left side frame. Remove the two spacers (non-Option 007). 5. Pull the A17 assembly out of the spectrum analyzer. 6. For Option 007 spectrum analyzers: Pull the A16 assembly out of the spectrum analyzer. 7. Disconnect W7, W8, W9, A6A1W2, and A18W1 from the A17 CRT driver assembly. 8. For Option 007 spectrum analyzers: Disconnect all cables from the A16 Fast ADC assembly.

234

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 10. A16 Fast ADC and A17 CRT Driver (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 4-26

A16 and A17 Mounting Screws

Replacement
1. Connect W7, W8, W9, A6A1W2, and A18W1 to the A17 CRT driver assembly. Place the assembly into the center-deck mounting slot next to the CRT assembly. 2. For Option 007 spectrum analyzers: Connect all A16 assembly cables as illustrated in Figure 4-27 on page 236 which shows the left side frame removed so that proper A16 assembly cable routing may be viewed. Place the A16 assembly into the center-deck mounting slot nearest the left side frame. 3. Secure the A17 assembly (and A16 assembly in Option 007) to the left side frame using two athead screws (and two spacers in non-Option 007). For Option 007: Attach the board mounts to the left side frame using two athead screws (1). See Figure 4-26 on page 235. 4. Place the spectrum analyzer on its right side frame. 5. Fold the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as described in Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies on page 202.

Chapter 4

235

Assembly Replacement Procedure 10. A16 Fast ADC and A17 CRT Driver (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 4-27

A16 Cable Routing

236

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 11. B1 Fan

Procedure 11. B1 Fan

Removal/Replacement
WARNING

Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before beginning this replacement procedure. Failure to follow this precaution can present a shock hazard which may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the four screws securing the fan assembly to the rear frame. 2. Remove the fan and disconnect the fan wire from the A6 power supply assembly. 3. To reinstall the fan, connect the fan wire to A6J3 and place the wire into the channel provided on the left side of the rear frame opening. Secure the fan to the rear frame using four panhead screws.

NOTE

The fan must be installed so that the air enters through the front and sides of the instrument and exits out the rear of the instrument.

Chapter 4

237

Assembly Replacement Procedure 12. BT1 Battery

Procedure 12. BT1 Battery

WARNING

Battery BT1 contains lithium polycarbon monouoride. Do not incinerate or puncture this battery. Dispose of discharged battery in a safe manner. To avoid loss of the calibration constants stored on the A2 controller assembly, connect the spectrum analyzer to the main power source and turn on before removing the battery. The battery used in this instrument is designed to last several years. An output voltage of +3.0 V is maintained for most of its useful life. Once this voltage drops to +2.6 V, its life and use are limited and the output voltage will deteriorate quickly. When the instrument is turned off, stored states and traces will only be retained for a short time and may be lost. Refer to State- and Trace-Storage Problems, in Chapter 10 , Controller Section. The battery should be replaced if its voltage is +2.6 V or less.

CAUTION

Removal/Replacement
1. Remove any option module attached to the rear panel. 2. Locate the battery assembly cover on the spectrum analyzer rear panel. Use a screwdriver to remove the two athead screws securing the cover to the spectrum analyzer. 3. Remove the old battery and replace it with the new one, ensuring proper polarity. 4. Measure the voltage across the new battery. Nominal new battery voltage is approximately +3.0 V. If this is not the case, check the battery cable and A2 controller assembly. 5. Secure the battery assembly into the spectrum analyzer.

238

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel

Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel

Removal
WARNING

The A6 power supply (in E-series and EC-series instruments) and the A6A1 high voltage (in E-series instruments) assemblies contain lethal voltages with lethal currents in all areas. Use extreme care when servicing these assemblies. Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before beginning this replacement procedure. Failure to follow this precaution can present a shock hazard which may result in personal injury. Diagrams that illustrate features common to E-series and EC-series instruments are shown with E-series instruments. Where features differ for E-series and EC-series instruments, separate diagrams are provided. 1. Disconnect the line-power cord from the spectrum analyzer. 2. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover, and place the spectrum analyzer on its right side frame. 3. Fold out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies as described inProcedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies, steps 3 through 5. 4. Disconnect the GPIB cable at A2J5. 5. Place the spectrum analyzer top-side-up on the work bench with A2 through A5 folded out to the right. For EC-series instruments, proceed to step 13. For E-series instruments proceed to step 6.

NOTE

WARNING

The voltage potential at A6A1W3 is +9 kV. Disconnect at the CRT with caution! Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument. 6. Connect the spectrum analyzer line-power cord to provide proper grounding while discharging the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable. Make sure that the spectrum analyzer line-power switch is in the off position.

Chapter 4

239

Assembly Replacement Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel

7. Connect a high-voltage probe (1000:1), such as the 34111A to a voltmeter with a 10 megohm input. 8. Connect the clip lead of the probe (ground) to the chassis of the spectrum analyzer. 9. Slip the tip of the high-voltage probe under the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable's rubber shroud to obtain a reading on the voltmeter. See Figure 4-2 on page 184. 10.Keep the high-voltage probe on the post-accelerator connector until the voltage has dropped to a voltmeter reading of less than 5 mV (less than 5 V at the connector). This normally takes about 30 seconds. 11.Disconnect the line-power cord from the spectrum analyzer. 12.Using a small screwdriver with the shank in contact with the CRT shield assembly, slip the tip of the screwdriver under the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable's rubber shroud and short the cable to ground on the CRT shield assembly. See Figure 4-2 on page 184. 13.Remove the three screws securing the power-supply shield to the power supply, and remove the shield. See (1) in Figure 4-2 on page 184. 14.Disconnect the fan and line-power cables from A6J3 and A6J101 on the A6 power supply assembly. 15.Remove the two athead screws that secure the rear-panel battery assembly, and remove the assembly. Remove the battery and unsolder the two wires attached to the battery assembly. 16.Use a 9/16-inch nut driver to remove the dress nuts holding the BNC connectors to the rear frame. If necessary, drill out the nut driver to t over the BNC connectors, and cover it with heatshrink tubing or tape to avoid scratching the dress panel. 17.Remove four screws that secure the rear frame to the main deck. See (1) in Figure 4-28 on page 241. 18.Remove the six screws that secure the rear frame to the left and right side frames. 19.Remove the knurled nut that secures the earphone jack. Carefully remove the jack using caution to avoid losing the lock washer located on the inside of the rear-frame assembly. Replace the washer and nut onto the jack for safekeeping. 20.Remove the rear-frame assembly. 21.To remove the rear dress panel, remove the two nuts located on the inside of the rear frame near the display adjustment holes.

240

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel

Figure 4-28

Main Deck Screws

Replacement
1. If the rear dress panel is removed, secure it to the rear frame using two nuts. Ensure that the dress panel is aligned with the frame. 2. Place the spectrum analyzer on its front panel allowing easy access to the rear-frame area. 3. Place the rear frame on the spectrum analyzer and secure the knurled nut on the earphone jack. A lock washer should be used on the inside of the rear frame and a at washer on the outside. 4. Place the coax cable's BNC connectors into the appropriate rear-frame holes as described below. Use a 9/16-inch nut driver to attach the dress nuts holding the BNC connectors to the rear frame.
Rear EC-series J1 n/a J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J11 Panel Jack E-series n/a J1 J4 J5 J6 n/a J8 J9 J11 RF Cable W64 W55 W24, coax 5 W23, coax 93 W25, coax 4 W55 W18, coax 97 W31, coax 8 W58, coax 8

Chapter 4

241

Assembly Replacement Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel

5. Secure the rear frame to the spectrum analyzer main deck, using four panhead screws (1). See Figure 4-28 on page 241. 6. Secure the rear frame to the spectrum analyzer side frames using three athead screws per side. Use caution to avoid damaging any coaxial cables. 7. Place the spectrum analyzer top-side-up on the work bench. 8. Pull the red and black battery wires through the rear-frame's battery-assembly hole. Solder the red wire to the battery-assembly's positive lug and the black wire to the negative lug. Replace the battery. 9. Secure the battery assembly to the rear frame, using two athead screws. 10.Connect the fan and line-power cables to A6J3 and A6J101 on the A6 power supply. For EC-series instruments, proceed to step 13. For E-series instruments proceed to step 11. 11.Snap the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable to the CRT assembly. 12.Snap the black grommet protecting A6A1W3 into the CRT shield. 13.Ensure that all cables are safely routed and will not be damaged when securing the A6 cover. 14.Secure the power-supply cover shield to the power supply, using three athead screws (1). One end of the cover ts into a slot provided in the rear-frame assembly. Ensure that the extended portion of the cover shield is seated in the shield wall groove. See Figure 4-29 on page 243. 15.Connect the GPIB cable to A2J5. 16.Fold the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as described in procedure 5.

242

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel

Figure 4-29

A6 Power Supply Cover

Chapter 4

243

Assembly Replacement Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8564E and 8565E)

Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8564E and 8565E)

NOTE

For the procedure for removing the line switch for 8564EC and 8565EC instruments see Removal of the Line Switch from the Front Panel on page 183.

Removal
WARNING

Due to possible contact with high voltages, disconnect the spectrum analyzer line-power cord before performing this procedure. 1. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly as described in "Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover." 2. Fold out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies as described in Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies, steps 3 through 5. 3. Disconnect A1A1W1 from A3J602. 4. Place the spectrum analyzer top-side-up on the work bench with A2 through A5 folded out to the right.

WARNING

The voltage potential at A6A1W3 is +9 kV. Disconnect at the CRT with caution! Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument. 5. Connect the spectrum analyzer line-power cord to provide proper grounding while discharging the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable. Make sure that the spectrum analyzer line-power switch is in the off position. 6. Connect a high voltage probe (1000:1), such as the 34111A to a voltmeter with a 10 megohm input. 7. Connect the clip lead of the probe (ground) to the chassis of the spectrum analyzer. 8. Slip the tip of the high voltage probe under the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable rubber shroud to obtain a reading on the voltmeter. See Figure 4-3 on page 193.

244

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8564E and 8565E)

9. Keep the high voltage probe on the post-accelerator connector until the voltage has dropped to a voltmeter reading of less than 5 mV (less than 5 V at the connector). This normally takes about 30 seconds. 10.Disconnect the line-power cord from the spectrum analyzer. 11.Using a small screwdriver with the shank in contact with the CRT shield assembly, slip the tip of the screwdriver under the A6A1W3 post-accelerator cable rubber shroud and short the cable to ground on the CRT shield assembly. See Figure 4-3 on page 193. 12.Remove the three screws securing the power supply shield to the power supply, and remove the shield. 13.Pull the cable tie (1), Figure 4-30 on page 246, to free W9 and the post-accelerator cables. 14.Disconnect W3 from A6J2. 15.Pull W3 up from between the power supply and the CRT assembly to release it from the cable clamp. 16.Place the spectrum analyzer on its right side frame. 17.Fold out the A14 and A15 assemblies as described in Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies, steps 3 and 4. 18.Loosen the screw (2) securing W3, the line switch assembly, to the front frame. The screw is captive. See Figure 4-31 on page 248.

Chapter 4

245

Assembly Replacement Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 4-30

W3 Dress and Connection to A6 Power Supply

19.Remove A1W1 and A1W1DS1 from the line switch assembly. Let each hang freely.
NOTE

If contact removal tool, part number 8710-1791, is available, complete assembly removal by performing "Removal," steps 20 and 21. If not, skip to "Removal," step 22. 20.With wire cutters, clip the tie wrap holding the cable to the contact housing. From the top side of the spectrum analyzer, use contact removal tool, Part Number 8710-1791, to remove the four wires from the W3 connector. See Figure 4-32 on page 249.

246

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8564E and 8565E)

21.Completely remove the cable from the instrument. 22.Remove the A1 Front-Frame assembly and A18 CRT assembly as described in Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC), steps 16 through 29. 23.Remove the left side frame from the spectrum analyzer using the hardware listed below. (The side frame will still be attached by the speaker wires. Do not let it hang freely.) Screw Quantity (1) SCREW-MACH M4 X 0.7 8 mm-LG FLAT HD 6 (2) SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 36 mm-LG FLAT HD ........... 2 (3) SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 6 mm-LG FLAT HD ............. 6 24.Remove the line switch cable assembly.

Chapter 4

247

Assembly Replacement Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 4-31

Line Switch Mounting Screw and Cable Dress

248

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 4-32

W3 Cable Connector

Chapter 4

249

Assembly Replacement Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8564E and 8565E)

Replacement (Using Contact Removal Tool, part number 8710-1791)

1. Ensure that the action of the switch is working properly. With a pair of wire cutters, clip the tie wrap holding the cable to the contact housing of the replacement W3 assembly. 2. Using the contact removal tool, remove the four wires from the replacement cable assembly connector. 3. From the bottom side of the spectrum analyzer, insert the contact end of W3 through the slotted opening in the main deck. W3 should come through to the top side of the spectrum analyzer between the A18 CRT assembly and the post-accelerator cable. 4. Place LED A1W1DS1 into the line switch assembly. 5. Attach the line switch assembly into the front frame, using the captive panhead screw. Ensure the connection of the line switch grounding lug to the screw. 6. Dress W3 between the main deck standoff and the side frame. See Figure 4-31, Line Switch Mounting Screw and Cable Dress. 7. On the top side of the spectrum analyzer, redress W3. 8. Insert the four contacts into the W3 connector. 9. Attach the cable to the connector housing using the supplied tie wrap. 10.Connect W3 to A6J2. Dress W3 into the slotted opening in the deck. 11.Connect A1A1W1 to A3J602. 12.Secure the power supply cover shield to the power supply, using three athead screws. One end of the cover ts into a slot provided in the rear frame assembly. Ensure that the extended portion of the cover shield is seated in the shield wall groove. 13.Redress W3 and the other cable assemblies down between the CRT assembly and the power supply cover such that the W9 wires are below the surface of the power supply cover. 14.Fold up the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as described in Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies, steps 5 through 10. 15.Fold up A14 and A15 assemblies as described in Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies,steps 9 through 11.

250

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8564E and 8565E)

Replacement (without Contact Removal Tool)

1. Lay the replacement line switch cable assembly between the side frame and main deck. Ensure that the action of the switch is working properly. 2. Attach the left side frame to the deck and rear frame. See Figure 4-33 on page 252. Screw Quantity (1) SCREW-MACH M4 X 0.7 8 mm-LG FLAT HD ............. 6 (2) SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 36 mm-LG FLAT HD ........... 2 (3) SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 6 mm-LG FLAT HD ............. 6 3. Dress W3 between the main deck standoff and the side frame. See Figure 4-31 on page 248. 4. Attach the A1 Front Frame assembly and the A18 CRT assembly as described inProcedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8564EC and 8564EC), steps 1 through 15. 5. Place LED A1W1DS1 into the line switch assembly. 6. Attach the line switch assembly into the front frame using the captive panhead screw. Be sure to connect the line switch grounding lug with the screw.

Chapter 4

251

Assembly Replacement Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 4-33

Side Frame Mounting Screws

7. On the top side of the spectrum analyzer, redress W3. 8. Connect W3 to A6J2. Dress W3 into the slotted opening in the deck. 9. Connect A1A1W1 to A3J602. 10.Secure the power supply cover shield to the power supply using three athead screws. One end of the cover ts into a slot provided in the rear frame assembly. Ensure that the extended portion of the cover shield is seated in the shield wall groove. See Figure 4-28 on page 241. 11.Place W3 and the other cable assemblies between the CRT assembly and the power supply cover so the W9 wires are below the surface of the power supply cover. 12.Fold up the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as described in Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies, steps 5 through 10.

252

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8564E and 8565E)

13.Fold up A14 and A15 assemblies as described in Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies, steps 3 through 5. 14.Replace the spectrum analyzer cover assembly. 15.Connect the line-power cord and switch the spectrum analyzer power on. If the spectrum analyzer does not operate properly, turn off the spectrum analyzer power, disconnect the line cord, and recheck the spectrum analyzer.

Chapter 4

253

Assembly Replacement Procedure 15. EEROM

Procedure 15. EEROM

Removal/Replacement
CAUTION

The EEROM is replaced with the power on. Use a nonmetallic tool to remove the defective EEROM and install the new EEROM. In EC-series analyzers the EEROM reference designator is U23. In newer E-series analyzers the EEROM reference designator is U500. In older spectrum analyzers the EEROM reference designator is U501. 1. Turn the spectrum analyzer LINE switch off. Remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly and fold out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assemblies as described in Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies, steps 3 through 5. 2. Turn the spectrum analyzer LINE switch on. 3. Set the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly to the WR ENA position. 4. Press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, SERVICE CAL DATA, COPY EEROM. The spectrum analyzer will store the contents of the EEROM into the program RAM. 5. Using a nonmetallic tool, carefully remove the defective EEROM. 6. Carefully install a new EEROM. 7. Press COPY TO EEROM. The spectrum analyzer will store the contents of the program RAM into the new EEROM. 8. Turn the spectrum analyzer LINE switch off, then on, cycling the power. Allow the power-on sequence to nish. 9. If error message 701, 702, or 703 is displayed, press RECALL, MORE, and RECALL ERRORS. Use the STEP keys to view any other errors. 10.If error message 701 or 703 is displayed, perform the "Front End Cal" adjustment in the 8564E/8565E adjustment/diagnostic software (see Chapter 2 , Adjustment/Diagnostic Software). 11.If error message 719 or 720 is displayed, the model number and/or the option information has been corrupted. The spectrum analyzer must be returned to an Agilent Technologies customer service center to have this data restored. 12.If error message 704 is displayed, press SAVE, SAVE PRSEL PK, and PRESET.

NOTE

254

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 15. EEROM

13.If there are no errors after cycling the spectrum analyzer power, the EEROM is working properly, but the frequency-response correction data might be invalid. Check the spectrum analyzer frequency response. 14.Place the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper in the WR PROT position. 15.Fold the A2 and A3 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as described in Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies.

Chapter 4

255

Assembly Replacement Procedure 16. A21 OCXO

Procedure 16. A21 OCXO

Removal
1. Remove the rear frame assembly as described in Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel, steps 1 through 20. 2. Place the spectrum analyzer on its right-side frame. 3. Fold out the A14 and A15 assemblies as described in "Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies Removal," steps 3 and 4. 4. Remove the three screws (1) securing the OCXO to the main deck. See Figure 4-34, A21 OCXO Mounting Screws. 5. Disconnect W49, coax 82, from the OCXO and disconnect W50 (orange cable) from the A15 RF assembly. Clip the tie wraps that hold W49 and W50 together and remove the OCXO from the spectrum analyzer (with the orange cable connected).

256

Chapter 4

Assembly Replacement Procedure 16. A21 OCXO

Figure 4-34

A21 OCXO Mounting Screws

Chapter 4

257

Assembly Replacement Procedure 16. A21 OCXO

Replacement
CAUTION

Ensure that the insulator is installed between the A21 OCXO and the main deck. Failure to do so will result in damage to the instrument by shorting the power supply. 1. Connect W49, coax 82, to the OCXO and position the OCXO in the spectrum analyzer. Dress W50, orange cable, next to W49 through the opening in the deck. 2. Secure the OCXO to the spectrum analyzer main deck using three screws (1) and insulating washers. See Figure 4-34 on page 257. 3. Connect W50 to A15J306. Install tie wraps to hold W49 and W50 together. 4. Fold the A14 and A15 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as described in Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies. 5. Perform the rear frame assembly replacement procedure described in Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel.

258

Chapter 4

Replaceable Parts

259

Replaceable Parts Introduction

Introduction
This chapter contains information on ordering all replaceable parts and assemblies. Locate the instrument parts in the following gures and tables:

Table 5-1 on page 264.Reference Designations Table 5-2 on page 265. Abbreviations Table 5-3 on page 269. Multiples Table 5-4 on page 270. Replaceable Parts Table 5-5 on page 279. Parts List, Assembly Mounting Table 5-6 on page 280. Parts List, Cover Assembly Table 5-7 on page 280. Parts List, Main Chassis (EC-series) Table 5-8 on page 281. Parts List, Main Chassis (E-series) Table 5-9 on page 282. Parts List, RF Section Table 5-10 on page 283. Parts List, Front Frame (EC-series) Table 5-11 on page 284. Parts List, Front Frame (E-series) Table 5-12 on page 285. Parts List, Rear Frame (EC-series) Table 5-13 on page 285. Parts List, Rear Frame (E-series) Figure 5-1 on page Figure 5-2 on page Figure 5-3 on page Figure 5-4 on page Figure 5-5 on page Figure 5-6 on page Figure 5-7 on page Figure 5-8 on page Figure 5-9 on page 279. Parts Identication, Assembly Mounting 287. Parts Identication, Cover Assembly 289. Parts Identication, Main Chassis (E-series) 291. Parts Identication, RF Section 293. Parts Identication, Front Frame (E-series) 295. Parts Identication, Rear Frame (E-series) 297. Parts Identication, Main Chassis (EC-series) 299. Parts Identication, Front Frame (EC-series) 301. Parts Identication, Rear Frame (EC-series)

260

Chapter 5

Replaceable Parts Ordering Information

Ordering Information
To order a part or assembly, quote the part number, indicate the quantity required, and address the order to the nearest Agilent Technologies ofce. See Table 1-5 on page 45. To order a part that is not listed in the replaceable parts table, include the instrument model number, the description and function of the part, and the number of parts required. Address the order to the nearest Agilent Technologies ofce.

Direct Mail-Order System

Within the USA, Agilent Technologies can supply parts through a direct mail-order system. Advantages of using the system are as follows: Direct ordering and shipment from the Agilent Technologies Support Materials Organization in Roseville, California. No maximum or minimum on any mail order. (There is a minimum order amount for parts ordered through a local Agilent Technologies ofce when the orders require billing and invoicing.) Prepaid transportation. (There is a small handling charge for each order.) No invoices. To provide these advantages, a check or money order must accompany each order. Mail-order forms and specic ordering information is available through your local Agilent Technologies Sales and Service ofce. See Table 1-5 on page 45.

Chapter 5

261

Replaceable Parts Ordering Information

Direct Phone-Order System

Within the USA, a phone order system is available for regular and hotline replacement parts service. A toll-free phone number is available, and Mastercard and Visa are accepted. Regular Orders: The toll-free phone number, (800) 227-8164, is available 6 am to 5 pm, Pacic time, Monday through Friday. Regular orders have a four-day delivery time. Hotline Orders: Hotline service for ordering emergency parts is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. There is an additional hotline charge to cover the cost of freight and special handling. The toll-free phone number is (800) 227-8164, is available 6 am to 5 pm, Pacic time, Monday through Friday and (916) 785-8HOT for after-hours, weekends, and holidays. Hotline orders are normally delivered the following business day.

262

Chapter 5

Replaceable Parts Parts List Format

Parts List Format

The following information is listed for each part: 1. The part number. 2. The total quantity (Qty) in the assembly. This quantity is given only once, at the rst appearance of the part in the list. 3. The description of the part. 4. A ve-digit code indicating a typical manufacturer of the part. 5. The manufacturer part number.

Chapter 5

263

Replaceable Parts Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers

Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers

Refer to the following rmware note (part number 5962-5047): 8560 Series, 85620A, and 85629B Firmware Note. Table 5-1
A AT

Reference Designations
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS

B BT C CP CR

Assembly Attenuator, Isolator, Limiter, Termination Fan, Motor Battery Capacitor Coupler Diode, Diode Thyristor, Step Recovery Diode, Varactor Directional Coupler Delay Line Annunciator, Lamp, Light Emitting Diode (LED), Signaling Device (Visible)

F FL HY J

Fuse Filter Circulator Electrical Connector (Stationary Portion), Jack Relay Coil, Inductor Meter Miscellaneous Mechanical Part Electrical Connector (Movable Portion), Plug

RT S T TB TC TP U

Thermistor Switch Transformer Terminal Board Thermocouple Test Point Integrated Circuit, Microcircuit Electron Tube Breakdown Diode (Zener), Voltage Regulator Cable, Wire, Jumper Socket Crystal Unit (Piezoelectric, Quartz) Tuned Cavity, Tuned Circuit

K L M MP

V VR

DC DL DS

W X

Silicon Y Controlled Rectier (SCR), Transistor, Triode Thyristor Resistor Z

Miscellaneous R Electrical Part

264

Chapter 5

Replaceable Parts Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers

Table 5-2

Abbreviations
ABBREVIATIONS
A A Across Flats, Acrylic, Air (Dry Method), Ampere ADJ ANSI Adjust, Adjustment American National Standards Institute (formerly USASI-ASA) ASSY AWG Assembly American Wire Gage CER CHAM B CHAR CD CCP C C Capacitance, Capacitor, Center Tapped, Cermet, Cold, Compression Carbon Composition Plastic Cadmium, Card, Cord Ceramic Chamfer Character, Characteristic, BCD Binary Coded Decimal BD BE-CU BNC BRG BRS BSC BTN Board, Bundle CMOS Beryllium Copper Type of Connector Bearing, Boring Brass Basic Button CNDCT Complementary Metal Oxide DBL DCDR DEG D Deep, Depletion, Depth, Diameter, Direct Current DA Darlington DAP-GL Diallyl Phthalate Glass Double Decoder Degree D CONV CPRSN CONT Contact, Continuous, Control, Controller Converter Compression

CUP-PT Cup Point CW Clockwise, Continuous Wave

Charcoal

Semiconductor
Conducting, Conductive, Conductivity, Conductor

D-HOLE D-Shaped Hole DIA DIP Diameter Dual In-Line Package

Chapter 5

265

Replaceable Parts Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers

Table 5-2

Abbreviations
D
DIP-SLDR

HEX
FDTHRU

Hexadecimal, Hexagon, Hexagonal

Dip Solder Depletion Mode Package Type Designation

Feedthrough Female Fillister Head Flash, Flat, Fluid HLCL HP

D-MODE

FEM FIL-HD FL

DO

Helical Hewlett-Packa rd Company, High Pass

DP

Deep, Depth, Diametric Pitch, Dip

FLAT-PT Flat Point FR FREQ FT Front Frequency Current Gain Bandwidth Product (Transition JFET Frequency), Feet, Foot FXD Fixed

DP3T

Double Pole Three Throw Dowell

I IN Inch
J Junction Field Effect Transistor K

DWL

E-R EXT

E-Ring Extended, Extension, External, Extinguish F

Kelvin, Key, Kilo, Potassium

GEN F Fahrenheit, Farad, Female, Film (Resistor), Fixed, Flange, Frequency FC Carbon Film/ Composition, Edge of Cutoff Frequency, Face H HDW HEX GND GP

General, Generator Ground General Purpose, Group H

KNRLD KVDC

Knurled Kilovolts Direct Current L

LED Henry, High Hardware Hexadecimal, LG LIN

Light Emitting Diode Length, Long Linear, Linearity

266

Chapter 5

Replaceable Parts Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers

Table 5-2

Abbreviations
L N PAN-HD Pan Head PC LK LKG LUM Link, Lock Leakage, Locking Luminous M NO M Male, Maximum, Mega, Mil, Milli, Mode MA MACH MAX MC MET MHz MINTR MIT MLD MM Milliampere Machined Maximum Molded Carbon Metal, Metallized Megahertz Miniature Miter Mold, Molded Magnetized Material, Millimeter MOM MTG MTLC SMA MW Momentary Mounting Metallic Subminiature Milliwatt PA P Picoampere, Power Amplier Q Q Figure of Merit OPT OA OD OP AMP Over-All Outside Diameter Operational Amplier Optical, Option, Optional PW NUM NYL NS NOM NPN N
N-CHAN

Printed Circuit Printed Circuit Board

Nano, None N-Channel Nanohenry Nanometer, Nonmetallic Normally Open, Number Nominal Negative Positive Negative (Transistor) Nanosecond, Non-Shorting, Nose Numeric Nylon (Polyamide) O

PCB

NH NM

P-CHAN P-Channel PD PF Pad, Power Dissipation Picofarad, Power Factor PKG Package

PLSTC PNL PNP

Plastic Panel Positive Negative Positive (Transistor)

POLYC POLYE POT POZI PREC PRP PSTN PT

Polycarbonate Polyester Potentiometer Pozidrive Recess Precision Purple, Purpose Piston Part, Point, Pulse Time Pulse Width

Chapter 5

267

Replaceable Parts Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers

Table 5-2
R

Abbreviations
R
Range, Red, Resistance, Resistor, Right, Ring REF RES RF RGD RND RR Reference Resistance, Resistor Radio Frequency Rigid Round Rear S SAWR Surface Acoustic Wave Resonator SEG SGL SI Segment Single Silicon, Square Inch SL SLT SMA Slide, Slow Slot, Slotted Subminiature A Type (Threaded Connector) SMB Subminiature B Type (Slip-on Connector) SMC Subminiature C-Type (Threaded Connector) SPCG Spacing UCD TPG TR-HD TRMR TRN TRSN THD THK TO TC PB TA T Teeth, Temperature, Thickness, Time, Typical Lead (Metal), Ambient Temperature, Tantalum Temperature Coefcient Thread, Threaded Thick Package Type Designation Tapping Truss Head Trimmer Turn, Turns Torsion U Microcandela ZNR YIG Yttrium-IronGarnet Z Zener X By (Used with Dimensions), Reactance Y W/SW WW W Watt, Wattage, White, Wide, Width With Switch Wire Wound X VAR VDC VAC SQ SST STL SPDT SPST Single Pole Single Pole Single Throw Square Stainless Steel Steel T V UF UH UL Microfarad Microhenry Microliter, Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
UNHDND Unhardened

V Variable, Violet, Volt, Voltage Vacuum, Volts Alternating Current Variable VoltsDirect Current W

268

Chapter 5

Replaceable Parts Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers

Table 5-3

Reference Designations, Abbreviations, and Multipliers

MULTIPLIERS

Abbreviation T G M k da d c

Prex tera giga mega kilo deka deci centi

Multiple 10
12

Abbreviation m n p f a

Prex milli micro nano pico femto atto

Multiple 103 106 109 1012 1015 1018

109 106 103 10 101 102

Manufacturers Code List Refer to the Manufacturers Code List in the 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information.

Chapter 5

269

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Replaceable Parts
Table 5-4 Replaceable Parts
Qty Description Mfr Code Mfr Part Number Reference Part Designation Number

ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED
5063-0274 85620A 1810-0118 1250-1200 1250-2187 1250-2188 10502A 8710-1755 5062-0800 5001-8739 5001-8740 5001-8742 5021-5807 5021-5808 5021-5836 0510-1148 0515-0886 0515-0887 0515-0889 0515-1241 0515-1331 5061-9679 0515-1114 8710-1755 5958-6573 5062-1900 5001-8739 5001-8740 5001-8742 5021-5807 5021-5808 0510-1148 0515-0886 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 5 10 16 8 12 8 22 2 6 FRONT COVER MASS MEMORY MODULE TERMINATION-COAXIAL SMA; 0.5W; 50 ADAPTER, SMA (m) TO BNC (f) ADAPTER, K (f) TO 2.4 mm (f) ADAPTER, 2.4 mm (f) TO 2.4 mm (f) 50 COAX CABLE WITH BNC MALE WRENCH-HEX KEY 28480 28480 16179 28480 28480 28480 28480 55719 5063-0274 85620A 2003-6113-02 1250-1200 1250-2187 1250-2188 10502A AWML4

OPTION 908
RACK KIT WITH FLANGES (Includes Parts Listed Below) PANEL-DRESS PANEL-SUB SUPPORT-REAR FRAME-FRONT FRAME-REAR CORNER-STRUT RETAINER-PUSH-ON KB-TO-SHFT EXT SCREW-MACH M3 0.5 6MM-LG PAN-HD SCREW-MACH M3.5 0.6 6MM-LG PAN-HD SCREW-MACH M3.5 0.6 6MM-LG SCREW-MACH M5 0.8 12 MM-LG PAN-HD SCREW-METRIC SPECIALTY M4 0.7 THD; 7MM MOUNT FLANGE SCREW-MACH M4 0.7 10MM-LG PAN-HD WRENCH-HEX KEY ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS 28480 28480 55719 28480 5061-9679 0515-1114 AWML4 5958-6573 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 11591 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 5001-8739 5001-8740 5001-8742 5021-5807 5021-5808 5021-5836 669 0515-0886 0515-0887 0515-0889 0515-1241 0515-1331

OPTION 909
RACK KIT WITH FLANGES AND HANDLES (Includes Parts Listed Below) PANEL-DRESS PANEL-SUB SUPPORT-REAR FRAME-FRONT FRAME-REAR RETAINER-PUSH-ON KB-TO-SHFT EXT SCREW-MACH M3 0.5 6MM-LG PAN-HD 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 11591 28480 5001-8739 5001-8740 5001-8742 5021-5807 5021-5808 669 0515-0886

270

Chapter 5

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-4

Replaceable Parts
Qty Description SCREW-MACH M3.5 0.6 6MM-LG PAN-HD SCREW-MACH M3.5 0.6 6MM-LG SCREW-MACH M5 0.8 12MM-LG PAN-HD SCREW-METRIC SPECIALTY M4 0.7 THD; 7MM 5061-9501 2 FRONT HANDLE ASSEMBLY MAJOR ASSEMBLIES BD AY-KEYBOARD BD AY-KEYBOARD CABLE ASSEMBLY, RIBBON, KEYBOARD (A1A1J1 to A3J602) RPG ASSEMBLY (Includes Cable) S/N <3728A00928 (8564) or 3728A00767 (8565) RPG ASSEMBLY (Includes Cable) S/N >3728A00929 (8564) or 3728A00768 (8565) CABLE ASSEMBLY, PROBE POWER/LED CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY* CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY* INTERFACE ASSEMBLY LOG AMPLIFIER/CAL OSCILLATOR ASSEMBLY * IF FILTER ASSEMBLY POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY * (Includes A6A2, but does not include A6A1) Therefore, the rebuilt board number will be 08563-69065 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 5061-9501 08563-60162 08562-60140 5062-8259 1290-1525 0960-0745 8120-8153 08563-60160 08564-60010 08563-60098 08563-60076 08563-60023 08564-60008 Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 0515-0887 0515-0889 0515-1241 0515-1331

Reference Part Designation Number 0515-0887 0515-0889 0515-1241 0515-1331

A1A1 (EC-series) A1A1 (E-series) A1A1W1 A1A2 A1A2 A1W1 A2 (EC-series) A2 (E-series) A3 A4 A5 A6

08563-60162 1 08562-60140 1 5062-8259 1290-1525 0960-0745 8120-8153 1 1 1 1

08563-60160 1 08564-60010 1 08563-60098 1 08563-60076 1 08563-60023 1 08564-60008 1

A6A1 A6A2 A7 A6A1 A6A2 A7 A8

5062-7089 5086-7869 5086-6869 5062-7089 5086-7869 5086-6869 5086-7908

1 1 1 1 1

HIGH VOLTAGE ASSEMBLY REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY LO MULTIPLIER/AMPLIFIER (LOMA) REBUILT A7, EXCHANGE REQUIRED HIGH VOLTAGE ASSEMBLY REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY LO MULTIPLIER/AMPLIFIER (LOMA) REBUILT A7, EXCHANGE REQUIRED LOW BAND MIXER (serial prex <3641A)

28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480

5062-7089 08564-60009 5086-7869 5086-6869 5062-7089 08564-60009 5086-7869 5086-6869 5086-7908

08564-60009 1

08564-60009 1

* These board assemblies are part of the rebuilt board exchange program. To order a rebuilt board, use the same number as that of the new board with the exception of the 7th digit which should be a 9. Example: New board number is 08563-60065.

Chapter 5

271

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-4

Replaceable Parts
Qty Description MAJOR ASSEMBLIES (continued) Mfr Code Mfr Part Number

Reference Part Designation Number Standard A8 Option 006 A8 A9 A10/A12 8564E/EC 5086-6930 A10/A12 8565E/EC 5086-6883 A11 A13 A14 A15 Standard A15 Option 008 A15 Option 103 A15U100 Option 007 A17 (EC-series) A17A1 (EC-series) A18 (EC-series) 5086-7806 5086-7906 5086-6906 5086-7957 5086-7883 5086-7982 5086-7930 5086-7748

1 1 1

LOW BAND MIXER(serial prex <3641A) LOW BAND MIXER(serial prex 3641A) ATTENUATOR, 50 GHz, 60 dB RYTHM/SBTX (INCLUDES FL5) REBUILT A10/A12, EXCHANGE REQUIRED

28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480

5086-7748 5086-7982 33325-60006 5086-7930 5086-6930 5086-7883 5086-6883 5086-7906 5086-6906 5086-7957 08564-60020 08563-60091 08563-60093 08563-60092 5086-7806 08563-60030 08562-60161 0950-3644 08563-60101 08563-60170 2090-0380

33325-60006 1

RYTHM/SBTX (INCLUDES FL5) REBUILT A10/A12, EXCHANGE REQUIRED

1 1

PORTABLE LVLD YTO REBUILT A11, EXCHANGE REQUIRED SECOND CONVERTER FREQUENCY CONTROL ASSEMBLY* RF ASSEMBLY (Standard)* RF ASSEMBLY (SIG ID)* RF ASSEMBLY (TCXO/SIG ID)* SAMPLER FAST ADC ASSEMBLY LCD DRIVER LCD INVERTER BOARD CRT ASSEMBLY LCD ASSEMBLY- INCLUDES LCD, LCD MOUNT, LCD GLASS and LCD backlights

08564-60020 1 08563-60091 1 08563-60093 1 08563-60092 1 1

A16 (E-series) 08563-60030 1 08562-60161 1 0950-3644 1

A17 (E-series) 08563-60101 1 08563-60170 1 1

A18DS1 and 2090-0380 A18DS2

A18 (E-series) A18M (E-series) 5062-7095

Replaceable LCD Backlight Cartridge (part of LCD ASSEMBLY)

CRT ASSEMBLY (Order by Individual Parts) CRT WIRING ASSEM. (Includes Shield A18L1, and A18W1)

1
1

28480

5062-7095

* These board assemblies are part of the rebuilt board exchange program. To order a rebuilt board, use the same number as that of the new board with the exception of the 7th digit which should be a 9.
Example: New board number is 08563-60065. Therefore, the rebuilt board number will be 08563-69065.

272

Chapter 5

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-4

Replaceable Parts
Qty Description MAJOR ASSEMBLIES (continued) Mfr Code Mfr Part Number

Reference Part Designation Number

A18MP2 (E-series) A18V1 (E-series) A18W1 A19 A19W1 A20 A21 AT1 B1 BT1 F1 F1 FL1 FL2 FL3 FL4 FL5

5041-3987 2090-0225

1 1

SPACER, CRT TUBE, CRT 6.7 IN CABLE ASSEMBLY, TWO WIRE, TRACE ALIGN (P/O A18MP1, A17J5 to A18L1)

28480 28480

5041-3987 2090-0225

08562-60042 1 5061-9031 5062-7755 5063-0245 0955-0994 5061-9036 1420-0341 2110-0709 2110-0756 0955-0420 0955-0519 0955-0721 5061-9032 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

GPIB ASSEMBLY CABLE ASSEMBLY, RIBBON, GPIB (A2J5 to Rear Panel J2) BATTERY ASSEMBLY (Includes W6) OCXO 10.0 MHz DC BLOCK (serial prex 3641A and <3804A,, non-Option 006 FAN ASSEMBLY (Includes Wire) BATTERY 3.0 V 1.2 A-HR LITHIUM POLYCARBON MONOFLORIDE THIONYL FUSE 5A 250V NTD FE IEC (230 VAC Operation) FUSE 5A 125V NTD UL (115 VAC Operation) LOW PASS FILTER, 2.9 GHz LOW PASS FILTER, 4.4 GHz LOW PASS FILTER, 7.0 GHz LINE FILTER ASSEMBLY LOW PASS FILTER, 27 GHz (Not separately replaceable; P/O A10/A12 assembly.)

28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 08709 16428 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480

08562-60042 5061-9031 5062-7755 5063-0245 0955-0994 5061-9036 BR 213 A 55P GDA-5 2110-0756 0955-0420 0955-0519 0955-0721 5061-9032

LS1

9160-0282

LOUDSPEAKER 2.5 IN SQ (Part of W5)

28480

9160-0282

CHASSIS MECHANICAL PARTS

(See Figures 5-1 through 5-9 for a complete listing of mechanical chassis parts.)

* These board assemblies are part of the rebuilt board exchange program. To order a rebuilt board, use the same number as that of the new board with the exception of the 7th digit which should be a 9. Example: New board number is 08563-60065. Therefore, the rebuilt board number will be 08563-69065.

Chapter 5

273

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-4

Replaceable Parts
Qty Description ASSEMBLY SHIELDS Mfr Code Mfr Part Number

Reference Part Designation Number

A3 Assembly

5021-6723 5021-6724 0515-2080 0515-1486 0905-0375 2190-0583

1 1 2 10 12 12 1 1 1 1 4 23 23 1 1 1 1 16 16 16 1 1 13 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 34 36 36 2

PEAK DETECTOR (TOP) PEAK DETECTOR (BOTTOM) SCREW M2.5 14L SCREW M2.5 9.5L 0-RING .070ID WSHR LK M2.5ID AMP 1 (BOTTOM) AMP 1 (TOP) AMP 2 (TOP) AMP 2 (BOTTOM) SCREW SMM 2.5 10 PNTROX SCREW M2.5 14L WSHR LK M2.5ID IF 1 (TOP) IF 1 (BOTTOM) IF 2 (TOP) IF 2 (BOTTOM) SCREW 5MM 2.5 16 PNPDS 0-RING .070ID WSHR LK M2.5ID FC (TOP) FC (BOTTOM) SCREW 5MM 2.5 16 PNPDS 0-RING .070ID REF (TOP) REF (BOTTOM) SYNTHZR (TOP) SYNTHZR (BOTTOM) SIGPATH (TOP) SIGPATH (BOTTOM) BRACE, RF BD SCREW SCREW 5MM 2.5 16 PNPDS 0-RING .070ID WSHR LK M2.5 ID SCREW 2.5M X 8MM LG TORX

28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480

5021-6723 5021-6724 0515-2080 0515-1486 0905-0375 2190-0583 5063-0220 5063-0221 5063-0219 5063-0222 0515- 1486 0515-2080 2190-0583 5021-6729 5021-6730 5021-6731 5021-6732 0515-2081 0905-0375 2190-0583 5063-0209 5063-0210 0515-0951 0905-0375 5021-6735 5021-6736 5022-0047 5022-0046 5021-6739 5021-6740 5002-0631 0515-2081 0515-2081 0905-0375 2190-0583 0515- 0367

A4 Assembly

5063-0220 5063-0221 5063-0219 5063-0222 0515-1486 0515-2080 2190-0583

A5 Assembly

5021-6729 5021-6730 5021-6731 5021-6732 0515-2081 0905-0375 2190-0583

A14 Assembly 5063-0209 5063-0210 0515-0951 0905-0375 A15 Assembly 5021-6735 5021-6736 5022-0047 5022-0046 5021-6739 5021-6740 5002-0631 0515-2081 0515-2081 0905-0375 2190-0583 0515-0367

* These board assemblies are part of the rebuilt board exchange program. To order a rebuilt board, use the same number as that of the new board with the exception of the 7th digit which should be a 9. Example: New board number is 08563-60065. Therefore, the rebuilt board number will be 08563-69065.

274

Chapter 5

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-4

Replaceable Parts
Qty Description CABLE ASSEMBLIES Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 8120-5682 5061-9025 5062-0728 5061-9033

Reference Part Designation Number W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 Non-Opt 007 W7 Option 007 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 Option 001 W20 W21 W22 W23 5062-0709 5062-0719 5062-0717 5062-0721 5062-0723 5061-9030 5062-6482 5062-0742 8120-6172 5062-0767 8120-5697 8120-5682 5061-9025 5062-0728 5061-9033

1 1 1 1

POWER CABLE, RIBBON CONTROL CABLE, RIBBON CABLE ASSEMBLY, LINE SWITCH CABLE ASSEMBLY, RIBBON, OPTION MODULE (A2J6 to Rear Panel J3) NOT ASSIGNED

1 1 1 1 1 1

CABLE ASSEMBLY, BATTERY (A2J9 to Rear Panel Battery Holder) CABLE ASSEMBLY, RIBBON, LINE GEN (A2J3 to A17J1) CABLE ASSEMBLY, RIBBON, LINE GEN (A2J3 to A16J1/J2 and A17J1) CABLE ASSEMBLY, DISPLAY POWER (A6J4 to A17J2) CABLE ASSEMBLY, CRT, YOKE (A17J3 and J7 to A18V1) CABLE ASSEMBLY, RIBBON, A11 YTO DRIVE (A14J3 to A11J1) CABLE ASSEMBLY, RIBBON, A9 ATTEN. DRIVE (A14J6 to A9) CABLE ASSEMBLY, A7 LOMA DRIVE CABLE ASSEMBLY, RIBBON, A13 2ND CONV DRIVE (A14J12 toA13) NOT ASSIGNED

28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480

5062-0767 8120-5697 8120-6172 5061-9030 5062-6482 5062-0742 08562-60064 5063-0655 5062-0743

08562-60064 1 5063-0655 5062-0743 1 1

08562-60188 1 8120-5676 1

CABLE ASESEMBLY, A8 DRIVE (serial prex 3641A) CABLE ASSEMBLY, A10 (RYTHM)/A12 (SBTX) DRIVE (A14J9 to A10) NOT ASSIGNED

28480 28480

08562-60188 8120-5676

1 1

CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 97, LO SWEEP 0.5 V/GHz (A14J7 to Rear Panel J8) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 83 2ND IF OUT (A15J803 to Rear Panel J10) CABLE ASSEMBLIES (CONTINUED)

28480 28480

5062-0721 5062-0723

CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 6, 0 SPAN VIDEO (A3J103 to A2J4) NOT ASSIGNED

28480

5062-0717

1 1

CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 0, 10 MHz FREQ. COUNT (A15J302 to A2J8) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 93, EXT TRIG IN (Rear Panel J5 to A3J600)

28480 28480

5062-0709 5062-0719

Chapter 5

275

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-4

Replaceable Parts
Qty Description Mfr Code Mfr Part Number

Reference Part Designation Number

CABLES (continued)
W24 W25 W26 W27 W28 W29 W30 W31 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W37 W38 W39 W39 W40 W41 W42 W42 5062-0714 5022-0915 5062-0711 5022-0913 5062-0722 5062-0705 5062-0706 8120-6367 5062-0710 5062-0725 5062-0707 5022-0917 5022-0911 5022-2830 5062-0724 5022-0918 5022-0909 5022-2831 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5062-0720 5062-0718 1 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX, 5 VIDEO OUT (A3J102 to Rear Panel J4) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 4, BLANKING OUT (A3J601 to Rear Panel J6) NOT ASSIGNED CABLE ASSEMBLY, FILTER 10.7 MHz (A5J5 to A4J3) CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, RYTHM LO (A7J3 to A10J4) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 7, 10.7 IF (A15J601 to A5J3) CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, LOMA/FL3 (A7J5 to FL3J1) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 8, 10 MHz REF IN/OUT (A15J301 to Rear Panel J9) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 87, SAMPLER IF (A15J101 to A14J501) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 81, 2ND LO DRIVE (A15J701 to A13J4) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 0, 1ST LO SAMP. (FL3J2 to A15A2J1) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 92, INT 2ND IF (A13J2 to A15J801) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 86, EXT 2ND IF (Front Panel J3 to A15J802) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 85, 10 MHz REF 1 (A15J303 to A14J301) CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, 1ST LO (A11J2 to A7J1) CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, 1ST MIXER LO (A7J4 to A8J3, serial prex <3641A) CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, 1ST MIXER LO (A7J4 to A8J3, serial prex 3641A) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 89, CAL OUT (A15J501 to Front Panel J5) CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, RF INPUT (Front panel J1 to A9J1) CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, 1ST LO OUT (A7J6 to Front Panel J4, serial prex <3641A) CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, 1ST LO OUT (A7J6 to Front Panel J4, serial prex 3641A) 28480 5022-2831 28480 5022-0909 28480 5022-0918 28480 5062-0724 28480 5022-2830 28480 5022-0911 28480 5022-0917 28480 5062-0707 28480 5062-0725 28480 5062-0710 28480 8120-6367 28480 5062-0706 28480 5062-0705 28480 5062-0722 28480 5022-0913 28480 5062-0711 28480 5022-0915 28480 5062-0714 28480 5062-0718 28480 5062-0720

276

Chapter 5

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-4

Replaceable Parts
Qty Description Mfr Code Mfr Part Number

Reference Part Designation Number

CABLES (continued)
W43 W44 W45 5022-0908 5022-0906 5022-0912 1 1 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, ATTEN/SBTX 28480 (A9J2 to A12J3) CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, RYTHM LOW 28480 BAND OUT (A10J2 to FL1J1) CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, MIXER INPUT (FL1J2 to A8J1, serial prex <3641A) W45 5022-2832 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, MIXER INPUT (FL1J2 to AT1, serial prex 3641A and <3804A, non-Option 006) W45 5022-2828 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, MIXER INPUT (FL1J2 to A8J1, serial prex 3641A, Option 006) W46 W47 5022-0907 5022-0916 1 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, SBTX LO (A7J2 to A12J4) CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, MIXER IF OUT (A8J2 to A12J5, serial prex <3641A) W47 5022-2829 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, MIXER IF OUT (A8J2 to A12J5, serial prex 3641A) W48 W49 W50 W51 W52 W53 W54 W55 W56 W57 8120-5660 5062-4892 5063-0245 5062-6478 5062-6477 5062-6476 5062-6475 5062-6471 5022-0910 5022-0184 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 8, 1ST IF HI BAND (A10J1 to A13J3) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 82, A21 OCXO (A21 to A15J305) CABLE ASSEMBLY, OCXO (A21 to A15, Includes A21) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 84, 10 MHz REF2 (A15J304 to A4J7) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 9, 10.7 MHz CAL SIG 28480 (A5J4 to A4J8) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 1, FREQ COUNTER (A2J7 to A4J5) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 2, VIDEO (A3J101 to A4J4) CABLE ASSEMBLY, AUDIO OUT (A4J6 to SPEAKER, LS1 and Rear Panel J1) CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID, SBTX IF OUT 28480 (A12J1 to FL2) CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI-RIGID (FL2 to A13J1) 28480 5022-0184 5022-0910 28480 5062-6471 28480 5062-6475 28480 5062-6476 5062-6477 28480 5062-6478 28480 5063-0245 28480 5062-4892 28480 8120-5660 28480 5022-2829 28480 5022-0916 28480 5022-0907 28480 5022-2828 28480 5022-2832 28480 5022-0912 5022-0906 5022-0908

Chapter 5

277

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-4

Replaceable Parts
Qty Description CABLES (continued) Mfr Code Mfr Part Number

Reference Part Designation Number

W58 Option 005 W59 W60 W61 W62 W63 W64 Option 007 Option 005

5062-0722 5063-0282 8120-6919 8120-5026 8120-8482 8120-8409 8121-0062

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 8, ALTN SWP OUT (A14J20 to Rear Panel J11) CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 839, FAST ADC DISPLAY CABLE, RIBBON (A2J8 to A17J1) CABLE, COAX (A2J9to A17J7) CABLE, RIBBON (A17J6 to A17A1) CABLE, RIBBON (A17J5 to A18) VGA CABLE ASSEMBLY (A17J4 to J1 on rear panel) CLOCK (A2J15 to A16J3) (A14J20 to Rear Panel J11)

28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480

5062-0722 5063-0282 8120-6919 8120-5026 8120-8482 8120-8409 8121-0062

278

Chapter 5

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Figure 5-1

Assembly Screw Mounting Locations

Table 5-5
Item Part Number 1 2 3 4 4

Replaceable Parts 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC

Qty Description SCREW-MACH M3 X 30MM-LG PAN-HD TORX SCREW-MACH M3 X 60MM-LG PAN-HD TORX SCREW-MACH M3 X 100MM-LG PAN-HD TORX SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX SCREW-MACH M3 X 12MM-LG PAN-HD TORX Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 0515-1349 0515-2310 0515-2308 0515-2332 0515-0664

0515-1349 11 0515-2310 3 0515-3208 2 0515-2332 12 0515-0664 2

Parts Identication, Assembly Mounting

Chapter 5

279

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-6
Item Part Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 5041-8911 5041-8912 0515-1114 1460-2164 5021-6343 5021-6344 5021-8667 5001-8728 0515-1367 0515-1133 5001-8800 5041-7238 5041-3989 5041-8913 0515-1114 5041-8907 0900-0024 2190-0587 0515-1218

Parts List, Cover Assembly 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC (see Figure 5-2)
Qty 1 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 6 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 4 4 4 Description BAIL HANDLE TRIM CAP SCREW MACH M4 X 10MM-LG PAN-HD SPRING-CPRSN .845 IN-OD 1.25-1N-OA-LG RING GEAR SOCKET GEAR HANDLE PLATE BACKUP PLATE SCREW MACH M4 X 8MM-LG 90DEG-FLT-HD SCREW-MACH M5 X 16MM-LG COVER MOISTURE DEFLECTOR-LF MOISTURE DEFLECTOR-RT SIDE TRIM SCREW-MACH M4 X 10MM-LG PAN-HD REAR FOOT O-RING .145-1N-XSECT-DIA SIL WASHER-LK HLCL 5.0 MM 5.1-MM-ID SCREW-SKT-HD-CAP M5 X 40MM-LG INSULATOR 292 X 355 MM .51 THK Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 51633 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 5041-8911 5041-8912 0515-1114 1460-2164 5021-6343 5021-6344 5021-8667 5001-8728 0515-1367 0515-1133 5001-8800 5041-7238 5041-3989 5041-8913 0515-1114 5041-8907 A5568-007 2190-0587 0515-1218 08562-80028

08562-80028 1

Table 5-7
Item 1 5 6 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Part Number

Parts List, Main Chassis 8564EC and 8565EC (see Figure 5-7)
Qty 4 1 3 1 1 4 2 2 12 12 8 5 5 2 2 1 2 2 Description SCREW-MACH M3 X 8MM-LG PAN-HD TORX COVER, A6 POWER SUPPLY (Includes label) SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 45MM-LG TORX MAIN DECK FRONT END DECK SCREW-MACH M4 X 8MM-LG FLH-HD TORX SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX SIDE FRAME SCREW-MACH M4 X 8MM-LG FLH-HD TORX SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX MOUNTING POST HINGE, 2 BOARD HINGE, 4 BOARD CABLE CLAMP SCREW-MACH M3 X 35MM-LG TORX SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 0515-2145 5002-1010 0515-2309 5002-1008 5002-1002 0515-1101 0515-1227 5021-7464 0515-1101 0515-1227 0515-1227 0515-1227 5021-5484 5062-0750 5062-0751 5041-7250 0515-2164 0515-1227

0515-2145 5002-1010 0515-2309 5002-1008 5002-1002 0515-1101 0515-1227 5021-7464 0515-1101 0515-1227 0515-1227 0515-1227 5021-5484 5062-0750 5062-0751 5041-7250 0515-2164 0515-1227

280

Chapter 5

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-7
Item 30 31 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 A17 A17A1 A18 Part Number

Parts List, Main Chassis 8564EC and 8565EC (see Figure 5-7)
Qty 1 1 2 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description SHIELD WALL, TOP SHIELD WALL, BOTTOM SCREW-INVERTER BOARD SCREW-DISPLAY DRIVER STANDOFF CUSHIONS LCD GLASS PLATE LCD MOUNT LCD BACKPLATE LCD DRIVER SHIELD LCD DRIVER BOARD INVERTER BOARD LCD ASSEMBLY - INCLUDES LCD GLASS, LCD MOUNT, AND A18DS1 and A18DS2 BACKLIGHT CABLES Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 5063-0269 5063-0268 0515-0430 0515-0372 0400-0333 1000-1014 5041-9632 5000-8314 5022-3667 08562-6016 0950-60166 2090-0379

5063-0269 5063-0268 0515-0430 0515-0372 0400-0333 1000-1014 5041-9632 5000-8314 5022-3667 08562-6016 0950-60166 2090-0379

Table 5-8
Item 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

Parts List, Main Chassis 8564E and 8565E (See Figure 5-3)
Part Number Qty Description SCREW-MACH M3 X 8MM-LG PAN-HD TORX SCREW-MACH M3 X 35MM-LG PAN-HD TORX SPACER .937LG .166ID COVER, A6 POWER SUPPLY (Includes label) SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 45MM-LG TORX BOARD MOUNT SCREW-MACH M3 X 8MM-LG PAN-HD TORX COVER, A17 CRT MOUNT CRT MOUNT STRAP SCREW-MACH M3 X 10MM-LG PAN-HD TORX MAIN DECK FRONT END DECK SCREW-MACH M4 X 8MM-LG FLT-HD TORX SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLT-HD TORX SIDE FRAME SCREW-MACH M4 X 8MM-LG FLT-HD TORX SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLT-HD TORX SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLT-HD TORX SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLT-HD TORX MOUNTING POST HINGE, 2 BOARD HINGE, 4 BOARD CABLE CLAMP SCREW-MACH M3 X 35MM-LG TORX Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 0515-2145 0515-1715 0380-2052 5002-1010 0515-2309 5041-7246 0515-1950 5041-8961 5021-5486 5001-5870 0515-2134 5002-1008 5002-1002 0515-1101 0515-1227 5021-7464 0515-1101 0515-1227 0515-1227 0515-1227 5021-5484 5062-0750 5062-0751 5041-7250 0515-2164

0515-2145 4 0515-1715 3 0380-2052 2 5002-1010 1 0515-2309 3 5041-7246 1 0515-1950 2 5041-8961 1 5021-5486 2 5001-5870 2 0515-2134 4 5002-1008 1 5002-1002 1 0515-1101 4 0515-1227 2 5021-7464 2 0515-1101 12 0515-1227 12 0515-1227 8 0515-1227 5 5021-5484 5 5062-0750 2 5062-0751 2 5041-7250 1 0515-2164 2

Chapter 5

281

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-8
Item 28 29 30

Parts List, Main Chassis 8564E and 8565E (See Figure 5-3)
Part Number Qty Description SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLT-HD TORX LABEL, ASSEMBLY LOCATIONS LABEL, WARNING SPACER, CRT TUBE, CRT P/O A18MP1 5041-7248 1 5063-0268 1 5063-0269 1 0515-0665 2 BOARD TRAY, A17 SHLD WALL ASSY BOTTOM SHLD WALL ASSY TOP SCREW-MACH M3 X 14MM-LG FLT-HD TORX 28480 28480 28480 28480 5041-7248 5063-0268 5063-0269 0515-0665 Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 0515-1227 5181-5040 5181-5046 5062-7095 5041-3987 2090-0225

0515-1227 2 5181-5040 1 5181-5046 1

A18MP1 5062-7095 1 A18MP2 5041-3987 1 A18V1 A18W1 31 32 34 35 2090-0225 1

CRT WIRING ASSY (INCLUDES A18L1, A18W1) 28480

Table 5-9
Item Part Number 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 18 19 20 22 23 24 25

Parts List, RF Section 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC (See Figure 5-4)

Qty Description SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX FILTER CLAMP SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX MAIN DECK SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLT-HD TORX FRONT END DECK SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLT-HD TORX SCREW-MACH 6-32 .375-IN-LG TORX SCREW-MACH M3 X 8MM-LG PAN-HD TORX SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX ATTENUATOR BRACKET ATTENUATOR BRACKET SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLT-HD TORX SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLT-HD TORX SCREW-MACH M3 X 20MM-LG FLT-HD TORX EMI SHIELD SCREW-MACH M3 X 5MM FLT-HD TORX Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 0515-1032 0515-2332 0515-2332 5021-7467 0515-2332 5002-1008 0515-1227 5002-1002 0515-1032 2360-0461 0516-0372 0516-1250 5001-8731 5002-1007 0515-1250 0515-1227 0515-1227 0515-1410 5002-1009 0515-1521

0515-1032 2 0515-2332 2 0515-2332 2 5021-7467 1 0515-2332 2 5002-1008 1 0515-1227 2 5002-1002 1 0515-1032 4 2360-0461 4 0515-0372 1 0515-1250 2 5001-8731 1 5002-1007 1 0515-1250 2 0515-1227 3 0515-1227 6 0515-1410 2 5002-1009 1 0515-1521 10

282

Chapter 5

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-10
Item 1 1 1 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 22 24 25 26 27 28 31 32 33 34 35 36 Part Number

Parts List, Front Frame 8564EC and 8565EC (see Figure 5-8)
Qty Description 8564EC - DRESS PANEL OVERLAY 8565EC - DRESS PANEL OVERLAY 8564EC (006) - DRESS PANEL OVERLAY 8564EC (006) - DRESS PANEL OVERLAY CONNECTOR OVERLAY 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 12 1 2 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 1 2 1 1 1 KNOB BASE 1-1/8 JGK .252-IN-IO (INCLUDES ITEM 5) SCREW-SET 6-32 .125-IN-LG SMALL CUP-PT NUT-HEX-DBL-CHAM 3/8-32-THD .094-IN-THK WASHER-LK INTL T 3/8 IN .377-IN-ID FRONT PANEL-DRESS PROBE POWER JACK NUT-SPCLY 15/32-32-THD .1-IN-THK .562-WD PLUG-HOLE (Opt. 327)(not shown) ADAPTOR COAX STR F-SMA F-SMA SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 8MM-LG PAN-HD TX BUMPER KIT (Includes 4 bumpers) CATCH LATCH SCREW-MACH M2.5 X 0.45 6MM-LG PAN-HD TX FRONT FRAME RFI ROUND STRIP STL MSH/SIL RBR CU/SN NUT WASHER-LK INTL T 3/8 IN .377-IN-ID NUT-HEX-DBL-CHAM 3/8-32-THD .094-IN-THK RF INPUT ASSEMBLY 8563EC (Option 026) - RF INPUT ASSEMBLY RUBBER KEYPAD (INCLUDES KEYCAPS) LED-LAMP LUM-INT=560UCD IF=20MA-MAX LINE SWITCH CABLE ASSEMBLY O-RING .101-IN-ID .07-IN-XSECT-DIA NTRL SCREW-MACH M2.5 X 0.45 6MM-LG PAN-HD TX (P/O A1W1) R-VC 20K 20% LOG WASHER-FL .250ID12 WASHER-LK INTL .256-IN-ID NUT-HEX 1/4-32 THD KNOB RND .125 JG Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 00000 00000 28480 28480 28480 00000 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 00000 28480 28480 28480 2M627 28480 51633 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 08564-80055 08565-80054 08564-80056 08565-80055 5181-8245 0370-3069 DESCRIBE DESCRIBE 2190-0016 5181-8246 5060-0467 DESCRIBE 6960-0171 1250-1666 0515-2145 5062-4806 5021-5483 0515-0366 5022-0199 8160-0520 0590-2563 2190-0016 DESCRIBE 5064-3968 5064-3968 5041-9630 LD-101MG 5063-3966 AS568-005 0515-0664 0515-1934 2100-4232 3050-0014 2190-0067 2950-0072 0370-3079

08564-80055 1 08565-80054 1 08564-80056 1 08565-80055 1 5181-8245 0370-3069 3030-0022 2950-0043 2190-0016 5181-8246 5060-0467 0590-1251 6960-0171 1250-1666 0515-2145 5062-4806 5021-5483 0515-0366 5022-0199 8160-0520 0590-2563 2190-0016 2950-0043 5064-3970 5064-3969 5041-9630 1990-1131 5063-3966 0900-0010 0515-0664 0515-1934 2100-4232 3050-0014 2190-0067 2950-0072 0370-3079

SCREW-MACHINE ASSEMBLYM3 X0.5 12MM-LG 28480

Chapter 5

283

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-11
Item Part Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 0515-1622 5041-8906 1000-0897 0370-3069 3030-0022 2950-0043 2190-0016

Parts List, Front Frame 8564E and 8565E (See Figure 5-5)
Qty 4 1 1 1 2 1 1 Description SCREW-SKT-HD-CAP M4 X 0.7 8MM-LG CRT BEZEL RFI CRT FACEPLATE KNOB BASE 1-1/8 JGK .252-IN-IO (INCLUDES ITEM 5) SCREW-SET 6-32 .125-IN-LG SMALL CUP-PT WASHER-LK INTL T 3/8 IN .377-IN-ID FRONT PANEL-DRESS (Standard) (8564E) FRONT PANEL-DRESS (Option 006) (8564E) FRONT PANEL-DRESS (Standard) (8565E) FRONT PANEL-DRESS (Option 006) (8565E) PROBE POWER JACK NUT-SPCLY 15/32-32-THD .1-IN-THK .562-WD ADAPTOR COAX STR F-SMA F-SMA SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 8MM-LG PAN-HD TX BUMPER KIT (Includes 4 bumpers) O-RING .126TD CATCH LATCH FRONT FRAME RFI ROUND STRIP STL MSH/SIL RBR CU/SN NVTM W LKWR M4 WASHER-LK INTL T 3/8 IN .377-IN-ID RF INPUT ASSEMBLY (Standard) SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 8MM-LG PAN-HD TX RUBBER KEYPAD (INCLUDES KEYCAPS) LED-LAMP LUM-INT=560UCD IF=20MA-MAX KEYCAP "LINE" O-RING .101-IN-ID .07-IN-XSECT-DIA NTRL SCREW-MACHINE ASSEMBLY M3 X 0.5 12MM-LG SUPPORT CENTER SCREW-MACH M4 X 0.7 16MM-LG PAN-HD TX (P/O A1W1) 00000 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 00000 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 2M627 28480 51633 28480 28480 28480 DESCRIBE DESCRIBE 2190-0016 08564-00001 08564-00002 08565-00161 08565-00162 5060-0467 DESCRIBE 1250-1666 0515-2145 5062-4806 0905-1018 5021-5483 0515-0366 5022-0199 8160-0520 0535-0082 2190-0016 DESCRIBE 5062-6614 0515-2145 5041-8985 LD-101MG 5041-1682 AS568-005 0515-0664 5021-5482 0515-1143 0515-1934 2100-4232 3050-0014 2190-0067 2950-0072 0370-3079 NUT-HEX-DBL-CHAM 3/8-32-THD .094-IN-THK 00000 Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 0515-1622 5041-8906 1000-0897 0370-3069

08564-00001 1 08564-00002 1 08565-00161 1 08565-00162 1 5060-0467 0590-1251 1250-1666 0515-2145 5062-4806 0905-1018 5021-5483 0515-0366 5022-0199 8160-0520 0535-0082 2190-0016 2950-0043 5062-6614 0515-2145 5041-8985 1990-1131 5041-1682 0900-0010 0515-0664 5021-5482 0515-1143 0515-1934 2100-4232 3050-0014 2190-0067 2950-0072 0370-3079 1 1 2 12 1 4 2 4 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 9 1 2 1 1 1

SCREW-MACH M2.5 X 0.45 6MM-LG PAN-HDTX 28480

NUT-HEX-DBL-CHAM 3/8-32-THD .094-IN-THK 00000

SCREW-MACH M2.5 X 0.45 6MM-LG PAN-HDTX 28480 R-VC 20K 20% LOG WASHER-FL .250ID12 WASHER-LK INTL .256-IN-ID NUT-HEX 1/4-32 THD KNOB RND .125 JG 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480

284

Chapter 5

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-12
Item Part Number 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 B1 BT1 FL4

Parts List, Rear Frame 8564EC and 8565EC (See Figure 5-9)
Qty Description SCREW-MACH M3 6MM-LG FLT-HD TORX BATTERY HOLDER (INCLUDES WIRES) SCREW-MACH M4 40MM-LG PAN-HD TORX FAN GRILL SPACER-RND .875-IN-ID PLUG-HOLE TR-HD FOR 0.5-D-HOLE STL PLUG-HOLE DOME-HD FOR 0.312-D-HOLE STL ADAPTOR-COAX STR F-SMA OPT 001 (INCLUDES WASHER AND NUT) SCREW-MACH M3 6MM-LG FLT-HD TORX SCREW-MACH M3 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX NUT HEX 15/32THD CONNECTOR-TEL 2-CKT .141-SHK-DIA (INCLUDES NUT AND JACK) REAR PANEL-DRESS SCREW-MACH M3 6MMLG PAN-HD TORX RFI ROUND STRIP STL SPIRA .150 REAR FRAME SCREW-CONNECTOR GPIB SCREW-MACH 4-40 .25-IN-LG TORX NUT M4.0 W/LOCKWR SCREW-MACH M3 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX NUT-HEX DBL-CHAM M4 X 0.7 3.2MM-THK FAN ASSEMBLY (INCLUDES WIRE) Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 05093 04213 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 0515-1946 5062-7755 0515-2216 3160-0309 0380-0012 SS-48152 D-2730-LC2 1250-1753 0515-1946 0515-0684 2950-0035 1252-0995 5002-1012 0515-2145 8160-0520 5021-5479 5021-6391 2200-0225 0535-0082 0515-0433 0535-0023 5061-9036 BR 2/3A SSP 5061-9032

0515-1946 2 5062-7755 1 0515-2216 4 3160-0309 1 0380-0012 4 6960-0149 1 6960-0023 1 1250-1753 1 0515-1946 2 0515-0684 1 2950-0035 1 1252-0995 1 5002-1012 1 0515-2145 4 8160-0520 1 5021-5479 1 5021-6391 2 2200-0225 2 0535-0082 2 0515-0433 1 0535-0023 2 5061-9036 1 1420-0341 1 5061-9032 1

BATTERY 3.0V 1.2A-HR LITHIUM POLYCARBON 08709

MONOFLUORIDE
LINE FILTER MODULE 28480

Table 5-13
Item Part Number 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11

Parts List, Rear Frame 8564E and 8565E (See Figure 5-6)
Qty Description SCREW-MACH M3 6MM-LG FLT-HD TORX BATTERY HOLDER (INCLUDES WIRES) SCREW-MACH M4 40MM-LG PAN-HD TORX FAN GRILL SPACER-RND .875-IN-ID PLUG-HOLE TR-HD FOR 0.5-D-HOLE STL PLUG-HOLE DOME-HD FOR 0.312-D-HOLE STL ADAPTOR-COAX STR F-SMA OPT 001 (INCLUDES WASHER AND NUT) SCREW-MACH M3 6MM-LG FLT-HD TORX SCREW-MACH M3 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 05093 04213 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 0515-1946 5062-7755 0515-2216 3160-0309 0380-0012 SS-48152 D-2730-LC2 1250-1753 0515-1946 0515-0684

0515-1946 2 5062-7755 1 0515-2216 4 3160-0309 1 0380-0012 4 6960-0149 1 6960-0023 1 1250-1753 1 0515-1946 2 0515-0684 1

Chapter 5

285

Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts

Table 5-13
Item Part Number 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 B1 BT1 FL4

Parts List, Rear Frame 8564E and 8565E (See Figure 5-6)
Qty Description NUT HEX 15/32THD CONNECTOR-TEL 2-CKT .141-SHK-DIA (INCLUDES NUT AND JACK) REAR PANEL-DRESS SCREW-MACH M3 6MMLG PAN-HD TORX RFI ROUND STRIP STL SPIRA .150 REAR FRAME SCREW-CONNECTOR GPIB SCREW-MACH 4-40 .25-IN-LG TORX NUT M4.0 W/LOCKWR SCREW-MACH M3 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX NUT-HEX DBL-CHAM M4 X 0.7 3.2MM-THK VGA CONNETOR AND CABLE FAN ASSEMBLY (INCLUDES WIRE) Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 2950-0035 1252-0995 5002-4049 0515-2145 8160-0520 5022-3778 5021-6391 2200-0225 0535-0082 0515-0433 0535-0023 8121-0062 5061-9036 BR 2/3A SSP 5061-9032

2950-0035 1 1252-0995 1 5002-4049 1 0515-2145 4 8160-0520 1 5022-3778 1 5021-6391 2 2200-0225 2 0535-0082 2 0515-0433 1 0535-0023 2 8121-0062 1 5061-9036 1 1420-0341 1 5061-9032 1

BATTERY 3.0V 1.2A-HR LITHIUM POLYCARBON 08709 MONOFLURIDE LINE FILTER MODULE 28480

286

Chapter 5

Major Assembly and Cable Locations

303

Major Assembly and Cable Locations Introduction

Introduction
This chapter identies the instrument's assemblies and cables and contains the following gures: Figure 6-1. Hinged Assemblies ........................................... page 306 Figure 6-2. Top View (A2 and A3 Unfolded) EC-Series ..... page 307 Figure 6-3. Top View (A2, A3, A4, A5 Unfolded) EC-Seriespage 308 Figure 6-2. Top View (A2 Unfolded) E-Series .................... page 307 Figure 6-3. Top View (A2 and A3 Unfolded) E-Series ..... page 308 Figure 6-4. Top View (A2, A3, A4, A5 Unfolded) E-Series page 309 Figure 6-5. Bottom View (A15 Unfolded)............................ page 310 Figure 6-6. Bottom View (A15 and A14 Unfolded) ............ page 311 Figure 6-7. A16 Fast ADC (Option 007 in E-Series) ......... page 312 Figure 6-8. 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC Front End .............. page 313 Figure 6-9. Rear View EC-Series........................................ page 314 Figure 6-9. Rear View E-Series .......................................... page 314 Use the list below to determine the gure(s) illustrating the desired assembly or cable. Assemblies Figure A1 Front Frame ...................................................................... 6-8 A1A1 Keyboard ...................................................................... 6-8 A2 Controller ................................................................... 6-3, 6-4 A3 Interface ..................................................................... 6-3, 6-4 A4 Log Amplier/Cal Oscillator ..................................... 6-3, 6-5 A5 IF Filter ...................................................................... 6-3, 6-6 A6 Power Supply .................................................................... 6-6 A6A1 High Voltage Module ................................................... 6-6 A7 LO Multiplier/Amplier (LOMA) ................................... 6-10 A8 Low Band Mixer ............................................................. 6-10 A9 RF Attenuator ................................................................. 6-10 A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX ....................................................... 6-10 A11 YTO ............................................................................... 6-10 A13 Second Converter .......................................................... 6-10 A14 Frequency Control ................................................... 6-3, 6-8 A15 RF ............................................................................. 6-3, 6-8 A16 Fast ADC (Option 007) ............................................ 6-6, 6-9 A17 LCD Driver (8564E and 8565E)................................ 6-2, 6-3 A17 CRT Driver ...................................................................... 6-6 A18 LCD (8564E and 8565E) ............................................ 6-2,6-3 A18 CRT Assembly ................................................................ 6-6 A19 GPIB ................................................................................ 6-6 A20 Battery Assembly ......................................................... 6-11 A21 OCXO .............................................................................. 6-6 B1 Fan ................................................................................... 6-11 BT1 Battery .......................................................................... 6-11 FL1 Low Pass Filter ............................................................. 6-10

304

Chapter 6

Major Assembly and Cable Locations Introduction

FL2 Low Pass Filter ............................................................. 6-10 FL3 Low Pass Filter ............................................................. 6-10 FL4 Line Filter ..................................................................... 6-11 FL5 Low Pass Filter ............................................................. 6-10 LS1 Speaker .................................................................... 6-6, 6-9 Cables Figure A1A1W1 Keyboard cable ................................................ 6-4, 6-6 A3W1 Interface cable ............................................................. 6-4 A19W1 GPIB cable .......................................................... 6-4, 6-6 W1 Power cable, ribbon .................................... 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7 W2 Control cable, ribbon ................................. 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7 W3 Line switch cable ........................................... 6-6, 6-10, 6-11 W4 Option module cable ........................................................ 6-6 W5 Speaker leads ................................................................... 6-9 W6 Battery cable (Part of A20 battery assembly) ................ 6-4 W7 Line generator cable ........................................................ 6-4 W8 Display power cable ......................................................... 6-6 W9 CRT yoke cable ................................................................ 6-6 W10 A11 YTO drive cable .................................... 6-8, 6-10, 6-11 W11 A9 attenuator drive cable .............................................. 6-8 W12 A7 LOMA drive cable ........................................... 6-8, 6-10 W13 A13 Second converter drive cable ........................ 6-8, 6-10 W14 (NOT ASSIGNED) W15 (NOT ASSIGNED) W16 A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX drive cable .................... 6-8, 6-10 W17 (NOT ASSIGNED) W18 LO sweep (coax 97) ........................................................ 6-8 W19 Second IF out (coax 83) ................................................. 6-7 W20 Zero-span video (coax 6) ......................................... 6-4, 6-9 W21 (NOT ASSIGNED) W22 10 MHz frequency count (coax 0) ........................... 6-4, 6-7 W23 External trigger in (coax 93) ......................................... 6-4 W24 Video out (coax 5) ........................................................... 6-4 W25 Blanking out (coax 4) ..................................................... 6-4 W26 (NOT ASSIGNED) W27 Filtered 10.7 MHz (coax 3) ..................................... 6-5, 6-6 W28 RYTHM LO cable ......................................................... 6-10 W29 10.7 IF (coax 7) ........................................................ 6-6, 6-7 W30 LOMA/FL3 cable .......................................................... 6-10 W31 10 MHz Reference in/out (coax 8) ................................. 6-7 W32 Sampler IF (coax 87) ............................................... 6-7, 6-8 W33 Second LO drive (coax 81) .................................... 6-7, 6-10 W34 1st LO Sampler (Coax 0) ............................... 6-7, 6-8, 6-10 W35 Int Second IF (Coax 92) ........................................ 6-7, 6-10 W36 Ext Second IF (Coax 86) ................................................ 6-7 W37 10 MHz Reference 1 (Coax 85) ............................... 6-7, 6-8 W38 Semirigid coax, A11J2 to A7J1 ................................... 6-10 W39 Semirigid coax, A7J4 to A8J3 ..................................... 6-10

Chapter 6

305

Major Assembly and Cable Locations Introduction

W40 Cal. Out (Coax 89) ......................................................... 6-7 W41 Semirigid coax, front-panel J1 to A9J1 ...................... 6-10 W42 Semirigid coax, A7J6 to front-panel J4 ...................... 6-10 W43 Semirigid coax, A9J2 to A12J3 ................................... 6-10 W44 Semirigid coax, A10J2 to FL1J1 ................................. 6-10 W45 Semirigid coax, FL1J2 to A8J1 ................................... 6-10 W46 Semirigid coax, A7J2 to A12J4 ................................... 6-10 W47 Semirigid coax, A12J5 to A8J2 ................................... 6-10 W48 1st IF, High Band (coax 8) ........................................... 6-10 W49 OCXO 10 MHz out (coax 82) ......................................... 6-7 W50 OCXO power (part of A21 OCXO assembly) ................ 6-7 W51 10 MHz Reference 2 (coax 84) ................................ 6-5, 6-7 W52 CAL oscillator out (coax 9) ............................................ 6-6 W53 Frequency counter (coax 1) .................................... 6-4, 6-5 W54 Video (coax 2) .......................................................... 6-4, 6-5 W55 Audio out ................................................................. 6-5, 6-6 W56 Semirigid coax, A12J1 to FL2 ..................................... 6-10 W57 Semirigid coax, FL2 to A13J1 ..................................... 6-10 W58 ALT SWEEP OUT (Coax 8) ........................................... 6-8 W59 8 MHz TTL (coax 839) ............................................ 6-4, 6-9 W60 ribbon, A2J8 to A17J1 ............................................. 6-2, 6-3 W61 coax, J9 on A2 to J7 on A17 J7 ............................... 6-2, 6-3 W62 ribbon, J6 on A17 to A17A1 .................................... 6-2, 6-3 W63 ribbon, J5 on A17 to A18 ......................................... 6-2, 6-3 W64 , J4 on A17 to J1 on the rear panel (VGA port)...... 6-2, 6-3 Figure 6-1 Hinged Assemblies

NOTE

Figure 6-1 shows an 8560 E-series instrument. EC-series instruments are identical except the A2 board is smaller.

306

Chapter 6

Major Assembly and Cable Locations Introduction

NOTE

Diagrams that show features common to EC-series and E-series instruments are illustrated with E-series instruments. Where E-series and EC-series features are different, separate diagrams are provided. Top View (A2 and A3 Unfolded) EC-Series

Figure 6-2

Chapter 6

307

Major Assembly and Cable Locations Introduction

Figure 6-3

Top View (A2, A3, A4, and A5 Unfolded) EC-Series

308

Chapter 6

Major Assembly and Cable Locations Introduction

Figure 6-4

Top View (A2, A3, A4, and A5 Unfolded) E-Series

Chapter 6

309

Major Assembly and Cable Locations Introduction

Figure 6-5

Bottom View (A15 Unfolded)

310

Chapter 6

Major Assembly and Cable Locations Introduction

Figure 6-6

Bottom View (A15 and A14 Unfolded)

Chapter 6

311

Major Assembly and Cable Locations Introduction

Figure 6-7

A16 Fast ADC (Option 007)

312

Chapter 6

Major Assembly and Cable Locations Introduction

Figure 6-8

8564E/EC and 8565E/EC Front End

Chapter 6

313

Major Assembly and Cable Locations Introduction

Figure 6-9

Rear View EC-Series

Figure 6-10

Rear View E-Series

314

Chapter 6

General Troubleshooting

315

General Troubleshooting Introduction

Introduction
This chapter provides information needed to troubleshoot your spectrum analyzer to one of the six major functional sections. Chapters 8 through 13 cover troubleshooting for each of these sections. Before troubleshooting, read the rest of this introduction. To begin troubleshooting, refer to Troubleshooting to a Functional Section on page 324. Page Troubleshooting to a Functional Section .....................page 324 Error Messages ..............................................................page 326 Block Diagram Description ...........................................page 351
NOTE

When a part or assembly is replaced, adjustment of the affected circuitry is usually required. Refer to the adjustment procedures in Chapters 2 and 3. Troubleshooting and repair of this instrument with the cover removed exposes high voltage points that, if contacted, may cause personal injury. Maintenance and repair of this instrument should be performed only by a skilled person who knows the hazards involved. Where maintenance can be performed without power applied, power should be removed. When any repair is completed, be sure that all safety features are intact and functioning and that all necessary parts are connected to their grounds.

WARNING

Assembly Level Text

To locate troubleshooting information for an individual assembly, refer to Table 7-1 on page 325.

Block Diagrams
Instrument-level block diagrams are located at the end of this chapter. Power levels and voltages shown on block diagrams are provided only as a troubleshooting aid. They should not be used for making instrument adjustments.

316

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Introduction

Assembly Test Points

The spectrum analyzer board assemblies contain four types of test points: post, pad, extended component lead, and test jack. Figure 7-1 on page 318 illustrates each type of test point as seen on both block diagrams and circuit boards. The name of the test point will be etched into the circuit board next to the test point (for example, TP2). In some instances, the test point will be identied on the board by its number only. Pad Each pad test point uses a square pad and a round pad etched into the board assembly. The square pad is the point being measured. The round pad supplies a grounding point for the test probe. Test Jack The test jack is a collection of test points located on a 16-pin jack. There are approximately 20 test jacks used throughout the spectrum analyzer. The pins on the test jack may be manually probed, provided caution is used to prevent accidental shorting between adjacent pins. Figure 7-1 on page 318 illustrates the pin conguration for the test jack. Line names are the same for all test jacks. The following mnemonics are used: MS (measured signal) and OS (output signal). Test jack test points are identied on block diagrams by both the jack/pin number and line name.

Ribbon Cables
Ribbon cables are used extensively in the spectrum analyzer. The following ve cables use different pin numbering methods on the jacks (signal names remain the same but the pin numbers vary): W2, control cable W4, option cable A3W1, interface cable A19W1, GPIB cable Figure 7-2 on page 319 and Figure 7-3 on page 320 illustrate the pin congurations of these ve cables. Cables W1 and W2 use two pin numbering methods on their many jacks. These methods are identied in the interconnect and block diagrams by the letters "A" and "B" next to the jack designator (for example, J1(A)). Board assembly jacks connected to W1 will always be labeled J1. Board assembly jacks connected to W2 will always be labeled J2.

Chapter 7

317

General Troubleshooting Introduction

Figure 7-1

Assembly Test Points

Figure 7-4 on page 321 shows the pin conguration for the 80 pin, W60 cable that is found on EC-series instruments. The numbering of the pins is identical on the A2 Controller board and the A17 Display Driver board.

318

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Introduction

Figure 7-2

Ribbon Cable Connections (1 of 3)

Chapter 7

319

General Troubleshooting Introduction

Figure 7-3

Ribbon Cable Connections (2 of 3)

320

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Introduction

Figure 7-4

Ribbon Cable Connections (3 of 3) EC-Series Only

Figure 7-4 shows A2J8 connections on 8560 EC-Series Instruments. Lines 2 5 and 42 44 supply +5V to the two LCD backlights. Lines 1 and 41 supply +5V to the A17A1 Inverter board. Lines 1 6 and 41 44 are identical on A17J1.

Chapter 7

321

General Troubleshooting Introduction

Service Cal Data Softkey Menus

The jumper on A2J12 is shipped from the factory in the WR PROT (write protect) position (jumper on pins 2 and 3). When the jumper is set to the WR ENA (write enable) position (jumper on pins 1 and 2), an additional service cal data menu is displayed under CAL. Figure 7-5 on page 323 illustrates those areas of the service cal data menu that are available.

322

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Introduction

Figure 7-5

Service Cal Data Menu

Chapter 7

323

General Troubleshooting Troubleshooting to a Functional Section

Troubleshooting to a Functional Section

1. Refer to Table 7-1 on page 325 for the location of troubleshooting information. 2. If error messages are displayed, refer to "Error Messages" in this chapter. You will nd both error descriptions and troubleshooting information. 3. If a signal cannot be seen, and no error messages are displayed, the fault is probably in the RF Section. Refer to Chapter 12 , RF Section. 4. Blank displays result from problems caused by either the controller or display/power supply sections. Because error messages 700 to 759 caused by the controller section cannot be seen on a blank display, use the following BASIC program to read these errors over GPIB. If the program returns an error code of 0, there are no errors.

10 DIM Err$[128] 20 OUTPUT 718;"ERR?;" 30 ENTER 718; Err$ 40 PRINT Err$ 50 END a. If there is no response over GPIB, set an oscilloscope to the following settings: Sweep time ................................................... 2 ms/div Amplitude scale .............................................. 1 V/div b. The signals at A2J202 pin 3 and pin 14 should measure about 4 Vp-p. If the levels are incorrect, refer to Chapter 10 and troubleshoot the A2 controller assembly. c. Set the oscilloscope to the following settings: Sweep time ........................................................ 1 ms/div Amplitude scale ................................................... 2 V/div d. The signal at A2J202 pin 15 should consist of TTL pulses. If the signal is at a constant level (high or low), troubleshoot the A2 controller assembly. 5. Display problems such as intensity or distortion are caused by either the controller or display/power supply sections. Refer to Chapter 10 or Chapter 13 .

324

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Troubleshooting to a Functional Section

Table 7-1

Location of Assembly Troubleshooting Text

Instrument Assembly A1A1 keyboard A1A2 RPG A2 controller A3 interface Location of Troubleshooting Text Chapter 8 ADC/Interface Section Chapter 8 ADC/Interface Section Chapter 10 Controller Section Chapter 8 ADC/Interface Section Chapter 9 IF Section A4 log amplier/cal oscillator A5 IF A6 power supply A6A1 HV module A6A2 regulator A7 LOMA A8 low band mixer A9 input attenuator A10 RYTHM A11 YTO A12 SBTX A13 2nd converter A14 frequency control Chapter 9 IF Section Chapter 9 IF Section Chapter 13 Display/Power Supply Section Chapter 13 Display/Power Supply Section Chapter 13 Display/Power Supply Section Chapter 12 RF Section Chapter 12 RF Section Chapter 12 RF Section Chapter 12 RF Section Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section Chapter 12 RF Section Chapter 12 RF Section Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section Chapter 12 RF Section A15 RF assembly Chapter 11 Synthesizer Sectionn Chapter 12 RF Section A16 fast ADC A17 LCD driver A17 CRT driver A17 LCD A18 CRT A19 GPIB A21 OCXO FL1, FL2 Chapter 8 ADC/Interface Section Chapter 13 Display/Power Supply Section Chapter 13 Display/Power Supply Section Chapter 13 Display/Power Supply Section Chapter 13 Display/Power Supply Section Chapter 10 Controller Section Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section Chapter 12 RF Section

Chapter 7

325

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

Error Messages
The spectrum analyzer displays error messages in the lower right-hand corner of the display. A number, or error code, is associated with each error message. These error messages alert the user to errors in spectrum analyzer function or use. Multiple error messages may exist simultaneously. Refer to "Viewing Multiple Messages" below. The following information can be found in this section: Viewing Multiple Messages .............................................. 7-11 Error Message Elimination .............................................. 7-11 System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150) ....... 7-12 ADC Errors (200 to 299) ................................................... 7-13 LO and RF Hardware/Firmware Failures (300 to 399) YTO Loop Errors (300 to 301) ....................................... 7-15 YTO Loop Errors (317 to 320) ....................................... 7-15 YTO Loop Error (331) .................................................... 7-15 600 MHz Reference Loop (333) ...................................... 7-16 Sampling Oscillator (335) .............................................. 7-16 10 MHz Reference (336) ................................................. 7-16 Fractional N PLL (337) .................................................. 7-16 LOMA (Local Oscillator Multiplier/Amplier) Leveling Loop Errors (338 to 340) .............................................................. 7-17 YTO Loop Settling Errors (351 to 354) ......................... 7-17 Sampling Oscillator (355) .............................................. 7-17 Span Accuracy Calibration Errors (356 to 361) ............ 7-18 Automatic IF Errors (400 to 599) ..................................... 7-19 System Errors (600 to 651) ............................................... 7-28 Digital and Checksum Errors (700 to 799) EEROM Checksum Errors (700 to 704) ........................ 7-29 Program ROM Checksum Errors (705 to 710)............... 7-30 RAM Check Errors (711 to 716) .................................... 7-30 Microprocessor Error (717) ............................................ 7-30 Battery Problem (718) .................................................... 7-31 Model/Option Number Error (719 to 720) ..................... 7-31 RAM Check Error (721) ................................................. 7-31 System Errors (750 to 759) ............................................ 7-31 Fast ADC Error (760) ..................................................... 7-32 Option Module Errors (800 to 899) .................................. 7-32 User Generated Errors (900 to 999) ................................. 7-32

326

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

Viewing Multiple Messages

Although multiple errors may exist, the spectrum analyzer displays only one error message at a time. To view any additional messages, do the following: 1. Press RECALL and MORE 1 OF 2. 2. Press RECALL ERRORS. An error message is displayed in the active function block. 3. Use the up and down step keys to scroll through any other error messages which might exist, making note of each error code.

Error Message Elimination

When an error message is displayed, always perform the following procedure: 1. Press SAVE and SAVE STATE. 2. Store the current state in a convenient STATE register. (It may be necessary to set SAVELOCK to OFF.) 3. Press CAL and REALIGN LO &IF. Wait for the sequence to nish. 4. Press RECALL and RECALL STATE. 5. Recall the previously stored STATE. 6. If an error message is still displayed, refer to the following list of error messages for an explanation of the error.

System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)

Refer to the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzers Users Guide for information on programming the spectrum analyzer. 100 NO PWRON Power-on state is invalid; default state is loaded. Press SAVE, PWR ON STATE to clear error message. 101 NO STATE State to be RECALLed not valid or not SAVEd. 102 # ARGMTS Command does not have enough arguments. 103 # ARGMTS Command does not have enough arguments. 104 # ARGMTS Command does not have enough arguments. 105 # ARGMTS Command does not have enough arguments. 106 ABORTED! Current operation is aborted; GPIB parser reset. 107 HELLO ?? No GPIB listener is present. 108 TIME OUT Spectrum analyzer timed out when acting as controller.

Chapter 7

327

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

109 CtrlFail Spectrum analyzer unable to take control of the bus. 110 NOT CTRL Spectrum analyzer is not system controller. 111 # ARGMTS Command does not have enough arguments. 112 ??CMD?? Unrecognized command. 113 FREQ NO! Command cannot have frequency units. 114 TIME NO! Command cannot have time units. 115 AMPL NO! Command cannot have amplitude units. 116 ?UNITS?? Unrecognizable units. 117 NOP NUM Command cannot have numeric units. 118 NOP EP Enable parameter cannot be used.

119 NOP UPDN UP/DN are not valid arguments for this command. 120 NOP ONOF ON/OFF are not valid arguments for this command. 121 NOP ARG AUTO/MAN are not valid arguments for this command. 122 NOP TRC Trace registers are not valid for this command. 123 NOP ABLK A-block format not valid here. 124 NOP IBLK I-block format not valid here. 125 NOP STRNG Strings are not valid for this command. 126 NO ? This command cannot be queried.

127 BAD DTMD Not a valid peak detector mode. 128 PK WHAT? Not a valid peak search parameter. 129 PRE TERM Premature A-block termination. 130 BAD TDF Arguments are only for TDF command. 131 ?? AM/FM AM/FM are not valid arguments for this command. 132 !FAV/RMP FAV/RAMP are not valid arguments for this command. 133 !INT/EXT INT/EXT are not valid arguments for this command. 134 ??? ZERO ZERO is not a valid argument for this command. 135 ??? CURR CURR is not a valid argument for this command. 136 ??? FULL FULL is not a valid argument for this command. 137 ??? LAST LAST is not a valid argument for this command. 138 !GRT/DSP GRT/DSP are not valid arguments for this command. 139 PLOTONLY Argument can only be used with PLOT command. 140 ?? PWRON PWRON is not a valid argument for this command.

328

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

141 BAD ARG Argument can only be used with FDIAG command. 142 BAD ARG Query expected for FDIAG command. 143 NO PRESL No preselector hardware to use command with. 144 COUPL?? Invalid COUPLING argument, expected AC or DC.

ADC Errors (200 to 299)

These errors are directly related to the ADC/interface section. Suspect a faulty A2 controller, A3 interface assembly or, in 8560 E-series analyzers with Option 007, the A16 fast ADC (FADC) assembly. Errors 202 through 207 apply only to EC-series analyzers and E-series analyzers with fast ADC (Option 007). 200 SYSTEM 201 SYSTEM ADC driver/ADC hardware/rmware interaction; check for other errors. ADC controller/ADC hardware/rmware interaction; check for other errors.

202 FADC CAL Binary search failed during FADC linear offset calibration. This error applies only to EC-series analyzers and E-series analyzers with fast ADC (Option 007). 203 FADC CAL Binary search failed during FADC log offset calibration. This error applies only to EC-series analyzers and E-series analyzers with fast ADC (Option 007). 204 FADC CAL Binary search failed during FADC log expand offset calibration. This error applies only to EC-series analyzers and E-series analyzers with fast ADC (Option 007). 205 FADC CAL Slope derivation failed during FADC linear offset calibration. This error applies only to EC-series analyzers and E-series analyzers with fast ADC (Option 007). 206 FADC CAL Slope derivation failed during FADC log offset calibration. This error applies only to EC-series analyzers and E-series analyzers with fast ADC (Option 007).

Chapter 7

329

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

207 FADC CAL Slope derivation failed during FADC log expand offset calibration. This error applies only to EC-series analyzers and E-series analyzers with fast ADC (Option 007). 250 OUTOF RG ADC input is outside of ADC range. 251 NO IRQ Microprocessor not receiving interrupt from ADC.

LO and RF Hardware/Firmware Failures (300 to 399)

YTO Loop Errors (300 to 301) These errors often require troubleshooting the A14 frequency control assembly (synthesizer section) or the ADC circuits. 300 YTO UNLK YTO (1st LO) phase locked loop is unlocked. The ADC measures YTO_ERR voltage under phase-lock condition. 301 YTO UNLK YTO (1st LO) phase locked loop is unlocked. Same as ERR 300 except ERR 301 is set if the voltage is outside certain limits. YTO Loop Errors (317 to 320) These messages indicate that the YTO main coil coarse DAC (ERR 317) or ne DAC (ERR 318) is at its limit. If error codes 300 or 301 are not present, a hardware problem exists in the YTO loop but the loop can still acquire lock. Refer to Chapter 11 to troubleshoot the YTO PLL. The ADC circuit on the A3 interface assembly may also cause this error. 317 FREQ ACC Main coil coarse DAC at limit. The main coil coarse DAC is set to bring YTO ERR close enough to 0 volts for the main coil ne DAC to bring YTO ERR to exactly 0 volts. ERR 317 is set if the main coil coarse DAC is set to one of its limits before bringing YTO ERR close enough to 0 volts. 318 FREQ ACC Main coil ne DAC at limit. The main coil ne DAC is set to bring YTO ERR to 0 volts after the main coil coarse DAC has brought YTO ERR close to 0 volts. ERR 318 is set if the main coil ne DAC is set to one of its limits before bringing YTO ERR to 0 volts. 319 WARN COA YTO coarse tune DAC near limit. 320 WARN FIN YTO ne tune DAC near limit.

330

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

YTO Loop Error (331) This error rarely occurs but is usually indicative of a digital hardware failure. 331 FREQ ACC Invalid YTO frequency. Firmware attempted to set the YTO to a frequency outside the range of the YTO (2.95 to 6.8107 GHz). Suspect a digital hardware problem, such as a bad RAM on the A2 controller assembly. Contact the factory. 600 MHz Reference Loop (333) This error requires troubleshooting the A15 RF board assembly (synthesizer section) or the ADC circuits. 333 600 UNLK The 600 MHz reference oscillator PLL is unlocked. If error codes 302, 303, 304, 327 or 499 are also present, suspect the 10 MHz reference, the A21 OCXO, or the TCXO (Option 103), or the A15 RF assembly. ERR 333 is set if LO3ERR is outside of its prescribed limits. Sampling Oscillator (335) This error indicates an unlocked sampling oscillator (also known as the offset lock loop). 335 SMP UNLK Sampling oscillator PLL is unlocked. ERR 335 is set if OFL_ERR is outside its prescribed limits. 10 MHz Reference (336)

This message occurs during the internal IF calibration routines. The routine locks the cal oscillator to the internal 10 MHz reference, regardless of the setting of INT/EXT REF. 336 10 MHz Ref Calibration oscillator failed to lock within 5 seconds after going to internal 10 MHz reference. ERR 336 will not be cleared until a successful full calibration "LO Re-Align" is executed. Fractional N PLL (337) This error indicates an unlocked fractional N phase locked loop. This error only applies to the hardware in an 8560 E-series or EC-series spectrum analyzer. 337 FN UNLK Fractional N circuitry is unable to lock.

Chapter 7

331

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

LOMA (Local Oscillator Multiplier/Amplier) Leveling Loop Errors (338 to 340) These errors are generated when one of the LOMA (local oscillator multiplier/amplier) loops is unlevelled. These errors only apply to the hardware in an 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer. 338 LOMA AGC The LOMA main loop AGC is unleveled. Error 338 may be displayed if the front panel LO OUTPUT is not terminated in 50 ohms. This error is usually accompanied by error codes 300 or 301. ERR 301 YTO UNLK is cleared once ERR 338 has been cleared. Check the output of the A11 YTO with the jumper on A14J23 in the TEST position. The YTO power output should be between +9 and +13 dBm. If the YTO is working properly, refer to "A7 LOMA Drive" in Chapter 12. The LOMA AGC voltage is monitored by the ADC. ERR 334 is set if LOMA AGC is outside of its prescribed limits. Refer to "A7 LOMA Drive" in Chapter 12. 339 SBTX AGC The LOMA SBTX (switched barium-tuned mixer) loop AGC is unleveled. If ERR 338 LOMA AGC is also present, refer to ERR 338. Otherwise, refer to "A7 LOMA Drive" in Chapter 12. 340 SAMP AGC The LOMA (local oscillator multiplier/amplier) sampler loop AGC is unleveled. If ERR 338 LOMA AGC is also present, refer to ERR 338. Otherwise, refer to "A7 LOMA Drive" in Chapter 12. YTO Loop Settling Errors (351 to 354) These errors are generated when the YTO loop error voltage will not stabilize at an acceptable value during the YTO loop locking routines. These errors only apply to the hardware in an 8560 E-series or EC-series spectrum analyzer. 351 SETL FLD YTO error voltage is not settling. 352 TWID FLD Unable to bring YTO error voltage DAC's to quiescent point. 353 SRCH FLD No acceptable YTO DAC value found. 354 LK ITERS Cannot lock. Lock iteration routine terminated.

332

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

Sampling Oscillator (355) This error indicates an unlocked sampling oscillator during the local oscillator (LO) alignment routine. This error only applies to the hardware in an 8560 E-series or EC-series spectrum analyzer. 355 SMP CAL Sampler unlock condition during calibration routine. This error remains until a successful recalibration is performed. Span Accuracy Calibration Errors (356 to 361) These errors are generated when the span accuracy calibration fails. The span accuracy calibration is done during "power up", IF calibration (every 5 minutes), and LO IF realignment routines. Span accuracy calibration sweeps occur during the retrace (dead time) of the main sweep ramp. The rmware then detects any span accuracy calibration errors. These errors only apply to rmware revisions 931216 and later. 356 SPAC CAL Sweep data problem nding "bucket 1" of the span accuracy calibration sweep. This error indicates a possible failure of the sweep generator, span attenuator, or main/FM coil sweep switches on the A14 frequency control assembly. Refer to Chapter 11 , Synthesizer Section. 357 SPAC CAL Cannot nd the "x" intersection for "bucket 1" of the span accuracy calibration sweep. This error indicates a possible failure of the sweep generator, span attenuator, or main/FM coil sweep switches on the A14 frequency control assembly. Refer to Chapter 11 , Synthesizer Section. 358 SPAC CAL Sweep data problem nding "bucket 2" of the span accuracy calibration sweep. This error indicates a possible failure of the sweep generator, span attenuator, or main/FM coil sweep switches on the A14 frequency control assembly. Refer to Chapter 11 , Synthesizer Section. 359 SPAC CAL Cannot nd "x" intersection for "bucket 2" of the span accuracy calibration sweep. This error indicates a possible failure of the sweep generator, span attenuator, or main/FM coil sweep switches on the A14 frequency control assembly. Refer to Chapter 11 , Synthesizer Section.

Chapter 7

333

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

360 SPAC CAL The start bucket correction is out of range. This error indicates a possible failure of the sweep generator on the A14 frequency control assembly. Refer to Sweep Generator Circuit, in Chapter 11 , Synthesizer Section. 361 SPAC CAL The percent of span correction is out of range. This error indicates a possible failure of the sweep generator on the A14 frequency control assembly. Refer to Sweep Generator Circuit, in Chapter 11 , Synthesizer Section.

Automatic IF Errors (400 to 599)

These error codes are generated when the automatic IF adjustment routine detects a fault. This routine rst adjusts amplitude parameters, then resolution bandwidths in this sequence: 300 kHz, 1 MHz, 100 kHz, 30 kHz, 10 kHz, 3 kHz, 1 kHz, 300 Hz, 100 Hz, 30 Hz, 10 Hz, 3 Hz, 1 Hz, and 2 MHz. The routine restarts from the beginning if a fault is detected. Parameters adjusted after the routine begins but before the fault is detected are correct; parameters adjusted later in the sequence are suspect. Refer to "Automatic IF Adjustment" in Chapter 8. The IF Section relies on the ADC and video circuitry to perform its continuous IF adjustments. IF-related errors occur if the ADC, video circuitry, or A4 assembly linear path is faulty. 400 AMPL <300 Unable to adjust amplitude of resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz. 401 AMPL 300 Unable to adjust amplitude of 300 Hz resolution bandwidth. 402 AMPL 1K Unable to adjust amplitude of 1 kHz resolution bandwidth. 403 AMPL 3K Unable to adjust amplitude of 3 kHz resolution bandwidth. 404 AMPL 10K Unable to adjust amplitude of 10 kHz resolution bandwidth. Errors 405 to 416: When these 10K resolution bandwidth (RBW) error messages appear, use the following steps to check for errors 581 or 582: 1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off.

334

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

2. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on and observe the lower right-hand corner of the display for 10 seconds. 3. If ERR 581 or ERR 582 appears, the fault is most likely caused by the cal oscillator. Refer to errors 581 and 582. 4. If ERR 581 or ERR 582 does not appear, troubleshoot the A5 IF assembly. Multiple IF errors during IF adjust: If a FULL IF ADJ sequence (pressing CAL and FULL IF ADJ) results in IF errors while displaying IF ADJUST STATUS: AMPLITUDE, the cal oscillator on the A4 assembly might not be providing the correct output signal. Perform the following steps: 1. Disconnect W30 (white) from A5J4. 2. Connect W30 to the input of a second spectrum analyzer and set its controls as follows: Center frequency........................... 10.7 MHz Reference level .............................. 30 dBm 3. Observe the spectrum analyzer display while pressing FULL IF ADJ on the spectrum analyzer. If a 35 dBm signal does not appear, troubleshoot the cal oscillator on the A4 assembly. 4. If a 35 dBm signal does appear, troubleshoot the A5 IF assembly. 405 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in rst crystal pole. 406 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in second crystal pole. 407 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in third crystal pole. 408 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in fourth crystal pole. 409 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in rst crystal pole. 410 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in second crystal pole. 411 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in third crystal pole.

Chapter 7

335

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

412 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in fourth crystal pole. 413 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in rst crystal pole. 414 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in second crystal pole. 415 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in third crystal pole. 416 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in fourth crystal pole. 417 RBW 3K 418 RBW 3K 419 RBW 3K 420 RBW 3K Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in rst crystal pole. Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in second crystal pole. Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in third crystal pole. Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in fourth crystal pole.

421 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in rst crystal pole. 422 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in second crystal pole. 423 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in third crystal pole. 424 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in fourth crystal pole. 425 RBW 3K 426 RBW 3K 427 RBW 3K 428 RBW 3K Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in rst crystal pole. Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in second crystal pole. Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in third crystal pole. Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in fourth crystal pole.

429 RBW <300 Unable to adjust resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz. ADC handshake. 430 RBW 300 Unable to adjust 300 Hz resolution bandwidth. ADC handshake.

336

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

431 RBW 1K 432 RBW 3K

Unable to adjust 1 kHz resolution bandwidth. ADC handshake. Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth. ADC handshake.

433 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth. ADC handshake. 434 RBW 300 300 Hz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in rst crystal pole. 435 RBW 300 300 Hz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in second crystal pole. 436 RBW 300 300 Hz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in third crystal pole. 437 RBW 300 300 Hz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in fourth crystal pole. 438 RBW 1K 439 RBW 1K 440 RBW 1K 441 RBW 1K 442 RBW 3K 443 RBW 3K 444 RBW 3K 445 RBW 3K 1 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in rst crystal pole. 1 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in second crystal pole. 1 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in third crystal pole. 1 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in fourth crystal pole. 3 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in rst crystal pole. 3 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in second crystal pole. 3 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in third crystal pole. 3 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in fourth crystal pole.

446 RBW 10K 10 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in rst crystal pole. 447 RBW 10K 10 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in second crystal pole. 448 RBW 10K 10 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in third crystal pole. 449 RBW 10K 10 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in fourth crystal pole. 450 IF SYSTM IF hardware failure. Check other error messages.

Chapter 7

337

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

451 IF SYSTM IF hardware failure. Check other error messages. 452 IF SYSTM IF hardware failure. Check other error messages. 454 AMPL 455 AMPL 456 AMPL 457 AMPL 458 AMPL 459 AMPL 460 AMPL 461 AMPL 462 AMPL 463 AMPL 464 AMPL 465 AMPL Unable to adjust step gain ampliers. Check other errors. Unable to adjust ne attenuator of the step gain ampliers. Unable to adjust ne attenuator of the step gain ampliers. Unable to adjust ne attenuator of the step gain ampliers. Unable to adjust rst step gain stage. Unable to adjust rst step gain stage. Unable to adjust rst step gain stage. Unable to adjust second step gain stage. Unable to adjust second step gain stage. Unable to adjust third step gain stage. Unable to adjust third step gain stage. Unable to adjust third step gain stage.

466 LIN AMPL Unable to adjust linear amplier scale. 467 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust step gain ampliers. 468 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust third step gain stage. 469 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust step gain ampliers. 470 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust third step gain stage. 471 RBW 30K Unable to adjust 30 kHz resolution bandwidth in rst LC pole. 472 RBW 100K Unable to adjust 100 kHz resolution bandwidth in rst LC pole. 473 RBW 300K Unable to adjust 300 kHz resolution bandwidth in rst LC pole. 474 RBW 1M Unable to adjust 1 MHz resolution bandwidth in rst LC pole.

475 RBW 30K Unable to adjust 30 kHz resolution bandwidth in second LC pole. 476 RBW 100K Unable to adjust 100 kHz resolution bandwidth in second LC pole.

338

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

477 RBW 300K Unable to adjust 300 kHz resolution bandwidth in second LC pole. 478 RBW 1M Unable to adjust 1 MHz resolution bandwidth in second LC pole.

483 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth. 484 RBW 3K 485 RBW 1K Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth. Unable to adjust 1 kHz resolution bandwidth.

486 RBW 300 Unable to adjust 300 Hz resolution bandwidth. 487 RBW 100 Unable to adjust 100 Hz resolution bandwidth. 488 RBW 100 Unable to adjust 100 Hz resolution bandwidth. 489 RBW 100 Unable to adjust 100 Hz resolution bandwidth. 490 RBW 100 Unable to adjust 100 Hz resolution bandwidth. 491 RBW <300 Unable to adjust the resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz. Crystal sweep gain problem. 492 RBW 300 Unable to adjust 300 Hz resolution bandwidth. Crystal sweep gain problem. 493 RBW 1K 494 RBW 3K Unable to adjust 1 kHz resolution bandwidth. Crystal sweep gain problem. Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth. Crystal sweep gain problem.

495 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth. Crystal sweep gain problem. 496 RBW 100 Unable to adjust 100 Hz resolution bandwidth. Inadequate Q. 497 RBW 100 Unable to adjust 100 Hz resolution bandwidth. Alignment problem. 498 RBW 100 Unable to adjust 100 Hz resolution bandwidth. Gain problem. 499 CAL UNLK Cal oscillator is unlocked. Verify the unlocked conditions as follows: 1. Place A4 in its service position and disconnect W51 (gray-yellow) from A4J7. 2. Connect W51 to the input of another spectrum analyzer. This is the 10 MHz reference for the cal oscillator.

Chapter 7

339

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

3. If a 10 MHz signal (approximately 0 dBm) is not present, suspect the A15 RF assembly, the A21 OCXO, or the A15 assembly TCXO (Option 103). If the 10 MHz reference is present, continue with step 4. 4. Reconnect W17 to A4J7 and monitor the tune voltage at A4J9 pin 3 with an oscilloscope. 5. Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer under test. 6. If the voltage is either +15 Vdc or 15 Vdc, the cal oscillator is probably at fault. Normally, the voltage should be near +15 V during a sweep, and between 9 V and +9 V during retrace. An intermittent error 499 indicates the cal osc phase-locked-loop probably can lock at 10.7 MHz, but cannot lock at the 9.9 and 11.5 MHz extremes. This may prevent the cal oscillator from adjusting the 1 MHz or 30 kHz through 300 kHz bandwidths. This symptom implies a failure in the oscillator, function block X. (See the A4 log amp/cal oscillator schematic sheet 4 of 4.) The oscillator is unable to tune the required frequency range with the 9 V to +9 V control voltage. Troubleshoot A4CR802 (most probable cause), L801, C808, C809, and U807. 500 AMPL 30K Unable to adjust amplitude of 30 kHz resolution bandwidth. 501 AMPL .1M Unable to adjust amplitude of 100 kHz resolution bandwidth. 502 AMPL .3M Unable to adjust amplitude of 300 kHz resolution bandwidth. 503 AMPL 1M Unable to adjust amplitude of 1 MHz resolution bandwidth. 504 AMPL 30K Unable to adjust amplitude of 30 kHz resolution bandwidth. 505 AMPL .1M Unable to adjust amplitude of 100 kHz resolution bandwidth. 506 AMPL .3M Unable to adjust amplitude of 300 kHz resolution bandwidth. 507 AMPL 1M Unable to adjust amplitude of 1 MHz resolution bandwidth.

340

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

508 AMPL 30K Unable to adjust amplitude of 30 kHz resolution bandwidth. Insufcient gain during LC bandwidth calibration. 509 AMPL .1M Unable to adjust amplitude of 100 kHz resolution bandwidth. Insufcient gain during LC bandwidth calibration. 510 AMPL .3M Unable to adjust amplitude of 300 kHz resolution bandwidth. Insufcient gain during LC bandwidth calibration. 511 AMPL 1M Unable to adjust amplitude of 1 MHz resolution bandwidth. Insufcient gain during LC bandwidth calibration. 512 RBW <300 Unable to adjust resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz. Insufcient gain during crystal bandwidth calibration. 513 RBW 300 Unable to adjust 300 Hz resolution bandwidth. Insufcient gain during crystal bandwidth calibration. 514 RBW 1K 515 RBW 3K Unable to adjust 1 kHz resolution bandwidth. Insufcient gain during crystal bandwidth calibration. Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth. Insufcient gain during crystal bandwidth calibration.

516 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth. Insufcient gain during crystal bandwidth calibration. 517 RBW 100 Unable to adjust 100 Hz resolution bandwidth. Crystal sweep problem. 518 RBW 300 Unable to adjust 300 Hz resolution bandwidth. Crystal sweep problem. 519 RBW 1K 520 RBW 3K Unable to adjust 1 kHz resolution bandwidth. Crystal sweep problem. Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth. Crystal sweep problem.

521 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth. Crystal sweep problem. 522 RBW 10K Unable to adjust symmetry of 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in rst crystal pole. 523 RBW 10K Unable to adjust symmetry of 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in second crystal pole. 524 RBW 10K Unable to adjust symmetry of 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in third crystal pole.

Chapter 7

341

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

525 RBW 10K Unable to adjust symmetry of 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in fourth crystal pole. 526 RBW <300 ADC timeout during IF ADJUST of <300 Hz resolution bandwidth. 527 RBW <300 Step gain correction failed for <300 Hz resolution bandwidth. Check narrow bandwidth SGO attenuator. 528 RBW <300 Calibration of dc level at ADC failed for <300 Hz resolution bandwidth. 529 RBW <300 Invalid demodulated data for <300 Hz resolution bandwidth atness and IF down-converter. Demod data for calibration may be bad. 530 RBW <300 Adjustment of VCXO down-converter failed with resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz. Narrow bandwidth VCXO calibration failed. 531 RBW <300 Flatness correction data for resolution bandwidths <300 Hz not acceptable. 532 RBW <300 Absolute gain data for resolution bandwidths <300 Hz not acceptable. 533 RBW <300 ADC timeout adjusting resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz. Timeout during data sampling narrow bandwidth chunk. 534 RBW <300 Unable to do frequency count of CAL OSC using IF down-converter when adjusting resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz. 535 RBW <300 Unable to obtain adequate FM demod range to measure 500 Hz IF lter with resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz. 536 RBW <300 Unable to auto-range chirp signal while setting VCXO or doing atness calibration with resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz. 537 RBW <300 Unable to auto-range CW CAL OSC signal to count VCXO signal with resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz. 538 RBW <300 Shape of 500 Hz IF lter appears too noisy to adjust VCXO down-converter for resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz. 539 RBW <300 Unable to auto-range the CW CAL OSC signal to pretune the VCXO for resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz.

342

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

540 RBW <300 Unable to nd CW CAL OSC signal during VCXO pretune at power-up with resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz. 550 ID CALOSC CAL Oscillator ID. Indicates incompatible hardware. Cal Osc not expected 551 ID LOGBD LOG Board ID. Indicates incompatible hardware. Log board not expected. 552 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. 553 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. 554 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. 555 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. 556 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. 557 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. 558 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. 559 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. 560 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. 561 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. Possible problem in second step gain. 562 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. Possible problem in second step gain. 563 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. Possible problem in third step gain range. 564 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. 565 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. 566 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. 567 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. Possible problem in log offset/log expand stage. 568 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. Possible problem in log offset/log expand stage. 569 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. Possible problem in log offset/log expand stage. 570 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. Possible problem in log offset/log expand stage. 571 AMPL Unable to adjust step gain ampliers.

572 AMPL 1M Unable to adjust amplitude of 1 MHz resolution bandwidth.

Chapter 7

343

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

573 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. Check video offset circuitry. 574 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. Check video offset circuitry. 575 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. Check video offset circuitry. 576 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. Check video offset circuitry. 577 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. Check video offset circuitry. 578 LOG AMPL Limiter calibration error from DC logger calibration. 579 LOG AMPL Attenuator CAL level error from DC logger calibration. 580 LOG AMPL Calibration level error from DC logger delity calibration. 581 AMPL Unable to adjust 100 kHz resolution bandwidth and resolution bandwidths less than or equal to 10 kHz. ADC/CALOSC handshake calibration problem in crystal sweep. Refer to Error 582. Unable to adjust 100 kHz resolution bandwidth and resolution bandwidths less than or equal to 10 kHz. Bad CALOSC calibration in sweep rate. Test the 100 kHz resolution bandwidth lter 3 dB bandwidth as follows: 1. Connect the CAL OUTPUT signal (A4J8) to the INPUT 50. 2. Press PRESET and set the controls as follows: Center frequency ........................ 300 MHz Span .............................................. 500 kHz Resolution bandwidth .................. 100 kHz Log dB/div .......................................... 1 dB Reference level ......... adjust to place signal peak at top of the screen 3. Press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA and turn the knob clockwise to position the marker until the delta MKR reads 3 dB 0.1 dB. 4. Press MARKER DELTA and move the marker to the other side of the peak until the delta MKR reads 0 dB 0.1 dB.

582 AMPL

344

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

5. If the delta MKR frequency is between 90 kHz and 110 kHz, the 100 kHz resolution bandwidth is working properly. If the frequency is outside these limits, read the following information on the A4 cal oscillator sweep generator. If the 100 kHz resolution bandwidth works properly, the cal oscillator sweep generator is failing to sweep its oscillator frequency at the correct rate. The error is detected in sweeping on the skirts of the 100 kHz resolution bandwidth. A properly operating sweep generator generates a series of negative-going parabolas. These parabolas generate the sweeps used to adjust resolution bandwidths of 10 kHz and below. Check the sweep generator with the following steps. Refer also to the 300 Hz to 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Out of Specication troubleshooting text in Chapter 9 , IF Section. 1. Remove the shields. 2. Connect an oscilloscope probe to A4U804C pin 8. 3. On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL and FULL IF ADJ. 4. Approximately 8 seconds after starting the FULL IF ADJ, check for negative-going parabolas (similar to half-sine waves) 5 ms wide and approximately 4 V at their peak. Refer to Chapter 9 , IF Section, for more information on the A4 log amp/cal oscillator assembly. 583 RBW 30K Unable to adjust 30 kHz resolution bandwidth. 584 RBW 100K Unable to adjust 100 kHz resolution bandwidth. 585 RBW 300K Unable to adjust 300 kHz resolution bandwidth. 586 RBW 1M Unable to adjust 1 MHz resolution bandwidth.

587 RBW 30K Unable to adjust 30 kHz resolution bandwidth. 588 RBW 100K Unable to adjust 100 kHz resolution bandwidth. 589 RBW 300K Unable to adjust 300 kHz resolution bandwidth. 590 RBW 1M Unable to adjust 1 MHz resolution bandwidth.

591 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale. 592 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale.

Chapter 7

345

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

593 LOG TUNE Limiter calibration tune error from DC logger calibration. 594 LOG OFST Attenuator calibration offset error from DC logger calibration. 595 LOG ATTN Attenuator calibration absolute error from DC logger calibration. 596 LOG FID Fidelity error from DC logger calibration. 597 LOG OFST Fidelity offset error from DC logger calibration. 598 LOG OFST Fidelity offset unstable from DC logger calibration. 599 LOG GAIN Fidelity gain error from DC logger calibration.

System Errors (600 to 651)

ADC timeout errors occur if the A2 controller assembly frequency counter is faulty. Refer to Chapter 8 , ADC/Interface Section. 600 SYSTEM 601 SYSTEM Hardware/rmware interaction; check other errors. Hardware/rmware interaction; check other errors.

650 OUTOF RG ADC input is outside of the ADC range. 651 NO IRQ Microprocessor is not receiving interrupt from ADC.

Digital and Checksum Errors (700 to 799)

EEROM Checksum Errors (700 to 704) Faults on the A2 controller assembly can cause these errors. Refer to Chapter 10 , Controller Section.Although some of these errors might result in a blanked display, it is possible to read these errors over GPIB. Refer to Troubleshooting to a Functional Section on page 324. The EEROM on the A2 controller assembly is used to store data for frequency response correction, elapsed time, focus, and intensity levels. Error codes from 700 to 703 indicate that some part of the data in EEROM is invalid. An EEROM error could result from either a defective EEROM or an improper sequence of storing data in EEROM. Check the EEROM with the following steps: 1. Place the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly in the WR ENA position.

346

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

2. On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL MORE 1 OF 2, SERVICE CAL DATA, FLATNESS, and FLATNESS DATA. Enter a value of 130. Press PREV MENU, STORE DATA, YES, and DISPLAY. 3. Press INTEN, enter an intensity value of 90, and press STORE INTEN. 4. Press MORE 1 OF 2 FOCUS, enter a focus value of 128, and press STORE FOCUS. Turn the LINE switch off, then on, cycling the power. 5. If errors are still present, the EEROM A2U501 is defective. Refer to the EEROM replacement procedure in Chapter 4 . 700 EEROM Checksum error of EEROM A2U501.

701 AMPL CAL Checksum error of frequency response correction data. 702 ELAP TIM Checksum error of elapsed time data. 703 AMPL CAL Checksum error of frequency response correction data. Default values being used. 704 PRESELCT Checksum error of customer preselector peak data. External preselector data recalled in internal mode, or internal preselector data recalled in external mode. To clear the error, press RECALL, MORE 1 OF 2, FACTORY PRSEL PK, SAVE, and SAVE PRSEL PK. Program ROM Checksum Errors (705 to 710) The instrument power-on diagnostics perform a checksum on each programmed ROM (A2 controller assembly). If an invalid checksum is found for a particular ROM, an error code is generated. If a defective programmed ROM is found, replace it with another ROM with the same part number. Refer to Chapter 5 , Replaceable Parts. Although some of these errors might result in a blanked display, it is possible to read these errors over GPIB. Refer to Troubleshooting to a Functional Section on page 324. 705 ROM U306 Checksum error of program ROM A2U306. 706 ROM U307 Checksum error of program ROM A2U307. 707 ROM U308 Checksum error of program ROM A2U308. 708 ROM U309 Checksum error of program ROM A2U309. 709 ROM U310 Checksum error of program ROM A2U310.

Chapter 7

347

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

710 ROM U311 Checksum error of program ROM A2U311. RAM Check Errors (711 to 716) The instrument power-on diagnostics check the program RAM. This includes the two RAMs used for STATE storage. If any STATE information is found to be invalid, all data in that RAM is destroyed. A separate error code is generated for each defective program RAM. All RAM is battery-backed. See Stateand Trace-Storage Problems in Chapter 10 . 711 RAM U303 Checksum error of system RAM A2U303. 712 RAM U302 Checksum error of system RAM A2U302. 713 RAM U301 Checksum error of system RAM A2U301. 714 RAM U300 Checksum error of system RAM A2U300. 715 RAM U305 Checksum error of system RAM A2U305. 716 RAM U304 Checksum error of system RAM A2U304. Microprocessor Error (717) 717 BAD uP Microprocessor not fully operational. Refer to Chapter 10, "Controller Section."

Battery Problem (718)

If STATE or TRACE data is found to be corrupt, the processor tests the display RAMs and the program RAMs containing the STATE information. If the RAMs are working properly, this error message is generated. To check the BT1 battery and the battery backup circuitry, refer to State- and Trace-Storage Problems in Chapter 10 . 718 BATTERY? Nonvolatile RAM not working; check battery BT1. This error can also be generated if the battery has been disconnected then reconnected. If this is the cause, cycling power clears the error.

Model/Option Number Errors (719 to 720)

If one of these errors occurs, return the instrument to a service center for repair. 719 MODEL #? Could not read ID string from EEROM A2U501. 720 OPTION #? Cannot identify an option number.

348

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

RAM Check Error (721)

721 AMPC RAM Checksum error of the ampcor function correction data.

System Errors (750 to 759)

These errors often require troubleshooting the A2 controller and A3 interface assemblies. 750 SYSTEM 751 SYSTEM 752 SYSTEM 753 SYSTEM 754 SYSTEM 755 SYSTEM 756 SYSTEM 757 SYSTEM 758 SYSTEM 759 SYSTEM Hardware/rmware interaction, zero divide. Check for other errors. Hardware/rmware interaction, oating point overow. Check for other errors. Hardware/rmware interaction, oating point underow. Check for other errors. Hardware/rmware interaction, log error. Check for other errors. Hardware/rmware interaction, integer overow. Check for other errors. Hardware/rmware interaction, square root error. Check for other errors. Hardware/rmware interaction, triple overow. Check for other errors. Hardware/rmware interaction, BCD overow. Check for other errors. Unknown system error. Hardware/rmware interaction. Code invoked for wrong instrument.

Fast ADC Error (760)

This error applies only to EC-series instruments and to E-series instruments with fast ADC (Option 007). 760 NO FADC The FADC board did not respond properly to initialization commands.

Option Module Errors (800 to 899)

These error codes are reserved for option modules, such as the 85629 test and adjustment module and the 85620A mass memory module. Refer to the option module manual for a listing of error messages.

Chapter 7

349

General Troubleshooting Error Messages

User-Generated Errors (900 to 999)

These error codes indicate user-generated errors. 900 TG UNLVL Tracking generator output is unleveled. 901 TGFrqLmt Tracking generator output unleveled because START FREQ is set below tracking generator frequency limit (300 kHz). 902 BAD NORM The state of the stored trace does not match the current state of the spectrum analyzer. 903 A > DLMT Unnormalized trace A is off-screen with trace math or normalization on. 904 B > DLMT Calibration trace (trace B) is off-screen with trace math or normalization on. 905 EXT REF Unable to lock cal oscillator when set to external frequency reference. Check that the external 10 MHz reference is within tolerance. 906 OVENCOLD The oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO) oven is cold. 907 DO IF CAL Unit is still performing IF calibrations, or is in need of IF calibrations which were not yet done due to an OVENCOLD condition. An OVENCOLD error is indicative of a bandwidth 1 kHz not getting calibrated. 908 BW>>SPCG Channel bandwidth is too wide, compared to the channel spacing, for a meaningful adjacent channel power computation. 909 SPANACP The frequency span is too small to obtain a valid adjacent channel power (ACP) measurement. 910 SPAN>ACP The frequency span is too wide, compared to the channel bandwidth, to obtain a valid adjacent channel power (ACP) measurement. 911 ACPSTATE Adjacent channel power (ACP) measurement has been compromised (invalid measurement parameters). 921 AMPCOR Measurement data which would normally be displayed above the top graticule, and therefore has unspecied accuracy, has been corrected by the amplitude correction function (ampcor) to appear between the top and bottom graticule. 922 AMPCOR Measurement data which would normally be displayed below the bottom graticule, and therefore has unspecied accuracy, has been corrected by the amplitude correction function (ampcor) to appear between the top and bottom graticule.

350

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Block Diagram Description

Block Diagram Description

The spectrum analyzer is comprised of the six main sections listed below. See Figure 7-6 on page 352. The following descriptions apply to the simplied block diagram and overall block diagram located at the end of this chapter. Assembly level block diagrams are located in Chapters 8 through 13.

Chapter 7

351

General Troubleshooting Block Diagram Description

Figure 7-6

Functional Sections

352

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Block Diagram Description

RF Section
The RF section of the 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC includes the following assemblies: A7 LOMA (LO multiplier/amplier) A8 low band mixer A9 input attenuator A10 RYTHM (YIG-tuned lter/mixer) A11 YTO (YIG-tuned oscillator) A12 SBTX (switched barium-tuned mixer) A13 second converter A14 frequency control assembly (also in synthesizer section) A15 RF assembly (also in synthesizer section) FL1, FL2, FL3, and FL5 low-pass lters The RF section converts all input signals to a xed IF of 10.7 MHz. The RF section microcircuits are controlled by signals from the A14 frequency control and A15 RF assemblies. Band 0 .............................................................. 9 kHz to 2.9 GHz Bands 1 through 3 .............................................. 2.9 to 26.5 GHz Bands 4 and 5 ...................................................... 26.5 to 50 GHz Band 0 and bands 4 and 5 use triple conversion to produce the 10.7 MHz IF, and a fourth conversion used only in the digital resolution bandwidths (100 Hz). In band 0, A8 low band mixer up-converts the RF input to a 1st IF of 3.9107 GHz. In bands 4 and 5, A12 SBTX down-converts the RF input to a 1st IF of 3.9107 GHz. A13 second converter down-converts the 3.9107 GHz IF to an IF of 310.7 MHz. A third conversion on the A15 RF assembly down-converts the second IF to the 10.7 MHz third IF. A fourth conversion on the A4 log amplier assembly down-converts the third IF to the 4.8 kHz fourth IF used only in the digital resolution bandwidths (100 Hz). Bands 1 through 3 use double conversion. A third conversion is used for the digital resolution bandwidths (100 Hz). A10 RYTHM down-converts the RF input to a 1st IF of 310.7 MHz. Although this IF passes through the A13 second converter, it bypasses the second mixer. The second conversion on the A15 RF assembly down-converts the 310.7 MHz IF to 10.7 MHz. A third conversion on the A4 log amplier assembly down-converts the second IF to the 4.8 kHz third IF used only in the digital resolution bandwidths (100 Hz).

Chapter 7

353

General Troubleshooting Block Diagram Description

A7 LOMA The A7 LOMA (LO multiplier/amplier) levels the output of the A11 YTO and distributes the YTO fundamental frequency to the front panel 1ST LO OUTPUT, A8 low band mixer, A10 RYTHM, and A15U100 sampler. It also doubles the YTO frequency and levels this signal for use by the A12 SBTX. The leveling circuitry is on the A14 frequency control assembly. A8 Low Band Mixer (serial prex <3641A) A8 low band mixer is ac-coupled and contains a limiter. (Option 006 is dc-coupled.) The high band mixing is done in either the A10 YIG-tuned lter/mixer or the A12 SBTX. PIN diode switches in A10 and A12 direct the RF input to the appropriate mixer. A PIN diode switch in A7 LOMA directs the 1st LO to the appropriate mixer. A8 Low Band Mixer (serial prex 3641A) A8 low band mixer is dc-coupled and contains a limiter. (Non-Option 006 analyzers have a dc block (AT1), connected to the input of A8.) The high-band mixing is done in either the A10 YIG-tuned lter/mixer or the A12 SBTX. PIN diode switches in A10 and A12 direct the RF input to the appropriate mixer. A PIN diode switch in A7 LOMA directs the 1st LO to the appropriate mixer. Power for the LO and RF ampliers is provided via W15 from A14. A9 Input Attenuator The attenuator is a 50 precision, coaxial step attenuator. Attenuation in 10 dB steps from 0 dB to 70 dB is accomplished by switching the signal path through one or more of the three resistive pads. The attenuator automatically sets to 70 dB when the spectrum analyzer turns off, providing ESD protection. (Note that the input attenuator is not eld-repairable.) A10 YIG-Tuned Filter/Mixer The YIG-tuned lter/mixer (RYTHM) is a combination of an RF switch, a microwave (2.9 GHz to 26.8 GHz) mixer, and a tracking preselector. The PIN diode switch directs the RF input to the appropriate mixer in the A10 RYTHM assembly or A8 low band mixer. The tracking preselector is a YIG-tuned lter. It functions as a tunable bandpass lter for microwave signals. Coarse frequency control originates from slope and offset DACs located on the A14 frequency control assembly. (Slope and offset DAC values are loaded into EEROM.)

354

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Block Diagram Description

Fine frequency control originates from a preselector peak DAC located on the A3 interface assembly. Values for the preselector peak DAC are interpolated approximately every 17 MHz based upon data taken during the frequency response (atness) adjustment. The preselector bandwidth varies from greater than 30 MHz, at 2.75 GHz, to greater than 60 MHz, at 26.5 GHz. The mixer is ac coupled. It uses the rst, second, and fourth harmonics, mixed with the 1st LOcal oscillator, to cover the frequency range. A PIN diode switch in A7 LOMA directs the 1st LO to the appropriate mixer. The A14 frequency control assembly provides PIN diode bias. A11 YTO

A11 is a YTO (YIG-tuned oscillator). YIG (yttrium-iron-garnet) is a ferro-magnetic material which is polished into a small sphere and precisely oriented in a magnetic eld. Changes in this magnetic eld alter the frequency generated by the YTO. Current control of the magnetic eld surrounding the YIG sphere tunes the oscillator to the desired frequency. A12 Switched Barium-Tuned Mixer (SBTX) The switched barium-tuned mixer (SBTX) is a combination of an RF switch, tracking preselector, millimeter (26.5 GHz to 50 GHz) mixer, and low-noise amplier. The PIN diode switch directs the RF input to the appropriate mixer in the A12 SBTX or to A10 RYTHM, where it may be again switched to the A8 low band mixer. The tracking preselector is a barium-tuned lter. It functions as a tunable bandpass lter for millimeter signals. Coarse frequency control originates from slope and offset DACs located on the A14 frequency control assembly. (Slope and offset DAC values are loaded into EEROM.) Fine frequency control originates from a preselector peak DAC located on the A3 interface assembly. Values for the preselector peak DAC are interpolated approximately every 17 MHz based upon data taken during the frequency response adjustment ('front-end cal'). The preselector 3 dB bandwidth varies from approximately 200 MHz at 26.5 GHz to approximately 300 MHz at 50 GHz. The millimeter mixer IF (3.9107 GHz) is fed through a low-noise amplier and one input of a PIN diode switch before being sent to the A13 second converter. The other switch input accepts the IF output of the A8 low band mixer.

Chapter 7

355

General Troubleshooting Block Diagram Description

A13 Second Converter The A13 second converter down-converts the 3.9107 GHz 1st IF (low-band and millimeter band) to a 310.7 MHz 2nd IF. In the microwave band, it passes the 310.7 MHz 1st IF from the A10 YIG-tuned lter/mixer to the A15 RF assembly. The converter generates a 3.6 GHz second LO by multiplying a 600 MHz reference. Bandpass lters remove unwanted harmonics of the 600 MHz driving signal. 1st IF and 2nd LO signals are ltered by cavity lters. Second IF Amplier (part of A15) The second IF amplier (SIFA) amplies and lters the second IF. Access to this pre-ltered signal is available at the rear panel 2ND IF OUTPUT (Option 001 only). The external mixing input from the front panel IF INPUT connector is also directed through the SIFA. A dc bias is placed onto the IF INPUT line for biasing external mixers. Third Converter (part of A15) The third converter down-converts the 310.7 MHz IF to 10.7 MHz. A PIN-diode switch selects the LO signal used. For normal operation, a 300 MHz LO signal is used. The signal is derived from the 600 MHz reference PLL. During signal identication (SIG ID ON), the 298 MHz SIG ID oscillator is fed to the double balanced mixer on alternate sweeps. Flatness Compensation Ampliers (part of A15) The atness compensation ampliers amplify the output of the double-balanced mixer. The variable gain of the amplier (0 to 45 dB) compensates for atness variations within a band. Band conversion loss is compensated by step gain ampliers in the IF section. Control for the ampliers originates from two DACs on the A3 Interface assembly. (DAC values are interpolated approximately every 17 MHz based on data obtained during the frequency response adjustment.) The atness-compensation control circuitry on A15 converts the RF GAIN voltage, from A3, into two currents: RF GAIN1 and RF GAIN2. These currents drive PIN diodes in the atness compensation ampliers.

356

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Block Diagram Description

Synthesizer Section
The 1st LO is phase-locked to the 10 MHz standard internal to the instrument by four PLLs. See Figure 7-7 on page 358. The reference PLL supplies reference frequencies for the instrument. The three remaining PLLs tune and phase-lock the LO through its frequency range. To tune the LO to a particular frequency, the instrument microprocessor must set the programmable feedback dividers (N) and reference dividers (R) contained in each PLL. Sweeping the 1st LO The spectrum analyzer uses a method called lock and roll to sweep the 1st LO (A11 YTO) for LO spans >2 MHz. This involves phase-locking the spectrum analyzer at the start frequency during the retrace of the sweep, then sweeping through the desired frequency range in an unlocked condition. The sweep ramp, which sweeps the LO during the roll part of the lock and roll process, is generated on the A14 frequency control assembly. It is applied to either the main coil or the FM coil of the A11 YTO. For LO spans2.0 MHz, the YTO PLL remains locked and the fractional N PLL sweeps while remaining phase locked. The frequency/span relationships are as follows:
A11 YTO Spanwidth 20.1 MHz to 3.8107 GHz 2.01 MHz to 20.0 MHz 100 Hz to 2 MHz Sweep Applied To A11 YTO main coil A11 YTO FM coil Fractional N phase locked loop

When the sweep ramp is applied to the YTO, the spectrum analyzer must prevent this loop from trying to compensate for changes in the output frequency. To accomplish this, the spectrum analyzer opens the PLL by disconnecting the YTO PLL phase detector output. Reference PLL (part of A15) The 100 MHz PLL output is routed through multipliers to provide 600 MHz for the second LO, and 300 MHz for the third LO and the sampling oscillator reference. In spectrum analyzers with A15 assemblies earlier than 08563-60054, 08563-60055, or 08563-60056, the PLL circuitry consists of a 600 MHz SAWR which is divided down to obtain the 300 MHz. The reference PLL is also divided down to 10 MHz for the fractional N PLL. The reference PLL is locked to a 10 MHz OCXO (oven-compensated crystal oscillator) or a TCXO (Option 103). The PLL can also be locked to an external frequency reference. The 10 MHz reference also supplies the reference for the frequency counter on the A2 controller assembly, and the cal oscillator on the A4 assembly.

Chapter 7

357

General Troubleshooting Block Diagram Description

YTO PLL (A7, A11, part of A14, part of A15) The YTO PLL produces the 1st LO of the instrument (3.0 to 6.81 GHz). The YTO output is mixed with a harmonic of the sampling oscillator in the sampler (A15A2), and the resulting frequency is phase-locked to the output of the fractional N PLL. The A15U100 sampler mixes the LO signal from the A7 LOMA with a harmonic of the sampling oscillator. The mixing product, the sampler IF, is between 60 and 96 MHz (same frequency range as the fractional N PLL). Offset Lock Loop (part of A15) The 285 MHz to 297.2 MHz sampling oscillator is used to sample the YTO. By changing the offset lock loop programmable dividers, the YTO frequency can be changed. Figure 7-7 Phase Lock Loops

358

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Block Diagram Description

Fractional N PLL (part of A14) The fractional N PLL produces an output of 60 MHz to 96 MHz. This PLL output serves as the reference frequency for the YTO PLL. A one-to-one relationship in frequency tracking exists between the fractional N PLL and the YTO. A change of 1 MHz in the fractional N PLL will produce a 1 MHz change in the YTO frequency.

IF Section
The IF section processes the 10.7 MHz output of the RF section and sends the detected video to the ADC/interface section. The following major assemblies are included in this section: A3 interface assembly A4 log amplier/calibration oscillator assembly A5 IF assembly The spectrum analyzer uses trace-data manipulation to generate the 5 dB/DIV scale from the 10 dB/DIV scale. The A3 interface assembly amplies and offsets the 10 dB/DIV video to generate the 2 dB/DIV scale. The 1 dB/DIV scale is generated from the 2 dB/DIV scale through trace data manipulation. The rst 50 dB of IF gain (log and linear mode) is achieved using the linear step-gain ampliers on the A5 assembly. The video-offset circuit on the A4 assembly provides the remaining 60 dB of log mode IF gain. The linear ampliers on the A4 assembly provide 40 dB of linear mode gain. IF gain steps of less than 10 dB (regardless of the reference level) are accomplished on the A5 assembly. A4 Log Amplier/Cal Oscillator Assembly The A4 log amplier has separate log and linear amplier paths. After amplication, the signal path consists of a linear detector, video log amp, buffer amplier, video offset, and video buffer amplier. Other auxiliary functions include the frequency counter prescaler/conditioner, the AM/FM demodulator, and down-conversion to 4.8 kHz for digital resolution bandwidths of 1 Hz through 100 Hz. The cal oscillator, which is part of A4, supplies the stimulus signal for automatic IF adjustments. Normally, the oscillator operates only during retrace (for a few milliseconds) to adjust part of the IF. (All IF parameters will be re-adjusted approximately every ve minutes.) With continuous IF adjust on, a group of IF parameters are adjusted during each retrace period (non-disruptive). If continuous IF adjust is off, the most recent IF calibration data will be used. The IF parameters adjusted include step gains, log amplier gain and offset, bandwidth centering, 3 dB bandwidth, bandwidth amplitude, crystal-lter symmetry, and oscillator frequency used in 1 Hz through 100 Hz resolution bandwidths.

Chapter 7

359

General Troubleshooting Block Diagram Description

The cal oscillator output has three forms (all 35 dBm): 10.7 MHz 9.9 to 11.5 MHz in 100 kHz steps Frequency sweeps from 20 kHz to 2 kHz centered at 10.7 MHz (lasting 5 to 60 ms respectively) The purpose of these signals is: Adjust gains, log amps, and video slopes and offsets Adjust 3 dB bandwidth and center frequencies of LC resolution BW lters (30 kHz through 1 MHz). Adjust 3 dB bandwidth, symmetry, and gain of the crystal resolution BW lters (300 Hz through 10 kHz). Adjust gain and gain-vs-frequency for digital resolution bandwidths (1 Hz through 100 Hz). A5 IF Assembly The A5 IF assembly has four crystal lter poles, four LC lter poles, and step gain ampliers. The crystal lters provide resolution bandwidths of 300 Hz to 10 kHz. The LC lters provide resolution bandwidths of 30 kHz to 2 MHz. All lter stages are in series. PIN diode switches bypass unwanted stages. An automatic IF adjustment, in spectrum analyzer rmware, sets center frequency and 3 dB bandwidth of all lter poles through varactor and PIN diodes. The rmware also controls crystal-pole symmetry and the step gain amplication.

ADC/Interface Section
The ADC/interface section is the link between the controller section and the rest of the spectrum analyzer. It controls the RF, synthesizer, and IF sections through address and data lines on the W2 control cable (analog bus). Analog signals from these sections are monitored by the ADC (analog to digital converter) circuit on the ADC/interface section. The ADC/interface section includes the A3 interface assembly, A1A1 keyboard, and A1A2 RPG (front panel knob). The A3 assembly includes log expand, video lter, peak detector, track-and-hold, real-time DACs, RF gain DACs, +10 V reference, and ADC circuitry. The digital section of the A3 assembly includes ADC ASM, sweep trigger, keyboard interface, RPG interface, and analog bus interface circuitry.

360

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Block Diagram Description

ADC The spectrum analyzer can digitize signals with either the main ADC on the A3 interface assembly, or the optional A16 fast ADC (Option 007). The main ADC is used for digitizing video signals (when the sweep time is 30 ms) and various other signals such as PLL error voltages. The fast ADC is used only to digitize video signals for sweep times 30 ms. Main ADC (part of A3 interface assembly) For slower sweep times (30 ms) the spectrum analyzer uses a successive-approximation type of ADC. The main ADC has a 10-bit resolution but it is realized with 12-bit hardware. The ADC algorithmic state machine (ADC ASM) controls the interface between the start/stop control and the ADC itself, switching between positive and negative peak detectors when the NORMAL detector mode is selected, and switching the ramp counter into the ADC for comparison to the analog sweep ramp. Fast ADC When Option 007 is installed and sweep times 30 ms are selected, the spectrum analyzer digitizes video signals with the A16 fast ADC. The fast ADC uses an 8-bit ash ADC, sampled at a 12 MHz rate. Only POS PEAK, NEG PEAK, and SAMPLE detector modes are available with fast ADC; NORMAL detector mode is not available. Pretriggering is possible with fast ADC. Log Expand/Video Functions The A3 interface assembly performs log expand and offset functions. The log expand/log offset amplier provides a 2 dB/Div log scale. When the main ADC is used, the 5 dB/Div scale is derived by multiplying the digitized 10 dB/Div trace data by two in the CPU. When the fast ADC is used, the 5 dB/Div scale is derived by amplifying the video signal by two. The 1 dB/Div scale is similarly derived by either multiplying the 2 dB/Div trace data by two (main ADC) or amplifying the video signal by two (fast ADC). The spectrum analyzer uses two types of video lters. An RC low-pass circuit provides 300 Hz to 3 MHz video bandwidths. Video bandwidths 100 Hz are generated using digital ltering. Digitally ltered video bandwidths use a sample detector. When sample detection is selected, the effective video bandwidth is limited to approximately 450 kHz. When a digital lter is selected, a D appears along the left edge of the CRT, indicating that something other than the normal detector mode is being used. After ltering, the video is sent to the positive and negative peak detectors. These detectors are designed for optimum pulse response. The positive peak detector resets at the end of each horizontal "bucket" (there are 601 such buckets across the screen). The negative peak detector resets at the end of every other bucket. When reset, the output of the peak detector equals its input.

Chapter 7

361

General Troubleshooting Block Diagram Description

Triggering The spectrum analyzer has ve trigger modes: free run, single, external, video, and line. The free run and single trigger signal comes from the 1 MHz ADC clock. The line trigger signal comes from the A6 power supply. Video triggering originates from the A3 video lter buffer circuit. External triggering requires either a high or low TTL logic level as determined by the setting of the trigger polarity function. The external trigger signal is received from a rear panel BNC connector. A DAC in the trigger circuit sets the video trigger level. The trigger circuit is responsible for setting HSCAN high.

Controller Section
The controller section includes the A2 controller assembly and A19 GPIB assembly. The battery on the rear panel provides battery backup for state and trace storage. In 8564EC and 8565EC instruments the A2 contains the CPU, RAM, ROM, the display ASM, Fast ADC circuitry, GPIB interface, control, frequency counter, display RAM, option module interface, and EEROM. In 8564E and 8565E instruments the A2 contains the CPU, RAM, ROM, the display ASM and line generators, CRT blanking, focus, intensity, GPIB interface, control, frequency counter, display RAM, option module interface, and EEROM. In 8561E and 8563E instruments the A2 assembly controls the A17 CRT driver through W7. The A19 GPIB is a mechanical interface between the standard GPIB connector and the ribbon cable connector on the A2 controller assembly. All four RAM ICs are battery-backed. The battery-backed RAM stores trace information (two display memory RAMs) and spectrum analyzer state information (two program RAMs). A total of eight traces and ten states may be stored. Typical battery life is ve years with the lithium battery. Trace and state information may be retained for up to 30 minutes with a dead battery and power turned off. This is due to the very low data retention current of the RAM. EEROM The EEROM stores important amplitude-related correction data. This includes data for LO distribution amplier DACs, preselector slope and offset DACs, RF gain DACs (atness correction), and preselector peak DAC. The spectrum analyzer serial number, model number, and installed options are also stored in EEROM. Firmware The spectrum analyzer rmware reads the model number and installed options from the EEROM to determine how to respond to certain keystrokes.

362

Chapter 7

General Troubleshooting Block Diagram Description

Display ASM Much of the miscellaneous digital control is performed by A2U100. U100 functions as the display ASM (algorithmic state machine) and character ROM. It also converts the 16-bit CPU data bus to an 8-bit data bus for the rest of the spectrum analyzer.

Display/Power Supply Section

A6 Power Supply The A6 power supply is a switching supply operating at 40 kHz for low voltages in both EC-series and E-series instruments. In E-series instruments, the power supply also provides the 30 kHz signal for the CRT supplies (cathode, lament, +110 Vdc, and post accelerator). The A6A1 high voltage module contains the high-voltage transformer and post-accelerator multiplier. Power is distributed through W8 to A17 and through W1 to the rest of the assemblies. A6A1W2 supplies CRT cathode and lament voltages to the A17 assembly The speed of the spectrum analyzer fan is variable. A thermistor on A6 senses the temperature and adjusts the fan speed accordingly. This allows the spectrum analyzer to run quietly in most room-temperature environments and faster (louder) only when necessary. A17 LCD Display Driver (EC-series) The display is an LCD color at panel screen with 640 X 480 VGA resolution. A connector for an external VGA is available at the rear panel. The A17A1 backlight supply provides the high voltage to supply the two backlights in the LCD display. The LCD display is not adjustable. The display driver board consists of the Hitatchi 7707 processor, an Actel FPGA, DRAM, SRAM, a lter circuit, and a video DAC. This board monitors the 8560 EC-series controller board, copies display instructions to local memory, creates a bitmap from the data, and generates the signals needed to drive the LCD and a VGA monitor. The video DAC converts the digital color information from the LCD to analog; these analog signals drive the RGB color lines on the VGA port on the rear panel.

Chapter 7

363

General Troubleshooting Block Diagram Description

A17 CRT Display Driver (E-series) The line generators on the A2 assembly drive the A17 CRT driver. The A17 assembly contains X and Y deection ampliers, focus and intensity grid ampliers, and miscellaneous CRT bias circuitry. The high voltage is supplied by A6A1 high voltage module. In fast-analog zero-span mode (sweep times 30 ms without Option 007), the 0-SPAN VIDEO signal from A3 and the sweep ramp from A14 connects to the A17 CRT driver. The graticule and annotation are still digitally drawn.

364

Chapter 7

ADC/Interface Section

377

ADC/Interface Section Introduction

Introduction
The ADC/Interface section includes the A1A1 keyboard, A1A2 RPG (rotary pulse generator), A3 interface, and A16 fast ADC (Option 007) assemblies. Table 8-1 on page 379 lists signal versus pin numbers for control cable W2. Figure 8-1 on page 380 illustrates the location of the test connectors on A3. Keyboard/RPG Problems ..............................................page Keyboard Interface ......................................................page RPG Interface ..............................................................page Triggering or Video Gating Problems ..........................page Preselector Peaking Control (Real Time DAC) ............page Flatness Control (RF Gain DACs) ................................page A3 Assembly Video Circuits ........................................ page Log Offset/Log Expand ...............................................page Video MUX ..................................................................page Video Filter ..................................................................page Video Filter Buffer Amplier ......................................page Positive/Negative Peak Detectors ...............................page Peak Detector Reset ....................................................page Rosenfell Detector .......................................................page ADC MUX ....................................................................page Variable Gain Amplier (VGA) ..................................page Track and Hold ............................................................page A3 Assembly ADC Circuits ...........................................page ADC Control Signals ...................................................page ADC Start/Stop Control ..............................................page ADC ASM ....................................................................page ADC ..............................................................................page Ramp Counter .............................................................page A3 Assembly Control Circuits ......................................page Analog Bus Drivers .....................................................page Analog Bus Timing ......................................................page Interface Strobe Select ................................................page A16 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits (8564E and 8565E, Option 007) ....................................................................page Video Input Scaling Ampliers and Limiter .............page 8-Bit Flash ADC ..........................................................page Peak/Pit Detection .......................................................page 32 K-Byte Static RAM .................................................page A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (8564E and 8565E, Option 007) ....................................................... page CPU Interface and Control Registers ........................page Reference Clock ...........................................................page Clock and Sample Rate Generator .............................page Trigger .........................................................................page Page 382 382 383 385 388 389 391 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 402 402 403 403 404 405 405 406 407 407 408 409 411 411 412 413 414 415 415 418 418 419

378

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section Introduction

16-Bit Post-Trigger Counter ...................................... page 420 15-Bit (32 K) Circular Address Counter ................... page 420 Video Trigger Comparator ........................................ page 421 Table 8-1 W2 Control Cable Connections (1 of 2)
Signal D0 D GND D1 D2 D3 D4 D GND D5 D6 D7 A0 D GND A1 A2 A3 A4 D GND A5 A6 A7 D GND LRF_STB LFC_STB LIF_STB CAL OSC TUNE LLOG_STB VCMON D GND RT PULSE HSCAN D GND RESERVED OFL ERR R/T DAC3 A3J2 (pins) 1* 2* 3* 4* 5* 6* 7* 8* 9* 10* 11* 12* 13* 14* 15* 16* 17* 18* 19* 20* 21* 22* 23* 24* 25 26* 28* 29* 30* 31* 33 34* A4J2 (pins) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 17 21 25* A5J2 (pins) 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 27 A14J2 (pins) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 23 27 28 30 31 A15J2 (pins) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 21 22 28 31 33*

26 28 23 31 20 * Indicates signal source.

Chapter 8

379

ADC/Interface Section Introduction

Table 8-2

Table 8-1. W2 Control Cable Connections (2 of 2)

Signal A GND RF GAIN LO3 ERR A GND LVFC_ENABLE FC ERR A GND YTO ERR +10V REF A GND SCAN RAMP VIDEO TRIGGER A GND NC R/T DAC2 R/T DAC1 A3J2 (pins) 35* 36* 38* 39* 40 41* 42 43* 44* 45 46* 47* 49* 50* A4J2 (pins) 35 38 41 43 44 A5J2 (pins) 16 13 10 7 A14J2 (pins) 35 37 38 39 40* 41 42* 44 45* 47 50 A15J2 (pins) 35 36 37* 38 41 43 44 47

47 4 * Indicates signal source.

Figure 8-1

A3 Test Connectors

380

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section Introduction

Figure 8-2

A3 Test Connector Pin Locations

Chapter 8

381

ADC/Interface Section Keyboard/RPG Problems

Keyboard/RPG Problems
Keyboard Interface
Refer to function block G of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 3 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. A pressed key results in a low on a keyboard sense line (LKSNS0 through LKSNS7). This sets the output of NAND gate U607 high, generating KBD/RPG_IRQ. The CPU determines the key pressed by setting only one keyboard scan line (LKSCN0 through LKSCN5) low through U602 and reading the keyboard sense lines. 1. If none of the keys or RPG responds, check ribbon cable, A1A1W1. (This cable connects the A1A1 keyboard to the A3 interface assembly.) The keys are arranged in a row/column matrix, as shown in Table 8-3 on page 382. 2. If an entire row or column of keys does not respond, and the RPG does respond, there might be an open or shorted wire in A1A1W1. Table 8-3
LKSNS0 LKSCN0 LKSCN1 CONFIG MODULE

Keyboard Matrix
LKSNS1 SAVE TRIG LKSNS2 RECALL DISP LKSNS3 GHz 9 LKSNS4 MHz 6 LKSNS5 kHz 3 LKSNS6 Hz BK SP LKSNS7 PRESET

LKSCN2

PEAK SEARCH

BW

TRACE

LKSCN3

FREQ COUNT

AUTO COUPLE SK1 MEAS/ USER

MKR

HOLD

LKSCN4 LKSCN5

SWEEP AUX CRTL

SK2 CAL

SK3 SGL SWP

SK4 COPY

SK5 FREQUENCY

SK6 SPAN

MKR AMPLITUDE

3. Check that all inputs to NAND gate A3U607 (LKSNS lines) are high when no key is pressed. If any input is low, continue with the following: a. Disconnect A1A1W1 from A3J602 and again check all inputs to U607. b. If any input is low with A1A1W1 disconnected, suspect A3U604, A3U607, or A3U602. c. Reconnect A1A1W1 to A3J602.

382

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section Keyboard/RPG Problems

4. Monitor A3U607 pin 8 with a logic probe. A TTL high should be present when any key is held down. Monitor this point while pressing each key in succession. 5. Check that the LKSCN lines (outputs of A3J602 pins 1 through 6) read a TTL low with no key pressed. (Any TTL high indicates a faulty A3 Interface assembly.) 6. Check that a pulse is present at each LKSCN output of U602 when a key is pressed. 7. Check that only one input to U607 (LKSNS lines) goes low when a key is pressed. 8. Check that U602 pin 9 (LKBD_RESET) pulses low when a key is pressed. 9. If LKBD_RESET is incorrect and a pulse is not present at each of the LKSCN outputs of U602 when a key is pressed, check for LWRCLK and LSCAN_KBD.

RPG Interface
Refer to function block J of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 3 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. U608B latches the RPG direction from the two RPG outputs, RPG_COUNT and RPG_COUNT1. Counterclockwise RPG rotation produces low-going pulses which result in a high output on U608B. Clockwise RPG rotation results in a low output from U608B. U612A provides the edge to trigger one-shot U423B, which generates a 90 ms pulse. This pulse gates U610A for counting of RPG pulses by U606. Gates U610D and U614D prevent retriggering of U423B until its 90 ms pulse has timed out.
NOTE

Elsewhere, RPG_COUNT1 is referred to as RPG_01 and RPG_COUNT is referred to as RPG_02. 1. Monitor A3U401 pin 2 with a logic probe or oscilloscope. Pulses should be present as the RPG is rotated. 2. Monitor A3U608 pin 12 as the RPG is rotated. Pulses should be present. 3. If pulses are missing at both points, check for power and ground signals to A1A1W1 and A1A2W1. If both power and ground are there, the A1A2 RPG is probably defective. 4. If pulses are missing at only one point, check for an open or short on A1A1W1 and A1A2W1. If these cables are working properly, A1A2 RPG is probably defective.

Chapter 8

383

ADC/Interface Section Keyboard/RPG Problems

5. Press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer off and disconnect A1A1W1 from A3J602. Jumper A3U608 pin 12 (RPG_COUNT1) to U608 pin 14 (+5 Vdc). Jumper U401 pin 2 (RPG_COUNT1) to U511 pin 11 (HDPKD_CLK). This provides a 7.8 kHz square wave to the RPG_COUNT input of the RPG Interface. 6. Press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer on. 7. Check A3U608 pin 9 for narrow, low-going pulses approximately every 90 ms. 8. Check A3U608 pin 13 (LRPG_RESET) for narrow, low-going pulses approximately every 90 ms. 9. Check A3U612 pin 5 for narrow, low-going pulses approximately every 90 ms. 10.Check U608 pin 5 (HRPG_IRQ) for narrow, high-going pulses approximately every 90 ms. 11.If HRPG_IRQ is correct but LRPG_RESET is incorrect, check U505 pin 13 (LKBD/RPG_IRQ) for narrow, low-going pulses approximately every 90 ms. 12.If HRPG_IRQ and LKBD/RPG_IRQ are correct but LRPG_RESET is incorrect, suspect a failure on the A2 controller assembly. 13.Check U610 pin 3 for a 7.8 kHz square wave. Check U606 pin 2 (HRPG_RESET) for narrow, high-going pulses approximately every 90 ms. Refer to Table 8-4 on page 384 and check the frequencies at divide-by-16 counter A3U606. 14.If all the checks above are correct but the spectrum analyzer does not respond to the RPG, suspect a problem in either the A1A2 RPG or the A1A1 Keyboard. 15.Press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer off. 16.Reconnect A1A1W1 to A3J602 and remove all jumpers. Table 8-4 Counter Frequencies
A3U606 pin # 3 4 5 6 11 10 9 Nominal Frequency (Hz) 3900 1950 975 488 244 122 61

384

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section Triggering or Video Gating Problems

Triggering or Video Gating Problems

Refer to function block H of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 3 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The 1 MHz ADC clock provides synchronization in FREE RUN and SINGLE triggering. LINE triggering synchronization originates on the A6 power supply. Trigger MUX A3U613 selects between FREE RUN, VIDEO, LINE, and EXTERNAL trigger sources. The trigger signal sets the output of the HSCAN latch high. HBADC_CLK0 provides the trigger signal for FREE RUN. The VIDEO TRIG signal must be at least 25 mV (0.25 divisions) peak-to-peak to trigger in video trigger mode. The 3 MHz video bandwidth is not available when using video gating. The trigger for Gated Video has two modes of operation, level mode and edge mode. In the edge mode, positive-edge or negative-edge triggering can be selected. Output 0 from pin 10 of A3U617 generates the gate delay and output 1 from pin 13 of A3U617 generates the gate length. The duration of these two time intervals is set using front-panel softkeys under the SWEEP key. The trigger input for Gated Video is the rear panel EXT/GATE TRIG INPUT (TTL > 10 k). 1. Check that the trigger MUX is receiving the proper trigger source information by selecting each of the following trigger modes and checking the TRIG_SOURCE0 and TRIG_SOURCE1 lines as indicated in Table 8-5 below. 2. If a trigger mode does not work, check that a trigger signal is present at the appropriate trigger MUX input, as indicated in Table 8-5. Table 8-5 Trigger MUX Truth Table
Trigger Mode FREE RUN VIDEO LINE EXTERNAL TRIG_SOURCE0 TRIG_SOURCE1 MUX Input Pin U613 pin 14 U613 pin 2 Number U613 L H H L L L H H 6 5 3 4

3. Check that the appropriate trigger MUX input signal is present at the trigger MUX output (A3U613 pin 7). 4. To check the video trigger level DAC, connect the positive lead of a DVM to A3J400 pin 1 and the negative DVM lead to A3TP4. 5. Press TRIG and VIDEO. 6. Press the STEP w key several times while noting the DVM reading and position of the video trigger level on the screen.

Chapter 8

385

ADC/Interface Section Triggering or Video Gating Problems

7. Check that the voltage displayed on the DVM changes by 1 V for each step of the VIDEO TRIG LEVEL. 8. If the voltage changes incorrectly, proceed as follows: a. Check the 10 Vdc reference (A3U409 pin 4). b. While using the front-panel knob to adjust the video trigger level, check for the presence of pulses on A3U409 pin 15 (LDAC2). c. While using the front-panel knob to adjust the video trigger level, check for the presence of pulses on A3U409 pin 16 (LWRCLK). d. Check that pulses are present on U409 pin 6 (IA0). 9. If the LWRCLK and LDAC2 signals are not correct, refer to Interface Strobe Select on page 409 10.If correct trigger pulses are present at the trigger MUX output (A3U613 pin 7), but the instrument does not appear to be sweeping, proceed as follows: a. Press PRESET, SWEEP, and DLY SWP ON OFF until ON is underlined, then DLY SWP [ ] 30 milliseconds. b. Using an oscilloscope, check for activity at pins 1 and 3 of A3U615A. c. If there is activity at pin 1 but not at pin 3 of A3U615A, suspect A3U616 or A3U617. d. If there is activity at pin 1 and pin 3 of A3U615A, suspect A3U615. (Check pin 5 for activity.) 11.If there is a problem with Video Gating, proceed as follows: a. Press PRESET and set the spectrum analyzer as follows: Center frequency ................................................ 300 MHz Span ............................................................................ 0 Hz Sweep time ............................................................. 150 ms b. Press TRIG, EXTERNAL, then SWEEP and GATE ON OFF until ON is underlined. c. Press GATE DLY [ ] 10 milliseconds, then press GATE LEN [] 30 milliseconds. d. Connect a pulse/function generator (such as an 8116A) to provide a 5 V peak-to-peak square wave (TTL level) to the spectrum analyzer rear panel EXT/GATE TRIG INPUT and also (using a BNC tee) to the channel 4 input of the oscilloscope (54501A).

386

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section Triggering or Video Gating Problems

e. Set the pulse/function generator to NORMAL mode with a duty cycle of 50% and a frequency of 10 Hz. f. Press the following keys on the oscilloscope:
CLEAR DISPLAY off frame axes grid ..................................... highlight grid connect dots off on ...................................... highlight on TRIG source 1 2 3 4 ................................................ highlight 4 level ........................................................................... 2 V TIMEBASE TIMEBASE ...................................................... 50 ms/div CHAN CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 off on

highlight CHANNEL 1 on set V/div to 0.2 V and offset to 0.6 V (10:1 probe used) highlight CHANNEL 4 on set V/div to 2 V and offset to 0 V
DISPLAY DISPLAY norm avg env ........................... highlight norm

g. Using a 10:1 probe connected to channel 1 of the oscilloscope, check for activity at pins 10 and 13 of A3U617. h. If either pin (or both) show no activity, check for activity at pin 21 (LTIMER) of A3U617. i. If LTIMER is not active, troubleshoot the Interface Strobe Select circuitry (block K). j. If there was activity at pins 10 and 13 of A3U617, suspect A3U616.

Chapter 8

387

ADC/Interface Section Preselector Peaking Control (Real Time DAC)

Preselector Peaking Control (Real Time DAC)

Refer to function block H of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 3 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The spectrum analyzer uses a real-time DAC (R/T DAC1) to peak the preselector. 1. Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the span to 0 Hz. 2. Connect a positive DVM lead to A3J400 pin 3 and the negative DVM lead to A3TP4. 3. Press MKR, AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and PRESEL MAN ADJ. 4. Monitor the DVM reading while changing the PRESELECTOR TUNE value from 0 to 255. The PRESELECTOR TUNE value is the setting of R/T DAC1. 5. Check that the DVM reading increases from 0 to approximately +10 Vdc as R/T DAC1 is set from 0 to 255. 6. If the voltage does not change as described, set the spectrum analyzer to single trigger mode and check the following: a. Check that A3U409B pin 18 is at 10 Vdc. b. Check for the presence of pulses at U409 pin 6 (IA0). c. Check that pulses are present at U409 pin 15 (LDAC2). d. Check that pulses are present at U409 pin 16 (LWRCLK). 7. If the LDAC2 or LWRCLK signals are incorrect, refer to Interface Strobe Select on page 409

388

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section Flatness Control (RF Gain DACs)

Flatness Control (RF Gain DACs)

Refer to function block M of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 4 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. RF Gain DACs control the A15 assembly atness compensation ampliers. The RF Gain DACs are arranged so that the output of one DAC is the voltage reference for the other DAC. This results in an RF GAIN voltage which is exponentially proportional to the DAC settings. Each DAC is set to the same value. The A15 RF assembly converts the RF GAIN signal to a current for driving the PIN diode attenuators in the Flatness Compensation Ampliers. The exponentially-varying voltage compensates for the nonlinear resistance-versus-current characteristic of the PIN diodes. 1. Place the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly in the WR ENA position. 2. Press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, SERVICE CAL DATA, FLATNESS, and FLATNESS DATA. Press NEXT BAND until FLATNESS BAND # 0 is displayed. 3. Press the v key until DATA @ 300 MHz is displayed. Note the number directly below DATA @ 300 MHz this is the RF Gain DAC value. 4. Connect a positive DVM lead to A3J400 pin 13 and the negative DVM lead to A3TP4.
5. Check that the DVM reading increases from near 0 Vdc to between

1.3 and 1.9 Vdc as the RF Gain DAC setting is increased from 0 to 4095.

6. If the DVM readings are incorrect, press PRESET, SGL SWP, CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, SERVICE CAL DATA, FLATNESS, and FLATNESS DATA. Press NEXT BAND until FLATNESS BAND # 0 is displayed. Press the v key until DATA @ 300 MHz is displayed. Proceed as follows: a. Check the +10 V reference. b. Check for narrow, low-going pulses at A3U417 pin 13 (LWRCLK). c. While rotating the front-panel knob, check for narrow, low-going pulses at A3U417 pin 1 (LDAC1) and pin 14 (LDACU1). d. While rotating the front-panel knob, check for narrow, low-going pulses at U417 pin 16 (L_IA0) and pin 15 (IA4). 7. If the LWRCLK, LDAC1, or LDACU1 is incorrect, refer to the Interface Strobe Select block in this chapter.

Chapter 8

389

ADC/Interface Section Flatness Control (RF Gain DACs)

8. Place the WR PROT/ WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly in the WR PROT position. Press PRESET.

390

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Video Circuits

A3 Assembly Video Circuits

Voltages from A3J101 to the Variable Gain Amplier on A3 correspond (approximately) to on-screen signal levels. (One volt corresponds to the top of the screen and zero volts corresponds to the bottom of the screen.) This is true for both log and linear settings except when the spectrum analyzer is in 1 dB/div or 2 dB/div. In these cases the log expand amplier is selected, and 1 V corresponds to top-screen and 0.8 or 0.9 V corresponds to bottom-screen. The spectrum analyzer can be set to zero span at the peak of a signal to generate a constant dc voltage in the video circuits during sweeps. 1. Disconnect W26 from A3J101 and W20 from A2J4. 2. Connect W26 to A2J4. 3. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Sweep time .................................................................... 20 ms Resolution bandwidth ................................................. 1 MHz Log/division ............................................................ 10 dB/DIV 4. If a trace is displayed, troubleshoot the A3 assembly. If a trace is absent, connect an oscilloscope to the rear panel BLKG/GATE OUTPUT. 5. The presence of a TTL signal (TTL low during 20 ms sweep) indicates a good A3 Interface Assembly. Troubleshoot the IF section. 6. If the BLKG/GATE OUTPUT is always at a TTL high or low, troubleshoot the trigger/video gating circuits on A3. 7. Reconnect W26 to A3J101 and W20 to A2J4. 8. Remove the A3 assembly shield. 9. If the video lters appear faulty, see to Video Filter on page 395 10.If there appears to be a peak detector problem, refer to Positive/Negative Peak Detectors on page 397 11.Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 and set the controls as follows: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Reference level ......................................................... 10 dBm 12.If the spectrum analyzer works correctly in 5 dB/div and 10 dB/div but not in 1 dB/div or 2 dB/div, refer to Log Offset/Log Expand on page 393 Continue with step 13 if the problem involves on-screen amplitude errors which appear to originate in the video chain.

Chapter 8

391

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Video Circuits

13.Press CAL and IF ADJ ON OFF until OFF is underlined. Monitor A3TP9 with an oscilloscope. If the voltage is not approximately +1 Vdc, troubleshoot the Log Amplier on A4. (Refer to the IF troubleshooting procedure in Chapter 9 , IF Section.) 14.To conrm proper video input to the video circuit, set the spectrum analyzer to Log 10 dB per division and change the reference level in 10 dB steps from 10 dBm to +30 dBm. At each 10 dB step, the input voltage should change 100 mV. The input level should be +0.6 Vdc for a +30 dBm reference level.
NOTE

The on-screen amplitude level will probably not change as expected, since the video circuitry is assumed to be faulty. 15.Monitor A3TP14 while stepping the reference level from 10 dBm to +30 dBm. If the voltage does not step approximately 100 mV per 10 dB step, refer to Video MUX on page 394 16.If the Video MUX is working properly, monitor A3TP15 with the oscilloscope and step the reference level from 10 dBm to +30 dBm. If the voltage does not change 100 mV per 10 dB step, refer to Video Filter on page 395 17.If the voltage at A3TP15 is correct, move the oscilloscope probe to A3TP17 and step the reference level between 10 dBm and +30 dBm. If the voltage does not change 100 mV per 10 dB step, refer to Video Filter Buffer Amplier on page 396 18.If the voltage at A3TP17 is correct, move the oscilloscope probe to A3TP6. Set the following controls to keep the ADC MUX set to the MOD_VIDEO input during the sweep: Sweep time .................................................................... 50 s Detector mode .......................................................... Sample 19.Step the reference level from 10 dBm to +30 dBm while monitoring the voltage change on the oscilloscope. If the voltage does not change 100 mV per 10 dB step, refer to ADC MUX on page 400 20.If the voltage at A3TP6 is correct, move the oscilloscope probe to A3TP8 and step the reference level between 10 dBm and +30 dBm. If the voltage at A3TP8 is not the same as that at A3TP6, replace A3U110. 21.If the voltage at A3TP8 and A3TP6 are equal, move the oscilloscope probe to A3TP7. 22.Change the reference level from 10 dBm to 0 dBm. The voltage change on A3TP7 should be between 630 mV and 770 mV. If the voltage change is outside of these limits, refer to Variable Gain Amplier (VGA) on page 402 The gain of the VGA should be 7 10%.

392

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Video Circuits

Log Offset/Log Expand

Refer to function block X of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 5 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The log scales are modied using a combination of amplication and digital trace manipulation. The video input to the A3 assembly is either 10 dB/div or linear. To obtain the 5 dB/div scale, the CPU manipulates the trace data from the 10 dB/div scale. To obtain the 2 dB/div scale, the video signal is amplied and offset so that top-screen in 10 dB/div corresponds to top-screen in 2 dB/div. To obtain the 1 dB/div scale, the CPU manipulates trace data from the 2 dB/div scale. In 2 dB/div, Log Offset/Log Expand amplies the top 20 dB of the display. This is done by offsetting the video signal by 0.8 V and providing a gain of 5 to the top 0.2 V of the video signal. The 0.8 V offset is accomplished by sinking 2 mA through R114 by current source U105/Q101. 1. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, SPAN, ZERO SPAN, CAL, and IF ADJ OFF. 2. Disconnect W26 (coax 2) from A3J101 and connect the output of a function generator to A3J101. 3. Set the function generator to the following settings: Output .................................................................... Sine wave Amplitude ........................................................... 1 V pk-to-pk DC Offset ................................................................. +500 mV Frequency ...................................................................... 50 Hz 4. Set the spectrum analyzer sweep time to 50 ms. 5. Adjust the function generator amplitude and offset until the sine wave lls the entire graticule area. 6. Measure and note the function generator peak-to-peak voltage using an oscilloscope.
V(10 dB/div) = ________________________________V

7. Set the spectrum analyzer to 2 dB/div. 8. Readjust the function generator amplitude and offset until the sine wave again lls the entire graticule area. 9. Measure the function generator peak-to-peak voltage and dc offset.
V(2 dB/div) = ______________________________V

Chapter 8

393

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Video Circuits

10.The ratio of voltage recorded in step 6 to the voltage recorded in step 9 should be 5 3%. If the ratio is not 5, troubleshoot the A3 Interface assembly. 11.Reconnect W26 to A3J101.

Video MUX
Refer to function block U of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 5 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. 1. Press PRESET and set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz 2. Press SGL SWP, CAL, and IF ADJ OFF. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 connector. 3. Check for a TTL high on A3U104 pin 2 and a TTL low on U104 pin 10. Set the spectrum analyzer to 2 dB/div and check for a TTL high on A3U104 pin 10 and a TTL low on A3U104 pin 2. 4. If the logic levels on A3U104 are incorrect, check the LLOG_STB signal as follows: a. Monitor A3U104 pin 9 with an oscilloscope or logic probe. Check that a 1 microsecond, low-going pulse is present when switching between 10 dB/div and 2 dB/div. b. Check the inputs to A3U104 (pins 3 and 11) while switching between 10 dB/div and 2 dB/div. c. If the logic signals are incorrect, refer to Analog Bus Drivers, on page 407, and Analog Bus Timing on page 408 5. Check comparators A3U109A/C for proper outputs. The outputs should be high when the noninverting input is greater than the threshold voltage of +1.3 Vdc. 6. If A3U104 and A3U109 are working properly, set the AMPLITUDE and REF LVL to 0 dBm. 7. Monitor the voltage at A3TP14 while switching the spectrum analyzer between 10 dB/div and 2 dB/div. The voltage should switch between 0.8 and 0.4 Vdc. 8. If the voltage at A3TP14 is incorrect, suspect either A3Q220 or A3Q221.

394

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Video Circuits

9. The Video MUX will appear faulty if A3CR109 is shorted or leaky. Diode A3CR109 clamps the voltage at A3TP14 to 0.4 V when in log expand with less than 0.8 V at J101. To conrm this failure, lift the cathode of diode A3CR109 and perform steps 1 through 7 again. 10.To return the spectrum analyzer to automatic sweep, press SWEEP, SWEEP CONT SGL or press PRESET.

Video Filter
Refer to function block V of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 5 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The spectrum analyzer uses digital ltering for 1 Hz to 100 Hz video bandwidths. An RC low-pass lter is used for 300 Hz to 3 MHz video bandwidths. Various series resistances and shunt capacitances switch into the video lter to change its cutoff frequency. The 3 MHz video bandwidth is not available when Gated Video is selected. When sample detection is selected, the effective video bandwidth is limited to approximately 450 kHz by the track and hold circuitry. When Gated Video is selected, the video signal is "gated" (turned on periodically for a set duration of time). This function is shown in block V of the block diagram as a series switch that allows the video signal to pass only when it is closed. The actual switch, U109B/CR118, shunts the video to ground (video signal is passed only when the switch is open). The control circuitry for this switch is described under Triggering or Video Gating Problems on page 385 The rear panel EXT/GATE TRIG INPUT provides the connection for triggering in the Gated Video mode. The gate output signal is available at the rear panel BLKG/GATE OUTPUT connector. Positive or negative edge mode, or level mode can be selected from the front panel. 1. Press PRESET and set the spectrum analyzer controls to the following settings: Center frequency ..................................................... 225 MHz Span ......................................................................... 550 MHz Sweep time ................................................ Uncoupled (MAN) 2. Press CAL and IF ADJ OFF. 3. Step the Video BW from 3 MHz to 10 kHz. At each step, the peak-to-peak deviation of the noise should decrease. 4. Step the Video BW down to 1 Hz. At each step, the amplitude of the LO feedthrough should decrease. 5. Refer to Table 8-6 on page 396 and check for correct latched levels for the selected video bandwidth setting.

Chapter 8

395

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Video Circuits

6. If the output of latch A3U102 is not correct, trigger an oscilloscope on LLOG_STB (U102 pin 9) and monitor U102 pin 1 and other latch inputs while changing the video bandwidth. 7. If the inputs are incorrect, troubleshoot the analog bus. Correct inputs with bad outputs indicate a faulty U102. 8. Check that the outputs of A3U111A, A3U111B, and A3U107A/B/C/D are correct for their inputs. The outputs should be high with noninverting inputs higher than the +1.4 V threshold voltage. If a voltage drop is noticed across these components, suspect A3CR109 or A3Q317B. Since no dc current ows through any of the series resistances or FETS (drain to source), no voltage drops should occur. 9. To return the spectrum analyzer to automatic sweep, press SWEEP, SWEEP CONT SGL or PRESET. Table 8-6 A3U102 Latch Outputs
Video BW 300 Hz 1 kHz 3 kHz 10 kHz 30 kHz 100 kHz 300 kHz 1 MHz 3 MHz Pin 2 H L L L H L L L L Pin 5 L L H L L L H L L Pin 7 L L L L H H H H L Pin 10 L L L L L L L L H Pin 12 L L L H L L L H L Pin 15 L H L L L H L L L

Video Filter Buffer Amplier

Refer to function block W of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 5 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The video lter buffer amplier provides outputs for video trigger, positive and negative peak detectors, and the analog zero-span (sweeps <30 ms). The zero-span video output is terminated in 500 ohms on the A2 Controller assembly. The amplier is a high-input-impedance buffer amplier with a gain of one when properly terminated.

396

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Video Circuits

Current source U307C provides twice the current of Q316. Resistor R145 and current source U307D shift the dc level. Resistor R260 terminates the peak detector inputs in 500 ohms. The unterminated gain is 1.1. Diode CR114 prevents latchup during positive overdrive conditions while CR113 protects Q318 during overdrive. Diode CR117 is a 12.7 V zener that limits the output of the peak detector to +1.5 V. Typically, limiting occurs at +1.1 V.

Positive/Negative Peak Detectors

Refer to function blocks Y and Z of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 5 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The following information pertains to the positive peak detector and is applicable to troubleshooting the negative peak detector. The positive peak detector consists of an input amplier (A3U204 and A3Q210) followed by detector diodes (A3CR203 and A3CR204) and hold capacitor A3C217. Output amplier A3Q206, Q211, and Q212 buffers the hold capacitor. Both the input and output ampliers have a gain of one. Each amplier has local feedback. On the output amplier the emitter of Q212 connects to the gate of Q206. On the input amplier the feedback goes through Q209 and Q208 back to the base of U204D. Global feedback occurs from the output amplier through R223 back to the input amplier U204D. The peak detector resets through Q207. 1. Press PRESET and set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ......................................................................... 500 MHz Resolution bandwidth .................................................. AUTO Video bandwidth ........................................................... AUTO Log dB/division ...................................................... 10 dB/DIV 2. If the spectrum analyzer does not meet the conditions in steps a through e below, the positive and negative peak detectors are probably faulty. Continue with step 3 to check the detectors. a. The peak-to-peak deviation of the noise in NORMAL detector mode should be approximately two divisions. Press TRACE, TRACE B, CLEAR WRITE B, VIEW B, TRACE A, MORE 1 of 3, and DETECTOR MODES. b. Select DETECTOR POS PEAK mode. c. Conrm that the noise is about one-third division peak-to-peak. The noise should also be no higher than the top of the noise level in NORMAL detector mode.

Chapter 8

397

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Video Circuits

d. Select DETECTOR NEG PEAK mode. The noise should be about one-third of a division peak-to-peak. The noise should also be no lower than the bottom of the noise in NORMAL mode. e. Select DETECTOR SAMPLE mode. Check that the noise appears between the top and bottom of the noise in NORMAL mode. 3. On the spectrum analyzer, connect the front-panel CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 and set the controls to the following settings: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz Sweep time ...................................................................... 5 s Detector mode .................................................... POS PEAK 4. Monitor A3TP17 and A3TP16 simultaneously with an oscilloscope. 5. Change the reference level from 10 dBm to +30 dBm and verify a voltage change at both A3TP17 and A3TP16 of 0.9 V to 0.5 V in 100 mV steps. 6. Check the entire range of the detector by substituting a dc source at J101 and varying its output from 0 V to 1 V. 7. If the peak detector appears latched up, check LPOS_RST (U422 pin 4) for a negative TTL level reset pulses. The reset pulses should occur every 130 s and should be approximately 250 ns wide. 8. If the reset pulses are absent, troubleshoot the Peak Detector Reset circuitry. 9. If the reset pulses are present, check the gate of Q207. The pulses should be positive-going from 12.7 V to 1.35 V. 10.The peak detector can be made into a unity gain amplier by shorting the cathode of CR203 to the anode of CR204. If the peak detector functions normally as a unity gain amplier, suspect Q208 or CR203 or CR204.

Peak Detector Reset

Refer to function block R of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 4 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. 1. Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz Sweep time ...................................................................... 5 s Detector mode .................................................... POS PEAK 2. Check that HHOLD (A3U526 pin 11) has 18 s wide pulses every 128 s.
398 Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Video Circuits

3. Check that HODD (U408 pin 5) is a square wave with a period of 16.7 ms (2 sweep time/600). 4. Check LPOS_RST (U422 pin 4) for 200 ns low-going pulses every 128 s. 5. Check LNEG_RST (A3U422 pin 12) for 200 ns low-going pulses every 128 s. 6. Set the detector mode to NORMAL and check that LNEG_RST (A3U422 pin 12) has two pulses spaced 40 s apart and then a single pulse approximately 88 s from the second pulse. 7. Check HMUX_SEL0 (A3U408 pin 3) and HMUX_SEL1 (A3U408 pin 9) according to Table 8-7. Table 8-7 HMUX_SELO/1 versus Detector Mode
Detector Mode NORMAL SAMPLE POS PEAK NEG PEAK HMUX_SEL0 (U408 pin 3) 15 s pulse every 128 s H H L HMUX_SEL1 (U408 pin 9) 40 s pulse every 128 s H L H

Rosenfell Detector
Refer to function block S of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 4 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. If both HPOS_HLDNG and HNEG_HLDNG are high during the same bucket, HROSENFELL will also be set high. This indicates that the video signal probably consists of noise, since it rose and fell during the same period. The HROSENFELL signal is valid only when the NORMAL (rosenfell) detector mode is selected. 1. Remove anything connected to the 8561E or 8563E front-panel INPUT 50 connector. Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Sweep time .......................................................................... 5 s Detector mode ......................................................... NORMAL 2. Check LPOS_RST and LNEG_RST as described in Peak Detector Reset on page 398

Chapter 8

399

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Video Circuits

3. Check A3U423 pin 4 for two low-going 3.3 s pulses 40 s apart occurring every 130 s. 4. Check that HROSENFELL (A3U610 pin 6) has two pulses spaced approximately 40 s apart and then a third pulse 60 s from the second pulse. Each pulse should be approximately 10 s wide and low-going. 5. Monitor HROSENFELL with an oscilloscope while reducing the video bandwidth from 1 MHz to 1 kHz. 6. As the video bandwidth is decreased to 1 kHz, the HROSENFELL line should increasingly show a low logic level. With a video bandwidth of 1 kHz, a nearly at line should be displayed on the CRT. 7. Set the sweep time to 50 ms. Externally trigger the oscilloscope using the spectrum analyzer rear panel BLKG/GATE OUTPUT. 8. Check that HPOS_HLDNG (A3U416 pin 4) is mostly high with a 1 MHz video bandwidth and mostly low with a 1 kHz video bandwidth. 9. Check that LNEG_HLDNG (U408A pin 13) is mostly high with a 1 MHz video bandwidth and mostly low with a 1 kHz video bandwidth.

ADC MUX
Refer to function block AA of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 6 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The ADC MUX switches various inputs into the video path for conversion by the ADC. The SCAN RAMP input is used during sweeps having a width of equal to or greater than 2.01 MHz times N, to control the timing of the ADC operations. Some combination of MOD_VIDEO, NEG_PEAK, and POS_PEAK is used for the video signal to be converted by the ADC. The YTO ERR, FCMUX, CAL OSC TUNE, and OFL ERR inputs are used only during diagnostic and auto adjust routines and during retrace. 1. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz Reference level ....................................................... 10 dBm Sweep time .................................................................... 50 s DETECTOR MODE ............................................. SAMPLE

400

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Video Circuits

2. Refer to Table 8-8 and check for correct logic levels at A3U108 pins 1, 15, and 16. Check for proper output signals at TP6. If the select lines are not changing, suspect the ADC ASM or the VGA/ADC MUX Control. If the select lines are changing, but the proper video inputs are not being switched to the output, replace U108. In SAMPLE mode, the input is MOD_VIDEO (pin 7); in POS PEAK mode, the input is POS_PEAK (pin 5); and in NEG PEAK mode, the input is NEG_PEAK (pin 6). 3. Check for the presence of the YTO ERR signal at A3J2 pin 42 with an oscilloscope probe. 4. If ERR 300 YTO UNLK or 301 YTO UNLK occurs and the voltage is near zero during a sweep and positive during retrace (YTO is being locked), the fault is on the A3 assembly. If a constant dc voltage is present, refer to the Synthesizer section troubleshooting procedure in Chapter 11. Table 8-8 Logic Levels at A3U108
Detector Mode SAMPLE POS PEAK NEG PEAK U108 pin 1 H H L U108 pin 15 L L L U108 pin 16 H L H

5. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Span ............................................................................. 5 MHz Sweep time .................................................................... 50 ms 6. Check for the presence of the SCAN RAMP signal by connecting an oscilloscope probe to A3J2 pin 45 (component side of A3J2). Connect the negative-probe lead to A3TP4. 7. A 0 to 10 V ramp should be present in both LINE and FREE RUN trigger modes. If the waveform is present only in LINE trigger, ADC control signal HBADC_CLK0 may be faulty. Refer to ADC Control Signals on page 403. 8. If the scan ramp is present, but is not being switched to the output of U108, replace U108. If the scan ramp is absent in either mode, do the following: a. Connect the oscilloscope probe to A3J400 pin 15 (HSCAN). b. A TTL signal (high during 50 ms sweep time and low during retrace) should be present, indicating A3 is working properly. Refer to the Synthesizer section troubleshooting procedure in Chapter 11. A faulty TTL signal indicates a bad A3 Interface assembly.

Chapter 8

401

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Video Circuits

9. Set the spectrum anal"ADC Control Signals" in this chapter.yzer to the following settings: Sweep time ................................................................. 100 ms Span ......................................................................... 100 MHz 10.Press CAL and IF ADJ ON and check for the presence of the CAL OSC TUNE signal by monitoring A3J401 pin 25 with an oscilloscope. If ERR 499 CAL UNLK is displayed and a signal within the range of 10 V to +10 V is present during part of the retrace period, the fault is on the A3 assembly. 11.If a constant dc voltage is present during the sweep and all of the retrace period, refer to the IF Section troubleshooting procedure in Chapter 9 , IF Section.

Variable Gain Amplier (VGA)

Refer to function block AB of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 6 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The VGA provides adjustable gain in the video path. Its nominal gain of 7 can be adjusted 10%. U112 removes dc offset to keep U113 in its monotonic range. (Both U112 and U113 are set to the same value.) The DAC settings cannot be changed from the front panel.

Track and Hold

Refer to function block AC of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 6 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. 1. Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz Detector mode .......................................................... Sample Reference level ....................................................... 70 dBm Log dB/division ..................................................... 2 dB/DIV Sweep time ................................................................. 50 ms 2. Disconnect any signal from the spectrum analyzer input. A full scale display of sampled noise should be present. 3. Trigger an oscilloscope on the positive going edge of HHOLD (A3U506 pin 16). 4. The waveform at A3TP10 should be random noise with an average level of approximately 4 V. The noise should have a at spot in its response while HHOLD is high, indicating proper operation of U114.

402

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly ADC Circuits

A3 Assembly ADC Circuits

The ADC consists of a 12-bit DAC, 12-bit successive approximation register (SAR), data multiplexers, and data latches. The ADC ASM (algorithmic state machine) controls the ADC. Eight inputs are controlled by the ADC MUX. These include a positive peak detector, negative peak detector, sampled video, scan ramp, YTO error voltage, FC MUX voltages, Cal Oscillator tune voltage, and offset lock error voltage. A MUX on the A14 frequency control assembly selects which voltage is sent to the ADC MUX on the FC MUX signal line. During NORMAL detector mode sweeps, when noise is detected by the rosenfell detector, the ADC ASM automatically switches between POS PEAK and NEG PEAK.

ADC Control Signals

Refer to function blocks B and F of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 2 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The ADC requires two signals from the A2 controller assembly: HBADC_CLK0 and HBBKT_PULSE. HBBKT_PULSE is used only in zero span. Use the following steps to verify the signals: 1. Disconnect W22 from A2J8. 2. If a 10 MHz TTL signal is absent on W22, refer to the 10 MHz Reference (on the A15 RF assembly) troubleshooting procedure in Chapter 12 , RF Section. 3. Set the spectrum analyzer SPAN to zero. 4. Reconnect W22. 5. With an oscilloscope probe, monitor A3J401 pin 20. 6. If TTL pulses are absent, the A2 controller assembly is faulty. Refer to Chapter 10 , Controller Section. The presence of TTL pulses indicates a faulty A3 assembly. 7. Monitor A3J401 pin 23 (HBADC_CLK0). If a 1 MHz TTL clock signal is present, HBADC_CLK0 is working properly. 8. If HBKT_PULSE or HBADC_CLK0 is missing, disconnect A3W1 from A2J2. 9. Monitor A2U5 pin 3 for HBKT_PULSE and A2U5 pin 7 for HBADC_CLK0. 10.If HBADC_CLK0 is absent, troubleshoot the A2 controller assembly.

Chapter 8

403

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly ADC Circuits

11.HBKT_PULSE is absent, refer to the information on troubleshooting the frequency counter in Chapter 10 , Controller Section. 12.Reconnect A3W1 to A2J2.

ADC Start/Stop Control

Refer to function block B of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 2 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The ADC Start/Stop Control determines the start time of all ADC conversions. Multiplexer A3U509 chooses the source of the start signal. Both HSTART_SRC and HBUCKET tell the ASM to start a conversion. 1. Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the following controls: Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz Sweep time .................................................................... 60 s Detector mode ....................................................... SAMPLE 2. Check for a TTL high at A3U509 pin 2 and a TTL low at A3U509 pin 14. 3. Set the detector mode to NORMAL. 4. Check that A3U509 pins 2 and 14 are both TTL low. 5. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Span .......................................................................... 1 MHz Detector mode ....................................................... SAMPLE 6. Check for a TTL high at A3U509 pin 2 and a TTL low at A3U509 pin 14. 7. Press CAL and REALIGN LO &IF. During the realignment, A3U509 pin 2 should be TTL low and pin 14 should be TTL high until the 10 kHz and narrower resolution bandwidths are adjusted. If correct, the Start/Stop Control circuitry is being selected properly by the processor and U508 in the ADC Register block is working properly. 8. Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows: Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz Detector mode ....................................................... SAMPLE Sweep time ............................................................... 400 ms 9. Check that A3U509 pin 7 has positive 15 s pulses with a 667 s period (sweep time/600). Check that A3U509 pin 9 has positive 15 s pulses with a 667 s period (sweep time/600). The pulses should be present during the sweep but absent during retrace.

404

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly ADC Circuits

10.Set the detector mode to NORMAL. 11.Check that A3U509 pin 9 has pulses every 130 s and U509 pin 7 has pulses every 667 s (although pulse widths may be changing).

ADC ASM
Refer to function block F of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 2 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. 1. Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows: Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Sweep time ........................................................................ 60 s Detector mode .......................................................... SAMPLE 2. Check that HSTART_SRC (U504 pin 4) goes TTL high, causing HHOLD (U506 pin 16) to go high 15 s later. 3. Check that HSTART_ADC (U506 pin 15) goes TTL high 19 s after HSTART_SRC goes high. 4. HHOLD should stay TTL high for approximately 18 s, and HSTART_ADC should stay high for approximately 31 s. 5. Check that LCMPLT (U504 pin 15) goes TTL low 12 s after HSTART_ADC goes high (12 bits at 1 s per bit). LCMPLT indicates that the successive approximation state machine (SASM) has completed the ADC conversion. 6. Check that LDONE (U506 pin 19) goes TTL low approximately 2 s after LCMPLT goes low.

ADC
Refer to function block A of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 2 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The successive approximation state machine (SASM) consists of A3U527 and A3U528. Upon the occurrence of HSTART_ADC, the SASM successively toggles bits from high to low starting with the most signicant bit. The digital result is then converted to an analog current in DAC U518 and compared with the SAMPLED VIDEO. If the DAC current is too high, the output of U512 will be low, telling the SASM that the "guess" was high and that the bit just toggled should remain low. It then moves on to the next most signicant bit until all 12 bits have been "guessed" at. Each "guess" takes 1 s (one cycle of HBADC_CLK0), or 12 s to complete a conversion. When the conversion is completed, the SASM sets LCMPLT low. The bits are written to the data bus by buffers U514 and U516.

Chapter 8

405

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly ADC Circuits

1. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz Sweep time .................................................................... 60 s Detector mode ....................................................... SAMPLE 2. Trigger an oscilloscope on HSTART_ADC (U506 pin 15) and monitor the outputs of the SASM (U527 pins 18 and 19; U528 pins 14 through 23). Each bit should start high and be switched low. It will either stay low or return to a high state 1 s later, depending on the comparison at U512. 3. If the outputs do not exhibit this bit pattern, and the ADC ASM checks are working properly, suspect A3U527, U528, or one of the latches (U514/516). If the output of comparator U512 does not toggle back and forth during a conversion, suspect either U512 or one of the clipping diodes (CR500/CR501).
NOTE

Because currents are being summed at U512 pins 2 and 3, voltage levels at these points are difcult to interpret.

Ramp Counter
Refer to function block D of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 2 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The ramp counter is used for sweeps with widths greater than 2.0 MHz times N. The analog sweep ramp is compared to the digital ramp counter. When the analog sweep ramp exceeds the DAC output generated for that ramp counter setting, HRAMP_COMP toggles high, indicating the end of a bucket. The ramp counter counts horizontal buckets. There are 601 buckets per sweep, so the ramp (bucket) counter counts from 0 to 600. The ramp counter is incremented by HRST_PK_ENA. 1. Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows: Span .......................................................................... 5 MHz Detector mode ....................................................... SAMPLE 2. For spans greater than 2.0 MHz times N0, HODD (A3U525 pin 3) is a square wave with a period dened by (2 sweep time/600). For example, for a 6 s sweep time, HODD has a period of 20 ms. The ramp (bucket) counter will be odd every other bucket.

406

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Control Circuits

A3 Assembly Control Circuits

A digital control problem will cause the following three steps to fail: 1. On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, ATTEN MAN, 6, 0, and dB. 2. A click should be heard after pressing dB in step 1, unless ATTEN was previously set to 60 dB. 3. Press 1, 0, and dB. Another click should be heard. If no clicks were heard, but the ATTEN value displayed on the CRT changed, the digital control signals are not operating properly.

Analog Bus Drivers

Refer to function block N of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 4 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. 1. Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer, and set the controls as follows: Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Trigger .......................................................................... Single 2. Monitor A3U401 pin 3 (LRF_STB) with an oscilloscope or logic probe. This is the strobe for the A15 RF Assembly. 3. Press AUX CTRL and REAR PANEL and check that pulses occur when toggling between 10 MHz INT and 10 MHz EXT. 4. Monitor U401 pin 5 (LFC_STB) with an oscilloscope or logic probe. This is the strobe for the A14 frequency control assembly. 5. Press AMPLITUDE and check that pulses occur when toggling between ATTEN settings of 10 and 20 dB. 6. Monitor U401 pin 7 (LIF_STB) with an oscilloscope or logic probe. This is the strobe for the A5 IF assembly. 7. Press AMPLITUDE and check that pulses occur when toggling between REF LVL settings of 10 dBm and 20 dBm. 8. Monitor U401 pin 9 (LLOG_STB) with an oscilloscope or logic probe. This is the strobe for the log amplier on the A4 assembly. 9. Press AMPLITUDE and check that pulses occur when toggling between LINEAR and LOG dB/DIV. 10.To check the Address and Data Lines, place a jumper from A3TP1 and A3TP2 to A3U406 pin 20 (+5 V).

Chapter 8

407

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Control Circuits

11.Check that address lines A0 through A7 and data lines D0 through D7 are all TTL high. 12.If any address or data line is low, press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer off and disconnect the W2 control cable from A3J2. Press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer on. Ignore any error messages. 13.Check that address lines A0 through A7 and data lines D0 through D7 are all high. If all address and data lines are high, suspect a fault either in W2 or one of the other four assemblies which connect to W2. 14.If any address or data line is low, check the appropriate input of either U405 (data lines) or U406 (address lines). 15.If a data line input is stuck low, check the data bus buffer. If an address line input is stuck low, check A3W1 and the A2 controller assembly. 16.If the appropriate input is high or toggling between high and low, suspect a failure in either U405 (data lines) or U406 (address lines). 17.Remove jumpers.

Analog Bus Timing

Refer to function block P of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 4 of 6) in the Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information and 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. Analog bus timing (ABT) generates the strobes for the A4, A5, A14, and A15 assemblies. The A14 frequency control assembly also requires a qualier for its strobe, LVFC_ENABLE. A3U400 and A3U414 provide a 2 s delay between the time HANA_BUS goes high and the enable line to demultiplexer A3U407 goes low. 1. Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span ...................................................................... 100 MHz 2. Check that A3U407 pin 1 goes low approximately 2 s after HANA_BUS (A3U400 pin 3) goes high. 3. If HANA_BUS is absent, check for pulses on ABT A3U505 pin 2 and IA10 (A3U505 pin 5). 4. If A3U407 pin 1 is not delayed 2 s from HANA_BUS, check for the presence of the 1 MHz HBADC_CLK0. 5. If A3U407 pin 1 is not delayed 2 s from HANA_BUS and HBADC_CLK0 is correct, suspect a fault in either A3U414 or A3U400.

408

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Control Circuits

6. Press PRESET and set the controls as follows: Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Trigger ...................................................................... SINGLE 7. Monitor A3U401 pin 3 (LR_STB) with an oscilloscope or logic probe. This is the strobe for the A15 RF assembly. 8. Press AUX CTRL and REAR PANEL and check that pulses occur when toggling between 10 MHz INT and 10 MHz EXT. 9. Monitor A3U401 pin 5 (LF_STB) with an oscilloscope or logic probe. This is the strobe for the A14 frequency control assembly. 10.Press AMPLITUDE and check that pulses occur when toggling between ATTEN settings of 10 and 20 dB. 11.Monitor A3U401B pin 7 (LIF_STB) with an oscilloscope or logic probe. This is the strobe for the A5 IF assembly. 12.Press AMPLITUDE and check that pulses occur when toggling between REF LVL settings of 10 dBm and 20 dBm. 13.Monitor A3U401B pin 9 (LLOG_STB) with an oscilloscope or logic probe. This is the strobe for the A4 log amplier/cal oscillator assembly. 14.Press AMPLITUDE and check that pulses occur when toggling between LINEAR and LOG DB/DIV.

Interface Strobe Select

Refer to function block K of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram (sheet 3 of 6) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. Interface strobe select generates the various strobes used by circuits on the A3 Interface Assembly. Table 8-9 on page 410 and Table 8-10 on page 410 are the truth tables for demultiplexers A3U410 and A3U500.

Chapter 8

409

ADC/Interface Section A3 Assembly Control Circuits

Table 8-9

Demultiplexer A3U410 Truth Table

Selected Output Line Pin 15, LSCAN_KBD Pin 14, LDACU1 Pin 13, LDAC1 Pin 12, LDAC2 Pin 11, LDAC3 Pin 10 Pin 9, LTIMER Pin 7, LADC_REG1 IA1 L H L H L H L H IA2 L L H H L L H H IA3 L L L L H H H H

Table 8-10

Demultiplexer A3U500 Truth Table

Selected Output Line Pin 15, LSENSE_KBD Pin 14, LINT_PRIOR Pin 13, LADC_DATA1 Pin 12, LDAC_DATA0 Pin 11, HCNTR_LD0 Pin 10, HCNTR_LD1 Pin 9, LRPG_RD Pin 7, LADC_REG0 IA0 L H L H L H L H IA1 L L H H L L H H IA2 L L L L H H H H

410

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A16 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments)

A16 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments)
The fast ADC consists of video signal scaling and limiting ampliers, an 8-bit ash ADC, peak/pit detection of the digitized video signal, a 32 K-byte RAM, and the fast ADC control circuitry.

Video Input Scaling Ampliers and Limiter

Refer to function block L of the A16 Fast ADC Assembly Schematic Diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The video input scaling ampliers help provide scaling (10 dB/div, 5 dB/div, 2 dB/div, or 1 dB/div) and buffer the ash video output. When the GAINX2 control line is low, switch U44D is open and switch U44C is closed. Thus, the scaled video at TP26 virtually follows the video input (0 - 1 V). When the GAINX2 control line is high, switch U44C is open and switch U44D is closed. Amplier U43 then provides a gain of 2(Vin) 1 V. Voltage clamp CR4 prevents the scaled video input to amplier U45 from going more negative than 0.35 V or more positive than +1.25 V.
NOTE

When measuring voltages or waveforms on the A16 fast ADC assembly, connect the ground (or common) lead to the ground-plane trace on the A16 assembly. This digital ground plane is totally isolated from the chassis. 1. Press PRESET on the Option 007 spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Reference level ......................................................... 10 dBm Log/division ............................................................ 10 dB/DIV Sweep time .................................................................... 20 ms 2. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 connector. 3. Adjust the Option 007 spectrum analyzer reference level to place the signal at the top graticule line on the CRT display. 4. Measure the dc level at TP25. If the voltage measured is not +1.0 0.15 V, troubleshoot the A3 interface assembly. 5. Measure the dc level at TP26. The level should be approximately the same as the level measured at TP25. If not, suspect switch U44. 6. Set the Option 007 spectrum analyzer scale to 5dB per division.

Chapter 8

411

ADC/Interface Section A16 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments)

7. Adjust the Option 007 spectrum analyzer reference level to place the signal at the top graticule line on the CRT display. 8. Measure the dc level at TP25 and TP26. The level should be +1.0 0.25 V. If the level measured at TP26 differs from the level measured at TP25 by more than 0.25 volts, troubleshoot U43 and associated circuitry. 9. Disconnect the CAL OUTPUT signal from the INPUT 50 connector. 10.The level at TP26 should drop to 0.35 Vdc. If the level is less (more negative) than 0.35 Vdc, replace voltage clamp CR4. 11.Measure the dc level of the ash video at TP27. The level should be near 0 Vdc with the signal at the bottom graticule line (no input to the spectrum analyzer). 12.Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 connector. 13.Measure the dc level of the ash video at TP27. The level should be near +1.7 Vdc.

8-Bit Flash ADC

Refer to function block I of the A16 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The ash ADC (U35) converts the analog video signal into 8-bit digital values at a xed rate of 12 megasamples per second.
NOTE

When measuring voltages or waveforms on the A16 fast ADC assembly, connect the ground (or common) lead to the ground-plane trace on the A16 assembly. This digital ground plane is totally isolated from the chassis. 1. Press PRESET on the Option 007 spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz Reference level ....................................................... 20 dBm Log/division ........................................................... 5 dB/DIV Sweep time ................................................................. 20 ms 2. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 connector. 3. Pins 4 through 10 (ADC7-ADC1) and pin 21 (ADC0) of U35 should all be high (logic 1), corresponding to an ADC digital count of 255 for the analog input of +2 volts or greater. 4. Disconnect the CAL OUTPUT signal from the INPUT 50 connector.

412

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A16 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments)

5. Pins 4 through 10 (ADC7-ADC1) and pin 21 (ADC0) of U35 should all be low (logic 0), corresponding to an ADC digital count of zero for the analog input of 0 volts or less.

Peak/Pit Detection
Refer to function block J of the A16 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. Peak detection or pit (negative peak) detection can be enabled whenever the sample rate is less than 12 MHz (sweep times greater than 50 s). Peak detection uses the maximum value of all the samples taken within each bucket (between adjacent display points). Pit detection uses the minimum value of all the samples taken within each bucket. And sample detection uses the last sample of all the samples taken within each bucket. The different detection modes are implemented by selectively clocking latch U30, depending on the state of LP/Q which is generated in PAL U1 (block A). When LP/Q is low, U30 is clocked by WCLK. When LP/Q is high, U30 is not clocked. LP/Q is a function of the 12M_SEL, SCLK-1, LSAMPLE, LPEAK, P_LO, and P_HI signals. See Table 8-11. If the sample rate is 12 MHz, 12M_SEL is high, which forces LP/Q low so that every sample is clocked into latch U30 and latched into RAM U32 (block K). If the sample rate is less than 12 MHz and the detection mode is peak or pit, the SCLK-1, LPEAK, P_LO, and P_HI signals control the LP/Q signal. In these detection modes, latch U30 stores the peak or pit value of the samples taken for each bucket. The 8-bit digital magnitude comparator, U31, compares the input byte (P) with the output byte (Q) from latch U30. When P is greater than Q, P_LO is low (0) and P_HI is high (1). When P is less than Q, P_LO is high (1) and P_HI is low (0). When P is equal to Q, P_LO and P_HI are both low (0). See Table 8-11. Table 8-11
Mode 12MHz SAMPLE POS PEAK NEG PEAK (Pit) Clocking Peak/Pit Sample LP/Q L L L H H H L H L

LP/Q Truth Table

12M_SEL SCLK-1 H X L L L L L L L X X L L L L L L H LSAMPLE X L H H H H H H H LPEAK X X L L L H H H X P_LO X X L H L L H L X P_HI X X H L L H L L X

Chapter 8

413

ADC/Interface Section A16 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments)

32 K-Byte Static RAM

Refer to function block K of the A16 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The static RAM stores the ash ADC samples that are taken when the fast ADC circuitry is in the "write" mode. When not in the "write" mode, the static RAM is read by the CPU on the A2 controller assembly to retrieve the fast ADC data. The 8-bit Q bus connects the outputs of latch U30 to the data port of static RAM U32.

414

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments)

A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments)
The fast ADC control circuits consist of the CPU interface and control registers, the reference clock, a clock and sample rate generator, a trigger circuit, a 16-bit post-trigger counter, a 15-bit circular address counter, a video trigger comparator, and the reference and power supply circuits.

CPU Interface and Control Registers

Refer to function block A of the A16 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The A16 assembly digital interface to the A2 controller assembly consists of an 8-bit bi-directional data bus, one address line, a most-signicant byte strobe, and a least-signicant byte strobe. The A16 fast ADC assembly can be accessed by rmware (on the A2 controller assembly) at two logical addresses. When the address line (ADDR3) is low, the primary address is selected. When the ADDR3 is high, the secondary address is selected. The data transfers between the A16 fast ADC assembly and the A2 controller assembly are clocked by the two strobe lines, MSB_STRB and LSB_STRB. 16-bit word transfers occur as two sequential byte transfers; the most-signicant byte rst, followed by the least-signicant byte. The primary address (ADDR3 low) contains the 16-bit control word written by the rmware on the A2 controller assembly. The secondary address (ADDR3 high) supports both 8-bit byte and 16-bit word reads and writes. There is no read/write line on the A16 fast ADC assembly to control the direction of data transfer. The fast ADC is precongured to read or write by setting the appropriate bits in the 16-bit control word. Refer to Table 8-12 on page 416. If the control word is not correct, it may result in a bus conict.

Chapter 8

415

ADC/Interface Section A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments)

Table 8-12

Control Word at Primary Address (U3 and U4)

Bit Bit 0 Mnemonic WRITE 1 State Description Allows samples to be written to FADC memory. All on-board clocks running and samples being written to FADC memory. (FADC memory cannot be read by A2 controller in this mode.) All on-board clocks turned off and no samples being written to FADC memory. (FADC memory can be read by A2 controller.) Arms the FADC assembly for a trigger. 1 FADC assembly armed to accept trigger from HSWP line or video trigger. FADC assembly cannot be triggered. Turns on X2 log expand amplier. 1 0 A16U43 turned on. (5 dB/div or 1 dB/div scale) A16U43 turned off. (10 dB/div, 2 dB/div, or linear scale) Controls digital video trigger polarity. 1 0 Bit 4 LSAMPLE 1 0 Bit 5 LADCEN Negative-edge video trigger. Positive-edge video trigger. Enables sample detection mode. Sample detection mode disabled. Sample detection mode enabled. Enables FADC memory for "writes". (Toggled in conjunction with bit 0.) 1 0 Bit 6
LLOADADDR

Bit 1

ARM

0 Bit 2 GAINX2

Bit 3

VTRIG_POL

Disables FADC memory for "writes". Enables FADC memory for "writes". Enables load address counter.

1 0 Bit 7
LLOADPOST

"Writes" to the address counter disabled. "Writes" to the address counter enabled. Enables load post-trigger counter.

1 0 Bit 8 LVTRIG_EN 1 0

"Writes" to the post-trigger counter disabled. "Writes" to the post-trigger counter enabled. Enables digital video trigger on A16. Digital video trigger disabled. Digital video trigger enabled.

416

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments)

Table 8-12

Control Word at Primary Address (U3 and U4)

Bit Bit 9 Mnemonic LREADCLK State Description Clocks counters during "read" mode. Used to load post-trigger counter or address counter. Also used to post-increment address counter following memory "reads". 1 0 Bit 10
LREADMEM

Read clock disabled. Read clock enabled. Enables read FADC memory.

1 0 Bit 11
LREADADDR

Read FADC memory disabled. Read FADC memory enabled. Enables read trigger address latch.

1 0 Bit 12
LRATELATCH

"Reads" from trigger address latch disabled. "Reads" from trigger address latch enabled. Enables load sample rate latch.

1 0 Bit 13 LRLSHSWP

"Writes" to the sample rate latch are disabled. "Writes" to the sample rate latch are enabled. Releases HSWP strobe.

1 0 Bit 14
LLOADTRIG

Release HSWP strobe disabled. Release HSWP strobe enabled. Enables load video trigger level.

1 0 Bit 15 LPEAK

Load digital video trigger level disabled. Load digital video trigger level enabled. Peak/pit detection mode control.

Enables pit (negative-peak) detection mode if LSAMPLE (Bit 4) is also high. Enables peak detection mode if LSAMPLE (Bit 4) is high.

Chapter 8

417

ADC/Interface Section A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments)

Reference Clock
Refer to function block B of the A16 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The reference clock circuitry takes the 8 MHz CMOS square wave clock from the A2 controller assembly (via W59, coax 839) and triples the frequency to 24 MHz. Inverters U5A and U5B provide the proper match for the 8 MHz clock input, and also the desired drive level into the 24 MHz bandpass lter. The 24 MHz bandpass lter consists of R5, C8, L1, C9, C10, L2, C11, L3, C12, L4, C13, C14, and R6. Inverters U6A and U6B provide amplication of the 24 MHz clock to produce CMOS levels, and also buffer the 24 MHz clock output.

Clock and Sample Rate Generator

Refer to function block C of the A16 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The clock and sample rate generator takes the 24 MHz reference clock signal and generates all of the various clock signals used on the A16 fast ADC assembly. The sample rate generator consists of CMOS latch U15, CMOS counters U14 and U16, and CMOS ip-ops U7B and U9A. The sample rate generator only controls the rate at which the static RAM address counter (15-bit circular address counter) and the 16-bit post-trigger counter are clocked (ACLK and PCLK respectively). The sample rate generator also controls the number of ash ADC samples taken per bucket. The range of the sample rate is 1 sample per bucket (12 MHz rate) to 256 samples per bucket (less than 12 MHz rate). SCLK-1 is an input to PAL U1 (block A) and affects the LP/Q signal to ensure that the rst sample of a bucket is always clocked into latch U30 (block J) and written into static RAM U32 (block K) when the detection mode is peak or pit and the sample rate is less than 12 MHz. Refer to Table 8-11 on page 413.

418

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments)

Trigger
Refer to function block D of the A16 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. When the A16 fast ADC is triggered, the current static RAM address is latched into trigger address latches U27 and U28 (block G), and the post-trigger counter (U19, U20, U21, U22, and U47) begins counting. Samples continue to be written to consecutive addresses in RAM U32 until the post-trigger counter reaches its terminal count. The CPU on the A2 controller assembly monitors the HSWP line and starts a software timer when HSWP goes high after being triggered. The software timer is set to slightly longer than the post-trigger counter will be counting, so at the end of the "time-out", the post-trigger counter has already reached its terminal count. At the end of this "time-out", the CPU on the A2 controller assembly takes the fast ADC out of "write" mode and reads latches U27 and U28 to determine the static RAM address of the sample that was taken when the trigger occurred. The CPU then writes the trigger address (read at U27/U28) to the fast ADC static RAM address counter (15-bit circular address counter). If pre-trigger or post-trigger (delay) is being used, the CPU adds or subtracts appropriately and writes the "adjusted" trigger address to the static RAM counter. The CPU then begins reading the fast ADC data, starting from the trigger (or offset trigger) address. The trigger circuitry is enabled by the ARM signal (bit 1 of the fast ADC control word). Once a trigger occurs, the fast ADC cannot be triggered again until the ARM line goes low (disarmed), then high again (armed). The fast ADC is triggered by the HSWP line in FREE RUN, LINE, and EXTERNAL trigger modes. When VIDEO trigger is being used, a synchronous digital video trigger signal, VCLK, is generated by PAL U1 (block A) and U17A (block D).

Chapter 8

419

ADC/Interface Section A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments)

16-Bit Post-Trigger Counter

Refer to function block E of the A16 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The 16-bit post-trigger counter controls the number of static RAM memory locations that will be written after the trigger occurs. This counter consists of U19, U20, U21, U22, and U47. The counter is loaded from the CPU on the A2 controller assembly when the A16 fast ADC assembly is in "read" mode. The CPU loads the counter by rst setting the LLOADPOST (bit 7 of the fast ADC control word) and the LREADCLK (bit 9 of the fast ADC control word) to their low state. The CPU then writes the 16-bit word to the fast ADC secondary address. The rising edge of PCLK then latches the 16-bit data into the post-trigger counter. The post-trigger counter begins counting upward in "write" mode on the rst rising edge of PCLK after the LCOUNT signal from the trigger circuit goes low. The frequency of PCLK is the programmed sample rate. When the post-trigger counter reaches its terminal count, the LSTOP signal goes low and disables the static RAM address counter from further counting. LSTOP also forces LCOUNT high in NAND gate U11D, which disables the post-trigger counter.

15-Bit (32 K) Circular Address Counter

Refer to function block G of the A16 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. This 15-bit programmable circular counter provides the address lines of the static RAM (U32). The counter consists of U23, U24, U25, and U26. It counts upward from 0 to 32767 and then back to 0 in a circular fashion. When a trigger occurs, latches U27 and U28 latch the current static RAM address so that the CPU on the A2 controller assembly can later read the latches and determine the static RAM address of the sample that was taken when the trigger occurred. The CPU loads the address counter during "read" mode by rst setting LLOADADDR (bit 6 of the fast ADC control word) and LREADCLK (bit 9 of the fast ADC control word) to their low state. The CPU then writes the 16-bit load value to the CPU secondary address. The rising edge of ACLK then latches the 16-bit data into the address counter.

420

Chapter 8

ADC/Interface Section A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (Option 007 in 8564E and 8565E instruments)

After the address counter is loaded by the CPU during "read" mode, the static RAM is read by the CPU. The RAM is read by rst setting LREADMEM (bit 10 of the fast ADC control word) and LREADCLK (bit 9 of the fast ADC control word) to their low state. Since the LREADCLK control bit is low, a negative-going pulse on the ACLK line will occur on every static RAM "read" by the CPU. This causes the address counter to increment at the end of each static RAM "read" so that the address counter automatically post-increments to the next address of RAM U32. In order for this address post-increment to occur, the LSTOP count enable signal from the post-trigger counter must be high. LSTOP goes low when the post-trigger counter reaches its terminal count in the "write" mode to stop the address counter from counting. When the fast ADC assembly is changed from "write" mode to "read" mode, LSTOP will be low. So the CPU on the A2 controller board must always rst program the post-trigger counter to a value other than the terminal count (65535) to force LSTOP high.

Video Trigger Comparator

Refer to function block M of the A16 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. This 8-bit digital magnitude comparator, U34, compares the digitized samples from the ash ADC (latch U29 output) to the programmed video trigger level. The video trigger level value on IOB2 through IOB7 is latched into the P input (top portion of U34) by the rmware on the A2 controller assembly when the fast ADC is in "read" mode. When the sample on the Q input is higher than the video trigger level on the P input, V_HI output is high. and V_LO output is low. When the Q input is lower than the P input, V_HI output is low and V_LO output is high. And when P is equal to Q, both V_HI and V_LO are low. These two signals (V_HI and V_LO) go to PAL U1 (block A) and are used to clock the video trigger generator (block D).

Chapter 8

421

IF Section

427

IF Section Introduction

Introduction
The IF section contains the A4 log amplier/cal oscillator and the A5 IF assemblies. Figure 9-2 on page 431 illustrates the location of the A4 and A5 test connectors. Figure 9-7 on page 436 illustrates the level and paths through the IF section. Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software ........... page Troubleshooting the Cal Oscillator on A4 .................... page Using Diagnostic Software Troubleshooting A5 Using Diagnostic Software .......... page Automatic IF Adjustment ............................................... page Parameters Adjusted .................................................... page Requirements ................................................................ page Performance Test Failures .............................................. page IF Gain Uncertainty Performance Test ....................... page Scale Fidelity Performance Test .................................. page Resolution Bandwidths Performance Tests ................. page Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly) ................................... page Log Amplier ................................................................. page Linear Ampliers .......................................................... page Video Offset ................................................................... page Video Output ................................................................. page Frequency Counter Prescaler/Conditioner .................. page AM/FM Demodulator .................................................... page 4.8 kHz IF Filters .......................................................... page 10.7 MHz IF Filters ....................................................... page 4.8 kHz and 10.7 MHz IF Filters ................................. page 10.6952 MHz VCXO ...................................................... page Input Switch .................................................................. page LO Switch ...................................................................... page Synchronous Detector ................................................... page Limiter ........................................................................... page Isolation Amplier ........................................................ page Detector/Mixer ............................................................... page Log Offset/Gain Compensation .................................... page Log Offset Compensation .............................................. page Log Gain Compensation ................................................ page Video MUX .................................................................... page A5 IF Assembly ............................................................... page IF Signature .................................................................. page Common IF Signature Problems .................................. page 1 MHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems ...................... page 30 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems .................... page 3 kHz and 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems ... page Step Gains ..................................................................... page Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly) .................................. page 430 431 435 437 438 439 441 441 442 442 443 443 444 447 447 448 448 449 450 450 451 451 452 452 453 453 453 453 453 454 454 455 456 462 465 466 467 468 469

428

Chapter 9

IF Section Introduction

Cal Oscillator Unlock at Beginning of IF Adjust ......... page 470 Inadequate CAL OSC AMPTD Range ........................ page 471 300 Hz to 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Out of Specication ..page 472 Low-Pass Filter ............................................................. page 478 Sweep Generator ........................................................... page 479 AM/FM Demodulation, Audio Amplier, and Speaker page 479

Chapter 9

429

IF Section Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software

Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software

NOTE

Whenever the software program says "Connect the 8566 to .," just about any spectrum analyzer with GPIB will work. However, an 8566B or 8563E is recommended for speed of measurement. (The 8562A and 8560A-Series spectrum analyzers are much slower when using the diagnostics program.) For required hardware and instructions on how to load the 8564E/8565E adjustment/diagnostic software, refer to Chapter 2 , Adjustment/Diagnostic Software. The diagnostic software can be used to quickly isolate a number of common problems that might cause the spectrum analyzer to fail. Carefully follow the instructions displayed by the software program.

Figure 9-1

A4 and A5 Test Connectors

430

Chapter 9

IF Section Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software

Figure 9-2

A4 and A5 Test Connector Pin Locations

NOTE

Because the cal oscillator circuitry on the A4 assembly is such an integral part of the IF adjustment, always check this assembly rst, before checking the rest of the IF Section. A faulty cal oscillator can cause many apparent "faults" in the rest of the IF Section.

Troubleshooting the Cal Oscillator on A4 Using Diagnostic Software

1. From the 8564E/8565E adjustment/diagnostic software menu, select "CAL Oscillator Control." 2. Set the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC to external trigger and press SGL SWP, CAL, and IF ADJ OFF. 3. Using a second spectrum analyzer, look at the output of the cal oscillator at A4J8. Set the second spectrum analyzer to external trigger (positive-edge) and use the signal at A4U104 pin 2, with ground connection at A4U104 pin 10, to externally trigger the second spectrum analyzer. (A 20-pin IC clip is recommended to avoid inadvertently shorting pins together on A4U104.) 4. Select cw frequencies of 9.9 MHz, 10.7 MHz, and 11.5 MHz in the diagnostic software menu. The amplitude should be 35 dBm at each frequency. 5. Select the 20 kHz sweep width in the software menu. The display on the second spectrum analyzer should be similar to that shown in Figure 9-3 on page 433.

Chapter 9

431

IF Section Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software

6. Select the 10 kHz sweep width in the software menu. The display on the second spectrum analyzer should be similar to that shown in Figure 9-4 on page 433. 7. Select the 4 kHz sweep width in the software menu. The display on the second spectrum analyzer should be similar to that shown in Figure 9-5 on page 434. 8. Select the 2 kHz sweep width in the software menu. The display on the second spectrum analyzer should be similar to that shown in Figure 9-6 on page 434. 9. If the cal oscillator is not sweeping, check the output of the sweep generator circuit (A4U804 pin 8 of function block Z). A series of negative-going parabolas should occur. Frequency and amplitude vary, depending on the sweep width chosen. Table 9-1 lists the RANGE, MA0, and MA1 values for the sweep widths. Table 9-1 Sweep Width Settings
Sweep Width 20 kHz 10 kHz 4 kHz 2 kHz Sweep Time 5 ms 10 ms 30 ms 15 ms Res BW Adjusted 10 kHz 3 kHz 1 kHz 300 Hz RANGE A4U105 Pin 6 +5 V +5 V +5 V +5 V MA1 A4U105 Pin 2 0V 0V +5 V +5 V MA0 A4U105 Pin 5 0V +5 V 0V +5 V

432

Chapter 9

IF Section Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software

Figure 9-3

CAL Oscillator Swept Output, 20 kHz Width

Figure 9-4

CAL Oscillator Swept Output, 10 kHz Width

Chapter 9

433

IF Section Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software

Figure 9-5

CAL Oscillator Swept Output, 4 kHz Width

Figure 9-6

CAL Oscillator Swept Output, 2 kHz Width

434

Chapter 9

IF Section Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software

Troubleshooting A5 Using Diagnostic Software

The IF diagnostics in the software include: DC probe (using the TAM) Gain checks LC frequency checks Xtal frequency checks DC Probe Using the up/down arrow, select "DC probe" in the IF diagnostics menu. Connect the TAM (Test and Adjustment Module) and use the dc probe as directed by the diagnostic software program. The current into each IF lter or amplier stage is measured and compared to limits. This helps locate shorted or open components. An asterisk will appear at the points of failure. An @ indicates a measurement error (bad setup, GPIB not responding, test equipment error, or major failure).
NOTE

In the following gain and frequency checks, an 8566B or 8563E is the preferred spectrum analyzer. Gain Checks Using the up/down arrow, select "Gain checks" in the IF diagnostics menu. An 3335A synthesizer/level generator is used as a stimulus and a spectrum analyzer is used to measure the response. The gain of each stage is measured and compared to limits. An asterisk will appear at the points of failure. An "@" indicates a measurement error (bad setup, GPIB not responding, test equipment error, or major failure). LC Frequency Checks Using the up/down arrow, select "LC frequency checks" in the IF diagnostics menu. An 3335A synthesizer/level generator is used as a stimulus and a spectrum analyzer is used to measure the response. The center frequency tuning range and the bandwidth adjustment range are measured for each pole. The LC pole selection menu allows selection using the up/down arrows. Select "All Poles" rst, unless a particular pole is suspected to have failed. An asterisk will appear at the points of failure. An "@" indicates a measurement error (bad setup, GPIB not responding, test equipment error, or major failure).

Chapter 9

435

IF Section Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software

Xtal Frequency Checks Using the up/down arrow, select "Xtal frequency checks" in the IF diagnostics menu. An 3335A synthesizer/level generator is used as a stimulus and a spectrum analyzer is used to measure the response. The symmetry adjustment range and the bandwidth adjustment range are measured for each pole. The Xtal pole selection menu allows selection using the up/down arrows. Select "All Poles" rst, unless a particular pole is suspected to have failed. An asterisk will appear at the points of failure. An "@" indicates a measurement error (bad setup, GPIB not responding, test equipment error, or major failure). Figure 9-7 IF Section Troubleshooting Simplied Block Diagram

436

Chapter 9

IF Section Automatic IF Adjustment

Automatic IF Adjustment
The 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer performs an automatic adjustment of the IF Section whenever needed. The cal oscillator on the A4 assembly provides a stimulus signal which is routed through the IF during the retrace period. The A3 Interface assembly measures the response using its analog-to-digital converter (ADC). The 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer turns the cal oscillator off during a sweep. When IF ADJ is ON, the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer readjusts part of the IF circuitry during each retrace period to readjust the IF completely every 5 minutes. Automatic IF adjustment is performed upon the following conditions: Power on: (unless STOP ALIGN is pressed). The IF parameter variables are initialized to values loaded in program ROM and all possible IF adjustments are made. If STOP ALIGN is pressed, the adjustment is halted. If REALIGN LO &IF is selected: All possible IF adjustments (and LO adjustments) are made with the most recent IF parameter variables used as the starting point. If FULL IF ADJ is selected: All possible IF adjustments are made with the most recent IF parameter variables used as the starting point. (FULL IF ADJ is located in the CAL menu.) If ADJ CURR IF STATE is selected: All amplitude data and some resolution bandwidths are adjusted. The bandwidths adjusted are a function of the currently selected resolution bandwidth setting. Between sweeps: IF ADJ must be set to ON. When IF ADJ is OFF, an A is displayed along the left side of the graticule. If a FULL IF ADJ sequence cannot proceed beyond the amplitude portion, check the output of the cal oscillator on the A4 assembly as follows: 1. Disconnect cable W52 (coax 9) from A5J4. Connect cable W52 to the input of a second spectrum analyzer. 2. Set the second spectrum analyzer center frequency to 10.7 MHz and the reference level to 30 dBm. 3. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer under test, press FULL IF ADJ and observe the display of the second spectrum analyzer. 4. If a 35 dBm signal does not appear, the cal oscillator is probably at fault.

Chapter 9

437

IF Section Automatic IF Adjustment

Parameters Adjusted
The following IF parameters are adjusted in the sequence listed: 1. Amplitude a. Video Offsets: analog (using log amplier video offset DAC) and digital (applying stored constant to all readings) 1. Linear Scale Offset 2. Log Scale Offset 1. Wideband and Narrowband modes 2. 0 to 60 dB range in 10 dB steps 3. 10 dB/division and 2 dB/division (log expand) modes b. Step Gains (A5 IF Assembly) 1. First Step Gain for 16 different DAC settings 2. Second Step Gain for 16 different DAC settings 3. Third Step Gain for 0, 15, and 30 dB attenuation relative to maximum gain 4. Fine Attenuator for 32 evenly-spaced DAC settings c. Log Amplier Slopes and Fidelity 1. Wideband (RES BW 300 kHz through 2 MHz) and Narrowband modes (RES BW 300 Hz through 100 kHz) 2. 10 dB/division and 2 dB/division (log expand) modes d. Linear Scale Gains - On the log amplier assembly (P/O A4) e. Peak Detector Offsets (both Positive and Negative Peak Detectors with respect to normal sample path used by Auto IF Adjust) 2. LC Bandwidths a. 300 kHz resolution bandwidth center frequency, bandwidth, and gain b. 1 MHz resolution bandwidth center frequency, bandwidth, and gain c. 2 MHz resolution bandwidth gain d. 100 kHz resolution bandwidth center frequency, bandwidth, and gain e. 30 kHz resolution bandwidth center frequency, bandwidth, and gain

438

Chapter 9

IF Section Automatic IF Adjustment

f. Gain of all resolution bandwidth relative to the 300 kHz RES BW 3. Crystal Bandwidths a. The cal oscillator sweep rate is measured against the 100 kHz resolution bandwidth lter skirt. This result is used in compensating the sweeps used for adjusting the crystal bandwidths. b. 10 kHz resolution bandwidth 1. Center frequency of LC tank that loads the crystal 2. Symmetry adjustment to cancel crystal case capacitance. 3. Bandwidth c. 3 kHz resolution bandwidth: center frequency of LC tank and bandwidth of resolution bandwidth d. 1 kHz resolution bandwidth: bandwidth e. 300 Hz resolution bandwidth: bandwidth f. Gain of all resolution bandwidth relative to the 300 kHz RES BW. 4. Digital Bandwidths (1 Hz through 100 Hz; 10 Hz through 100 Hz if Option 103). a. VCXO (nal LO) tuned to align digital bandwidths with crystal bandwidth center frequency. b. Overall gain. c. Gain variation with input frequency.

Requirements
For the Automatic IF Adjustment routine to work, the spectrum analyzer must provide the following basic functions: Power supplies Control signals ADC 10 MHz frequency reference to the A4 log amp/cal oscillator A15 RF assembly isolation from the RF signal during IF adjustment A15 RF assembly isolation is a function of the REDIR signal in the A15 Flatness Compensation Control block.

Chapter 9

439

IF Section Automatic IF Adjustment

The references against which the Automatic IF Adjustment routine aligns are: 10 MHz reference (A15) Linear scale delity, especially the 10 dB gain stage in A4 linear amplier block 15 dB reference attenuator (A5) Cal Oscillator output power (A4)

440

Chapter 9

IF Section Performance Test Failures

Performance Test Failures

Failures in IF-Section-related performance tests may be investigated using the following information.

IF Gain Uncertainty Performance Test

Failure of this performance test indicates a possible problem with the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer IF gain circuits. Assuming no major IF problems causing IF adjustment errors, IF gain problems in the rst 50 dB of IF gain (REF LVLs of 0 dBm to 50 dBm with 10 dB ATTEN) are a result of faults on the A5 IF Assembly. IF gain problems in the next 60 dB of IF gain (REF LVLs of 60 dBm to 110 dBm, 10 dB ATTEN) result from log amplier faults on the A4 assembly. A signal level of 5 dBm is required at input (A5J3) for displaying a signal at top screen with 10 dB input attenuation and a 0 dBm reference level. Isolate IF gain problems on the log amplier assembly (A4) with the following steps: 1. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, SPAN, ZEROSPAN, FREQUENCY, 1 GHz, AMPLITUDE, 50 dBm. 2. Press CAL and IF ADJ OFF. 3. Disconnect cable W27 (coax 3) from A5J5 and connect cable W27 to the output of a signal generator. 4. Set the signal generator controls as follows: Amplitude ................................................................ +10 dBm Frequency ............................................................... 10.7 MHz 5. Simultaneously decrease the signal generator output and the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer REF LVL in 10 dB steps. The signal displayed by the spectrum analyzer should remain at the reference level for each step. If the signal deviates from the reference level, troubleshoot the video offset circuitry on the A4 assembly. 6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 with the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer set to linear.

Chapter 9

441

IF Section Performance Test Failures

Scale Fidelity Performance Test

Failure of this performance test indicates a possible problem with the A4 assembly: If the Linear, 5 dB/div, or 10 dB/div scales are out of specication, the fault is most likely on the log amplier assembly (P/O A4). If only the 1 dB/div or 2 dB/div scales are out of specication, the fault is most likely on the A3 interface assembly.

Resolution Bandwidths Performance Tests

Most resolution bandwidth problems are a result of A5 IF assembly failures. The resolution bandwidths are adjusted in the following sequence using 300 kHz as the reference: 1 MHz, 2 MHz, 100 kHz, 30 kHz, 10 kHz, 3 kHz, 1 kHz, 300 Hz, 100 Hz, 30 Hz, 10 Hz, 3 Hz, and 1 Hz. The 3 Hz and 1 Hz bandwidths are not available with Option 103. If the IF adjustment routine encountered an error, the previously adjusted resolution bandwidths should be working properly and default DAC values are used for the remaining resolution bandwidth settings. If the IF bandpass adjustments and the automatic IF adjustments fail to bring the resolution bandwidths within specication, troubleshoot the A5 IF assembly.

442

Chapter 9

IF Section Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly)

Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly)

The log amplier on the A4 assembly performs several functions. It provides log and linear paths converting the 10.7 MHz IF signal to video. In addition it also provides offset circuitry, AM/FM demodulator circuitry, a frequency counter output, and down conversion of the 10.7 MHz IF to 4.8 kHz for use by the digital IF. The log amp results are realized by using a wide dynamic range linear detector followed by a video log amp. The detector is used for both linear and log paths and contains a mixer that acts as the down converter mixer for the digital IF.
CAUTION

For troubleshooting, it is recommended that you use an active probe, such as an 85024A, and another spectrum analyzer. If an 1120A active probe is being used with a spectrum analyzer having dc coupled inputs, such as the 8566A/B, 8569A/B and the 8562A/B, either set the active probe for an ac-coupled output or use a dc-blocking capacitor between the active probe and the spectrum analyzer input. Failure to do this can result in damage to the spectrum analyzer or the probe.

Log Amplier
Refer to function blocks K, L, and AE of A4 Log Amplier Schematic Diagram (sheets 3 of 4 and 4 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The log amplier receives the detected video signal from the Detector/Mixer and outputs a voltage proportional to the log of the input voltage. The linear output is tapped off at the emitter of U501D. U507 provides input offset adjustment capability and adjusts the offset of the op amp formed by U501A, B, C, and D. Q502 is a buffer. Q501 switches in additional offset for digital RBWs. The logarithmic characteristic of the base-emitter junction of U502B is used in the feedback path to produce the logging affect. U502D is used to adjust for non-linearities in the linear mode. R531 is used to adjust log delity at the top of the screen. Use the following steps to verify proper operation of the log amplier chain: 1. Press CAL and IF ADJ OFF. Set the digital multimeter to read dc volts and connect the negative lead to the chassis of the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer. 2. Remove W27 from A4J3 and inject a 10.7 MHz signal of +10 dBm into A4J3. 3. Set the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer to log mode, with a resolution bandwidth of 300 kHz and single sweep.

Chapter 9

443

IF Section Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly)

4. Using the DMM, check the voltage at U503 pin 6. 5. Verify that this level is about 700 mV. 6. Adjust the source amplitude to place the signal at the reference level. 7. Reduce the input signal level in 10 dB steps, down to 60 dBm, while noting the voltage displayed on the DMM. The voltage should increase (become less negative) at a rate of 30 mV for each 10 dB decrease in input power. Troubleshoot the A4 assembly if the signal does not decrease properly. 8. Set the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz to place the wide/narrow lter in narrow mode. 9. Repeat steps 2 through 7. 10.If log delity is poor near the bottom of the screen or the 1 MHz resolution bandwidth is narrow, a fault might exist in the wide/narrow lter switch. (Refer to function block G of A4 log amplier schematic diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information.) Check this switch as follows: a. Monitor voltages on A4U302 pins 1 and 7 while changing the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer resolution bandwidth from 100 kHz to 300 kHz. b. If the voltages do not come within a few volts of the +15 V and 15 V supplies, U103 and U302 are suspect. c. Disconnect the digital multimeter and reconnect W27 to A4J3.

Linear Ampliers
Refer to function block C of A4 log amplier schematic diagram (sheet 2 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information.

444

Chapter 9

IF Section Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly)

The linear ampliers consist of two variable gain stages, U201C and U201E as well as the buffer amplier A4U201B, A4U201D, and A4Q201. The linear ampliers provide 0 to 40 dB of IF gain in 10 dB steps. The gain of A4U201C can be increased by 20 dB by turning on A4CR201 and A4CR210 with the control line LIN_20B. The gain of A4U201E can be increased by either 10 dB or 20 dB with the control lines LIN_10 or LIN_20A respectively. The gain can be selected by setting the reference level of the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer.

Table 9-2

IF Gain Application Guidelines (ATTEN=10 dB)

Power into A4J3 Reference Level Gain of A4U201C (Pin 8 in; Pin 3 out) 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 20 dB 20 dB Gain of A4U201E (Pin 3 in; Pin 10 out) 0 dB 10 dB 20 dB 10 dB 20 dB Total Gain

+6 dBm 4 dBm 14dBm 24 dBm 34 dBm

50 dBm 60 dBm 70 dBm 80 dBm 90 dBm

0 dB 10 dB 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB

Chapter 9

445

IF Section Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly)

Total gain can be measured by injecting the specied power into A4J3 and measuring the total gain provided by A4U201C and A4U201E. The following procedure provides a means of troubleshooting the linear ampliers: 1. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, SPAN, ZERO, SPAN, CAL, IF ADJ OFF, FREQUENCY, 1 GHz, AMPLITUDE, 50 dBm, LINEAR, MORE, AMPTD UNITS, dBm, and AMPLITUDE. 2. Disconnect W27 (coax 3) from A4J3 and connect the output of a signal generator to A4J3. 3. Set the signal generator controls as follows: Amplitude .................................................................. +6 dBm Frequency ............................................................... 10.7 MHz 4. Simultaneously decrease the signal generator output and 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer REF LVL in 10 dB steps to 90 dBm. At each step, the signal displayed on the spectrum analyzer should be within one division of the previous position. 5. If a problem exists, isolate it by comparing the actual gain of A4U201C and A4U201E with those listed in the above gain guidelines. 6. Reconnect W27 (coax 3) to A4J3.

446

Chapter 9

IF Section Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly)

Video Offset
Refer to function block P of A4 log amplier schematic diagram (sheet 3 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The circuit provides a programmable video offset, with a step size of 5 mV, from 300 mV to +900 mV. 1. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, SPAN, ZERO SPAN, FREQUENCY, 1 GHz, AMPLITUDE, 50 dBm, CAL, IF ADJ OFF. 2. Disconnect W27 (coax 3) from A4J3 and connect a signal generator to A4J3. 3. Set the signal generator controls as follows: Amplitude ............................................................. +10 dBm Frequency ............................................................ 10.7 MHz 4. Simultaneously decrease the signal generator output and 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer reference level in 10 dB steps down to 110 dBm. At each step, the signal displayed on the spectrum analyzer should be close to the reference level. 5. Reconnect W27 (coax 3) to A4J3 and cycle the spectrum analyzer power. Press STOP REALIGN when it appears. 6. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press SWEEP, SINGLE, CAL, and IF ADJ OFF. 7. The offset DAC, A4U102 pin 2, should now be at its default value of approximately +2.45 V. The voltage at U601 pin 3 should be approximately 0 V for a DAC output of 2.45 V. 8. If this default offset voltage is incorrect, DAC U102 is the most probable cause.

Video Output
1. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, FREQUENCY, 300 MHz, SPAN, 100 Hz, AMPLITUDE, 10 dBm, SGL SWP, CAL and IF ADJ OFF. 2. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 connector. 3. Disconnect W54 (coax 2) from A4J4. Connect a short SMB to SMB cable from A4J4 to an SMB tee and connect W54 to the tee. Connect a test cable from the tee to the input of an oscilloscope.

Chapter 9

447

IF Section Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly)

4. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows: Amplitude scale ................................................... 200 mV/div Offset ........................................................................ +400 mV Coupling ............................................................................... dc Sweep time ....................................................... 50 s/division 5. The oscilloscope should display a 4.8 kHz sine wave. 6. Disconnect the cable from the CAL OUTPUT and the INPUT 50 connectors. 7. Set the resolution bandwidth to 2 MHz. 8. Broadband noise should be displayed on the oscilloscope from approximately +200 mV to +400 mV. 9. As the REF LVL is decreased in 10 dB steps from 10 dBm to 70 dBm, the noise displayed on the oscilloscope should increase in 100 mV increments. If this response is not observed, refer to Step Gains and Video Offset. 10.Reconnect cable W54 to A4J4.

Frequency Counter Prescaler/Conditioner

Refer to function block Q of A4 log amplier schematic diagram (sheet 4 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The frequency counter prescaler/conditioner divides the frequency by two, and then attenuates it. The circuit consists of frequency divider (U703A) and an output attenuator. The frequency divider turns on only when the instrument is counting.

AM/FM Demodulator
Refer to function block R of A4 Log Amplier Schematic Diagram (sheet 4 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The demodulator circuitry on the log amplier on A4 produces a low-level audio signal. This audio signal is then amplied by the audio amplier on A4. The FM demodulator demodulates narrowband FM (5 kHz deviation) signals. The detector (block J) demodulates AM signals. 1. If demodulation problems occur when the spectrum analyzer is in the frequency domain, perform the Frequency Span Accuracy performance test and, if necessary, the YTO Adjustments procedure.

448

Chapter 9

IF Section Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly)

2. If an FM signal cannot be demodulated, perform the Demodulator Adjustment procedure. If the output of A4C707 cannot be adjusted as described in the Demodulator Adjustment procedure, troubleshoot the FM Demodulator or Audio MUX circuits on A4.

4.8 kHz IF Filters

Refer to function block N of A4 Log Amplier Schematic Diagram (sheet 3 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. Problems with the 4.8 kHz lters can result in spurious signals appearing 2.88 kHz to 3.52 kHz greater than the frequency of the desired response. Also, ERR 536 RBW <300 may occur when problems exist with the 4.8 kHz IF lters. Measure the passband of the 4.8 kHz IF lters as described in the following procedure: 1. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press CAL, IF ADJ OFF, SPAN, and 600 Hz. 2. Disconnect W27 from A4J3 and inject a 10.7 MHz signal of 20 dBm into A4J3. 3. Fine-tune the frequency of the signal generator to center the signal on the screen. Set the signal generator to sweep one 2 kHz span about this center frequency. Press SGL SWP on the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer. 4. Set another spectrum analyzer, such as the 8566A/B, to 4.8 kHz center frequency and 2 kHz span.
CAUTION

If a dc block is not used, damage to the 8566A/B results. The 8566A/B and many other spectrum analyzers have dc-coupled inputs and cannot tolerate dc voltages on their inputs. 5. Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT (rear panel) of the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer through a 20 dB attenuator and dc block to the input of the 8566A/B. Set the sweep time of the 8566A/B to 10 seconds. 6. Set the 8566A/B to single trigger and press TRACE A CLEAR-WRITE. Trigger a sweep of the 8566A/B and the signal generator simultaneously. The 8566A/B shows the passband of the 4.8 kHz IF lters. The 3 dB bandwidth of the lters should be 1.2 kHz. The passband of the lters should be at within 2 dB over 800 Hz. 7. Reconnect W27 (coax 3) to A4J3.

Chapter 9

449

IF Section Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly)

10.7 MHz IF Filters

1. Press PRESET, FREQUENCY, 300 MHz, SPAN, 600 Hz, CAL, and IF ADJ OFF. 2. Disconnect W29 (coax 7) from A5J3. Set the signal generator for a 10.7 MHz signal at 50 dBm and connect it to A5J3. 3. Fine tune the frequency of the signal generator to center the signal on the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer display. Set the signal generator to sweep one 2 kHz span about this center frequency. 4. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP. 5. Disconnect W27 (coax 3) from A5J5. Connect a test cable from A5J5 to the input of an 8566A/B. 6. Set the 8566A/B as follows: Center frequency .................................................... 10.7 MHz Span .............................................................................. 2 kHz Reference level ......................................................... +10 dBm Sweep ............................................................................ Single 7. Press TRACE A CLEAR-WRITE on the 8566A/B. 8. Trigger a sweep on the signal generator and on the 8566A/B simultaneously. The 8566A/B should display a 3 dB bandwidth of approximately 500 Hz. 9. Reconnect W27 (coax 3) to A5J5 and W29 (coax 7) to A5J3.

4.8 kHz and 10.7 MHz IF Filters

1. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, FREQUENCY, 300 MHz, SPAN, 600 Hz, CAL, and IF ADJ OFF. 2. Disconnect W29 (coax 7) from A5J3. Set the signal generator for a 10.7 MHz signal at 60 dBm and connect it to A5J3. 3. Fine tune the frequency of the signal generator to center the signal on the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer display. Set the signal generator to sweep one 2 kHz span about this center frequency. 4. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP.

450

Chapter 9

IF Section Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly)

CAUTION

Damage to the 8566A/B results if a dc block is not used. The 8566A/B and many other spectrum analyzers have dc-coupled inputs and cannot tolerate dc voltages on their inputs. 5. Set the 8566A/B to 4.8 kHz center frequency and 2 kHz span. 6. Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT (rear panel) of the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer through a 20 dB attenuator and dc block to the input of the 8566A/B. Set the sweep time of the 8566A/B to 10 seconds. 7. Set the 8566A/B to single trigger and press TRACE A CLEAR-WRITE. Trigger a sweep on the 8566A/B and on the signal generator simultaneously. The 8566A/B should show a 3 dB bandwidth of 600 Hz 100 Hz. 8. Reconnect W29 (coax 7) to A5J3.

10.6952 MHz VCXO

Refer to function block E of A4 log amplier schematic diagram (sheet 2 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The purpose of the 10.6952 MHz voltage-controlled crystal oscillator (VCXO) is to provide an LO for down-converting the peak of the 10.7 MHz IF lter passband to 4.8 kHz. Since the peak of the passband of the 10.7 MHz IF lters is 10.7 MHz 300 Hz, the frequency of the VCXO is between 10.6949 MHz and 10.6955 MHz. This frequency can best be measured at the collector of A4Q202. The center frequency of the 300 Hz resolution-bandwidth lters and the 1 Hz to 100 Hz lters should differ no more than 10 Hz. If the center frequency is different by more than this, or if no signal is present in the 1 Hz to 100 Hz resolution-bandwidth settings, troubleshoot the 10.6952 MHz VCXO. Error message ERR 539 may occur if the VCXO is not oscillating. If problems exist with the VCXO control voltage, error messages ERR 536 or ERR 530 may occur. Between sweeps the VCXO, at times, is turned off. To prevent the oscillator from turning off, press PRESET, FREQUENCY, 0.3 GHz, SPAN, 1 kHz, SGL SWP, CAL, and IF ADJ OFF.

Input Switch
Refer to function block D of A4 Log Amplier Schematic Diagram (sheet 2 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information.

Chapter 9

451

IF Section Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly)

The input switch switches between log and linear modes. In addition it contains a 20 dB attenuator which is used only in digital resolution bandwidth settings. CR207, CR208, and CR209 form the input switch. CR205 and CR206 switch in R234 when in linear mode to maintain a constant impedance at J3. CR210, CR211, CR212, and CR221 switch the 20 dB attenuator in and out.

LO Switch
Refer to function block F of A4 log amplier schematic diagram (sheet 2 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The LO switch switches the limiter input between the 10.7 MHz path or the 10.6952 MHz VCXO path.

Synchronous Detector
A wide dynamic range linear detector is realized by the limiter (block G), the isolation amplier (block H), the LO amplier (block I), and the detector/mixer (block J). The combination of these circuits form what is commonly known as a synchronous detector. The input signal is split between two paths. One path ows through the isolation amplier and the other path ows through the limiter and LO amplier The path owing through the limiter generates the LO for the detector/mixer block. The path through the isolation amplier drives the RF port. To troubleshoot this group of circuits set the RBW to 300 kHz. Inject 10.7 MHz at +6 dbm into J3. Probe the gate of A4Q404 or A4Q405 with a scope. Look for a 0 to 3 V square wave. Decrease the input power from +6 dBm to 84 dBm in 10 dB steps. The square wave signal should remain unchanged. It is normal for the phase of the signal to jitter at the lowest signal levels. The signals at the gates of A4Q404 and A4Q405 should be 180 degrees out of phase from each other. If they are not 180 degrees out of phase or one of the signals are not present, troubleshoot the LO Amplier or the FETs in the mixer. If the signal is not a symmetrical square wave, troubleshoot the LO amplier. If the signal drops out prematurely or is not present at all, troubleshoot the limiter or LO amplier. Repeat the procedure for an RBW 100 kHz. If the log amplier works in the 300 kHz RBW but not in the narrower RBWs, troubleshoot the log narrow lter in the limiter or isolation amplier. A4CR302 and A4CR303 are varactor diodes in the limiter lter and are used to tune the lter.

452

Chapter 9

IF Section Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly)

Limiter Refer to function block G of A4 log amplier schematic diagram (sheet 2 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The limiter consists of 7 identical 20 dB gain stages. A "log narrow lter" is switched in for RBWs 100 kHz. This lter is switched in using the control lines NARROW between the 4th and 5th stages. During normal operation, the limiter serves to amplify even the smallest 10.7 MHz signals up to a level sufcient to drive the LO Amplier and subsequent detector/mixer. This signal serves as the LO for the mixer circuitry. Isolation Amplier Refer to function block H of A4 log amplier schematic diagram (sheet 3 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The isolation amplier prevents LO port to RF port feedthrough in the mixer from feeding back to the input of the limiter and causing loop oscillations. In addition, the isolation amplier matches the phase of the non-limited signal path to the phase of the limited signal path. The isolation amplier should have a gain of about 4 dB and also has a "log narrow lter" that is switched with the control line NARROWB. Detector/Mixer Refer to function block J of A4 log amplier schematic diagram (sheet 3 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. Sum and difference frequencies are produced in the Detector/Mixer. The difference frequency produces video (dc to approximately 3 MHz), since the two signals are at the same frequency. During digital resolution bandwidths the two signals are separated by about 4.8 kHz.

Log Offset/Gain Compensation

Refer to function blocks L and M of A4 log amplier schematic diagram (sheet 3 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. Log Offset Compensation The gain of A4U503 is set to unity, with A4R539 and A4R540 combining for a gain of 0.5. Therefore, the gain from A4U503 pin 3 to A4U508 pin 3 should be 0.5.

Chapter 9

453

IF Section Log Amplier (P/O A4 Assembly)

Log Gain Compensation The gain of A4U508 is nominally 6.8, measuring from pin 3 to pin 8. To check the log offset/gain compensation circuits inject a +10 dBm signal into J3 with the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer set to log mode. Measure A4U503 pin 3, Vin (1) and A4U508 pin 3, Vout (1) and record the results. Decrease the input level to 40 dBm and make the same measurements recording Vin (2) and Vout (2). The gain is then:

( V OUT ( 1 ) V OUT ( 2 ) ) -----------------------------------------------------( V IN ( 1 ) V IN ( 2 ) )

This gives an offset-independent gain measurement.

Video MUX
The video MUX switches the video output between linear, log and 4.8 kHz IF (for digital RBWs). The demod video is an unused feature. The easiest way to troubleshoot this circuit is to look for blown FETs. Bad FETs are characterized by having signicant gate current. Only one of the signal lines LIN_VIDEO, IF_VIDEO or LOG_VIDEO should be high (+15 V) at any given time. The others should be low (15 V). Also look for a voltage drop of several volts across the gate resistors R601, R605, R609, or R613 when in either the off or on state. This indicates gate current and thus a bad FET.

454

Chapter 9

IF Section A5 IF Assembly

A5 IF Assembly
The input switch connects the IF to either the cal oscillator on the A4 assembly or the 10.7 MHz IF output from the A15 RF assembly. The automatic IF adjustment uses the cal oscillator on A4 at instrument turn-on and between sweeps to align the IF lters and step-gain ampliers. During sweeps the input switch selects the 10.7 MHz IF output from A15. The LC lters are variable-bandwidth lters that provide resolution bandwidths from 30 kHz to 2 MHz. The automatic IF adjustment sets the bandwidths and center frequencies of each lter stage. The crystal lters are variable-bandwidth lters that provide resolution bandwidths from 300 Hz to 10 kHz. The automatic IF adjustment sets the lter bandwidths and symmetry. The step-gain ampliers consist of the rst step-gain stage, second step-gain stage, and third step-gain stage. These ampliers provide gain when the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer reference level is changed. The ampliers also provide gain range to compensate for variations in the IF lter gains, which change with bandwidth and environmental conditions, and band conversion loss in the front end. Fixed-gain ampliers shift the signal levels to lower the noise of the IF chain. The assembly has two variable attenuators. The ne attenuator provides the 0.1 dB reference level steps. The reference 15 dB attenuator provides a reference for automatic adjustment of the step-gain ampliers and the log amplier. The reference 15 dB attenuator also provides gain for changes in spectrum analyzer reference level. Various buffer ampliers provide a high-input impedance to prevent loading of the previous lter pole and a low-output impedance to drive the next lter pole. Digital control signals from the W2 control cable, the "analog bus," drive the control circuitry. At the beginning of each sweep the analog bus sets each control line for instrument operation. At the end of each sweep the analog bus sets each control line for the next portion of the automatic IF adjustment routine. IF adjustments continuously remove the effects of component drift as the spectrum analyzer temperature changes. The assembly contains a reference limiting amplier. This amplier provides a known amount of limiting for the automatic IF adjustment routines. (Limiting occurs only during the automatic IF adjustment routines.) The LC34_Short switches are open during sweeps. The current in the reference limiter is increased during sweeps to prevent limiting.

Chapter 9

455

IF Section A5 IF Assembly

CAUTION

For troubleshooting, it is recommended that you use an active probe, such as an 85024A, and another spectrum analyzer. If an 1120A active probe is being used with a spectrum analyzer having dc-coupled inputs, such as the 8566A/B, 8569A/B and the 8562A/B, either set the active probe for an ac-coupled output or use a dc-blocking capacitor between the active probe and the spectrum analyzer input. Do not short control voltages to ground. These voltages are not short-circuit protected. DACs damaged by shorting these voltages might not fail until several weeks after the shorting takes place. Do not short power supply voltages to ground. The 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer power supply current limiting cannot protect the resistors in series with the power supply.

CAUTION

NOTE

Some transistors have collectors connected to the case. Electrical connection of the case to the collector might not be reliable, making collector voltage measurements on the transistor case unreliable.

IF Signature
1. Disconnect W27 (coax 3) from A5J5. 2. Connect an SMB tee to A5J5, using a short coaxial cable with SMB connectors. 3. Connect one output of the tee to cable W27 (coax 3). 4. Connect an 85024A active probe, with a 10:1 divider installed, to the other output of the tee. 5. Connect the output (type N connector) of the active probe to the input of the 8566A/B spectrum analyzer. 6. Connect the probe power cable to the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer front panel PROBE POWER connector (you may need to use a probe power extension cable, 10131B).

456

Chapter 9

IF Section A5 IF Assembly

7. Set the 8566A/B controls as follows: Reference level ...................................................... +10 dBm Center frequency ................................................. 10.7 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz Resolution bandwidth ........................................... 300 kHz Video bandwidth .................................................... 300 kHz Sweep time .................................................................... 5.5 s Trigger ....................................................................... Single 8. On the 8566A/B, press SHIFT, (trace A blank) to set detector to SAMPLE mode. 9. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press PRESET and set the controls as follows: Center frequency ................................................... 300MHz Span ........................................................................... 5MHz 10.On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP and CAL. 11.Simultaneously press SINGLE on the 8566A/B and ADJ CURR IF STATE on the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer. The IF signature is displayed on the 8566A/B display. It may be necessary to experiment with different time intervals between initiating the sweep on the 8566A/B and initiating the current IF state adjustment on the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer. 12.Compare the IF signature to the signature of a properly operating spectrum analyzer illustrated in Figure 9-8 on page 458. If the signatures do not closely resemble each other, a more detailed view of the signature may show the failed hardware. a. Set the 8566A/B controls as follows: Sweep time .......................................................... 550 ms dB/division ............................................................... 5 dB Reference level .................................................. 5 dBm

Chapter 9

457

IF Section A5 IF Assembly

b. Press SINGLE on the 8566A/B and, a very short time later, press ADJ CURR IF STATE on 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer. Figure 9-9 on page 459 through Figure 9-13 on page 461 illustrate detailed IF signatures of a properly operating 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer. It may be necessary to experiment with different time intervals between initiating the sweep on the 8566A/B and initiating the current IF state adjustment on the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer to obtain the waveforms shown. Note the changes in the 8566A/B video bandwidth and sweep time. 13.Reconnect W27 (coax 3) to A5J5.

Figure 9-8

IF Adjust Signature

458

Chapter 9

IF Section A5 IF Assembly

Figure 9-9

Detailed IF Adjust Signature (1)

Figure 9-10

Detailed IF Adjust Signature (2)

Chapter 9

459

IF Section A5 IF Assembly

Figure 9-11

Detailed IF Adjust Signature (3)

Figure 9-12

Detailed IF Adjust Signature (4)

460

Chapter 9

IF Section A5 IF Assembly

Figure 9-13

Detailed IF Adjust Signature (5)

Chapter 9

461

IF Section A5 IF Assembly

Common IF Signature Problems

Region A of Figure 9-9, Detailed IF Adjust Signature (1) is noisy: Suspect the rst LC pole. Region B of Figure 9-9 on page 459 is at: Suspect the third step-gain stage, the ne attenuator, or the fourth LC-pole output amplier. Region C of Figure 9-9, Detailed IF Adjust Signature (1) has no 15 dB step: Suspect the reference 15 dB attenuator. Region D of Figure 9-9 on page 459 is at: Suspect the second step-gain stage. Entire signature noisy: If the signature resembles Figure 9-14 on page 463, suspect a broken rst step-gain stage or a break in the signal path in the input switch, rst crystal pole, or second crystal pole. Correct shape but noisy: If the signature resembles Figure 9-15, Noise with Correct Shape suspect the second crystal-pole output amplier. Amplitude of Region B of Figure 9-16, Region B Amplitude Variation varies more than 12 dB: Suspect the third step-gain stage output amplier. Region B of Figure 9-17, Region B Amplitude Offset is kinked: Suspect the fourth LC-pole output amplier.

462

Chapter 9

IF Section A5 IF Assembly

Figure 9-14

Noisy Signature

Figure 9-15

Noise with Correct Shape

Chapter 9

463

IF Section A5 IF Assembly

Figure 9-16

Region B Amplitude Variation

Figure 9-17

Region B Amplitude Offset

464

Chapter 9

IF Section A5 IF Assembly

1 MHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems

Check the crystal shorting switches as follows: 1. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press PRESET and set the controls as follows: Resolution bandwidth .............................................. 1 MHz Span ....................................................................... 500 kHz Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz 2. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, connect the 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50. 3. If the trace atness is not within 2.5 dB, a failure probably exists. 4. A trace similar to Figure 9-18 on page 465 indicates a crystal short failure. 5. Press SPAN to set the spectrum analyzer to 3 MHz. A trace that slopes across the screen (see Figure 9-19, Faulty LC Pole) indicates a failed LC pole. To isolate the broken pole refer to the shape factor information in 30 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems. Figure 9-18 Faulty Crystal Short

Chapter 9

465

IF Section A5 IF Assembly

Figure 9-19

Faulty LC Pole

30 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems

Shape factor too high: Shape factor is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB bandwidth. Shape factor should be less than 15:1. If one of the LC poles malfunctions, the shape factor may be the only indication of the failure. Isolate the non-functioning pole with the IF signature. Region E of Figure 9-13 on page 461 illustrates the four LC- pole adjustments. Take several signatures to examine the LC-pole adjustments. If one of the four sections of Region E is consistently longer than the others, the corresponding LC pole is faulty. IF gain compression: FET transistors Q301, Q303, Q700, and Q701 can deteriorate with age. Measuring less than 0 volts on the FET source indicates a bad FET. Bandwidth too wide: Check for contamination on the printed-circuit board. Clean the board as required.

466

Chapter 9

IF Section A5 IF Assembly

3 kHz and 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems

Asymmetric Filter Response: Check the crystal symmetry control with the following steps: 1. Press PRESET. 2. Set the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Resolution bandwidth .................................................. 3 kHz Span .......................................................................... 100 kHz Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz 3. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, connect the 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 . 4. A trace similar to Figure 9-20, Faulty Crystal Symmetry indicates a failed crystal-symmetry circuit. Narrow 10 kHz resolution bandwidth: Check for printed-circuit board contamination. Clean the board as required. IF Gain Compression in 10 kHz resolution bandwidth: FET transistors Q202, Q203, Q501, and Q503 can deteriorate with age. Measuring less than 0 volts on the FET source indicates a bad FET. Figure 9-20 Faulty Crystal Symmetry

Chapter 9

467

IF Section A5 IF Assembly

Step Gains
Refer to function blocks B, H, and I of A5 IF lter schematic diagram (sheets 1 of 3 and2 of 3) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. 1. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, SPAN, ZEROSPAN, FREQUENCY, and 1 GHz. 2. Press CAL and IF ADJ OFF. 3. Disconnect W29 (coax 7) from A5J3 and W27 (coax 3) from A5J5. 4. Inject a 5 dBm, 10.7 MHz signal into A5J3. 5. Monitor the output of A5J5 with another spectrum analyzer. 6. Simultaneously decrease the signal generator output and 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer reference level in 10 dB steps down to a 50 dBm reference level. 7. At each step, the signal displayed on the other spectrum analyzer should be close to +10 dBm. (More subtle IF gain problems might require smaller signal generator and reference level steps.) 8. Reconnect W29 to A5J3 and W27 (coax 3) to A5J5.

468

Chapter 9

IF Section Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly)

Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly)

The cal oscillator on the A4 assembly supplies the stimulus signal for automatic IF adjustments. Normally, the oscillator operates only during retrace (for a few milliseconds) to adjust part of the IF. (All IF parameters are to be readjusted about every 5 minutes.) With continuous IF adjust ON, a group of IF parameters are adjusted during each retrace period (non-disruptive). If continuous IF adjust is OFF, the most recent IF calibration data is used. The IF parameters adjusted include step gains, log amplier gain and offset, bandwidth centering, 3 dB bandwidth, bandwidth amplitude, and crystal-lter symmetry. The cal oscillator provides three types of output signals (all 35 dBm): 10.7 MHz 9.9 to 11.5 MHz in 100 kHz steps Frequency sweeps from 20 kHz to 2 kHz centered at 10.7 MHz (lasting 5 to 60 ms respectively) The signals perform the following functions: Adjust gains, log amps, and video slopes and offsets. Adjust 3 dB bandwidth and center frequencies of LC resolution bandwidth lters (30 kHz through 1 MHz). Adjust 3 dB bandwidth, symmetry, and gain of the crystal resolution bandwidth lters (300 Hz through 10 kHz). The cal oscillator uses a phase-locked loop (PLL). The oscillator (function block X) is locked to the instrument 10 MHz reference. The reference divider (function block U) divides the reference and delivers a 100 kHz TTL signal to the phase detector (function block V). The divide-by-N circuitry (function block Y) divides the oscillator output of 9.9 MHz to 11.5 MHz (by 99 to 115) resulting in a 100 kHz output to the phase detector. When the cal-oscillator PLL is locked, narrow positive and negative of equal width pulses occur at the phase detector output. Since the phase detector drives a low-input impedance at the loop integrator, observe the positive pulses at A4CR808 anode and negative pulses at A4CR809 cathode. The loop integrator acts as a low-pass lter that lters the pulses and inverts the result. If the anode of A4CR808 is more positive (with respect to ground) than the cathode of A4CR809 is negative, the loop integrator output should saturate to approximately 13 V. Conversely, if the anode of A4CR808 is less positive than the cathode of A4CR809 is negative, the integrator should saturate to a positive voltage.

Chapter 9

469

IF Section Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly)

NOTE

If error messages ERR 581 AMPL or ERR 582 AMPL appears, refer to error message ERR 582 AMPL in Chapter 6 and perform the procedure provided. 1. The oscillator output frequency should exceed 11.5 MHz if the CAL OSC TUNE line, A4U804 pin 14, exceeds +9 V. The oscillator frequency should be less than 9.9 MHz if CAL OSC TUNE is less than 9 V. The oscillator only operates when CALOSC_OFF is low (0 V). 2. If the cal oscillator remains locked (no error code ERR 499 displayed) but does not have the correct output level, troubleshoot the output leveling circuitry (function blocks AA, AB, and AC) or output attenuator (function block AD).

Cal Oscillator Unlock at Beginning of IF Adjust

1. Press LINE to turn the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer off and then on. The words IF ADJUST STATUS appear on the display 10 seconds after the instrument is turned on (assuming the rest of the instrument is working correctly). Immediately observe the lower right corner of the display for error messages. If the message ERR 499 CAL UNLK appears (before errors ERR 561, ERR 562 and ERR 565), the cal oscillator is unable to phase-lock. Expect to see the ERR 499 message for only about 1 second. 2. If the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer registers an unlocked cal oscillator, continue with step 3 to verify the presence of externally supplied signals. 3. Check A4U811 pin 9 for a 100 kHz TTL-level square wave verifying operation of A4U811, A4Q802, and the 10 MHz input signal from A4J7. 4. Check the +15 VF, +5 VF and 15 V power supplies, and +10 V reference on the A4 assembly. 5. Check that A4U807 pin 5 (CALOSC_OFF) becomes TTL low (0 V) at the start of a FULL IF ADJ (press CAL and FULL IF ADJ). The phase modulation output at A4U804 pin 8 should also remain at 0 volts. If these checks are correct, troubleshoot blocks V, W, X, and Y. See Figure 9-26, A4 Log Amplier/Cal Oscillator Block Diagram (2 of 2).

470

Chapter 9

IF Section Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly)

Inadequate CAL OSC AMPTD Range

Refer to function block AC of A4 Log Amplier Schematic Diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. 1. If A4R826, CAL OSC AMPTD, has inadequate range to perform the IF Amplitude Adjustment, press CAL. 2. Rotate A4R826 fully clockwise and disconnect W52 (coax 9) from A5J4. 3. Connect A5J4 to the input of a second spectrum analyzer. 4. Set the other spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Center frequency .................................................... 10.7 MHz Reference level ......................................................... 30 dBm 5. Observe the spectrum analyzer display while pressing FULL IF ADJ. The signal level should be greater than 34.55 dBm. If the signal level is incorrect, continue with step 7. 6. Rotate A4R826 fully counterclockwise. The signal should be less than 36.25 dBm. If the signal level is correct at both settings, troubleshoot the A5 IF assembly. If the signal level is incorrect, continue with step 7. 7. Troubleshoot the ALC loop on this assembly using the following steps: a. Connect a positive DVM probe to A4J9 pin 4. b. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press CAL. c. Press FULL IF ADJ. Observe the DVM reading between the displayed messages IF ADJUST STATUS: 300 kHz RBW and IF ADJUST STATUS: 3 kHz RBW. During this time period, the voltage should be within a 2 to 10 Vdc range. d. Observe the DVM reading while IF ADJUST STATUS: AMPLITUDE is displayed. The reading should be within the 2 to 10 Vdc range. e. If the DVM reading is outside the range in step c but inside the range in step d, suspect one of the reactive components in the lter. 8. If the ALC loop is working correctly (A4J9 pin 4 within the test tolerances given), then either the output attenuator is defective, or A4U810 pin 6 (in ALC loop integrator) is outside of its +3 to +6 Vdc range. 9. Reconnect W52 (coax 9) to A5J4.

Chapter 9

471

IF Section Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly)

300 Hz to 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Out of Specication

1. If the 3 dB bandwidth of one of these lters is incorrect, suspect a failure of one of the ve available sweeps from the cal oscillator sweep generator (function block Z). These sweeps are generated by changing the switch settings of A4U803 which routes signals through A4U802 and A4U804. 2. Disconnect W52 (coax 9) from A4J8. 3. Connect an SMB tee to A4J8, using a short coaxial cable with SMB connectors. 4. Connect one output of the tee to cable W52 (coax 9). 5. Connect an 85024A active probe to the other output of the tee. 6. Connect the output (type N connector) of the active probe to the input of the 8566A/B spectrum analyzer. 7. Connect the probe power cable to the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer front panel PROBE POWER connector (you may need to use a probe power extension cable, 10131B). 8. Press INSTR PRESET on the 8566A/B and set the controls as follows: Center frequency ................................................. 10.8 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz Reference level ....................................................... 43 dBm Resolution bandwidth ............................................ 100 kHz Video bandwidth ....................................................... 10 kHz Sweep time ................................................................. 50 ms Scale ................................................................ 1 dB/division Sweep ..................................................................... SINGLE 9. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press PRESET and CAL. 10.Press FULL IF ADJ. When the display reads ADJUSTING IF: 10 kHz RBW, press SINGLE on the 8566A/B. 11.The 8566A/B screen illustrates frequency versus time of the output sweeps of the cal oscillator. See Figure 9-21, Output Waveform, 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth. The slope of the 8566A/B 100 kHz resolution bandwidth is used to detect frequency changes. Sweeps that vary (greater than 30 percent) from the normal levels, trigger error code ERR 581 or ERR 582. 12.Press FULL IF ADJ. When the display reads ADJUSTING IF: 3 kHz, press SINGLE on the 8566A/B.

472

Chapter 9

IF Section Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly)

13.Figure 9-22 on page 475 illustrates normal operation. Severe failures (slope error greater than 30 percent) and subtle 3 kHz resolution bandwidth errors (less than 30 percent) indicate a problem with A4U802, A4U803, A4U804, or A4U106. 14.Severe failure of the bandwidth accompanied by subtle errors in the output signal indicate an A5 failure. 15.Set the 8566A/B controls as follows: Center frequency ................................................ 10.710 MHz Resolution bandwidth ................................................ 10 kHz Video bandwidth ........................................................... 1 kHz Sweep time .................................................................. 200 ms 16.On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press FULL IF ADJ. When the message IF ADJUST STATUS:1 kHz RBW appears, press SINGLE on the 8566A/B. 17.Figure 9-23, Output Waveform, 1 kHz Resolution Bandwidth illustrates normal operation. Severe failures (slope error greater than 30 percent) and subtle 3 kHz resolution bandwidth errors (less than 30 percent) indicate a problem with A4U802, U803, U804, or U106. 18.On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press FULL IF ADJ. When the message IF ADJUST STATUS: 300 Hz RBW appears, press SINGLE on the 8566A/B. 19.Figure 9-24 on page 477 illustrates normal operation. Severe failures (slope error greater than 30 percent) and 3 kHz resolution bandwidth errors (less than 30 percent) indicate a problem with A4U802, U803, U804, or U106. 20.Reconnect W52 (white) to A4J8.

Chapter 9

473

IF Section Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly)

Figure 9-21

Output Waveform, 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth

474

Chapter 9

IF Section Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly)

Figure 9-22

Output Waveform, 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth

Chapter 9

475

IF Section Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly)

Figure 9-23

Output Waveform, 1 kHz Resolution Bandwidth

476

Chapter 9

IF Section Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly)

Figure 9-24

Output Waveform, 300 Hz Resolution Bandwidth

Chapter 9

477

IF Section Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly)

Figure 9-25

Failed Crystal Set Symptoms

Low-Pass Filter
Refer to function block AB of A4 Log Amplier Schematic Diagram (sheet 4 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. 1. Connect a DVM positive probe to A4J9 pin 4. 2. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press CAL. 3. Press FULL IF ADJUST. Observe the DVM reading between the displayed messages IF ADJUST STATUS: 300 kHz RBW and IF ADJUST STATUS: 3 kHz RBW. During this time period, the voltage should be within a 2 to 10 Vdc range. 4. Observe the DVM reading while IF ADJUST STATUS: AMPLITUDE is displayed. The reading should be within the 2 to 10 Vdc range. 5. If the DVM reading is outside the range in step 3 but inside the range in step 4, suspect one of the reactive components in the lter.

478

Chapter 9

IF Section Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly)

Sweep Generator
Refer to function block Z of A4 log amplier schematic diagram (sheet 4 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. A properly operating sweep generator generates a series of negative-going parabolas. Before the sweep, switches A4U802C and A4U802D turn on, shorting A4C802 and A4C801 (the output is at 0 volts). These switches open to start the sweep. The output of A4U804A, pin 1, is 0.35 V to 10 V, depending on the sweep width selected by A4U802A and A4U803A. This voltage appears across A4R801. Capacitor A4C801 integrates the current through A4R801. The output of A4U804B is a straight, negative-going ramp. Capacitor A4C802 and resistor A4R802 integrate the output of A4U804A which starts a negative ramp (A4U804C) at the beginning of the sweep. The ramp from A4U804B is added to the current in A4R802 via A4U803B. Integrating this ramp results in the parabolic output waveform.

AM/FM Demodulation, Audio Amplier, and Speaker

Refer to function blocks R, S, and T of A4 Log Amplier Schematic (sheet 4 of 4) Diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. If the audio circuits are not functioning use the following procedure to isolate the problem: 1. Set an AM signal generator controls as follows: Frequency ................................................................ 100 MHz Amplitude .................................................................. 6 dBm Modulation type ....................................................... 80% AM Modulation frequency ................................................. 400 Hz 2. Set the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Center frequency ........................................................ 100 MHz Span ................................................................................... 0 Hz Sweep time ....................................................................... 50 ms Reference level ................................................................ 0 dBm Resolution bandwidth ................................................... 10 kHz Amplitude scale ........................................................... LINEAR 3. Adjust the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer reference level and center frequency to display the 400 Hz modulation frequency eight divisions peak-to-peak. 4. On the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, AM/FM DEMOD, AM DEMOD ON, and set the sweep time to 5 seconds.

Chapter 9

479

IF Section Cal Oscillator (P/O A4 Assembly)

5. Vary the volume and listen for the variation in speaker output level. Clipping is normal at the highest volume levels. 6. If the audio is not working correctly monitor the signal at A4U704 pin 3 with an oscilloscope. The signal should be 20 mV peak-to-peak 25 percent (with +2.5 V of dc bias). If the signal measures outside these limits, the fault is prior to the audio amplier (block T). 7. If the signal is correct, troubleshoot the audio amplier and speaker.

480

Chapter 9

10

Controller Section

487

Controller Section Introduction

Introduction
The controller section includes the A2 controller assembly, A19 GPIB assembly, and BT1 battery. The presence of a display (graticule and annotation) veries that most of A2 controller assembly is operating properly. Page Digital Signature Analysis DSA (E-Series) ...............page 490 Display Problems (E-Series) ..........................................page 491 Line Generators ..........................................................page 491 Blanking ..................................................................... page 492 Display Jumbled or Trace Off Screen ........................page 494 Intensity ......................................................................page 498 Bad Characters or Graticule ......................................page 499 Long Lines Dimmer than Short Lines .......................page 499 Analog Zero Span Problems (E-series, Non-Option 007) ............................................page 502 Frequency Count Marker Problems (EC-Series)..........page 503 Frequency Count Marker Problems (E-Series) ............page 504 Frequency Counter (EC-Series).....................................page 505 Frequency Counter (E-Series) .......................................page 507 Video Input Scale Ampliers and Limiters (EC-Series) page 509 12-Bit Flash ADC (EC-Series) .......................................page 511 32 K-Byte Static RAM....................................................page 512 Reference Clock (EC-Series) ..........................................page 513 16 MHz Harmonic Filter (EC-Series)............................page 514 State- and Trace- Storage Problems .............................page 515 Keyboard Problems ........................................................page 516
NOTE

When measuring voltages or waveforms, make ground connections to A2TP3. The metal board-standoffs are not grounded and should not be used when taking measurements. Figure 10-1 on page 489 shows the location of the A2 test connectors.

488

Chapter 10

Controller Section Introduction

Figure 10-1

A2 Test Connectors

Figure 10-2

A2 Test Connector Pin Locations

Chapter 10

489

Controller Section Digital Signature Analysis (8564E and 8565E)

Digital Signature Analysis (8564E and 8565E)

Digital signature analysis (DSA) places microprocessor, A2U1, in a simplied known state. This simplied state consists of placing a one-word instruction, 0111 XX10 XXXX XXX0 (MOVEQUICK), on the data bus. The microprocessor cycles through its address range continually reading the instruction. Perform the following DSA procedure to test the operation of microprocessor, A2U1: 1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. 2. Move the DSA jumper on J3 (located in the middle of the A2 assembly) from the DISable position to the ENAble position. 3. Remove jumper A2E1. A2E1 is a 16 pin dual-in-line package located in the middle of the A2 Assembly. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. 4. Use an oscilloscope to conrm that address lines, address strobe, and chip selects are toggling at proper levels. If not, microprocessor A2U1 is probably faulty. 5. Use an oscilloscope to check the address line sequencing. The signal on each line (starting with A1 and ending with A23) should be one-half the frequency of the previous line. 6. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Replace jumper A2E1. Move the DSA jumper from connecting E5 and E6 back to connecting E6 and E7.

490

Chapter 10

Controller Section Display Problems (8564E and 8565E)

Display Problems (8564E and 8565E)

Line Generators
Refer to function blocks D and I of A2 controller schematic diagram (sheet 1 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The line generators convert the digital display information to an analog output suitable to drive the A17 CRT driver assembly. These circuits change the digital words into vectors, or lines, which move the beam of the CRT. The vectors are each 6 s long (width of the INTEGRATE pulse) followed by a 1 s SAMPLE pulse. When characters of text are being drawn, the vectors are 3 s long. 1. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET. 2. On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL MORE CRT ADJ PATTERN. If the display is blank, press the bottom softkey and then the top softkey. 3. Set an oscilloscope to the following settings: Amplitude scale ........................................................ 3 V/div Sweep time ............................................................. 1 ms/div Triggering .............................................................. External 4. Externally trigger the oscilloscope off the signal at A2U207 pin 8 (LBRIGHT). 5. Compare the signals at the following test points with those illustrated in Figure 10-3 on page 492. X POS: Y POS: Z OUT: A2J202 pin 14 A2J202 pin 3 A2J201 pin 3

BLANKING: A2J202 pin 15

NOTE

Waveforms displayed on an analog scope may show considerably more spikes. This is normal and is due to the wider displayed bandwidth. 6. Troubleshoot the circuits associated with any bad waveforms.

Chapter 10

491

Controller Section Display Problems (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 10-3

Line Generator Output Waveforms

Blanking
Refer to function block J of A2 Controller Schematic Diagram (sheet 1 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Component Level Information. 1. Using an oscilloscope, check for blanking pulses at A2J202 pin 15. A2U206 pin 6 should be at a TTL high. Blanking pulses turn the CRT beam off during the sample time of the line generators and when moving the CRT beam to a new position for drawing the next vector. 2. Set an oscilloscope to the following settings: Amplitude scale ........................................................... 4 V/div Amplitude offset ........................................................... +2.5 V Sweep time .............................................................. 20 s/div Triggering ................................................................. External 3. Externally trigger the oscilloscope off the signal at A2U207 pin 8 (LBRIGHT). 4. Compare the blanking-circuit input signals at the following test points with those illustrated in Figure 10-4 on page 493. BLANKING: J202 pin 15 BLANK: VECTOR: U214 pin 12 U214 pin 11 U213 pin 13

492

Chapter 10

Controller Section Display Problems (8564E and 8565E)

5. The waveforms in Figure 10-4 must match the timing of the vectors being drawn. To do this, U215B is used to adjust the leading edge, and U215A is used to adjust the trailing edge. The rst six horizontal divisions show the line drawing mode where the VECTOR pulses are 6 s apart. The remaining divisions shows character mode (VECTOR pulses 3 s apart). The BLANK pulses are synchronized to the VECTOR pulses by U214B. The fourth trace shows the double pulses which delay the leading and trailing edges of the blanking pulses. 6. Set the oscilloscope to the following settings to expand the rst and fourth traces. This displays how the rising edges of U213-13 determine the transitions of the blanking pulses. See Figure 10-5 on page 494. Amplitude scale ............................................................. 4 V/div Amplitude offset ............................................................. +2.5 V Sweep time .................................................................. 2 s/div Delay from trigger ............................................................ 96 s Triggering ................................................................... External Figure 10-4 Blanking Waveforms

Chapter 10

493

Controller Section Display Problems (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 10-5

Expanded Blanking Waveforms

Display Jumbled or Trace Off Screen

Refer to function blocks D and I of A2 controller schematic diagram (sheet 1 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Component Level Information. The two line generators are identical circuits, so the following steps apply to both. The X generator is referenced below, with Y generator references in parentheses. Before proceeding, perform the 15. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment in Chapter 3 . If the 16 Mhz phase-lock loop is misadjusted or malfunctioning, the ADC ASM clock signal will be incorrect causing distortion. 1. The voltage at A2U202B pin 7 should measure 10.0 V. 2. Perform steps 1 through 5 of "Line Generators" in this chapter. If the X POS and Y POS waveforms look different from those illustrated in Figure 10-3 on page 492, check the waveforms at the input to the low-pass lter (function block E in the component-level information binder). 3. The waveform at the low-pass lter should look like X POS in Figure 10-3, Line Generator Output Waveforms, but have an amplitude from 0 V to +5 V. 4. If the waveform in step 3 is incorrect, set an oscilloscope to the following settings: Amplitude scale ....................................... 10 V/div Sweep time ............................................. 20 s/div
494 Chapter 10

Controller Section Display Problems (8564E and 8565E)

Triggering ............................................... External 5. Trigger the oscilloscope on the signal at U207 pin 8 (LBRIGHT). 6. Compare the line-generator input signals at the following test points with those illustrated in Figure 10-6 on page 495. INTEGRATE and SAMPLE waveforms are replicas of VECTOR except for polarity and amplitude. LCHAR is low when characters are drawn. INTEGRATE: Q202 collector SAMPLE: LCHAR: VECTOR: Figure 10-6 Q201 collector U207 pin 9 U213 Pin 9

Switch Driver Waveform LCHAR

7. All of the DAC inputs should change state two or more times within a 5 ms window. If one or more DAC bits are not working correctly, this will effect the entire display, especially the diagonal lines that go from lower left to upper right. When these lines are drawn, both the X and Y DACs are stepped one count at a time. A "stuck" bit will distort the diagonal in a repetitive manner. The quicker the repetition, the less signicant the "stuck" bit. Horizontal distortions apply to the X LINE GENERATOR DAC, while vertical distortions apply to the Y LINE GENERATOR DAC. The DACS have current outputs so they are not readily observable with an oscilloscope. Continue with step 8 to observe the DAC outputs.

Chapter 10

495

Controller Section Display Problems (8564E and 8565E)

8. To break the effect of feedback in the line generators and to observe the output of the DACs, short J201 pin 13 (J201 pin 1) to TP3 (GND) to observe U201 pin 1 and TP2 (U203 pin 1 and TP1.) Continue with step 9. 9. Set an oscilloscope to the following settings: Amplitude scale ........................................................... 5 V/div Sweep time ............................................................... 1 ms/div Coupling ............................................................................. AC Triggering ................................................................. External 10.Trigger the oscilloscope on the signal at U207 pin 8 (LBRIGHT). 11.The following waveforms should look like Figure 10-7 on page 497 on the oscilloscope. The top two traces are for the X line generator and the bottom two traces for the Y line generator. X line generator U201 pin 1 TP2 Y line generator U203 pin 1 TP1 12.Figure 10-8 on page 497 illustrates the waveforms in step 11 expanded to show relative timing. the second and fourth traces are delayed by 5 ms from the rst and third. The oscilloscope settings are changed as follows: Sweep time .............................................................. 20 s/div 13.Figure 10-9 on page 498 illustrates the waveforms of properly working line generators. Whenever there is a pulse on TP2 (or TP1), the appropriate integrator U201B (or U203B) generates a ramp (the output vector) which feeds back to U201A (U203A) and shows on its output.

496

Chapter 10

Controller Section Display Problems (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 10-7

Distorted X/Y Line Generator Waveforms

Figure 10-8

Expanded X/Y Line Generator Waveforms

Chapter 10

497

Controller Section Display Problems (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 10-9

Normal X/Y Line Generator Waveforms

Intensity
1. The length of the vector being drawn can effect intensity. U210A, U210C, and U210D sum the lengths of the X and Y vectors. Refer to "Long Lines Dimmer than Short Lines" in this chapter. 2. Short A2U207 pin 6 to pin 7. If the display does not brighten, troubleshoot LBRIGHT switch, U207B. This switch intensies trace A and active softkeys. 3. Short A2U207 pin 2 to pin 3. If the display does not brighten, troubleshoot DEF1 switch, U207A. This switch is used in analog zero span. 4. Change the intensity (under DISPLAY). If the intensity does not change, troubleshoot the intensity DAC, A2U212A. (A2U212A is controlled from the front panel.) The amplitude of the waveform at U211A pin 1 should increase or decrease with intensity changes. 5. Clamp U211B limits the voltage to about 4.2 V. Short A2J201-1 to ground and set the intensity DAC to a number greater than 80. A major portion of the waveform should be limited to 4.2 V. 6. If a major portion of the waveform is not limited to 4.2 V, troubleshoot the maximum brightness clamp, A2U211C.

498

Chapter 10

Controller Section Display Problems (8564E and 8565E)

Bad Characters or Graticule

If the displayed characters are bad but the graticule is correct (or if the symptoms are reversed), troubleshoot the X- and Y- generator switches A2U207D and A2U207C. Check that the switch driver signal LCHAR is working properly. Refer to Display Jumbled or Trace Off Screen on page 494.

Long Lines Dimmer than Short Lines

Refer to function block M of A2 controller schematic diagram (sheet 1 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Component Level Information. The Z output function block contains the absolute value circuits which determine the intensity of vectors drawn on the display. The vector length is approximated by the sum of the X length and Y length. The voltage corresponding to the X length, X, is converted to current by R274. If the voltage is negative, it is amplied by 2 in A2U210C, converted to current by A2R246, and added to the current from A2R274. This effectively turns both negative and positive voltages into positive currents, hence absolute value. 1. Short A2J201 pin 13 to ground (A2TP3). 2. Connect channel A of an oscilloscope to A2J201 pin 2. Connect channel B to A2U210D-14. 3. Set an oscilloscope to the following settings: Amplitude scale ......................................................... 10 V/div Sweep time ................................................................ 1 ms/div Triggering ................................................................. External 4. Externally trigger the oscilloscope off the signal at A2U207 pin 8 (LBRIGHT). 5. The waveforms should look like those illustrated in Figure 10-10 on page 500. If the waveform at J201 pin 2 is bad, troubleshoot the X line generator (function block D of the A2 controller schematic, sheet 1 of 4). 6. If the waveform at U210D pin 14 is bad, troubleshoot the Z output circuit (function block M of A2 controller schematic, sheet 1 of 4). 7. Remove the short from J201 pin 13 to ground. Short A2J201 pin 1 to ground.

Chapter 10

499

Controller Section Display Problems (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 10-10 Delta X Waveform

8. Move the oscilloscope channel A probe to J201 pin 14. 9. The waveforms should look like those illustrated in Figure 10-11, Delta Y Waveform,. If the waveform at J201 pin 14 is bad, troubleshoot the Y line generator (function block I of A2 controller schematic, sheet 1 of 4). 10.If the waveform at U210D pin 14 is bad, troubleshoot the Z output circuit (function block M of A2 controller schematic, sheet 1 of 4). 11.Remove the jumpers.

500

Chapter 10

Controller Section Display Problems (8564E and 8565E)

Figure 10-11

Delta Y Waveform

Chapter 10

501

Controller Section Analog Zero Span Problems (8564E and 8565E, Non-Option 007)

Analog Zero Span Problems (8564E and 8565E, Non-Option 007)

1. On the spectrum analyzer press PRESET, SPAN, ZERO SPAN, SWEEP, 1, ms, CAL, MORE, and CRT ADJ PATTERN. 2. Set an oscilloscope to the following settings: Amplitude scale .................................................... 10 V/div Sweep time ........................................................... 1 ms/div Triggering ............................................................ External 3. Externally trigger the oscilloscope off the signal at A2U207 pin 8 (LBRIGHT). 4. The display should be similar to Figure 10-12, DEF1 Synchronization, except that the untriggered trace should show at the left edge of the screen. In these settings, DEF1 causes switching between the line generators and the analog inputs (sweep and video). DEF1 remains high when the CRT adjust pattern is on. Refer to function block M of the A2 controller schematic, sheet 1 of 4. 5. The sweep input from J1-41 should go from 0 V to +10 V; the video In signal should go from about 0 V to 1 V from the bottom to the top of the screen. Apply a dc voltage to A2J4, Video In, to test the circuit. 6. In Figure 10-12 on page 502, there is no synchronization between DEF1 and the video patterns X POS and Y POS when DEF1 is TTL high. The Y POS level when DEF1 is low is the Video In level. Figure 10-12 DEF1 Synchronization

502

Chapter 10

Controller Section Frequency-Count Marker Problems (8564EC and 8565EC)

Frequency-Count Marker Problems (8564EC and 8565EC)

The FREQ COUNT function works by dividing the 10.7 MHz IF signal by two (prescaling) and counting the divided-down signal using the frequency counter on the A2 controller assembly . The prescaler is on the A4 Log amplier/cal oscillator assembly . Perform the following steps to determine whether the problem is on the A4 log amplier/cal oscillator or the A2 controller assembly: 1. Disconnect W53 from A2J13. 2. Connect the output of a synthesized source, such as an 3335A, to A2J13. 3. Set the synthesized source to the following settings: Amplitude .................................................................... +10 dBm Frequency ................................................................... 5.35 MHz 4. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ...................................................... 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 1 MHz 5. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQ COUNT. The frequency counter actually reads one half the frequency of the 10.7 MHz IF. If the CNT frequency display reads all asterisks, the frequency counter is probably at fault. 6. If a valid frequency is displayed, troubleshoot the prescaler on the A4 log amplier/cal oscillator assembly. 7. Reconnect W53 to A2J13.Frequency-Count Marker Problems (8564EC and 8565EC)

Chapter 10

503

Controller Section Frequency-Count Marker Problems (8564E and 8565E)

Frequency-Count Marker Problems (8564E and 8565E)

The FREQ COUNT function works by dividing the 10.7 MHz IF signal by two (prescaling) and counting the divided-down signal using the frequency counter on the A2 controller assembly (block Z of the A2 schematic diagram). The prescaler is on the A4 Log amplier/cal oscillator assembly (block Q of the A4 schematic diagram). Perform the following steps to determine whether the problem is on the A4 log amplier/cal oscillator or A2 controller assembly: 1. Disconnect W53 from A2J7. 2. Connect the output of a synthesized source, such as an 3335A, to A2J7. 3. Set the synthesized source to the following settings: Amplitude .................................................................... +10 dBm Frequency ................................................................... 5.35 MHz 4. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ...................................................... 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 1 MHz 5. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQ COUNT. The frequency counter actually reads one half the frequency of the 10.7 MHz IF. If the CNT frequency display reads all asterisks, the frequency counter is probably at fault. 6. If a valid frequency is displayed, troubleshoot the prescaler on the A4 log amplier/cal oscillator assembly. 7. Reconnect W53 to A2J7.

504

Chapter 10

Controller Section Frequency Counter (8564EC and 8565EC)

Frequency Counter (8564EC and 8565EC)

The frequency counter counts the frequency of the last IF and provides accurate timing signals for digital zero-spans. The circuit also provides timing signals to the ADC (analog to digital converter) on the A3 interface assembly. The nominal input frequency is 5.35 MHz (10.7 MHz divided by 2). The 10 MHz reference from the A15 RF assembly provides the frequency reference in the frequency count mode. The frequency reference in digitized zero spans (sweep times 30 ms) is the 4 MHz HPIB_CLK, selected by a clock select multiplexer in U35. The 10 MHz reference from the A15 RF assembly is rst ltered and passed through a comparator to generate a TTL, 50 percent duty cycle signal. C128, L16, and R91 provide a bandpass lter centered at 10 MHz. The output of comparator U33B is the actual reference used for the Frequency Counter. An additional stage of ltering is performed on this signal to provide a 10 MHz signal for the A17 LCD Driver assembly. In the frequency count mode, the 10 MHz reference is prescaled by 5 to generate a 2 MHz timebase. This timebase feeds through the clock select multiplexer in U35 to the CLK2 input of programmable timer U15. The output (OUT2) of programmable timer U15 is the gating signal (HBKT_PULSE); it performs the frequency count. The gating time interval is a function of the counter resolution which may be set between 10 Hz and 1 MHz. Table 10-1 on page 506 lists the gate time for each setting of COUNTER RES. The gate time is the period during which HBKT_PULSE (pin 20 of U15) is low. The FREQ COUNT input, A2J13, is gated by HBKT_PULSE. The gated signal clocks divide-by-16 counters within U35. These counters are cascaded to form a divide-by-256 counter. The MSB of this counter, CD7, clocks the CLK0 input of U15. The frequency of CD7 is a function of COUNTER RES as shown in Table 10-1 on page 506. If timer U15 overows, OUT0 will be set, generating CNTOVFLIRQ, which will interrupt the CPU. If IRQAK2 is high, HBKT_PULSE will generate FREQCNTLIRQ. Upon receiving the FREQCNTLIRQ interrupt, the CPU latches the CD0 to CD7 onto the BID bus by setting LCDRD (low counter data read) low and reading the counter data from the BID bus. The CPU will also read the data from the timer, U15, by setting L8254CS and LCNTLRD low, placing the timer data on the BID bus. The CPU then resets IRQAK2 low.

Chapter 10

505

Controller Section Frequency Counter (8564EC and 8565EC)

Table 10-1

Gate Times
Counter Res Gate Time* (U15 pin 20 low state) 200 ms 20 ms 2 ms 2 ms 2 ms 2 ms A2TP16 A2TP15

10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz

2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz

4.18 kHz 418 Hz 41.8 Hz 41.8 Hz 41.8 Hz 41.8 Hz

* U15 pin 10 = (FREQ COUNT input Gate Time)/256

1. Disconnect W22 from A2J9. 2. If a 10 MHz, TTL-level signal is not present at the end of W22, continue with step 3. If a 10 MHz signal is present at W22, proceed as follows: a. Reconnect W22 to A2J9. b. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Span ................................................................... Zero Span Sweep time ................................................................ 20 ms c. Monitor the signal at A2J2 pin 21. This is an output of the frequency counter, HBUCKET PULSE. d. If HBUCKET PULSE is stuck high, troubleshoot the frequency counter. 3. Check for a 10 MHz signal at A15J302. If the signal is not present at A15J302, the A15 RF assembly is probably defective.

506

Chapter 10

Controller Section Frequency Counter (8564E and 8565E)

Frequency Counter (8564E and 8565E)

See function block Z of A2 schematic diagram (sheet 4 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The frequency counter counts the frequency of the last IF and provides accurate timing signals for digital zero-spans. The circuit also provides timing signals to the A3 interface assembly ADC (analog to digital converter). The nominal input frequency is 5.35 MHz (10.7 MHz divided by 2). The circuit frequency reference in the frequency count mode is the 10 MHz reference from the A15 RF assembly. The frequency reference in digitized zero spans (sweep times 30 ms) is the 4 MHz HPIB_CLK, selected by MUX U704. In the frequency count mode, U702 prescales the 10 MHz reference by 5 to generate a 2 MHz timebase. This timebase feeds through MUX U704 to programmable-timer U700 CLK2 input. Programmable-timer U700 output (OUT2) is the gating signal (HBKT_PULSE) for performing the frequency count. The gating time interval is a function of the counter resolution which may be set between 10 Hz and 1 MHz. Table 10-1 on page 506 lists the gate time for each setting of COUNTER RES. The gate time is the period during which U511 pin 3 is high. The FREQ COUNT input, A2J7, is gated in U511B by HBKT_PULSE. The gated signal clocks divide-by-16 counters U703A and U703B. These counters are cascaded to form a divide-by-256 counter. The MSB of this counter, CD7, clocks the CLK0 input of U700. The frequency of CD7 is a function of COUNTER RES as shown in Table 10-1 on page 506. If timer U700 overows, OUT0 will be set and U701B clocked, generating CNTOVFLIRQ, which will interrupt the CPU. If IRQAK2 is high, HBKT_PULSE will clock U701A, generating FREQCNTLIRQ. Upon receiving the FREQCNTLIRQ interrupt, the CPU latches the CD0 to CD7 onto the BID bus by setting LCDRD (low counter data read) low and reading the counter data from the BID bus. The CPU will also read the data from the timer, U700, by setting L8254CS and LCNTLRD low, placing the timer data on the BID bus. The CPU resets U701A by setting IRQAK2 low via the BID bus and latch U506.

Chapter 10

507

Controller Section Frequency Counter (8564E and 8565E)

Table 10-2

Gate Times
Counter Res Gate Time* (U511 pin 3 high state) 200 ms 20 ms 2 ms 2 ms 2 ms 2 ms A2TP16 A2TP15

10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz

2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz

4.18 kHz 418 Hz 41.8 Hz 41.8 Hz 41.8 Hz 41.8 Hz

* TP15 = (FREQ COUNT input Gate Time)/256

1. Disconnect W22 from A2J8. 2. If a 10 MHz, TTL-level signal is not present at the end of W22, continue with step 3. If a 10 MHz signal is present at W22, proceed as follows: a. Reconnect W22 to A2J8. b. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Span ................................................................... Zero Span Sweep time ................................................................ 20 ms c. Monitor the signal at A2J2 pin 21. This is an output of the frequency counter, HBUCKET PULSE. d. If HBUCKET PULSE is stuck high, troubleshoot the frequency counter. 3. Check for a 10 MHz signal at A15J302. If the signal is not present at A15J302, the A15 RF assembly is probably defective.

508

Chapter 10

Controller Section Video Input Scaling Ampliers and Limiter (8564EC and 8565EC)

Video Input Scaling Ampliers and Limiter (8564EC and 8565EC)

The video input scaling ampliers help provide scaling (10 dB/div, 5 dB/div, 2 dB/div, or 1 dB/div) and buffer the ash video output. When the GAINX2 control line is low, switch U44D is open and switch U44C is closed. Thus, the scaled video at TP26 virtually follows the video input (0 - 1 V). When the GAINX2 control line is high, switch U44C is open and switch U44D is closed. Amplier U43 then provides a gain of 2(Vin) 1 V. Voltage clamp CR4 prevents the scaled video input to amplier U45 from going more negative than 0.35 V or more positive than +1.25 V.
NOTE

When measuring voltages or waveforms on the Fast ADC section of the A2 controller assembly, connect the ground (or common) lead to the ground-plane trace associated with the shield. This digital ground plane is totally isolated from the chassis. 1. Press PRESET on the 8560 EC-series spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows: Center frequency ............................................. 300 MHz Span ......................................................................... 0 Hz Reference level ................................................. 10 dBm Log/division .................................................... 10 dB/DIV Sweep time ............................................................ 20 ms 2. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 connector. 3. Adjust the spectrum analyzer reference level to place the signal at the top graticule line on the LCD display. 4. Measure the dc level at pin 3 of U10. If the voltage measured is not +1.0 0.15 V, troubleshoot the A3 interface assembly. 5. Measure the dc level at pin 3 of U17. The level should be approximately the same as the level measured at pin 3 of U10. If not, suspect switch U9. 6. Set the spectrum analyzer scale to 5dB per division. 7. Adjust the spectrum analyzer reference level to place the signal at the top graticule line on the LCD display. 8. Measure the dc level at pin 3 of U10 and pin 3 of U17. The level should be +1.0 0.25 V. If the level measured at pin 3 of U17 differs from the level measured at pin 3 of U10 by more than 0.25 volts, troubleshoot U10 and associated circuitry.

Chapter 10

509

Controller Section Video Input Scaling Ampliers and Limiter (8564EC and 8565EC)

9. Disconnect the CAL OUTPUT signal from the INPUT 50 connector. 10.The level at pin 3 of U10 should drop to 0.35 Vdc. If the level is less (more negative) than 0.35 Vdc, replace voltage clamp D3. 11.Measure the dc level of the ash video at pin 2 of R47. The level should be near 0 Vdc with the signal at the bottom graticule line (no input to the spectrum analyzer). 12.Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 connector. 13.Measure the dc level of the ash video at pin 2 of R47. The level should be near +1.7 Vdc.

510

Chapter 10

Controller Section 12-Bit Flash ADC (8564EC and 8565EC)

12-Bit Flash ADC (8564EC and 8565EC)

The ash ADC (U22) converts the analog video signal into 12-bit digital values at a xed rate of 12 megasamples per second. When measuring voltages or waveforms on the Fast ADC of the A2 controller assembly, connect the ground (or common) lead to the ground-plane trace associated with the shield. This digital ground plane is totally isolated from the chassis. 1. Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Reference level ......................................................... 20 dBm Log/division .............................................................. 5 dB/DIV Sweep time .................................................................... 20 ms 2. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 connector. 3. Pins 2 through 13 (ADC0-ADC11) of U22 should all be high (logic 1), corresponding to an ADC digital count of 255 for the analog input of +2 volts or greater. 4. Disconnect the CAL OUTPUT signal from the INPUT 50 connector. 5. Pins 2 through 13 (ADC0-ADC11) of U22 should all be low (logic 0), corresponding to an ADC digital count of zero for the analog input of 0 volts or less.

Chapter 10

511

Controller Section 32 K-Byte Static RAM (8564EC and 8565EC)

32 K-Byte Static RAM (8564EC and 8565EC)

The static RAM stores the ADC samples that are taken when the Fast ADC circuitry is in the "write" mode. When not in the "write" mode, the static RAM is read by the CPU to retrieve the fast ADC data. The 8-bit DFADC bus connects the outputs of latches within U35 to the data port of static RAM U21.

512

Chapter 10

Controller Section Reference Clock (8564EC and 8565EC)

Reference Clock (8564EC and 8565EC)

The reference clock circuitry takes the 8 MHz square wave clock and triples the frequency to 24 MHz. This is accomplished through two stages of ltering of the 8 MHz signal, to extract the third harmonic. The 8 MHz signal is rst passed through a high pass lter consisting of C123 and L15. The the signal passes through a bandpass lter centered at 24 MHz, consisting of C106, C08, L13, and R80. The comparator U28B generates a square wave. The signal then passes through a second stage of ltering by using the bandpass lter consisting of C89, C88, L12, and R77. Comparator U28A then regenerates the square wave. A divide-by-two ip op in U16 divides the 24 MHz signal to create the 12 MHz signal used by the ADC.

Chapter 10

513

Controller Section 16 MHz Harmonic Filter (8564EC and 8565EC)

16 MHz Harmonic Filter (8564EC and 8565EC)

The 16 MHz Harmonic Filter generates a 16 MHz signal through a series of stages, consisting of a lter and a comparator. The 10 MHz reference signal from the A15 RF assembly is rst prescaled by 2.5 to yield a 4 MHz signal with a 20 percent duty cycle. This prescaling is performed within U35. The 4 MHz signal is then passed, rst, through a high pass lter, and then, through a bandpass lter at 16 MHz. The high pass lter consists of R85, C122, and L14. The bandpass lter consists of L19 and C139. The lter basically lters the fourth harmonic of the 4 MHz signal to generate a 16 MHz signal. The resulting signal is then passed through comparator U34A to generate a 16 MHz square wave. Three more stages, consisting of a bandpass lter followed by a comparator, further lter the signal so that a clean 16 MHz signal results. The 16 MHz signal which is the result of these successive stages of ltering is output at pin 10 of U34. U35 buffers this signal to provide the 16 MHz clock for the CPU. In addition, divide-by-two ip ops are located within U35, which generate 8 MHz and 4 MHz signals.

514

Chapter 10

Controller Section State- and Trace-Storage Problems

State- and Trace-Storage Problems

State storage is in the two of the four Program RAMs and trace storage is in the two display RAMs. With low battery voltage, it is normal for states and traces to be retained if the power is off for less than 1 minute. If the power is left off for more than thirty minutes with low battery voltage, the stored states and traces will be lost.

The following steps test battery backup for EC-series instruments: 1. Measure the voltage on W6 at A2J3. If the voltage is less than 2.6 V, check the BT1 battery. 2. If the battery voltage is correct, reconnect W6 to A2J3, turn the analyzer power off and wait 5 minutes. 3. Measure the voltage at A2U19 pin 32and A2U26 pin 32. 4. If the voltage is less than 2.0 Vdc, the RAM power battery-backup circuitry on the A2 controller assembly is probably at fault.

The following steps test battery backup for E-series instruments: 1. Measure the voltage on W6 at A2J10. If the voltage is less than 2.6 V, check the BT1 battery. 2. If the battery voltage is correct, reconnect W6 to A2J10, turn the analyzer power off and wait 5 minutes. 3. Measure the voltage at A2U101 pin 28 and A2U102 pin 28. 4. If the voltage is less than 2.0 Vdc, the RAM power battery-backup circuitry on the A2 controller assembly is probably at fault.

Chapter 10

515

Controller Section Keyboard Problems

Keyboard Problems
If the analyzer does not respond to keys being pressed or the knob being rotated, the fault could be either on the A3 interface assembly or the A2 controller assembly. To isolate the A2 controller assembly, use the following procedure. This procedure tests the analyzer response over GPIB and the keyboard/RPG interrupt request signal. 1. Enter and run the following BASIC program: 10 OUTPUT 718; "IP; SP 1 MHz;" 20 WAIT 2 ! Wait 2 seconds 30 OUTPUT 718;"AT 70 DB;" 40 WAIT 2 ! Wait 2 seconds 50 OUTPUT 718;"AT 30 DB;" 60 WAIT 2 ! Wait 2 seconds 70 OUTPUT 718;"AT 10 DB;" 80 END 2. When the program runs, three or four clicks should be heard. This is the A9 input attenuator changing attenuation value. 3. If the display shows the analyzer to be in RMT and the ATTEN value displayed on the LCD (CRT on E-series instruments) changed according to the program, the A2 controller assembly is working properly. Refer to Chapter 8 , ADC/Interface Section. 4. If there was no response over GPIB, the A2 controller is probably defective. Be sure to also check the A19 GPIB assembly and A19W1. 5. If there was an improper response (for example, the displayed ATTEN value changed but no clicks were heard), the A2 controller is probably working properly. 6. On EC-series instruments, attach a logic probe to A2U35 pin 213. On E-series instruments, attach a logic probe to A2U2 pin 2. Look for pulses while pressing a key and rotating the knob (RPG). This is the interrupt request signal for the keyboard and RPG. 7. If the interrupt request signal is always low, troubleshoot the A2 controller assembly. 8. If the interrupt request signal is always high, the fault is on either the A3 interface or A1A1 keyboard assembly.

516

Chapter 10

8560 EC-SERIES
CONTROLLER SECTION
POWER SUPPLIES
+28V +15VF +5VF -12.6VF -15VF

POWER CABLE

J2

RESET CIRCUITRY

LHALT DRESET

CPU

CHIP SELECT AND CONTROL

TO FUNCTION BLOCKS

REF CLOCK (24 MHz)

8 MHz TTL

16 MHz TTL

Note: Dark Shaded area indicates the functions implemented in U16.

J1-6 HSWP

J11

DISPLAY CABLE

J8

FLAT PANEL DISPLAY CONNECTION

LMUX IDO-7

BUS INTERCONNECTS

OPTION MODULE

FADC CONTROL

A3 J1 INTERFACE CABLE IOBO-IOB7

CPU INTERFACE AND CONTROL REGISTERS

CLOCK AND SAMPLE RATE GENERATOR

TRIGGER

16-BIT POST-TRIGGER COUNTER

15-BIT (32K) CIRCULAR ADDRESS COUNTER AND LATCH

DCNTO-15 ADDRESS BUS TIMING AND CONTROL BUS BIDO-7

DISPLAY CONTROL

EEPROM

FLASH

+5VF

RAM POWER BATTERY BACKUP

RAM
+RP VIDEO INPUT 0-1V
J5

VIDEO INPUT SCALING AMPLIFIERS AND LIMITER

FLASH VIDEO

12-BIT ADC

ADCOADC11

PEAK/PIT DETECTION

DFADCODFADC7

32K RAM

BATTERY

J3 BATTERY P2-P7

AFADCOAFADC14 MEMORY ADDRESS BUS

FREQUENCY COUNTER J13

FREQUENCY COUNTER

INPUT/ OUTPUT

HP-IB
J7 HP-IB

+15VF

+5VF
-15VF

POWER SUPPLIES (FADC)

VIDEO TRIGGER COMPARATOR

TIMING AND CONTROL BUS

10MHz IN

J9

10MHz_DSPL
J10

FAST ADC CONTROL

FADC CONTROL

IOB2IOB7 IOBO-IOB15 IOB DATA BUS

16 MHz HARMONIC FILTER

4 MHz TTL 8 MHz TTL

Note: Shaded area indicates the functions implemented in U35

Figure 10 - 14 Controller Block Diagram

sm130c

11

Synthesizer Section

521

Synthesizer Section Introduction

Introduction
The synthesizer section includes the A7 LOMA (LO multiplier/ amplier), the A11 YTO, and parts of the A14 frequency control and A15 RF assemblies. Simplied and detailed block diagrams for each assembly are located at the end of this chapter. Page Test Connector Locations.............................................. page 524 Troubleshooting Test Setup...........................................page 527 Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section .....................page 528 General PLL Troubleshooting ......................................page 534 PLL Locked at Wrong Frequency ..............................page 534 Unlocked PLL .............................................................page 535 Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO) ................page 537 Operation (100 MHz VCXO) ......................................page 537 Troubleshooting (100 MHz VCXO) ............................page 537 Third LO Driver Amplier (100 MHz VCXO) ..........page 541 Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR) ............... page 542 Operation (600 MHz SAWR) ......................................page 542 Troubleshooting (600 MHz SAWR) ...........................page 542 Third LO Driver Amplier (600 MHz SAWR) ..........page 545 Unlocked Offset Lock Loop (Sampling Oscillator) ......page 547 Operation ....................................................................page 547 Troubleshooting ..........................................................page 547 Unlocked YTO PLL .......................................................page 551 Operation ....................................................................page 551 Troubleshooting an Unlocked YTO PLL ...................page 553 Unlocked Fractional N PLL ..........................................page 560 Operation ....................................................................page 560 Conrming an Unlocked Condition ...........................page 560 Fractional N PLL .......................................................page 561 Frequency Span Accuracy Problems ............................page 568 Determining the 1st LO Span ...................................page 568 Conrming Span Problems ....................................... page 569 YTO Main Coil Span Problems (LO Spans >20 MHz) .page 570 YTO FM Coil Span Problems (LO Spans 2.01to 20 MHz) .page 570 Fractional N Span Problems (LO Spans 2 MHz) ....page 572 1st LO Span Problems (All Spans) ............................page 572 1st LO Span Problems (Multiband Sweeps) .............page 573 Phase Noise Problems ...................................................page 575 Phase Noise in Locked versus Unlocked Spans .......page 575 Reference versus Reference PLL Phase Noise .........page 576 Fractional N versus Offset PLL or YTO PLL Phase Noise page 576 Fractional N PLL Phase Noise (08564-60007 Only) page 576 Sampler and Sampler IF ..............................................page 577 Sweep Generator Circuit ..............................................page 579 A21 OCXO .....................................................................page 585

522

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Introduction

CAUTION

All of the assemblies are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). For further information regarding electrostatic cautions, refer to Electrostatic Discharge"Electrostatic Discharge Information" in Chapter 1 . Using an active probe, such as an 85024A, with a spectrum analyzer is recommended for troubleshooting the RF circuitry. If an 1120A active probe is being used with a spectrum analyzer, such as the 8566A/B, or 8569A/B having dc coupled inputs, either set the active probe for an ac coupled output or use a dc blocking capacitor (11240B) between the active probe and the spectrum-analyzer input. Some spectrum analyzers can be set to ac coupled. Failure to do this can result in damage to the analyzer or the probe.

CAUTION

Chapter 11

523

Synthesizer Section Test Connector Locations

Test Connector Locations

When troubleshooting suspected faulty circuits, use Table 11-1 on page 525 to determine which procedure to perform. Figure 11-1 illustrates test connector locations on the A14 and A15 assemblies. The pin locations of a 16-pin test connector are indicated in Figure 11-2 on page 525. Figure 11-1 A14 and A15 Assembly Test Connectors

524

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Test Connector Locations

Figure 11-2

Test Connector Pin Locations

Table 11-1

Troubleshooting Suspected Faulty Circuits

Suspected Circuit YTO loop 1st LO 1st LO pretune frequency and amplitude Fractional N oscillator 3rd LO drive 10 MHz reference to reference PLL phase/frequency detector 10 MHz signal at other input to reference PLL phase/frequency detector Sampling oscillator tune voltage A14 frequency control assembly A14J301 10 MHz REF input A15 RF assembly Current source A14U307 Procedure to Perform Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section (steps 12-33) Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section (steps 9-11) Unlocked YTO PLL (steps 9-12) Unlocked YTO PLL (steps 13-17) Third LO Driver Amplier (100 MHz VCXO) (steps 1-6) Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR) (steps 8-13) Unlocked Reference PLL (steps 12 and 13)

Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section (steps 1-4) Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section (steps 12-18) Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section (steps 5-8) Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section (steps 18-25) 1st LO Span Problems (All Spans) (steps 14-21)

Chapter 11

525

Synthesizer Section Test Connector Locations

Table 11-1

Troubleshooting Suspected Faulty Circuits

Suspected Circuit YTO loop phase/frequency detector YTF gain and offset DACs Level at amplier input Levels into mixer A15U400 Offset PLL Main coil tune DAC Main coil coarse and ne DACs Sweeping fractional N Reference PLL phase/frequency detector Path to offset PLL phase/frequency detector Sampler drive output of A7 Sampler IF Sampler/sampler IF operation Span attenuator Sweep generator Sweep + tune multiplier 600 MHz reference loop amplier YTO loop YTO FM coil driver YTO FM coil driver and main loop error voltage driver Procedure to Perform Unlocked YTO PLL (steps 27-34) YTF Driver Circuit (steps 10-23) Third LO Driver Amplier (steps 1-6) Unlocked YTO PLL (steps 3-13) Unlocked YTO PLL (steps 1 and 2) Unlocked YTO PLL (steps 45-49) Unlocked YTO PLL (steps 41-44) Fractional N Span Problems (LO Spans 2 MHz) Unlocked Reference PLL (steps 17-22) Unlocked YTO PLL (steps 3-7, 14-19) Unlocked YTO PLL (steps 18-21) Unlocked YTO PLL (steps 22-26) Sampler and Sampler IF (steps 1-15) 1st LO Span Problems (All Spans) (steps 6-13) Sweep Generator Circuit YTF Driver Circuit (steps 4-9) Unlocked Reference PLL (steps 23-26) Unlocked YTO PLL 1st LO Span Problems (2.01 MHz to 20 MHz) (step 6) Unlocked YTO PLL (steps 35-40)

526

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Troubleshooting Test Setup

Troubleshooting Test Setup

Some synthesizer section problems require placing the YTO PLL in an unlocked condition. This is done by moving jumper A14J23 to the TEST position. This grounds the YTO ERROR signal and disables the CPU from detecting an unlocked YTO. The FM coil driver output is set to its mid-range level causing the YTO to be controlled only by the main coil tune DAC. Synthesizer section troubleshooting is best done with the spectrum analyzer SPAN set to 0 Hz (even though it is still possible to sweep the Main and FM coils of the YTO). With the YTO in its unlocked conditions and the SPAN set to 0 Hz, the nominal YTO frequency is not necessarily the value listed as LO FREQ in the Frequency Diagnose menu. The YTO has an initial pretune accuracy of 20 MHz. To display the nominal YTO frequency, press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ, DIAGNOSE, LO FREQ. The fractional N oscillator frequency is the same as the desired sampler IF. To display the fractional N oscillator frequency press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, FRAC N FREQ. If the sampler IF is negative (YTO frequency is lower than the desired sampling oscillator harmonic), the fractional N frequency will be displayed as a negative number.

Chapter 11

527

Synthesizer Section Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section

Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section

The A11 YTO (the 1st LO of the spectrum analyzer) is a YIG-tuned oscillator which tunes from 2.95 to 6.8107 GHz. The A7 LO multiplier/amplier (LOMA) levels the A11 output and distributes the signal to the following: A8 low band mixer A10 YIG-tuned mixer/lter (RYTHM) A12 switched barium-tuned mixer (SBTX) A15U100 sampler 1ST LO OUTPUT to the front panel The synthesizer section includes the following PLLs (Phase Locked Loops):
YTO PLL Offset PLL (sampling oscillator PLL) Fractional N PLL Reference PLL A7, A11, A14 and A15 assemblies A15 RF assembly A14 frequency control assembly A15 RF assembly

The fractional N PLL is sometimes swept backwards (higher frequency to lower frequency). This is necessary because of the way in which the sampler IF signal is produced.
NOTE

The frequency control board is digitally controlled. If multiple failures appear in unrelated areas of the circuitry, the control may be at fault. Refer to the troubleshooting procedures in this chapter for further help on isolating those failures.

Check Sampling 1. Connect the positive lead of a DVM to A15J200 pin 13 and the negative lead to A15J200 pin 6. This measures the sampling Oscillator Tune oscillator tune voltage which is an input to the ADC MUX of the A3 Voltage (steps interface assembly. 1-4) 2. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Center frequency .................................................. 389.5 MHz Trigger ...................................................................... SINGLE 3. Use the data entry keys to tune the CENTER FREQ to the values listed in Table 11-2 on page 529.

528

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section

4. As the sampling oscillator frequency is increased, the DVM reading should also increase. If the tune voltage is correct, but the ADC measures the voltage and determines it to be out of specication, troubleshoot the A3 assembly ADC MUX. Table 11-2 Center Frequency Tuning Values
8564E/EC and 8565E/EC Center Frequency (MHz) 2156.3 2176.3 2199.5 2230.3 799.3 2263.3 2282.3 2302.3 2155.3 2158.3 2336.3 2196.3 1.3 2378.3 2410.3 2422.3 Sampling Oscillator Frequency (MHz) 285.000 286.364 287.500 288.462 288.889 290.000 290.909 291.667 292.500 293.478 294.444 295.000 296.000 296.471 297.000 297.222

Check A14J301 5. Disconnect W37 from A14J301. 10 MHz reference 6. Connect a test cable from W37 to the input of another spectrum input (steps 5-8) analyzer. Tune the other spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency .................................................... 10 MHz Span .......................................................................... 2 MHz 7. The amplitude of the 10 MHz reference signal should measure >1 dBm. If the signal does not measure >1 dBm, troubleshoot the A15 10 MHz distribution and A21 OCXO (If not Option 103). 8. Reconnect W37 to A14J301. Check 1st LO (steps 9-11) 9. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to INPUT 50.

Chapter 11

529

Synthesizer Section Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section

10.Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ........................................................ 300 MHz Span ............................................................................ 100 MHz 11.If the 1st LO is present, a signal should be displayed at about 10 dBm (approximately 20 MHz from the center frequency). If no signal is displayed and ERR 338 LOMA AGC, ERR 339 SBTX AGC, or ERR 340 SAMP AGC is not present, suspect the A7 LOMA. If no signal is displayed and ERR 338 LOMA AGC, ERR 339 SBTX AGC, or ERR 340 SAMP AGC is present, check the A11 YTO as follows: a. Set jumper A14J23 to the TEST position. b. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ...................................................... 50 Hz CF step ................................................................ 300 MHz Span .............................................................................0Hz c. Connect a power meter directly to the output of the A11 YTO. d. Press the spectrum analyzer step-up key and measure the YTO output power at each step. e. Make sure that the A11 YTO output power is between +9 and +13 dBm. f. Set jumper A14J23 to the NORM position and reconnect the A11 YTO. 12.On the spectrum analyzer press PRESET, SPAN, ZERO Check A14 frequency SPAN, CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, and FRAC N FREQ. Note control assembly the fractional N oscillator frequency. (Ignore the minus sign, if (steps 12-18) present.)
Fractional N Oscillator Frequency = _________________MHz

13.Check A14J304 (FRAC N TEST) port with a spectrum analyzer for this exact frequency. The amplitude should be approximately -10 dBm. 14.Disconnect W32 from A14J501 and connect the output of a signal source to A14J501. Remove the jumper from A14J23. Connect the positive lead of a DVM to A14J23 pin 1, and the negative lead to A14J23 pin 3. See Figure 11-3 on page 531. 15.Set the signal source to the following settings: Power ........................................................................... 0 dBm Frequency .............................. Frequency recorded in step 12 16.Tune the source 1 kHz below the fractional N frequency. The voltage measured on the DVM should be approximately 12 Vdc.

530

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section

17.Tune the source 1 kHz above the fractional N frequency. The voltage measured on the DVM should be approximately 12 Vdc. 18.If the DVM reading does not change, the A14 frequency control assembly is defective. Reconnect W32 to A14J501. Replace the jumper on A14J23 to the NORM position. Figure 11-3 YTO Loop Test Setup

Check A15 RF 19.Disconnect W34 from A15U100J1 and disconnect W32 from assembly (steps A15J101. 19-25) 20.Connect a frequency counter to A15J101. Connect a high-frequency test cable from an 8340A/B synthesized sweeper to A15U100J1. See Figure 11-4 on page 532. 21.Connect a BNC cable from the spectrum analyzer 10 MHz REF IN/OUT to the 8340A/B FREQUENCY STANDARD EXT input. 22.Set the 8340A/B to the following settings: Frequency standard ........................................................ EXT Power level ................................................................. 5 dBm 23.Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz Trigger ................................................................... SINGLE

Chapter 11

531

Synthesizer Section Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section

24.Set the spectrum analyzer and 8340A/B frequencies to the combinations listed in Table 11-3 on page 533 and press SGL SWP on the spectrum analyzer. Figure 11-4 Sampler and Sampling Oscillator Test Setup

25.At each combination, the frequency counter should measure a sampler IF as shown in Table 11-3 on page 533. (The offset PLL sampling oscillator tunes to the frequencies listed in the table.) If the frequency counter does not read the indicated sampler IF 10 kHz, suspect the A15 RF assembly. 26.Reconnect W34 to A15U100J1 and W32 to A15J101. 27.The 1ST LO OUTPUT, located on the front panel, must be terminated in 50s. If the YTO unlocks only with certain center frequency and span combinations, check that the termination is in place. 28.Set the spectrum analyzer CENTER FREQ and SPAN to generate the unlock conditions. 29.On the spectrum analyzer press SGL SWP. 30.Move jumper A14J23 to the TEST position. 31.Disconnect W34 from A15U100J1 and measure the power of the signal at the end of W34.

532

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Conrming a Faulty Synthesizer Section

32.If the power is less than 6.5 dBm, suspect W34, A7 LOMA, or A11 YTO. 33.Move jumper A14J23 to the NORM position. Table 11-3 Sampling Oscillator Test Frequencies
8340A CW Frequency (GHz) 6.067000 6.087000 6.110200 6.141000 4.710000 6.174000 6.193000 6.213000 6.066000 6.069000 6.247000 6.107000 3.912000 6.289000 6.321000 6.333000 8564/65E Center Frequency (MHz) 2156.3 2176.3 2199.5 2230.3 799.3 2263.3 2282.3 2302.3 2155.3 2158.3 2336.3 2196.3 1.3 2378.3 2410.3 2422.3 Offset PLL Sampling Oscillator Freq (MHz) 285.000 286.364 287.500 288.462 288.889 290.000 290.909 291.667 292.500 293.478 294.444 295.000 296.000 296.471 297.000 297.222 Counter Reading Sampler IF (MHz) 82.000 73.364 72.700 83.308 87.778 84.000 83.909 88.000 76.500 94.044 63.667 88.000 64.000 63.118 84.000 91.333

Chapter 11

533

Synthesizer Section General PLL Troubleshooting

General PLL Troubleshooting

The synthesizer section relies heavily on phase-locked loops (PLL). Typically, faulty PLLs are either locked at the wrong frequency or unlocked. The information below applies to troubleshooting these two classes of problems on a generalized PLL.

PLL Locked at Wrong Frequency

Numbers in the following text identify items in Figure 11-5 on page 535: Any frequency errors at reference (1) will be multiplied by N/M on the PLL output. A sampler reference-frequency error (2) will be multiplied by its harmonic on the PLL output. A mixer reference-frequency error (3) produces the identical error on the PLL output. If divider input or output frequencies (4) are wrong, check for incorrect divide numbers and data controlling the dividers.

534

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section General PLL Troubleshooting

Figure 11-5

PLL Locked at Wrong Frequency

Unlocked PLL
An unlocked PLL can be caused by problems inside or outside the PLL. Troubleshoot this problem by working backward from the oscillator as described in the steps below. Numbers in the following text identify items in Figure 11-6 on page 536. 1. The loop integrator output voltage (1) should be attempting to tune the oscillator to the correct frequency: The voltage at (1) should increase as the frequency increases on all of the PLLs:

Chapter 11

535

Synthesizer Section General PLL Troubleshooting

PLL YTO PLL Reference PLL Sampler PLL Fractional N PLL

Measurement Point A14J23 pin 1 (YTO ERROR) A15J502 pin 3 (LO3 ERR) A15J200 pin 13 (OFL ERR) A14TP13 (INTEGRATOR)

Figure 11-6

Unlocked PLL

2. If the integrator output voltage changes in the manner described in step 1, the problem is external to the PLL. For example, the reference frequency could be faulty. If the integrator output voltage appears incorrect, conrm that the pulses out of the phase detector (2) are attempting to tune the oscillator in the correct direction. 3. If the phase detector output is bad, check the inputs to the detector (3). One input should be higher in frequency than the other; this should match the phase detector outputs. 4. Conrm proper power levels for the signals at the input to the "N" dividers (4), the reference inputs (5 and 7), and the loop feedback path (6).

536

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO)

Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO)

NOTE

The following information is for A15 RF assemblies 08563-60054 and later. For earlier A15 RF assemblies, proceed to Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR) in this chapter.

Operation (100 MHz VCXO)

The 600 MHz reference is generated by tripling, then doubling the output of the 100 MHz phase-locked loop. If the 600 MHz reference is off frequency, the 100 MHz phase-lock circuitry is probably at fault. If there is no signal present at A15J701, or if the level is less than 3 dBm, the 100 MHz VCXO, the tripler, or the doubler circuitry has probably failed. Refer to function blocks Q, R, and S of the A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 4) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information binder.

Troubleshooting (100 MHz VCXO)

Check 100 MHz VCXO, tripler, and doubler (steps 1-7) 1. Using an active probe/spectrum analyzer combination, such as the 85024A/8566B, measure the tripler output at A15TP700. The tripler output should be +3 dBm 2 dB. 2. If the tripler output is within tolerance, suspect the doubler circuitry. Refer to function block S of the A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 4). 3. If the tripler output is too low, probe the output of A15U700 RF amplier. The level should be +16.5 dBm 2 dB. The level at the input of A15U700 should be +8.5 dBm 2 dB. 4. If the level at the input of A15U700 is too low, suspect a faulty 100 MHz VCXO. Refer to function block Q of the A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 4). 5. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz INT. 6. Measuring the tune voltage indicates if the 100 MHz PLL is locked. Connect the ground lead the voltmeter to A15J1 pin 3 and measure the voltage at A15J700 pin 3. 7. The tune voltage should be between +1 and +24 Volts. If the tune voltage is incorrect, place the P700 jumper (on A15J700) in the TEST position (pin 1 to pin 2). This sets the tune voltage for varactor A15CR700 to the nominal +13 Volts, making it easier to troubleshoot the 100 MHz VCXO, tripler, and doubler. Remember to return P700 jumper to the NORMAL position when you have nished troubleshooting the oscillator circuitry.

Chapter 11

537

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO)

8. If the 100 MHz oscillator is working, the reason for the unlocked condition is either a problem in the 10 MHz reference or a fault in the signal path around the loop. 9. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz Check 10 MHz reference to INT. phase/frequency 10.Check the 10 MHz reference frequency-accuracy by connecting a detector (steps frequency counter to A15J301 and verify that the reference 9-14) frequency is 10 MHz 40 Hz after a 5 minute warm-up period. 11.If a 10 MHz signal >1 V peak-to-peak is not present at A15J301, refer to the 10 MHz Reference in Chapter 12 . 12.Measure the signal at TP301 with an oscilloscope. Refer to function block M of A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 4). 13.Measure the signal at U502 pin 11 with an oscilloscope. Refer to function block X of A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 4). This signal should be TTL levels at 10 MHz with a 60 percent duty cycle. 14.If TTL-level signals (approximately 10 MHz) are not present, check signals backwards through the loop to nd a fault in the signal path. 15.Measure the signals at the following test points with an active probe/spectrum analyzer combination:
Junction of C570 and C571 Junction of R715, R716, R567, and R568 U700 pin 3 U700 pin 1 100 MHz, +16.5 dBm 2 dB 100 MHz, +8.5 dBm 2 dB 100 MHz, +2.5 dBm 2 dB 100 MHz, 3 dBm 2 dB

16.If an approximately 10 MHz TTL signal is present at U502 pin 11 with 60 percent duty cycle, and the RF portion of the phase-lock loop is functioning, the fault probably lies in the phase/frequency detector or the 100 MHz lock loop integrator. 17.Monitor U504 pin 5 and U503 pin 9 with an oscilloscope. These are Check the two outputs of the phase/frequency detector. Refer to function phase/frequency block O of A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 4). detector (steps 17-22) 18.A locked loop will exhibit stable, narrow (approximately 20 ns wide), and positive-going TTL pulses occurring at a 10 MHz rate at U504 pin 5 and U503 pin 9.

538

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO)

19.If the loop is unlocked, but signals are present on both inputs of the phase/frequency detector, the output pulses will be superimposed on each other. 20.If the loop is unlocked, and there is no signal at one of the phase/frequency detector inputs, one phase detector output will be at TTL low and the other will be at TTL high. For example, if there is no input signal at U504 pin 3, U504 pin 5 will be TTL low and U503 pin 9 will be TTL high. If there is no input signal at U503 pin 11, U503 pin 9 will be TTL low and U504 pin 5 will be TTL high. 21.To remove the 10 MHz reference input to the phase/frequency detector, press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz EXT with no signal applied to the rear panel 10 MHz REF IN/OUT connector. 22.To remove the divided-down 100 MHz signal from the phase/frequency detector, short R595. Refer to function block X of A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 4). 23.Remove 10 MHz reference input to the phase/frequency detector by Check the 100 pressing AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz EXT. No signal should MHz lock loop integrator (steps be connected to the rear panel 10 MHz REF IN/OUT connector. 23-27)
NOTE

The outputs of phase/frequency detector are low-pass ltered to reduce the 10 MHz component of the signal. The ltered signals are then integrated by U506 and the result is fed to the tune line of the 100 MHz VCXO. 24.Check that the voltage on A15J502 pin 3 is less than 0 Vdc. Refer to function block P of A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 4). 25.Press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz INT and remove the divided-down 100 MHz input to the phase/frequency detector by shorting R572. 26.Check that the voltage on A15J502 pin 3 is greater than 13 Vdc. 27.If the loop is locked, the voltage on A15J502 pin 3 should be between 0 and +6 Vdc. 28.If the front-panel CAL OUTPUT amplitude is out of specication and cannot be brought within specication by adjusting A15R561, CAL AMPTD, check the calibrator AGC amplier with the following steps. Refer to function block W of A15 RF schematic (sheet 1 of 4).

Chapter 11

539

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO)

NOTE

The 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal comes from the tripled 100 MHz which is passed through a leveling loop. The 300 MHz signal passes through a low-pass lter for reducing higher harmonics. These harmonics can fool the detector. The 300 MHz signal passes through a variable attenuator controlled by PIN diode CR503 which is controlled by the feedback loop. Diode CR504 is the detector diode (the same type as CR505). Diode CR504 provides temperature compensation between the reference voltage and the detected RF voltage. Measure the level of 300 MHz at A15 TP505 with an active probe/spectrum analyzer combination. If the signal is less than +2 dBm, repeat the rst 27 steps of this procedure. If the signal at this point is correct, place a short across the PIN diode CR503. If the signal level at the CAL OUTPUT is still less than 10 dBm with CR503 shorted out, troubleshoot the RF forward path through amplier Q505. (The signal amplitude decreases.) If the CAL OUTPUT signal level is greater than 10 dBm, troubleshoot the PIN diode attenuator, the detector, or the feedback path. 29.Measure the detector voltage at A15J502 pin 14. The voltage should measure approximately +0.3 Vdc when the CAL OUTPUT signal is at 10 dBm. This voltage should change with adjustment of A15R561, CAL AMPTD. 30.Check that the voltage at U507A Pin 3 is +1.7 Vdc. If this voltage is not correct, there may be a problem with the +10 V reference. 31.Measure voltage at U507B pin 5 while adjusting R561. This is the temperature-compensated adjustable voltage reference to which the detected voltage is compared. It should vary between +0.15 V and +0.6 V. 32.Adjust R561 to its limits and verify that the output U507B pin 7 measures approximately +1 Vdc at one limit and 12 Vdc at the other limit.

540

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO)

Third LO Driver Amplier (100 MHz VCXO)

The third LO driver amplier (Q503) amplies the 300 MHz from the 300 MHz distribution amplier to a sufcient level to drive the LO port of the double balanced mixer. During the SIG ID operation, diodes CR501 and CR502 turn off the 3rd LO driver amplier in order to minimize the amount of 300 MHz going to the double-balanced mixer. Check level at amplier input (steps 1-5) 1. Press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER. Press SIG ID OFF, if Option 008 is installed. Use an active-probe/spectrum-analyzer combination to conrm the power level of the 300 MHz signal at the following test points:
A15X602 pin 5 A15TP504 +7 dBm +15 dBm

2. If the signal at A15X602 pin 5 is low, but the signal at A15TP504 is correct, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER. Press SIG ID OFF, if present. 3. Check that PIN diode switches CR603 and CR605 are reverse biased by approximately +10 Vdc. Refer to function block F of A15 RF schematic (sheet 4 of 4). 4. Measure 300 MHz signal at A15TP503 using an active probe/spectrum analyzer combination. If the signal is not approximately +10 dBm, refer to "Unlocked Reference PLL" in this chapter. 5. If the level at the TP503 is correct, but signal at TP504 is too low, the fault is probably in the amplier.

Chapter 11

541

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR)

Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR)

NOTE

The following information is for A15 RF assemblies earlier than 08563-60054, 08563-60055, or 08563-60056. For A15 RF assemblies with the aforementioned part numbers or later, refer to Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO) earlier in this chapter.

Operation (600 MHz SAWR)

The reference PLL 600 MHz output is generated by a 600 MHz SAWR (surface acoustical wave resonator) VCO. The SAWR provides a high Q feedback path in the oscillator ensuring good phase noise. If the oscillator is off-frequency, the phase-lock circuitry is probably at fault. If there is no signal present at A15J701, or if the level is less than 3 dBm, the oscillator has failed. Transistor Q703 provides active bias for oscillator transistor Q701. Transistor Q704 provides active bias for 600 MHz buffer amplier Q702. Refer to function blocks Q and R of A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 3) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information binder.

Troubleshooting (600 MHz SAWR)

1. If Q701 and Q703 are functioning, check the bias on varactors CR701 and CR702. The varactors should be reverse-biased between 0 V and 18 V, depending on tune voltage. 2. If the active devices are functioning properly, check the SAWR by placing a 100-ohm resistor across U701 pins 1 and 2. This bypasses the SAWR, but provides the equivalent loss of a correctly functioning SAWR. 3. If the oscillator begins to oscillate, the SAWR is probably defective. 4. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz INT. 5. Measuring tune line voltage (LO3 ERR) indicates if the Reference PLL is locked. Measure the voltage at A15J502 pin 3. Connect the ground lead to A15J200 pin 6. 6. If voltage is not between 0 V and 5.75 V the loop is unlocked and ERR 333 600 UNLK should be displayed on the CRT. 7. If the 600 MHz oscillator is working, the reason for the unlocked condition is either a problem in the 10 MHz reference or a fault in the signal path around the loop.

542

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR)

8. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and Check 10 MHz reference to 10 MHz INT. phase/frequency 9. Check the 10 MHz reference frequency-accuracy by connecting a detector (steps frequency counter to A15J301 and verify that the reference 8-13) frequency is 10 MHz 40 Hz after a 5 minute warm-up period. 10.If a 10 MHz signal >1 V peak-to-peak is not present at A15J301, refer to the 10 MHz Reference in Chapter 12 . 11.Measure the signal on U504 pin 3 with an oscilloscope. Refer to function block O of A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 4). 12.Measure the signal at U504 pin 11 with an oscilloscope. Refer to function block O of A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 4). This signal should be TTL levels at 10 MHz with a 90 percent duty cycle. 13.If TTL-level signals (approximately 10 MHz) are not present, check signals backwards through the loop to nd a fault in the signal path. 14.Use an oscilloscope to check for 50 MHz TTL level signal at U503 pin 2. Refer to function block X of A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 4). 15.Measure the signals at the following test points with an active probe/spectrum analyzer combination such as an 85024A/8566A/B. The signal level at TP701 should be sufcient to drive an ECL input.
U502 pin 2 U502 pin 15 TP503 TP502 TP701 50 MHz, +3 dBm 300 MHz, +3 dBm 300 MHz, approximately +8 dBm 300 MHz (ECL level), approximately +3 dBm 600 MHz (ECL level), approximately +3 dBm

16.If an approximately 10 MHz TTL signal is present at U504 pin 11 with 90 percent duty cycle, and the RF portion of the phase-lock loop is functioning, the fault probably lies in the phase/frequency detector or the 600 MHz reference loop amplier. 17.Monitor U504 pins 5 and 9 with an oscilloscope. These are the two Check outputs of the phase/frequency detector. Refer to function block O of phase/frequency A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 3). detector (steps 17-22) 18.A locked loop will exhibit stable, narrow (approximately 20 ns wide), and positive-going TTL pulses occurring at a 10 MHz rate at U504 pins 5 and 9. 19.If the loop is unlocked, but signals are present on both inputs of the phase/frequency detector, the output pulses will be superimposed on each other.

Chapter 11

543

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR)

20.If the loop is unlocked, and there is no signal at one of the phase/frequency detector inputs, one phase detector output will be at TTL low and the other will be at TTL high. For example, if there is no input signal at U504 pin 3, U504 pin 5 will be TTL low and U504 pin 9 will be TTL high. If there is no input signal at U504 pin 11, U504 pin 9 will be TTL low and U504 pin 5 will be TTL high. 21.To remove the 10 MHz reference input to the phase/frequency detector, press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz EXT with no signal applied to the rear panel 10 MHz REF IN/OUT connector. 22.To remove the divided-down 600 MHz signal from the phase/frequency detector, short R572. Refer to function block X of A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 4). Check the 600 MHz reference loop amplier (steps 23-26)
NOTE

23.Remove 10 MHz reference input to the phase/frequency detector by pressing AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz EXT. No signal should be connected to the rear panel 10 MHz REF IN/OUT connector.

The outputs of phase/frequency detector are low-pass ltered to reduce the 10 MHz component of the signal. The ltered signals are then integrated by U506 and the result is fed to the tune line of the 600 MHz oscillator. 24.Check that the voltage on A15J502 pin 3 is less than 0 Vdc. Refer to function block P of A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 4). 25.Press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz INT and remove the divided-down 600 MHz input to the phase/frequency detector by shorting R572. 26.Check that the voltage on A15J502 pin 3 is greater than 5.75 Vdc. 27.If the loop is locked, the voltage on A15J502 pin 3 should be between 0 V and +5.75 Vdc. 28.If the front-panel CAL OUTPUT amplitude is out of specication and cannot be brought within specication by adjusting A15R561, CAL AMPTD, check the calibrator AGC amplier with the following steps. Refer to function block W of A15 RF schematic (sheet 2 of 4).

NOTE

The 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal comes from the divided down 600 MHz which is passed through a leveling loop. The 300 MHz signal passes through a low-pass lter for reducing higher harmonics. These harmonics can fool the detector. The 300 MHz signal passes through a variable attenuator controlled by PIN diode CR503 which is controlled by the feedback loop. Diode CR504 is the detector diode (the same type as CR505). Diode CR504 provides temperature compensation between the reference voltage and the detected RF voltage.

544

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR)

a. Measure the level of 300 MHz at A15 TP505 with an active probe/spectrum analyzer combination. If the signal is less than +2 dBm, repeat the rst 27 steps of this procedure. b. If the signal at this point is correct, place a short across the PIN diode CR503. c. If the signal level at the CAL OUTPUT is still less than 10 dBm with CR503 shorted out, troubleshoot the RF forward path through amplier Q505. (The signal amplitude decreases.) d. If the CAL OUTPUT signal level is greater than 10 dBm, troubleshoot the PIN diode attenuator, the detector, or the feedback path. 29.Measure the detector voltage at A15J502 pin 14. The voltage should measure approximately +0.3 Vdc when the CAL OUTPUT signal is at 10 dBm. This voltage should change with adjustment of A15R561, CAL AMPTD. 30.Check that the voltage at U507A Pin 3 is +1.7 Vdc. If this voltage is not correct, there may be a problem with the +10 V reference. 31.Measure voltage at U507B pin 5 while adjusting R561. This is the temperature-compensated adjustable voltage reference to which the detected voltage is compared. It should vary between +0.15 V and +0.6 V. 32.Adjust R561 to its limits and verify that the output U507B pin 7 measures approximately +1 Vdc at one limit and 12 Vdc at the other limit.

Third LO Driver Amplier (600 MHz SAWR)

The third LO driver amplier (Q503) amplies the 300 MHz from the 300 MHz distribution amplier to a sufcient level to drive the LO port of the double balanced mixer. During the SIG ID operation, diodes CR501 and CR502 turn off the 3rd LO driver amplier in order to minimize the amount of 300 MHz going to the double-balanced mixer. Check level at amplier input (steps 1-6) 1. Press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER. Press SIG ID OFF, if Option 008 is installed. 2. Use an active-probe/spectrum-analyzer combination to conrm the power level of the 300 MHz signal at the following test points:
A15X602 pin 5 A15TP504 +7 dBm +15 dBm

Chapter 11

545

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR)

3. If the signal at A15X602 pin 5 is low, but the signal at A15TP504 is correct, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER. Press SIG ID OFF, if present. 4. Check that PIN diode switches CR603 and CR605 are reverse biased by approximately +10 Vdc. Refer to function block F of A15 RF schematic (sheet 4 of 4). 5. Measure 300 MHz signal at A15TP503 using an active probe/spectrum analyzer combination. If the signal is not approximately +10 dBm, refer to "Unlocked Reference PLL" in this chapter. 6. If the level at the TP503 is correct, but signal at TP504 is too low, the fault is probably in the amplier.

546

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Offset Lock Loop (Sampling Oscillator)

Unlocked Offset Lock Loop (Sampling Oscillator)

Operation
The offset lock loop drives the A15U100 sampler. The offset lock loop sampling oscillator tunes to one of sixteen discrete frequencies between 285 MHz and 297.222 MHz. Refer to A15 schematic (sheet 3 of 4). The oscillator output and the reference PLL 300 MHz signal is mixed by A15U400 to produce a 3 MHz to 15 MHz IF signal. The 3 MHz to 15 MHz signal is compared in the phase/frequency detector with the divided-down 300 MHz from the reference PLL. The phase/frequency detector drives a voltage-to-current diode switch which drives the loop integrator. Loop bandwidth switches vary the loop bandwidth to minimize noise sidebands. The sampling oscillator must produce low noise because the A15U100 sampler multiplies noise by a factor of approximately 24. Table 11-4 on page 548 lists the prescaler and postscaler divide numbers in the offset loop reference divide chain, for each of the 16 discrete frequencies to which the offset lock loop may be set. It also indicates what the reference frequency into the phase/frequency divide chain is. Refer to function block AN of A15 RF schematic (block 3 of 4).

Troubleshooting
Check loop references (steps 1 and 2) 1. Use an active probe and spectrum analyzer to conrm the presence of the following reference to the offset lock loop input. Refer to function block AM of A15 RF schematic (sheet 3 of 4).
A15TP404 300 MHz at +5 dBm

2. If this signal is not correct, refer to "Unlocked Reference PLL" in this chapter. Check levels into 3. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: mixer (steps Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz 3-13) Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Trigger ...................................................................... SINGLE 4. Force the PLL to unlock by shorting A15X201 pin 1 to A15X201 pin 5 with a short length of wire. Then connect a dc power supply to A15J200 pin 16. 5. Monitor A15TP201 with an active probe/spectrum analyzer combination. Vary the dc supply until the frequency of the sampling oscillator is 296 MHz.

Chapter 11

547

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Offset Lock Loop (Sampling Oscillator)

6. The voltage required to tune the oscillator should measure between +15 Vdc and +19 Vdc. If the voltage is out of this range, perform the sampling oscillator adjustment in Chapter 2. 7. Vary the voltage to tune the sampling oscillator to 296 MHz. 8. Use an active probe/spectrum analyzer combination to measure the 300 MHz LO signal at the following test point. Refer to function block AI of A15 RF schematic (sheet 3 of 4).
A15TP402 +7 dBm

9. If the signal is not measured near the indicated power, troubleshoot the offset lock loop buffer (function block AM of A15 RF schematic sheet 3 of 4). Table 11-4 Sampling Oscillator PLL Divide Numbers
Sampling Oscillator Frequency (MHz) 285.000 286.364 287.500 288.462 288.888 290.000 290.909 291.666 292.500 293.478 294.444 295.000 296.000 Center Frequency* (MHz) Reference Divide Chain Reference Frequency (MHz)

2156.3 2176.3 2199.5 2230.3 799.3 2263.3 2282.3 2302.3 2155.3 2158.3 2336.3 2196.3 1.3

Prescaler 10 11 8 13 9 10 11 9 8 23 9 10 15

Postscaler 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 4 5 2 6 6 5

15.000 13.636 12.500 11.538 11.111 10.000 9.091 8.333 7.500 6.522 5.556 5.000 4.000

296.471 2378.3 17 5 3.529 297.000 2410.3 20 5 3.000 297.222 2422.3 18 6 2.778 * To set the sampling oscillator to a desired frequency, set span to 0 Hz and CENTER FREQ to the value listed in the table.

10.Measure the 296 MHz loop feedback signal at the following test point:
A15TP400 +2 dBm

548

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Offset Lock Loop (Sampling Oscillator)

11.If the feedback signal is not near the indicated power, measure the signals at the following test points on the feedback path. Refer to function blocks AD, AG, and AH of A15 RF schematic (sheet 3 of 4).
A15TP200 A15TP201 A15TP202 +4 dBm +9 dBm +5.5 dBm

12.Measure the 4 MHz loop-IF signal at the mixer output. The frequency of the IF is the same as the reference frequency and can be found in Table 11-4 on page 548.
A15R447 (end nearest L414) 6 dBm

13.If the IF signal is not near the indicated power, troubleshoot the loop mixer (function block AI). Check path to phase/frequency detector (steps 14-19) 14.Measure the loop IF signal at the input to the IF amplier/limiter (function block AK):
A15L428 (end nearest U411) 4 MHz (approximately 6 dBm)

15.Conrm the presence of a 4 MHz square-wave reference frequency signal at U406 pin 3. The square wave is TTL and should be less than +0.6 V and greater than +2.2 V. 16.Disconnect the jumper from X201 pins 1 and 5. Disconnect the dc power supply which is connected to A15J200 pin 16. 17.Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ........................................................ 300 MHz Span ................................................................................... 0 Hz 18.Use an oscilloscope to conrm the presence of a 4 MHz TTL-level reference frequency signal at U406 pin 11. 19.Connect a short across A15R425. Connect A15U406 pins 3 and 11 together. This puts the same signal on both the phase/frequency detector inputs. 20.Observe the phase/frequency detector outputs, U406 pins 6 and 9, with an oscilloscope. Narrow TTL pulses should be present. Pin 9 is normally low, pulsing high, and pin 6 is normally high, pulsing low. 21.Check the end of L417 (nearest C445) with an oscilloscope. With the oscilloscope input ac-coupled, a triangle waveform approximately 20 mVp-p should be present.

Chapter 11

549

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Offset Lock Loop (Sampling Oscillator)

22.Short C441 with a wire jumper. (Connect the jumper from the end of R462 nearest C441 to the end of R460 nearest C443.) This changes the loop integrator into a voltage follower. Refer to function block AB of A15 RF schematic (sheet 3 of 4). 23.Check the voltages at the following points:
A15U408 pin 6 A15X201 pin 1 +2.5 Vdc (approximately) +2.5 Vdc (approximately)

24.If the voltages are not correct suspect A15U408. 25.Remove the jumpers.

550

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked YTO PLL

Unlocked YTO PLL

Operation
The A11 YTO is locked to two other oscillators, the fractional N oscillator and the offset PLL sampling oscillator. For LO spans of 2.01 MHz and greater, either the FM or main coil of the YTO is swept directly. For LO spans less than or equal to 2 MHz, the fractional N oscillator is swept. The sampling oscillator remains xed-tuned during all sweeps. The output of A11 YTO feeds through the A7 LO multiplier/amplier (LOMA) to the A15U100 sampler. The offset PLL sampling oscillator, which drives the sampler, oscillates between 285 and 297.222 MHz. The sampler generates harmonics of the sampling oscillator and one of these harmonics mixes with the YTO frequency to generate the sampler IF frequency. As a result, the frequency of the sampler IF is determined by the following equation:

F IF = F YTO ( N F SAMP )

Where: FIF is the sampler IF FYTO is the YTO frequency N is the desired sampling oscillator harmonic FSAMP is the sampling oscillator frequency Notice that FIF can be positive or negative depending upon whether the sampling oscillator harmonic used is less than or greater than the YTO frequency. The actual sampler IF is always positive, but the sign is carried along as a "bookkeeping" function which determines which way to sweep the fractional N oscillator (up or down) and what polarity the YTO error voltage should have (positive or negative) to maintain lock. To check if a negative sampler IF is selected, press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, FRAC N FREQ. If the fractional N oscillator frequency is positive, the sampler IF is also positive. A negative fractional N frequency indicates that the sampler IF is negative.

Chapter 11

551

Synthesizer Section Unlocked YTO PLL

Notice that the polarity of the YTO loop error voltage (YTO ERROR) out of the YTO loop phase/frequency detector changes as a function of the polarity of the sampler IF. That is, for positive sampler IFs, an increasing YTO frequency results in an increasing YTO ERROR signal. For negative sampler IFs, an increasing YTO frequency results in a decreasing YTO ERROR signal. This implies that to maintain lock in both cases, the sense of YTO ERROR must be reversed such that, with a negative sampler IF, an increasing YTO ERROR results in an increasing YTO frequency. This is accomplished with error-sign amplier, A14U328B. This amplier can be rmware-controlled to operate as either an inverting or non-inverting amplier. Digital control line ERRSGN (from A14U313 pin 19) controls the polarity of this amplier. When ERRSGN is high (positive sampler IF), the amplier has a positive polarity. In fractional N spans (LO Spans 2 MHz) the YTO remains locked to the sweeping fractional N PLL. Thus, the sampler IF must always equal the fractional N oscillator frequency (conditions for lock). Since the YTO must always sweep up in frequency, for negative sampler IFs, the fractional N oscillator must sweep from a higher frequency to a lower frequency. This is necessary since an increasing YTO frequency decreases the sampler IF for negative sampler IFs. The opposite is true for positive sampler IFs, so in these cases, the fractional N oscillator sweeps more conventionally from a lower frequency to a higher frequency. Table 11-5 on page 553 summarizes the amplier polarities for the various combinations of sampler IF polarities and LO spans. The YTO main coil lter is used to improve residual FM in FM spans. See function block I of A14 frequency control schematic (sheet 2 of 5) in the Component-Level Information binder. Transistors Q304 and Q305 switch the lter (capacitor C36 and resistor R48) into the circuit. Transistor Q303 and U333 keep C36 charged during main spans so the frequency does not jump when C36 is switch in.

552

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked YTO PLL

Table 11-5

Amplier Polarities
YTO Error Sign Amplier Fractional N Oscillator Swept Positive Sampler IF Negative Sampler IF FM/Main YTO Coils Swept Positive Sampler IF Negative Sampler IF Negative TTL Low Positive TTL High Negative TTL Low Positive ERRSGN (A14U313 pin 19) TTL High

Troubleshooting an Unlocked YTO PLL

1. If the YTO PLL is unlocked, error code 301 should be displayed. Place the spectrum analyzer in ZERO SPAN. Figure 11-7 on page 554 illustrates the simplied YTO PLL. 2. Move the jumper on A14J23 to connect pins 2 and 3 (TEST position). Refer to Figure 11-1 on page 524 for the location of A14J23. Error code 301 should no longer be displayed. (The YTO PLL feedback path is now open and the YTO error voltage is forced to zero.) 3. On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, and LO FREQ. The displayed LO FREQ is the desired YTO frequency calculated. Record the calculated YTO frequency below:
YTO frequency (calculated) =__________________ MHz

4. Measure the YTO frequency at the front-panel 1ST LO OUTPUT jack and record below:
YTO frequency (measured) = ___________________MHz

Chapter 11

553

Synthesizer Section Unlocked YTO PLL

Figure 11-7

Troubleshooting an Unlocked YTO PLL

5. Calculate the YTO frequency error by subtracting the frequency recorded in step 3 from the frequency recorded in step 4. Record the result below:
YTO Frequency Error = _______________________MHz

YTO frequency error = YTO frequency (MEASURED)YTO frequency(CALCULATED) 6. On the spectrum analyzer, press MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, and FRAC N FREQ. Record the fractional N frequency below:
Fractional N frequency = _______________________MHz

7. If the YTO frequency error recorded in step 5 is greater than 20 MHz, do the following: Check the YTO adjustments using the automated adjustment in Chapter 2 or the manual adjustment in Chapter 3.

554

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked YTO PLL

Check the YTO DACs using the procedure in steps 41 through 49 below. Refer to steps 9 through 34 below. 8. If the YTO Frequency error recorded in step 5 is less than 20 MHz, do the following: Measure the frequency at A14J304. The frequency should be equal to the frequency recorded in step 6. If not, refer to "Unlocked Fractional N PLL" in this chapter. Measure the input and output levels of the A15U100 sampler. If the sampler appears defective, check the LO drive to the sampler as described in "Sampler and Sampler IF." Refer to steps 34 through 51 below. 9. The pretuned frequency of the 1st LO must be sufciently accurate Check 1st LO for the YTO loop to acquire lock. The amplitude of the 1st LO must pretune be sufcient to drive the A15U100 sampler. Perform the YTO frequency and Adjustment procedure, particularly the YTO main coil adjustments. amplitude (steps (If available, use a synthesized microwave spectrum analyzer 9-12) instead of the microwave frequency counter specied in the adjustment procedure.) 10.If the YTO main coil cannot be adjusted, proceed to step 33 to troubleshoot the main coil coarse and ne DACs and main coil tune DAC. 11.The front-panel 1ST LO OUTPUT should measure between +14.5 and +18.5 dBm in amplitude. 12.If the 1ST LO OUTPUT amplitude is out of the specied range, perform the automated LOMA adjustments. Refer to Chapter 2. Check the fractional N oscillator (steps 13-17) 13.Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz 14.Monitor the fractional N PLL output at A14J304 (FRAC N TEST) with a synthesized spectrum analyzer such as an 8568A/B or 8566A/B. Refer to function block AI of A14 frequency control schematic (sheet 4 of 5). 15.The signal at A14J304 (FRAC N TEST) should measure approximately 10 dBm at 66.7 MHz. If the loop is unlocked, the sampler IF frequency can also be seen on A14J304, about 30 dB below the fractional N signal.

Chapter 11

555

Synthesizer Section Unlocked YTO PLL

16.If a problem exists only at particular CENTER FREQ and SPAN settings, determine the desired fractional N oscillator frequency by pressing CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, FRAC N FREQ and setting the spectrum analyzer to SINGLE trigger mode. 17.If the fractional N oscillator frequency is not correct, refer to "Unlocked Fractional N PLL" in this chapter. Check sampler drive output of A7 LOMA (steps 18-21) 18.Set A14J23 jumper to the TEST position and set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency .................................................... 2.9 GHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz 19.Disconnect cable W34 from A15U100J1. 20.Use a power meter to measure the A7 LOMA sampler-drive output at the end of W34. The power should measure greater than 9 dBm. 21.Place A14J23 jumper in the NORMAL position and reconnect W34 to A15U100J1. Check sampler IF (steps 22-26) 22.Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz 23.Place A14J23 jumper in the TEST position. 24.Disconnect W32 from A15J101. Monitor the sampler IF output (A15J101, SAMPLER IF) with a synthesized spectrum analyzer such as an 8568A/B or 8566A/B. 25.The sampler IF should measure between 46 MHz and 86 MHz at 15 dBm to +2 dBm. If the signal frequency or amplitude is incorrect, refer to "Unlocked Offset PLL" in this chapter. 26.Set A14J23 jumper in the NORMAL position. Reconnect W32 to A15J101. Check FM loop sense (steps 27-34) 27.Set A14J23 jumper in the TEST position. 28.Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz 29.Connect an RF signal-generator output to A14J501. Set the signal generator to the following settings: Frequency .................................................................. 56 MHz Amplitude .................................................................... 0 dBm 30.Monitor A14J17 pin 1 with a DVM or oscilloscope. Connect ground to A14J17 pin 6.

556

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked YTO PLL

31.As the signal generator frequency is increased to 76 MHz, the voltage at A14J17 pin 1 should change from approximately +12 V to 12 V. 32.Set the signal generator to the following settings and repeat step 30. Frequency .................................................................. 56 MHz Amplitude ................................................................ 15 dBm 33.If the voltage monitored in step 30 is correct with a 0 dBm output but not with 15 dBm output, suspect the limiting amplier function block AE. 34.Place A14J23 jumper in the NORMAL position and reconnect W32 to A14J501. Check YTO FM coil driver and main loop error voltage driver (steps 35-40) 35.To troubleshoot the YTO FM coil driver, refer to step 6 of "1st LO Span Problems (2.01 MHz to 20 MHz)." 36.Steps 36 through 40 verify that the YTO-loop error voltage is reaching the FM coil. The main loop error voltage driver has a gain of either 1.5 or 15; the analyzer rmware controls the gain during the locking process. The error voltage is read by the ADC on the A3 interface assembly. U324D calibrates out any offsets from true ground. A14U326A inverts the sense of the YTO loop to lock the YTO on lower sampler-sidebands (YTO frequency (sampler frequency sampler harmonic)). The fractional N frequency indicated in the FREQ DIAGNOSE menu will be negative when locking to lower sidebands. Refer to function blocks E, M, and N of A14 frequency control schematic (sheet 2 of 5) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information binder. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz 37.Remove A14J23 jumper and connect a dc power supply to A14J23 pin 2. Connect ground to A14J23 pin 3. Set the dc power supply to +7.5 Vdc. 38.Verify the nominal test-point voltages listed in Table 11-6 on page 558. 39.Change the input voltage to 7.5 volts and re-verify that the voltages listed in Table 11-6 on page 558 are the same except for a change in polarity.

Chapter 11

557

Synthesizer Section Unlocked YTO PLL

40.Change the CENTER FREQ to 678.8 MHz with the SPAN remaining 0 Hz. This will change the switch setting of U326A and invert the voltages listed in Table 11-6 on page 558. Table 11-6 Voltages in FM Coil and Main Loop Drivers
Measurement Points A14U405 pin 6 A14U322 pin 2 A14J17 pin 4 Voltages +3.116 Vdc approx. +1.5 Vdc >+10 Vdc

Check main coil coarse and ne DACs (steps 41-46)

41.The main coil coarse and ne DACs correct any initial pretune errors in the YTO main coil. The DACs adjust the FM-coil current to zero before any sweep begins. Refer to function block J of A14 frequency control schematic (sheet 2 of 5). 42.Set the spectrum analyzer to the settings listed below. This sets both DACs to 128 (the DAC setting range is 0 to 255). Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz Trigger ......................................................... SINGLE, EXT (with no external trigger connected) 43.Press SAVE, PWR ON STATE and turn off the spectrum analyzer. 44.Place A14J23 jumper in the TEST position and turn on the spectrum analyzer. 45.Verify the voltages listed in Table 11-7 on page 558.

Table 11-7

Main Coil Coarse and Fine DACs Voltages

Measurement Points A14J17 pin 2 A14J17 pin 3 A14J17 pin 5 Voltages 5 Vdc 5 Vdc +5 Vdc

46.Place A14J23 jumper in the NORMAL position. Check main coil tune DAC (steps 47-49) 47.Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ........................................................ 300 MHz Span .................................................................................... 0 Hz 48.Place A14J23 jumper in the TEST position.

558

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked YTO PLL

49.Measure the output of the main coil tune DAC (A14J18 pin 3) with a DVM. Refer to function block E of A14 frequency control schematic (sheet 2 of 5). 50.If the spectrum analyzer center frequency is 300 MHz, the voltage at A14J18 pin 3 should measure 3.35 V 0.25 V. The voltage may also be determined from the following equation: V = (1st LO Frequency 2.95 GHz) 2.654 V/GHz 51.The voltage at A14U330 pin 2 should measure 3.4 V 0.2 Vdc. This represents a current setting the YTO to approximately 2.95 GHz. 52.Return A14J23 jumper to the NORMAL position.

Chapter 11

559

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Fractional N PLL

Unlocked Fractional N PLL

Operation
The fractional N oscillator is used as a reference for the 1st LO phase locked loop. It provides the 1 Hz start-frequency resolution for the 1st LO, and is the means by which the 1st LO is swept in LO spans of 2 MHz or less (fractional N spans). The prescaler, fractional N divider, and the postscaler are preset at power-on. The PLL operates to produce an output frequency in the range of 60 MHz to 96 MHz selectable in 1 Hz increments. The output frequency can be swept (increasing or decreasing) over a selectable 100 Hz to 2 MHz range. To determine the fractional N frequency for any given center frequency, press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, and FRAC N FREQ. The FRAC N FREQ frequency displayed is the frequency that will be measured at A14J304 with the spectrum analyzer in zero span.

Conrming an Unlocked Condition

1. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz 2. Connect A14J304 FRAC N TEST to the input of a synthesized spectrum analyzer and view the fractional N PLL output at 66.7 MHz.
NOTE

If a synthesized spectrum analyzer is not available, connect A14J304 to the input of a 20 dB gain amplier, such as an 8447E. Connect the output of the amplier to the input of a frequency counter. 3. If the fractional N oscillator measures a stable 66.7 MHz, the fractional N PLL is probably locked. 4. Check the two LEDs visible through the shield on A14. If either LED is lit, the fractional N PLL is not locked. 5. If either LED on A14 is lit, and no error message is displayed, check FC MUX U305. Refer to function block AH of A14 frequency control schematic (sheet 4 of 5). 6. If neither LED is lit, but the output frequency is wrong by more than 1 MHz, check the postscaler, function block AV.

560

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Fractional N PLL

7. Check that the postscaler is dividing properly. The frequency at A14J304 should be equal to the frequency at A14TP4 divided by either 5, 6, or 7. Refer to Table 11-8 on page 561. To keep the divide number at a constant value set the spectrum analyzer to: Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Trigger ............................................................ SINGLE, EXT (with no external trigger connected) Table 11-8 Postscaler Divide Numbers
Divide Number 7 6 5 D11 0 0 0 D10 0 1 1 D9 1 0 1 Input Range (MHz) (A14J304) 840 to 973 834 to 987.96 823.2 to 960 Output Range (MHz) (A14TP4) 60.0 to 69.5 69.5 to 82.33 82.33 to 96.0

If the output frequency is wrong by less than 1 MHz, the phase locked loop is not unlocked but still requires repair. Continue with the "Fractional N Oscillator PLL" section.

Fractional N PLL
The fractional N PLL provides a synthesized frequency in the range of 60 MHz to 96 MHz. The 800 MHz to 1020 MHz voltage controlled oscillator (VCO) in the loop is divided down to lock with the 2.5 MHz reference. Simultaneously, the VCO is divided by two and then by either 5, 6, or 7 to generate the 60 MHz to 96 MHz output. The prescaler (function block AR) supplies the clock signal for the fractional divider and is required for the fractional divider to operate. At the start of a fractional N sweep the fractional divider is set to a value for the start frequency and a sweep rate. It then sweeps for as long as HSCAN is high. Use the following procedure to troubleshoot unlocked loop problems or problems of locking to the wrong frequency (by less than 1 MHz): 1. Check the two LEDs on A14 frequency control assembly. If either LED is lit, the fractional N phase locked loop is not locked. 2. The 10 MHz reference is required for fractional N operation. It is divided by four to 2.5 MHz in the reference divider circuitry, block AN. It is used to lock the divided voltage controlled oscillator (VCO) frequency. Check that the 10 MHz reference is present at A14J301. The 10 MHz reference is derived from the 600 MHz reference on the A15 RF assembly. 3. Change the spectrum analyzer from the fractional N span to 0 Hz.

Chapter 11

561

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Fractional N PLL

4. Check the frequency at A14TP1. It should equal the value found by pressing CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, and RAW OSC FREQ. 5. Check the tune voltage at R240 in function block AQ. 6. Look up the expected problem area in Table 11-9 on page 562 with the information from steps 4 and 5. Go to the appropriate troubleshooting steps. Table 11-9 Unlocked Fractional N Troubleshooting Areas (08564-60014 and Above)
Measured VCO Frequency Relative to Expected Value Below 4 V About 3.3 V Tune Voltage

Between 2 V and +10 V Divider or integrator Divider or integrator VCO

About +11 V

Above +12.5 V

Measured > expected Measured < expected Measured, not oscillating

VCO clamp VCO clamp VCO clamp

VCO Divider or integrator VCO

Divider or integrator VCO VCO

VCO clamp VCO clamp VCO clamp

Table 11-10

Table 11-9a. Unlocked Fractional N Troubleshooting Areas (08564-60007)

Measured VCO Frequency Relative to Expected Value Below 12.5 V Measured > expected Measured < expected Measured, not oscillating VCO clamp VCO clamp VCO clamp About 11 V VCO Divider or integrator VCO Tune Voltage

Between 10 V Divider or integrator Divider or integrator VCO

About +11 V Divider or integrator VCO VCO

Above +12.5 V VCO clamp VCO clamp VCO clamp

562

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Fractional N PLL

7. VCO clamp troubleshooting: Q131, Q132 and the associated components should limit the tune voltage at R240 to about 3.3 V to +11 V (11 V for 08564-60007). If the integrator (its output voltage is on TP13) tries to produce a voltage outside this range, excess current is shunted through CR131 and Q131 for positive excursions or CR132 and Q132 for negative excursions. The base of Q131 should be at about +9.60 V, and the base of Q132 should be at about 2.09 V for proper operation. If troubleshooting the earlier A14 frequency control assembly (08564-60007), the bases of Q131 and Q132 should be at about 9.6 V for proper operation. 8. VCO troubleshooting: Check the dc biases in the VCO function block. The bias voltages, for some points in the VCO, are indicated in Figure 11-8 on page 564 (or Figure 11-8a for earlier instruments).

Chapter 11

563

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Fractional N PLL

Figure 11-8

VCO Bias Voltages for A14 Assemblies 08564-60014 and Above

564

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Fractional N PLL

Figure 11-8a

VCO Bias Voltages for A14 Assembly 08564-60007

Chapter 11

565

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Fractional N PLL

9. Divider and integrator troubleshooting: Measure the frequency of the pulses at TP6 in block AO. Look up the expected problem area in Table 11-11 on page 566 and go to the appropriate troubleshooting steps. Table 11-11 Divider and Integrator Troubleshooting
Measured VCO Frequency Relative to Expected Value Measured > expected Measured < expected TP6 Frequency

zero Dividers Both

<2.5 MHz Dividers Detector or integrator

2.5 MHz Dividers Dividers

>2.5 MHz Detector or integrator Dividers

10.Divider troubleshooting: a. Check the frequency at A14TP2. It should be equal to the frequency at A14TP1 divided by two. b. The signal at A14TP3 should be greater than 14 dBm. c. Use an analog oscilloscope to view the signal at A14TP5. Adjust the scope triggering to view the divide-by-16 signal. The frequency at this point will be varying as the prescaler changes its divide number to either 16, 17, 20, or 21. The prescaler uses 16 as the divide number most frequently. The frequency displayed on the oscilloscope should equal the frequency from TP2 divided by 16. d. Use an oscilloscope to view the signal at pin 8 of U112. Its average frequency should be given by: f = f(A14TP5) 80 MHz/RAW OSC FREQ where: f(A14TP5) is the frequency measured at TP5, and RAW OSC FREQ comes from step 4 (A14TP1). If the frequency is in error, the fractional divider, block AS, is not functioning. Check that FRAC N RUN on U113 pin 39 is high. e. Use an oscilloscope to verify that the signals at N_in (U112 pin 8) and N_out (TP6) are identical except for a sub-microsecond delay. Detector and integrator troubleshooting: Check the phase detector output on TP11 in block AO. If F_ref is higher in frequency than TP6 (reclocked VCO/N), then the average voltage at TP11 should be positive by 0.05 V to 10 V. If F_ref is lower, TP11 should be 0.05 V to 10 V.

566

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Unlocked Fractional N PLL

The polarity of the output of the loop gain (block AP, TP12) should be the same as the polarity of the input (TP11). The integrator op amp (U106) output (TP13) should try to go very positive (about +12 V) if its average input (TP12) is positive. If its average input is negative, it should try to go very negative (about 4 V). If its average input is zero and it is functioning correctly, it may take on any output voltage between 4 V and +12 V (between 12 V and +12 V for 08564-60007).

Chapter 11

567

Synthesizer Section Frequency Span Accuracy Problems

Frequency Span Accuracy Problems

The spectrum analyzer employs lock-and-roll tuning to sweep the 1st LO for spans greater than 2.0 MHz. The 1st LO is locked to the start frequency immediately after the previous sweep has been completed. The 1st LO is then unlocked, and, when a trigger signal is detected, the 1st LO sweeps (rolls). When there is a considerable delay between the end of one sweep and the beginning of the next, the actual 1st LO start frequency may differ from the locked start frequency. This start frequency drift will be most noticeable in a 2.01 MHz LO span (the narrowest FM coil span). This drift is not noticeable in either free run or line trigger modes. The sweep is generated by different oscillators in the synthesizer section depending on the desired 1st LO span (due to harmonic mixing, this is not necessarily the same as the span setting of the analyzer). Refer to Table 11-12 on page 568 for a listing of sweep-signal destinations versus 1st LO spans. Sweeping the fractional N oscillator results in sweeping the YTO FM coil. There is a one-to-one relationship between the frequency span of the fractional N assembly and the 1st LO span. The fractional N oscillator sweep is generated digitally. The oscillator is always synthesized, rather than employing lock and roll tuning. Table 11-12 Sweep Signal Destination versus Span
1st LO Span >20 MHz 2.01 MHz to 20 MHz 2 MHz Sweep Signal Destination A11 YTO main coil A11 YTO FM coil None Fractional N oscillator sweeps without a sweep ramp signal.

Determining the 1st LO Span

The 1st LO span depends on the spectrum analyzer harmonic-mixing number. Use the following steps to determine the 1st LO span: 1. Read the span setting displayed on the spectrum analyzer.

568

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Frequency Span Accuracy Problems

2. Determine the harmonic-mixing number from the information in Table 11-13 on page 569. Table 11-13 Harmonic Mixing Number versus Center Frequency
Center Frequency 9 kHz to 2.9 GHz 2.75 GHz to 6.46 GHz 5.86 GHz to 13.2 GHz 12.4 GHz to 31.15 GHz 30.5 GHz to 50.6 GHz 18 GHz to 325 GHz Harmonic Mixing Number 1 1 2 4 8 6 through 54 depending upon lock harmonic selected

3. Use the following equation to determine the 1st LO span used.

Display Span Setting First LO Span = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Current Band Harmonic Mixing Number
4. Refer to Table 11-12 on page 568 to determine the circuit associated with the span.

Conrming Span Problems

1. First perform either the manual 7. YTO Adjustment in Chapter 3 , or the automated 2. LO Frequency and 3. YTO FM Coil adjustments in Chapter 2 . On the spectrum analyzer press CAL, REALIGN LO &IF, and retest all spans. If the YTO adjustment has sufcient range and only LO spans of 2.01 MHz or greater are faulty; test YTO linearity by performing step c. Test the span in question at different center frequencies in the same band. If the span accuracy changes signicantly (2% or more), suspect the A11 YTO. 2. If only 1st LO spans of 2 MHz or less are faulty, suspect the A14 fractional N PLL. 3. If there are several spans in the main coil and FM coil ranges affected, suspect the A14 span attenuator.

Chapter 11

569

Synthesizer Section Frequency Span Accuracy Problems

YTO Main Coil Span Problems (LO Spans >20 MHz)

For YTO main coil spans, the YTO is locked at the beginning of the sweep and the sweep ramp is summed into the main coil tune driver. 1. Perform the 7. YTO Adjustment in Chapter 3 . If the YTO adjustments cannot be performed, continue with step 2. 2. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Start frequency .......................................................... 10 MHz Stop frequency ........................................................... 2.9 GHz 3. Verify that a 1.2 V to 4.8 V ramp (approximately) is present at A14U331 pin 2. 4. If this ramp is not present, troubleshoot the main/FM sweep switch. See function block H of A14 frequency control schematic (sheet 2 of 5). 5. Measure the output of the main coil tune DAC at A14J18 pin 3. At the frequency settings of step 2, this should be 2.48 V. If the voltage is not 2.48 V, troubleshoot the main coil tune DAC. See function block E of A14 frequency control schematic (sheet 2 of 5).

YTO FM Coil Span Problems (LO Spans 2.01 MHz to 20 MHz)

In YTO FM coil spans, the YTO loop is locked and then opened while the sweep ramp is summed into the FM coil. The FM coil sensitivity is corrected by changing the sensitivity of the FM coil driver. 1. Perform the 7. YTO Adjustment in Chapter 3 . If the YTO adjustments cannot be performed, continue with this procedure. 2. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ........................................................................... 20 MHz Sweep time ................................................................... 50 ms 3. Check for the presence of a 0 V to 10 V sweep ramp at A14J15 pin 14 (input to the main/FM sweep switch). Refer to function block H of A14 frequency control schematic (sheet 2 of 5). 4. Check for the presence of a 0 V to +5 V sweep ramp at A14U405 pin 6 (YTO FM coil driver). Refer to function block M of A14 frequency control schematic (sheet 2 of 5). 5. Check the state of the Main/FM sweep switches as indicated in Table 11-14 on page 571.

570

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Frequency Span Accuracy Problems

6. The rest of the procedure troubleshoots the YTO FM coil driver. Refer to function block M of A14 frequency control schematic (sheet 2 of 5). Table 11-14 Settings of Sweep Switches
Switch U318A U318B U318C U318D Switch State Closed Open Closed Open Switch Control Line (Pin #) 1 16 9 8 Control Line State (TTL) High High Low Low

7. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Trigger ............................................................ SINGLE, EXT a. On the spectrum analyzer press SAVE, SAVE STATE, STATE 0. b. Remove A14J23 jumper and connect a dc voltage source to A14J23 pin 2. Connect the voltage source ground to A14J23 pin 3. c. Connect a microwave frequency counter or another spectrum analyzer to the spectrum analyzer 1ST LO OUTPUT. (front panel output) d. Set the dc-voltage source output for 0 Vdc and note the 1st LO frequency. e. Set the dc-voltage source output for +10 Vdc. The 1st LO frequency should momentarily increase approximately +15.6 MHz. f. The voltage at A14U332 pin 2 should be approximately 19% of the voltage at A14J23 pin 2. g. If the 1st LO frequency did not change in step e, press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer off and disconnect W10 from A14J3. h. Place a jumper between A14J3 pins 9 and 10. Place a 50 , 3 watt resistor across A14J3 pins 5 and 6 (resistor, part number 0811-1086). Press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer on. i. On the spectrum analyzer, press RECALL, STATE, STATE 0.

Chapter 11

571

Synthesizer Section Frequency Span Accuracy Problems

j. If the voltage at U332 pin 2 is correct with A14J3 pins 9 and 10 shorted, but was incorrect with W10 connected, the YTO FM coil is probably open; replace the A11 YTO. k. Replace A14J23 jumper. Remove the jumper and resistor from A14J3. Reconnect W10 to A14J3.

Fractional N Span Problems (LO Spans 2 MHz)

If the fractional N spans are inaccurate or non-existent, but the fractional N PLL is locked to the correct frequency and other spans are correct, there may be a problem with the HSCAN signal. Check that HSCAN is present at the fractional divider, U113 pin 41 in function block AS. HSCAN comes from the A3 interface assembly and goes to the sweep generator circuitry in function block A and to fractional N.

1st LO Span Problems (All Spans)

1. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span ........................................................................ 20 MHz Resolution BW .......................................................... 1 MHz Video BW .................................................................. 1 MHz Sweep time ................................................................. 50 ms 2. Check that there is 0 V to +10 V ramp of 50 ms duration at A14J15 pin 15. 3. If a scan ramp is not present, refer to "Sweep Generator" in this chapter. 4. If there is a 0 to 10 V ramp at A14J15 pin 14, the fault is probably in the Main/FM sweep switch. See function block H of A14 frequency control schematic (sheet 2 of 5). 5. Check that there is a 0 V to +10 V ramp at U325 pin 1. The ADC of the spectrum analyzer obtains information about the sweep from this node. Check span 6. Continue with step 7 to check the span attenuator. See function attenuator (steps block L of A14 frequency control schematic (sheet 2 of 5). 6-13) 7. With the spectrum analyzer set to the settings in step 1, monitor A14U323 pin 6 with an oscilloscope. A 0 V to 10 V ramp should be present. 8. Change the spectrum analyzer span to 10 MHz and check for a 0 V to 5 V ramp at U323 pin 6. 9. Change the spectrum analyzer span to 2.01 MHz and check for a 0 V to 1 V ramp at U323 pin 6.

572

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Frequency Span Accuracy Problems

10.Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Start frequency ............................................................. 10 MHz Stop frequency .............................................................. 2.9 GHz Sweep time ....................................................................... 80 ms 11.Monitor A14J15 pin 14 for a 0 V to 7.4 V ramp. Switches U317A, U317B, and U317D should be open and U317C should be closed. 12.Change the spectrum analyzer SPAN to 365 MHz and check for a 0 to 936 mV ramp at A14J15 pin 14. Switches U317A, B, and C should be open and U317D closed. 13.Change the spectrum analyzer SPAN to 36.5 MHz and check for a 0 to 93.6 mV ramp at A14J15 pin 14. Switches U317B, C, and D should be open and U317A closed.

1st LO Span Problems (Multiband Sweeps)

During multiband sweeps, the sweep ramp at A14J15 pin 15 should go from 0 V to +10 V for each band or portions of a band covered. See function block A of A14 frequency control schematic (sheet 1 of 5) in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. However, the scan ramp at A14U325A pin 1 is scaled according to the percentage of the total span that the band is covering. See function block B of A14 schematic (sheet 1 of 5). Also, the sum of the individual ramps is 10 V. For the 8564E/EC, Figure 11-9 on page 574 illustrates both sweep and the scan ramp for a 0 GHz to 40 GHz span with instrument preset conditions. For the 8565E/EC, Figure 11-10 on page 574 illustrates both sweep and the scan ramp for a 0 GHz to 50 GHz span with instrument preset conditions.

Chapter 11

573

Synthesizer Section Frequency Span Accuracy Problems

Figure 11-9

8564E/EC Sweep and Scan Ramps

Figure 11-10

8565E/EC Sweep and Scan Ramps

574

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Phase Noise Problems

Phase Noise Problems

System phase noise can be a result of noise generated in many different areas of the spectrum analyzer. When the spectrum analyzer is functioning correctly, the noise can be observed as a function of the distance away (the offset) from the carrier frequency. The major contributor to system noise can be characterized as coming from specic circuit areas depending upon the offset frequency. Some very general recommendations can be made for identifying which circuitry is the cause of the noise at certain offsets. The recommendations below apply with a center frequency of 1 GHz. Table 11-15 Settings of Sweep Switches
Carrier Frequency Offset 100 Hz 1 kHz 3 kHz 10 kHz to 150 kHz >150 kHz Major Contributor (when working correctly) Reference (OCXO or TCXO) 100 MHz (or 600 MHz) reference PLL Fractional N PLL Offset lock loop or YTO loop YTO

Phase Noise in Locked versus Unlocked Spans

Input a signal to the spectrum analyzer. Set the center frequency to the input signal frequency, set the span to 2 MHz, and plot the display. This plots the system noise for a locked sweep. Plot the display again with a span of 2.01 MHz (lock and roll sweep). The crossover point of the noise oor of the two plots is typically at an offset of about 50 kHz, for a functioning instrument. If the crossover point is shifted out to a higher offset frequency, suspect the YTO loop circuitry. If the crossover point is shifted in to a lower offset frequency, suspect the offset or fractional N loop circuitry.

Chapter 11

575

Synthesizer Section Phase Noise Problems

Reference versus Reference PLL Phase Noise

If the problem seems to be in the frequency reference or reference PLL circuitry, measure the noise with internal and external references. If there is no difference, suspect the circuitry associated with the 100 MHz VCXO (or the SAWR, A15U701, on earlier A15 RF assemblies).

Fractional N versus Offset PLL or YTO PLL Phase Noise

If the spectrum analyzer has excessive noise at >1 kHz offset, measure the noise with center frequencies of 100 MHz and 2.5 GHz. If the measurements are equal, suspect the fractional N circuitry and the YTO loop circuitry on the A14 frequency control assembly. If the measurements differ by 2 dB to 5 dB, with the 2.5 GHz measurement at a higher noise level, suspect the offset lock loop circuitry.

Fractional N PLL Phase Noise (08564-60007 Only)

Check the noise on the 5 V regulators on A14, particularly the regulator in the reference divider circuitry A14U121. Refer to function block AN on the A14 frequency control assembly schematic. The noise level of the voltage regulator should be <1 mV. The typical noise level is 40 V RMS between 10 Hz and 100 kHz. A coaxial probe with very little unshielded tip area should be used to avoid picking up radiated 60 Hz. Check that your measurement is valid by probing ground on the circuit and verifying that the measured value is well under the 1 mV threshold that indicates a defective regulator. There can also be phase noise problems if the loop gain is incorrect. See function block AP for loop gain troubleshooting information.

576

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Sampler and Sampler IF

Sampler and Sampler IF

The A15U100 sampler creates and mixes harmonics of the sampling oscillator with the 1st LO. The resulting sampler IF (60 MHz to 96 MHz) is used to phase-lock the YTO. The sampler IF lters unwanted products from the output of A15U100 and amplies the IF to a level sufcient to drive the YTO loop. When the IF is between 78 and 87 MHz, PIN diodes switch a 120 MHz notch lter in the sampler IF section. 1. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz 2. Disconnect W32 from A15J101. 3. Connect the input of a power splitter to A15J101. Connect W32 to one of the splitter outputs. Connect the other splitter output to the input of another spectrum analyzer. 4. If a 66.7 MHz signal, greater than 15 dBm, is not displayed on the other spectrum analyzer, set a microwave source to the following settings: Frequency ............................................................ 4.2107 GHz Amplitude .................................................................. 5 dBm 5. Connect the microwave source to A15U100J1. A 66.7 MHz signal at approximately 0 dBm should be displayed on the other spectrum analyzer. 6. Use an active probe/spectrum analyzer combination to measure the signal at the following test points:
A15TP101 A15TP201 66.7 MHz, 8 dBm 296 MHz, +9 dBm

7. If a correct signal is seen at A15TP201 but the signal at A15TP101 is wrong, proceed as follows: Use an oscilloscope to measure the signals at the following test points: A15J400 pin 1 +0.8 Vdc to +1.6 Vdc (0.5 Vp-p variation) A15J400 pin 3 0.8 Vdc to 1.6 Vdc (0.5 Vp-p variation) If these levels are wrong, perform the "Power and Sampler Match Adjustments" in the sampling oscillator adjustment procedure. Refer to Chapters 2 and 3.

Chapter 11

577

Synthesizer Section Sampler and Sampler IF

If adjusting the sampler match does not bring the signal at A15TP101 within specication when the signal at A15TP201 is correct, the A15U100 sampler is defective. 8. The sampler IF signal at A15J101 is 60 MHz to 96 MHz at 10 dBm to +5 dBm. If the signal at A15TP101 is correct, but the signal at A15J101 is wrong, the fault lies in the sampler IF circuitry. Continue with the following steps. 9. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz 10.Set a microwave source to the following settings: Frequency ......................................................... 4.2107 GHz Amplitude ................................................................ 5 dBm 11.Connect the microwave source to A15U100J1. 12.Measure the signal at U103 pin 1 using an active probe/spectrum analyzer combination. 13.If a 94.7 MHz signal, approximately 14 dBm, is present, but the signal at A15J101 is low, suspect U103. 14.When U104 pin 3 is at TTL low, U104 pin 6 should near 15 Vdc and PIN diodes CR101, CR102, and CR103 should be reverse-biased. 15.Set the spectrum analyzer under test to the following settings: Center frequency ................................................. 89.3 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz 16.Check that U104 pin 3 is at a TTL high and U104 pin 6 is greater than +7 V. PIN diodes CR101, CR102, and CR103 should all be turned on with about 7 mA of forward current. 17.Disconnect the power splitter and reconnect W32 to A15J101.

578

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Sweep Generator Circuit

Sweep Generator Circuit

The sweep generator circuitry generates a ramp from 0 to 10 volts during the sweep time. The available sweep times range from 50 s to 2,000 seconds. The sweep times are generated in two different ranges, a 50 s to 30 ms range and a 50 ms to 2,000 second range. The 50 s to 30 ms range is only needed for analog zero span sweeps. The sweep generator is controlled with an 8-bit latch and the control signal HSCAN. The latch, U308, controls the sweep rate. HSCAN determines when to reset the scan ramp and when to let it sweep. Operation of the 50 ms to 2,000 second range will be described using a 50 ms sweep time as the example. For a 50 ms sweep time, Q1 shorts out C16. The D to A converter, U307, has zero output current. U334A is a buffer with zero offset, because there is no current coming out of U307. The buffering of U334 makes the base-emitter voltages on Q3A and Q3B the same. These two transistors are matched, so their collector currents should be identical when their base-emitter voltages are identical. The emitter current of Q3B is 200 A, therefore the emitter current of Q3A is 200 A and the sweep ramp is generated by C14. The sweep time is given by the formula:

V sweeptime = capaci tan ce ( C 14 ) ------------------current

Where V is equal to 10 Volts. With a capacitance of 1 F and a current of 200 A, the sweep time should be 50 ms. The DAC setting is increased for longer sweep times. This increases the current sunk by the DAC output U307 pin 4, which increases the emitter voltage on Q3A, decreasing the base-emitter voltage drop. Q3A acts as an exponentiator and reduces its collector current, creating a slower sweep ramp. For the shorter sweep times, 50 s to 30 ms, Q1 is opened putting C16 in series with C14. This changes the effective capacitance from 1 F to 1,000 pF, or a reduction of 1,000 to 1. The HSCAN signal uses Q2 to reset the ramp. Q2 shorts the integrator and sets its output nominally to ground. Check the sweep generator circuit Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ......................................................................... 100 MHz Sweep time .................................................................... 50 ms

Chapter 11

579

Synthesizer Section Sweep Generator Circuit

Press PRESET and set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: 18.Using an oscilloscope, check that the sweep ramp at A14U320 pin 6 sweeps linearly from 0 to +10 Volts in 50 ms, then resets to 0 Volts. 19.Change the sweep time to 10 seconds and check that the sweep ramp (U320 pin 6) sweeps linearly from 0 to +10 Volts in 10 seconds, then resets to 0 Volts. 20.Change the spectrum analyzer settings as follows: Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Sweep time ................................................................... 10 ms 21.Check that the ramp (U320 pin 6) sweeps linearly from 0 to +10 Volts in 10 ms, then resets to 0 Volts. 22.If the any of the sweep times were not within specication or the sweep ramp appeared to be non-linear in the preceding steps, proceed with the following checks: 23.Connect the negative lead of a voltmeter to A14Q3 pin 8 and connect the positive lead to A14U312 pin 1 to check the temperature sensor (U312). 24.The voltage at pin 1 should be 10 mV/C times the temperature of the A14 frequency control assembly. (For example, if the ambient temperature is approximately 20C, and the A14 frequency control assembly is 10C warmer, the actual temperature of the A14 assembly is 30C and U312 pin 1 should measure 300 mV.) 25.To check the temperature-dependent offset voltage generator, connect the positive lead of the voltmeter A14Q3 pin 6. The voltmeter should read 600 mV 150 mV. 26.To check the DAC buffer, A14U334A, connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to A14U334 pin 2. The voltmeter should read the same voltage measured at A14Q3 pin 6, within 2 mV. (The same voltage should be present at U334 pin 3.) 27.To check the buffered DAC, press PRESET and set the spectrum analyzer as follows: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span ...................................................................... 100 MHz Sweep time ................................................................. 50 ms 28.Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to A14U334 pin 1. The voltmeter should read the same voltage measured at U334 pin 2, within 2 mV. 29.Change the spectrum analyzer sweep time to 2000 seconds. The voltage at A14U334 pin 1 should increase by 275 mV 20 mV (compared to the voltage measured in step 12).

580

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Sweep Generator Circuit

Figure 11-11

Simplied Synthesizer Section

Chapter 11

581

Synthesizer Section Sweep Generator Circuit

Figure 11-12

Simplied A14 Assembly Block Diagram

582

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section Sweep Generator Circuit

Figure 11-13

Simplied A15 Assembly Block Diagram (100 MHz PLL)

Chapter 11

583

Synthesizer Section Sweep Generator Circuit

Figure 11-13a

Simplied A15 Assembly Block Diagram (600 MHz PLL)

584

Chapter 11

Synthesizer Section A21 OCXO

A21 OCXO
The spectrum analyzer uses an oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO). It is deleted in Option 103 and replaced by a temperature-compensated crystal oscillator (TCXO), located on the A15 RF assembly. Connectors J305 and J306 on the A15 RF assembly are located where the TCXO would be installed in an Option 103. The oven in the OCXO is powered only when the spectrum analyzer is powered on; there is no standby mode of operation. The OCXO oscillator operates only when the internal frequency reference is selected. Control line HEXT (High = EXTernal frequency reference) is inverted by A15U303B (Refer to the A15 RF assembly schematic diagram, block M, sheet 2 of 4) to generate LEXT. LEXT is sent to the OCXO via A15J306 pin 4. When LEXT is low, the oscillator in the OCXO will be turned off. Replacement OCXOs are factory adjusted after a complete warmup and after the specied aging rate has been achieved. Thus, readjustment should typically not be necessary after OCXO replacement, and is generally not recommended. If adjustment is necessary, the spectrum analyzer must be on continuously for a minimum of 24 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment to allow both the temperature and frequency of the oscillator to stabilize. Failure to allow sufcient stabilization time could result in oscillator misadjustment. Check operation of the A21 OCXO as follows: 1. Disconnect W49 (Coax 82) from A15J305. Connect the output of W49 to the input of another spectrum analyzer. 2. Check that the fundamental frequency is 10 MHz and that the power level is 0 dBm 3 dB. Also check that the harmonics are at least 25 dBc. Excessive harmonics can generate spurious responses on the fractional N oscillator on the A14 frequency control assembly. 3. If the OCXO has no output, check A15J306 pin 1 for +15 Vdc. Check A15J306 pin 4 for a TTL-high level. 4. If A15J306 pin 4 is at a TTL-low level, press AUX CTRL and REAR PANEL. Press 10 MHz EXT INT until INT is underlined. A15J306 pin 4 should read a TTL-high level. Press 10 MHz EXT INT until EXT is underlined. A15J306 pin 4 should read a TTL-low level.

Chapter 11

585

12

RF Section

593

RF Section Introduction

Introduction
The RF Section converts the input signal to a 10.7 MHz IF (Intermediate Frequency). See Figure 12-11 on page 631 for a detailed block diagram.
NOTE

The block diagrams for the A14 and A15 assemblies are located in Chapter 11, Synthesizer Section. Page 595 599 600 601 602 604 605 608 609 610 612 612 615 615 621 621 621 622 624 624 625 626

Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software .........page Low Band Problems ......................................................page High Band Problems .....................................................page Low and High Band Problems ......................................page A7 LO Multiplier and Distribution Amplier .............page A8 Low Band Mixer ......................................................page A9 Input Attenuator .....................................................page A10 YIG-Tuned Filter/Mixer (RYTHM) .......................page A12 Switched Barium-Tuned Mixer (SBTX) ...............page A13 Second Converter ...................................................page A14 Frequency Control Assembly ................................page LO Multiplier/Amplier Drive ...................................page Control Latch for Band-Switch Drivers .....................page YTF Driver Circuit ......................................................page A15 RF Assembly ..........................................................page Conrming a Faulty Third Converter ....................... page Conrming Third Converter Output ..........................page Third Converter ...........................................................page Flatness Compensation Control .................................page PIN Switch Drivers .................................................... page SIG ID Oscillator (Option 008) ...................................page 10 MHz Reference ...................................................... page
CAUTION

All of the RF assemblies are extremely sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). For further information regarding electrostatic cautions, refer to Electrostatic Discharge in Chapter 1 .

594

Chapter 12

RF Section Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software

Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software

The adjustment and diagnostic software is documented in Chapter 2 . The software troubleshoots RF failures by testing signal paths and allowing you to control various latches and DACs. The rst thing it does is to check that all of the frequency bands are functional. Depending on the results of that testing it may do some other checks. Using the 8564E and 8565E adjustment/diagnostic software, select the RF diagnostics. Connect the test board between the A7 LOMA and A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX microcircuits, and the A14 Frequency Control board. The test board is labeled CKT and INSTR SIDE. 1. Disconnect W16 from A14J9 and W12 from A14J10. 2. Connect W16 to J4 on the test board and W12 to J5 on the test board. 3. Connect J2 on the test board to A14J10 (use 24-conductor ribbon cable, part number 08564-60012). 4. Connect J1 on the test board to A14J9 (use 20-conductor ribbon cable, part number 8120-5526). You will then be prompted to make different connections to the 85629B Test and Adjustment Module (TAM), a source or spectrum analyzer. Connection locations are shown in Figure 12-1 on page 596 and Figure 12-2 on page 597. The software can be used to control the DACs and latches for troubleshooting. Refer to Chapter 2 , Adjustment/Diagnostic Software, for listings of DACs and latches.

Chapter 12

595

RF Section Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software

Figure 12-1

Diagnostic Software Connection Locations, A14 and A15

596

Chapter 12

RF Section Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software

Figure 12-2

Diagnostic Software Connection Locations, RF Section

Chapter 12

597

RF Section Troubleshooting Using the Diagnostic Software

Table 12-1

Procedures To Use For Isolating Faults

Suspected Faulty Circuit 2nd IF Amplier 2nd IF Distribution 10.7 MHz IF Out of Double Balanced Mixer 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT A7 LO Multiplier and Distribution Amplier A8 Low Band Mixer A9 Input Attenuator A13 Second Converter A13J2 INT 2nd IF A14 Latch A15 Control Latches A15J601 10.7 MHz External 10 MHz Reference Operation Gain of Flatness Compensation Amplier INT 10 MHz Reference Operation LO Feedthrough LO Power PIN Switches in SIG ID Oscillator (Opt 008) Second Converter Control SIG ID Oscillator (Opt 008) SIG ID Oscillator Operation (Opt 008) Third Converter Manual Procedure to Perform Third Converter Third Converter Third Converter 8. Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment in Chapter 3 A7 LO Multiplier and Distribution Amplier A8 Low Band Mixer A9 Input Attenuator A13 Second Converter A13 Second Converter (steps 1 to 6) Control Latch for Band-Switch Drivers Control Latch for Band-Switch Drivers Third Converter

10 MHz Reference (steps 5 to 11)

Third Converter

10 MHz Reference (steps 1 to 4) Low Band Problems (steps 1 to 3)

Low and High Band Problems (steps 4 to 9) SIG ID Oscillator (Option 008) A13 Second Converter Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment in Chapter 3 SIG ID Oscillator (Option 008)) Low and High Band Problems (step 10)

CAUTION

Use of an active probe, such as an 85024A, with another spectrum analyzer is recommended for troubleshooting the RF circuitry. If an 1120A Active Probe is being used with a spectrum analyzer, such as the 8566A/B, 8569A/B and the 8562A/B, having dc coupled inputs, either set the active probe for an ac coupled output or use a dc blocking capacitor (11240B) between the active probe and the spectrum analyzer input. Failure to do this can result in damage to the spectrum analyzer or to the probe.

598

Chapter 12

RF Section Low Band Problems

Low Band Problems

1. Disconnect all inputs from the front panel INPUT 50 connector. 2. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency .......................................................... 0 Hz Span .......................................................................... 1 MHz Input attenuator ........................................................... 0 dB 3. The LO feedthrough amplitude observed on the display should be between 6 (above top of screen) and 30 dBm.
NOTE

The marker will not PEAK SEARCH on the LO Feedthrough when in a non-zero span. To measure the LO Feedthrough amplitude with the markers, set the SPAN to 0 Hz and CENTER FREQ to 0 Hz. Press MKR ON. 4. If the LO feedthrough amplitude is within limits, but signals are low, the RF path following the A8 mixer is probably operating properly. 5. If the LO feedthrough amplitude is higher than 5 dBm (signal will be "clipped" at top of screen) and signals are low in amplitude, suspect a defective A8 mixer assembly. 6. If signal amplitudes <2.9 GHz are bad, but signals >26.8 GHz are good, check the A8 Low Band Mixer or the lter FL1. If both the LO feedthrough and signal amplitudes are low, check the A12 SBTX. 7. Perform the steps located in Control Latch for Band-Switch Drivers on page 615. 8. Check A13 second converter mixer diode bias at A14J19 pin 1. The bias voltage should be between 150 and 800 mVdc. 9. Troubleshoot the signal path. Refer to the power levels listed on Figure 12-11 on page 631, RF Section Troubleshooting Block Diagram.

Chapter 12

599

RF Section High Band Problems

High Band Problems

1. If the low band is functioning, but amplitudes of signals >26.8 GHz are wrong, check the A12 SBTX. 2. If the low band and millimeter band signals are correct, but microwave band signals are wrong, check the A10 RYTHM. 3. Perform the steps located in Control Latch for Band-Switch Drivers on page 615. 4. Troubleshoot the signal path. Refer to the power levels listed in Figure 12-11 on page 631, RF Section Troubleshooting Block Diagram.

600

Chapter 12

RF Section Low and High Band Problems

Low and High Band Problems

1. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET and REALIGN LO & IF. If any error messages are displayed, refer to Error Messages in Chapter 7 . 2. Perform "External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment" in Chapter 3. If this adjustment cannot be completed, perform the steps located in "Third Converter" in this chapter. 3. Perform the "1st LO OUTPUT Amplitude" performance test in the calibration guide. 4. If the performance test fails, perform the "LOMA Adjustments" using the adjustment/diagnostic software. If the adjustment fails, set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz 5. Place the jumper on A14J23 in the TEST position. Remove W38 from the input of A7. 6. Use a power meter or another spectrum analyzer to measure the output of A11 YTO. The power should be between +2 dBm and +13 dBm. 7. Reconnect W38 to A7. Place the jumper on A14J23 in the NORM position. 8. If ERR 334 (unlevelled output) is present and the A11 YTO power output is correct, the A7 drive circuit may be defective. Refer to A7 LO Multiplier and Distribution Amplier on page 602. 9. Troubleshoot the signal path. Refer to the power levels listed on Figure 12-11 on page 631, RF Section Troubleshooting Block Diagram. 10.Check Third Converter as follows: a. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET and set the controls as follows: Center frequency ............................................. 300 MHz Span ......................................................................... 0 Hz b. Inject a 28 dBm, 310.7 MHz signal into A15J801. c. If a at line is displayed within 2 dB of the reference level, but the External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment fails, troubleshoot the A15 RF Assembly.

Chapter 12

601

RF Section A7 LO Multiplier and Distribution Amplier

A7 LO Multiplier and Distribution Amplier

NOTE

YTO unlock errors may occur if the power delivered to the A15U100 sampler is less than 9.5 dBm. Frequency response will be degraded in both internal and external mixing modes if the output power is low or unlevelled. Connecting or disconnecting the A7 bias with the spectrum analyzer power turned on will destroy the A7 assembly. Always press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off before removing or reinstalling W12 to either the A7 or A14J10. ERR 334 may be displayed if the LO OUTPUT connector on the front panel is not properly terminated into a 50 termination. A14J10, Solder Side of A14 (Ignore Pin Numbers on Mating Connector)

CAUTION

NOTE

Figure 12-3

1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Disconnect W12 from A14J10. 2. Connect a jumper between A14J10 pin 5 and A14J19 pin 6. Connect a jumper between A14J18 pin 13 and A14J18 pin 1. See Figure 12-3 on page 602. 3. Connect the positive lead of a DVM to A14J18 pin 14 and the negative lead to A14J18 pin 6. 4. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. 5. The voltage measured on the DVM should be more negative than 9.4 Vdc. 6. Move the jumper from A14J18 pin 1 to A14J18 pin 2. The voltage measured on the DVM should be more positive than +12.3 Vdc. 7. If the voltages do not meet the limits listed in steps 5 and 6, troubleshoot the A14 frequency control assembly. 8. Connect the positive DVM lead to A14J10 pin 1.

602

Chapter 12

RF Section A7 LO Multiplier and Distribution Amplier

9. The measured voltage should be approximately +5 Vdc. If the voltage is not +5 Vdc, troubleshoot the A14 frequency control assembly. 10.Connect the positive lead of a DVM to A14J18 pin 15. The voltage should measure within 10 mV of the Gate Bias voltage listed on the A7 label. 11.If this voltage is not within the correct range, refer to the "LO Distribution Amplier Adjustment" in Chapter 2, adjustment procedures. 12.If the voltage varies between 0 Vdc and 2 Vdc, adjust the Gate Bias for a DVM reading within 10 mV of the Gate Bias voltage listed on the A7 label. If the voltage does not vary between 0 Vdc and 2 Vdc, troubleshoot the A14 Frequency Control Assembly. 13.Disconnect the jumper from A14J19 to A14J10. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Reconnect W12 to A14J10. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. 14.If the DVM reading changes signicantly, the A7 is probably defective.

Chapter 12

603

RF Section A8 Low Band Mixer

A8 Low Band Mixer

1. Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 connector. 2. Set the spectrum analyzer as follows: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Input attenuation .......................................................... 10 dB 3. If the spectrum analyzer serial number prex is 3641A or greater, make sure A8 is receiving the 5 V and 4 V supply voltages from frequency control board assembly A14 via cable assembly W12. 4. Using another spectrum analyzer, check for approximately 21 dBm (300 MHz) at the input of A8. (This level can easily be measured at the output of FL1 by disconnecting W45 from FL1.) 5. If the level at the input of A8 is less than 25 dBm, suspect FL1 low-pass lter, A10 RYTHM, A12 SBTX, or A9 input attenuator. Refer to power levels shown on Figure 12-11 on page 631, RF Section Troubleshooting Block Diagram. 6. Check for approximately 30 dBm (3.9107 GHz) at the output of A8. (This level can easily be measured at the output of FL2 by disconnecting W57 from FL2.) 7. If the level at the output of A8 is less than 35 dBm, suspect A8 low band mixer or FL2 low-pass lter.

604

Chapter 12

RF Section A9 Input Attenuator

A9 Input Attenuator
1. Perform the "Input Attenuator Accuracy" performance test in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide. 2. If there is a step-to-step error of approximately 10 dB or more, continue with step 3. 3. On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, and ATTEN AUTO MAN until MAN is highlighted. 4. Step the input attenuator from 0 dB to 60 dB. A "click" should be heard at each step. The absence of a click indicates faulty attenuator drive circuitry. It will be necessary to use the DATA keys to enter an input attenuator setting of 0 dB (the step key will not allow selecting 0 dB input attenuation). 5. Monitor the pins of A14U421 with a DVM while setting the input attenuator to the values listed in Table 12-2 on page 606. 6. If one or more logic levels listed in Table 12-2 on page 606 is incorrect, disconnect W11 from A14J6 and repeat step 5 using Table 12-4 on page 607.
NOTE

When W11 is disconnected, the +28 V levels listed in Table 12-2 on page 606 are oating and will read approximately 0.2 V. Refer to Table 12-4 on page 607. 7. If one or more logic levels listed in Table 12-4 on page 607 is incorrect with W11 disconnected, troubleshoot the A14 frequency control assembly. 8. If all logic levels are correct, the A9 input attenuator is probably defective.

Chapter 12

605

RF Section A9 Input Attenuator

Table 12-2

Attenuator Control Truth Table (W11 connected to A14J6)

A14U421 ATTEN Setting (dB) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 10 dB Pin 16 L H* L H* H* L H* ON Pin 15 H* L H* L L H* L OFF Pin 14 L L L L H* H* H* ON 30 dB Pin 13 H* H* H* H* L L L OFF Pin 12 L L H* H* L H* H* ON 20 dB Pin 11 H* H* L L H* L L OFF

* reads 0.2 V (oating) when W11 is disconnected H 28 V L 0.6 V

Table 12-3

Attenuator Control Truth Table (W11 connected or disconnected from A14J6)

A14U420 ATTEN Setting (dB) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 10 dB Pin 1 H L H L L H L OFF Pin 2 L H L H H L H ON 30 dB Pin 3 H H H H L L L OFF Pin 4 L L L L H H H ON 20 dB Pin 5 H H L L H L L OFF Pin 6 L L H H L H H ON

H TTL High L TTL Low

606

Chapter 12

RF Section A9 Input Attenuator

Table 12-4

Attenuator Control Truth Table (W11 connected or disconnected from A14J6)

A14U421 ATTEN Setting (dB) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 10 dB Pin 16 L F L F F L F Pin 15 F L F L L F L Pin 14 L L L L F F F 30 dB Pin 13 F F F F L L L Pin 12 L L F F L F F 20 dB Pin 11 F F L L F L L

F Floating (0.2 V) L 0.6 V

Chapter 12

607

RF Section A10 YIG-Tuned Filter/Mixer (RYTHM)

A10 YIG-Tuned Filter/Mixer (RYTHM)

The RF diagnostics routine in the adjustment/diagnostic software is recommended for troubleshooting faults in and around A10. The RF diagnostics will prompt you where to connect a source and another spectrum analyzer to make RF signal level measurements. A test board, part number 08564-69201, is connected between the A7 LOMA and A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX ribbon cables, and the A14 frequency control assembly. DC measurements are made using the TAM manual probe cable on several test connectors on the test board. An 3478A DVM is used to measure the voltage across A14R91 (the large power resistor next to A14Q404) to determine the tuning current in the A10 preselector. Be sure to follow all prompts precisely; failure to do so will result in incorrect fault determinations.

608

Chapter 12

RF Section A12 Switched Barium-Tuned Mixer (SBTX)

A12 Switched Barium-Tuned Mixer (SBTX)

The RF diagnostics routine in the adjustment/diagnostic software is recommended for troubleshooting faults in and around A12. The RF diagnostics will prompt you where to connect a source and another spectrum analyzer to make RF signal level measurements. A test board, part number 08564-69201, is connected between the A7 LOMA and A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX ribbon cables, and the A14 frequency control assembly. DC measurements are made using the TAM manual probe cable on several test connectors on the test board. An 3478A DVM is used to measure the voltage across A14R91 (the large power resistor next to A14Q404) to determine the tuning current in the A12 preselector. Be sure to follow all prompts precisely; failure to do so will result in incorrect fault determinations.

Chapter 12

609

RF Section A13 Second Converter

A13 Second Converter

CAUTION

The A13 assembly is extremely sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). For further information regarding electrostatic cautions, refer to Electrostatic Discharge in Chapter 1 . 1. Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 connector. 2. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz Input attenuation .......................................................... 10 dB 3. Disconnect W35 (coax 92) from A13J2. 4. Connect a test cable from A13J2 to the input of a second spectrum analyzer. 5. Tune the second spectrum analyzer to 310.7 MHz. The signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer should be approximately 38 dBm. 6. Remove the test cable from A13J2 and reconnect W35 to A13J2. 7. Disconnect W33 (coax 81) from A13J4 and connect W33 through a test cable to the input of a second spectrum analyzer. 8. Tune the second spectrum analyzer to a center frequency of 600 MHz. 9. If a 600 MHz signal is not present, or its amplitude is less than 5 dBm, the fault is probably on the A15 RF assembly. 10.Reconnect W33 to A13J4. 11.Connect the positive lead of a DVM to A14J19 pin 15 and the negative lead to A14J19 pin 6. If the DVM does not measure between +14.0 Vdc and +15.0 Vdc perform the following: a. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer being tested, off and disconnect W13 from A14J12. b. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on again and set the it to the following settings: Center frequency ................................................ 300 MHz Span ...................................................................... 10 MHz

610

Chapter 12

RF Section A13 Second Converter

c. The voltage should measure +15 Vdc 0.2 V. If the voltage measures outside this limit, the A14 frequency control assembly is probably defective. d. Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. Reconnect W13 to A14J12, and press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on. Set it to the following settings: Center frequency ............................................. 300 MHz Span ......................................................................... 0 Hz 12.Move the positive lead of the DVM to A14J19 pin 1. The voltage should measure between 150 mVdc and 800 mVdc. If the voltage measures outside this limit, the A13 Second Converter is probably defective.

Chapter 12

611

RF Section A14 Frequency Control Assembly

A14 Frequency Control Assembly

NOTE

The block diagrams for the A14 and A15 assemblies are located in Chapter 11 , Synthesizer Section.

LO Multiplier/Amplier Drive
Refer to function block Z on the A14 Frequency Control Schematic Diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. 1. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz Span ............................................................................. 2 MHz 2. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP and measure the signal power at the output of A7J4. See Figure 12-4 on page 614. 3. If the output power is low, the output voltage of A14U602B at A14J18 pin 14 (item (1) of Figure 12-4 on page 614) should be greater than 0 V. If the output power is high, the voltage should be more negative than 10 V. If the voltages do not measure as indicated, check that the voltages at A14J18 pins 5 and 13 are consistent with the output of the operational amplier.
NOTE

The voltages on A14J18 pins 5, 13, and 14 are referred to as LOMA PIN DRV T, RYTHM/LB SENSE, and LOMA INPUT PIN ATTEN respectively. 4. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ......................................................... 35 GHz Span ............................................................................. 2 MHz 5. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP and measure the signal power at the output of A7J2. (See item (1) of Figure 12-4 on page 614.) 6. If the output power is low, the output voltage of A14U602D at A14J10-21 (item (3) of Figure 12-4 on page 614) should be greater than 0 V. If the output power is high, the voltage should be more negative than 10 V. If the voltages do not measure as indicated, check that the voltages at A14J15 pin 5 and A14U602 pin 13 are consistent with the output of the operational amplier.

NOTE

The voltages on A14J10 pin 21 and A14J15 pin 5 are referred to as SBTX PIN ATTEN and SBTX SENSE, respectively.

612

Chapter 12

RF Section A14 Frequency Control Assembly

If the voltages measure as indicated in step 3 and step 6, measure the A11 YTO output. See Figure 12-4 on page 614. If all measurements are within limits, refer to "A7 LO Multiplier and Distribution Amplier" in this chapter.

Chapter 12

613

RF Section A14 Frequency Control Assembly

Figure 12-4

A7 LO Multiplier/Amplier Drive

614

Chapter 12

RF Section A14 Frequency Control Assembly

Control Latch for Band-Switch Drivers

Refer to function block P on A14 Frequency Control Schematic Diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. 1. Connect the positive lead of a DVM to A14U417 pin 14 (LLOWBAND) and the negative lead to A14J18 pin 6. 2. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz 3. The voltage should measure approximately 0 Vdc (TTL low). 4. Set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to 3 GHz. 5. The voltage should measure approximately +5 Vdc (TTL high). 6. Move the positive lead of the DVM to A14U406 pin 12 (LSBTX). 7. The voltage should measure approximately +5 Vdc (TTL high). 8. Set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to 35 GHz. 9. The voltage should measure approximately 0 Vdc (TTL low).

YTF Driver Circuit

The YTF driver circuitry consists of the Sweep + Tune Multiplier, FAV (Frequency Analog Voltage) Generator, YTF Gain and Offset, and YTF Drive. Refer to function blocks Q, R, S, and T on A14 frequency control schematic diagram. The FAV generator generates the 0.5 V/GHz signal. The YTF driver circuitry can be half-split by checking the rear panel FAV OUTPUT.
NOTE

The rear panel output changes according to the external-mixer mode selected. The preselected external-mixer mode must not be selected while executing this procedure. Make sure that the rear panel output is set for .50 V/GHz and not .25 V/GHz. The Sweep + Tune Multiplier takes tune information (YTO start frequency) and sweep (based on LO span) and multiplies it so that it is correct for the appropriate YTF band. C31 of the FAV Generator holds the YTF steady during retraces between multiband sweeps. Switch U606C and R94 provide the YTF dehysteresis pulse. A dehysteresis pulse is activated at the end of spans greater than 1 MHz. In microwave bands, amplier U402A provides an offset voltage to account for the 310.7 MHz offset (U415A open) between the desired harmonic of the YTO frequency and the center frequency. In low band, switch U415A is closed to account for the negative 3.9107 GHz 1st IF offset between the YTO frequency and the center frequency. In millimeter bands, U415D is closed to account for the

Chapter 12

615

RF Section A14 Frequency Control Assembly

positive 3.9107 GHz 1st IF offset between the desired harmonic of the YTO frequency and the center frequency. This signal is 0.5 V/GHz of tuned frequency and is available at the rear panel. The output can be set for 0.50 V/GHz or 0.25 V/GHz. 1. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, and set the controls to the following settings: Start frequency .............................................................. 0 Hz Stop frequency ....................................................... 26.5 GHz 2. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and V/GHz .25 .50 so that .50 is underlined. 3. Monitor the rear panel LO SWP | FAV OUTPUT with an oscilloscope. The waveform should resemble Figure 12-5 on page 617. 4. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows: Start frequency ........................................................... 8 GHz Stop frequency .......................................................... 10 GHz 5. Monitor A14J15 pin 1 with an oscilloscope. The waveform should resemble Figure 12-7 on page 618. 6. If the ramp is not correct, conrm the operation of the Main Coil Tune DAC and Sweep Generator. Refer to Unlocked YTO PLL in Chapter 11 . 7. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency .......................................................... 5 GHz Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz 8. Monitor A14J15 pin 3 with a DVM. For a center frequency of 5 GHz, the voltage should measure 1.33 Vdc 0.2 Vdc. Use the following formula to calculate the voltage: EQUATION {\rm V\sb {(J15\ pin\ 3)]] = {\rm {-0.25\ V \over GHz}\ (freq\ in\ GHz)+offset} EQUATION Offset voltage: 0.98 V in bands 0 and 5 0.078 V in bands 1, 2, and 3 +0.98 V in band 4

616

Chapter 12

RF Section A14 Frequency Control Assembly

Figure 12-5

8564E/EC Rear Panel SWP Output

Figure 12-6

8565E/EC Rear Panel SWP Output

Chapter 12

617

RF Section A14 Frequency Control Assembly

Figure 12-7

8564E/EC Signal at A14J15 Pin 1

Figure 12-8

8565E/EC Signal at A14J15 Pin 1

618

Chapter 12

RF Section A14 Frequency Control Assembly

9. Check the voltage at A14J15 pin 3 with the spectrum analyzer center frequency set to the frequencies listed in Table 12-5. The following table lists the voltage that should be measured at A14J15 pin 3, the settings for the four switches (U416 in function block Q), and the gain through the Sweep + Tune Multiplier. Table 12-5
N*

Sweep + Tune Multiplier Values

A14J15 Pin 3 (Vdc) U416A U416B U416C U416D Gain

Center Frequency

1 2 4 4 4 8 8

5 GHz 10 GHz 15 GHz 20 GHz 30 GHz 40 GHz 50 GHz

1.33 2.58 3.83 5.08 6.52 10.98 13.48

Open Open Open Open Open Open Open

Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Open Open

Closed Open Open Open Open Open Open

Closed Closed Open Open Open Open Open

0.208 0.417 0.833 0.833 0.833 1.666 1.666

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

Gain

is the ratio of the change in the voltage at A14J15 pin 3 to the change in the voltage at A14J15 pin 1, within a given band.

10.Move the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 Controller assembly to the WR ENA position. 11.Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency ........................................................ 5 GHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz 12.On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, SERVICE CAL DATA, PRESEL ADJ, and PRESEL OFFSET. 13.Connect a DVM to A14J16 pin 13. 14.Set the DAC to values from 0 to 255 to yield DVM readings from 0 V to 10 V respectively. 15.Set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to 40 GHz and measure the voltage at A14U414 pin 1: V 16.Connect the DVM to A14J16 pin 1. 17.Press PRESEL SLOPE. 18.Set the DAC to values from 0 to 255 to yield DVM readings from 0 V to the voltage measured in step 15. 19.On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL and REALIGN LO & IF.

Chapter 12

619

RF Section A14 Frequency Control Assembly

20.Connect the DVM to A14J16 pin 3. 21.Change the center frequency in 1 GHz steps and conrm that the voltage changes by 220 mV/GHz in microwave bands and 250 mV/GHz in millimeter bands. 22.Move the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 Controller assembly to the WR PROT position.

620

Chapter 12

RF Section A15 RF Assembly

A15 RF Assembly
NOTE

The block diagrams for the A14 and A15 assemblies are located in Chapter 11, Synthesizer Section.

Conrming a Faulty Third Converter

1. Perform the "IF Input Amplitude Accuracy" performance test in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide. This exercises most of the third converter. 2. If the performance test fails, perform the manual 13. External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment on page 147 or the automated 6. 3rd Amp/2nd IF Align on page 71 of this manual. 3. If adjustment cannot be made, disconnect W35 (coax 92) from A15J801. 4. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET and set the controls to the following settings: Center frequency ................................................... 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz 5. Connect a signal generator to A15J801. 6. Set the signal generator to the following settings: Frequency ................................................... 310.7 MHz CW Power .............................................................................. 28 dBm 7. If a at line is displayed within 2 dB of the reference level and the performance test passed, troubleshoot microcircuits A7, A8, A9, A10, A12, and A13. 8. If a at line is displayed within 2 dB of the reference level and the performance test failed, troubleshoot the 2nd IF distribution circuitry on the A15 RF assembly. 9. Disconnect the signal generator from A15J801 and reconnect W35.

Conrming Third Converter Output

1. Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 connector. 2. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz Input attenuation ....................................................... 10 dB

Chapter 12

621

RF Section A15 RF Assembly

3. Press SGL SWP, CAL, IF ADJ OFF. 4. Disconnect W29 (coax 7) from A15J601. 5. Connect a test cable from A15J601 to the input of another spectrum analyzer. 6. Tune the other spectrum analyzer to 10.7 MHz. The signal displayed on the other spectrum analyzer should be approximately 15 dBm. 7. Remove the test cable from A15J601 and reconnect W29 to A15J601.

Third Converter
Refer to function blocks A, B, C, D, and E on A15 RF Section Schematic Diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The 3rd converter consists of the 2nd IF distribution, 2nd IF amplier, double balanced mixer, 10.7 MHz bandpass lter, and atness compensation amplier. The 2nd IF distribution switches between two possible 2nd IF inputs: the internally generated 2nd IF, or the external mixing IF INPUT. A variable dc bias can be applied to the IF INPUT for external mixers which require such bias. The selected input is fed to the 2nd IF Amplier. This amplier consists of four stages of gain and two stages of SAW lters for image frequency rejection. The atness compensation amplier consists of two xed-gain stages and two stages of variable gain. This provides an overall adjustable gain of 4 dB to 30 dB. This gain is adjusted during a spectrum analyzer sweep to compensate for front end conversion loss versus frequency. The gain of the atness compensation ampliers is driven to a minimum by the REDIR line going low during automatic IF adjustment. The 10.7 MHz bandpass lter provides a broadband termination to the mixer while ltering out unwanted mixer products. Perform the following steps to test the amplier gain: 1. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, then INTERNAL MIXER. 2. In the 2nd IF distribution (function block A), diode CR802 should be forward biased and diode CR801 should be reverse biased. 3. Disconnect W35 (coax 92) and connect a signal source to A15J801. Set the source to the following settings: Frequency ............................................................. 310.7 MHz Amplitude ................................................................ 30 dBm

622

Chapter 12

RF Section A15 RF Assembly

CAUTION

For troubleshooting, it is recommended that you use an active probe, such as an 85024A, and a second spectrum analyzer. If an 1120A active probe is being used with a spectrum analyzer having dc coupled inputs, such as the 8566A/B, 8569A/B and the 8562A/B, either set the active probe for an ac-coupled output or use a dc-blocking capacitor between the active probe and the spectrum analyzer input. Failure to do this can result in damage to the spectrum analyzer or the probe. 4. Use an active probe with a second spectrum analyzer to measure the signal at A15TP601 (function block C). The signal should measure 17 dBm 4 dB conrming the operation of the 2nd IF Amplier. 5. Use an active probe with a second spectrum analyzer to measure the 300 MHz into the LO port of the third mixer. The signal should measure at least +20 dBm. 6. Measure the 10.7 MHz IF output power of the mixer. The signal level should be approximately 22 dBm. 7. Move the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly to the WR ENA position. 8. While measuring the signal at the mixer 10.7 MHz IF output, adjust the signal source until the level of the 10.7 MHz IF is 40 dBm. 9. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP, CAL, IF ADJ OFF, MORE 1 OF 2, and FLATNESS. Increase the gain of the atness compensation ampliers to maximum by entering 0 using the data keys. This sets the gains in the atness compensation ampliers to their maximum values. 10.Connect the second spectrum analyzer to A15J601 and measure the 10.7 MHz IF signal level. The signal should measure greater than 10 dBm. If the signal level is incorrect, continue with step 13. 11.Enter 4095 into the spectrum analyzer atness data. The signal level at A15J601 should measure less than 36 dBm. This sets the gain of atness compensation ampliers to a minimum. If the signal level is incorrect, continue with step 13. 12.Check that the gain stages are properly biased and functioning. 13.Check the attenuator stages and atness compensation control circuitry. a. For minimum gain (atness data equals 4095), RF GAIN (A15U909 pin 10) should be at 1.6 Vdc and the current through each section as measured across R667 or R668 should be about 7 mA.

Chapter 12

623

RF Section A15 RF Assembly

b. For maximum gain (atness data equals 0), RF GAIN (A15U909 pin 10) should be at approximately 0 Vdc and the current through each attenuator section should be close to 0 mA.
CAUTION

As long as the atness data just entered is not stored, the previously-stored atness data will be present after the power is cycled. 14.Move the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly to the WR PROT position. 15.Reconnect the cable to A15J801.

Flatness Compensation Control

Refer to function block G on A15 RF Section Schematic Diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The Flatness Compensation Control consists of a buffer amp (U909C) and two identical voltage-to-current converters (U909B and U909D). The thermistor RT901 in the buffer amp provides temperature compensation for the PIN diodes in the gain stages and the SAW lters.

PIN Switch Drivers

Refer to function block H on A15 RF Section Schematic Diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. The control latches control the PIN Switch Drivers illustrated in Function Block I. 1. Connect the positive lead of a DVM to A15J901 pin 15 (HEXTMIX). Connect the negative lead to A15J901 pin 6. The measured signal controls the switching between internal and external IF signals. 2. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL and EXTERNAL MIXER. The voltage on the DVM should measure approximately +5 Vdc (TTL high). 3. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL and INTERNAL MIXER. The voltage on the DVM should measure approximately 0 Vdc (TTL low). 4. Connect the DVM positive lead to A15J901 pin 13 (LSID). The signal measured turns on the SIG ID oscillator. 5. On the spectrum analyzer, press SIG ID ON (if present), SGL SWP. 6. Subsequent pushes of SGL SWP should cause the signal measured on the DVM to toggle between TTL high and low levels. 7. Connect an oscilloscope probe to A15U902 pin 7 (LRDIR) and the probe ground lead to A15J901 pin 6. The signal measured controls the atness compensation circuit.

624

Chapter 12

RF Section A15 RF Assembly

8. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET and set the SPAN to 1 MHz. Set the oscilloscope for the following settings: Amplitude scale ........................................................... 2 V/div Sweep time .............................................................. 20 ms/div 9. The waveform should be at a TTL high during part of the retrace period and a TTL low during the sweep (about 50 ms).

SIG ID Oscillator (Option 008)

Refer to function block F on A15 RF Section Schematic Diagram in the 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information. SIG ID is available only with Option 008. The SIG ID Oscillator provides a shifted third LO (approximately 298 MHz) to distinguish true signals from false signals (such as image or multiple responses). When the spectrum analyzer is set to SIG ID ON, the SIG ID Oscillator turns on during alternate sweeps. 1. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings: Trigger ............................................................ single sweep SIG ID .............................................................................. on 2. Use an active probe with a second spectrum analyzer to measure the signal level at A15X602. 3. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP. With each press of SGL SWP, the analyzer alternates between the following two states: State 1: A15J901 pin 13 (LSID)....................................... TTL low SIG ID Oscillator ........................................................ ON Signal at A15X602..298MHz 50 kHz (at least +1 dBm) State 1: A15J901 pin 13 (LSID)......................................TTL high SIG ID Oscillator .......................................................OFF
3rd LO Driver Amplier .... Provides LO for Double Balanced Mixer

4. With the SIG ID oscillator on, measure the frequency at A15X602 with a frequency counter and an active probe. If the frequency is not 298 MHz 50 kHz, refer to the 14. Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment (serial prex 3517A and below) on page 151. (There is no adjustment for instruments with A15 RF assembly 08563-60084 or greater.)

Chapter 12

625

RF Section A15 RF Assembly

5. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP until A15J901 pin 13 is at TTL low. Diodes CR603 and CR605 should be forward biased and CR604 should be reverse biased (approximately 6 Vdc reverse bias). Diodes CR501 and CR502 should be forward-biased, disabling the 3rd LO Driver Amplier. 6. The voltage at the R622/R623 node should measure approximately 5 Vdc, biasing Q604 on. 7. If oscillator bias voltages are correct, place a 100 resistor across SAWR U602 input and output. If the SAWR has failed, this will provide the equivalent loss of a correctly functioning SAWR, and the circuit will begin to oscillate.

10 MHz Reference
The spectrum analyzer 10 MHz reference consists of 10 MHz OCXO (Option 103: TCXO) with associated TTL level generator and distribution circuitry. The OCXO (or TCXO) and TTL level generator are turned off when an external 10 MHz reference is used. Also, with the analyzer set to EXTernal frequency reference, U304A output (low) forces the output of U304D to stay high. This allows U304B to control the outputs of U303B, U304C, and U303D. In INTernal frequency reference, U304D controls the outputs of these three NAND gates, and the output of U304B is held high. Check the 10 MHz reference by performing the following steps: 1. Set the spectrum analyzer 10 MHz reference to internal by pressing AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz EXT INT so that INT is underlined. 2. Use a second spectrum analyzer to conrm the presence of a 10 MHz signal at the following test points: A15J303 ................................................................... 10 dBm A15J304 .................................................................. 10 dBm A15J301 .................................................................... 2 dBm 3. Check for a 1.3 Vp-p waveform at A15J302 using an oscilloscope. See Figure 12-9 on page 627. 4. Check that the signal at A15J301 is 10 MHz 40 Hz (with Option 103 TCXO reference) using a frequency counter. If necessary, perform the appropriate 10 MHz reference adjustment. 5. If there is no problem with INTernal 10 MHz reference operation, check EXTernal 10 MHz reference operation as follows. 6. Set the spectrum analyzer 10 MHz reference to external by pressing 10 MHz EXT.

626

Chapter 12

RF Section A15 RF Assembly

7. Connect a 10 MHz, 2 dBm, signal to the rear panel 10 MHz REF IN/OUT connector. 8. Check the signals at A15J301, A15J302, A15J303, and A15J304 according to the procedure in steps 2 through 4. 9. If the signals are correct in EXTernal operation, but not in INTernal operation, the problem lies in A21 OCXO (or Option 103 TCXO), its voltage reference, or the TTL level generator. Check these areas as follows: a. On the spectrum analyzer, press 10 MHz INT. b. Check U305 pin 3 for approximately +12 Vdc (Option 103 only). c. Check, with an oscilloscope, for a 10 MHz sine wave greater than or equal to 1 V p-p at J305, or at U302 pin 3 (with Option 103). 10.If the signal at U304 pin 13 is correct (see Figure 12-10 on page 628), but there is a problem with the signals at A15J301, A15J302, A15J303, or A15J304, suspect U303 or U304 in the 10 MHz Distribution circuitry. Figure 12-9 10 MHz Reference at A15J302

Chapter 12

627

RF Section A15 RF Assembly

Figure 12-10

10 MHz TTL Reference at U304 Pin 13

628

Chapter 12

RF Section A15 RF Assembly

Table 12-6 on page 629 lists the RF Section mnemonics shown in Figure 12-11 on page 631 and provides a brief description of each. Table 12-6 RF Section Mnemonic Table
Mnemonic TUNE+, TUNE HTR+, HTR MAIN COIL+, MAIN COIL FM+, FM LO SENSE LEVEL ADJUST GATE BIAS HEXTMIXB Description YTF Tune Signal (SBTX or RYTHM) YTF Heater Power YTO Main Coil Tune Signal YTO FM Coil Tune Signal LO Amplitude Sense Voltage LO Amplitude Adjustment Voltage (PIN ATTEN) LOMA Gate Bias Voltage External Mixer: +12V=EXT MIX 12V=INT MIX HSIGIDOFFA SIG ID Oscillator ON: +12V=SIG ID OFF 8V=SIG ID ON PIN SW PIN DIODE SWITCH MIXER BIAS RFGAIN RFGAIN1 and RFGAIN2 L10dB ON, L20dB ON, L30dB ON PIN Diode Switch Control (SBTX or RYTHM LO Band/HI Band) PIN Diode Switch Control For 2ND Conv. IF Output Detected Voltage on 2ND Converter Mixer Diode Voltage to Control Gain of Flatness Comp. Amps. Currents to Drive PIN Diodes in Flatness Comp. Amps. Control Lines to Set Attenuator Sections 10, 20, and 30 to Attenuate Position (Active Low) Control Lines to Set Attenuator Sections 10. 20, and 30 to Bypass Position (Active Low)

L10dB OFF, L20dB OFF, L30dB OFF

Chapter 12

629

13

Display/Power Supply Section

633

Display/Power Supply Section Introduction

Introduction
The Display/Power Supply chapter consists of the following sections: A17 LCD Display (8564EC and 8565EC ) ..................... page 635 A17 CRT Display (8564E and 8565E ) .......................... page 641 A6 Power Supply ............................................................. page 654
WARNING

The A6 power supply in 8560 E-series and EC-series instruments, and the A6A1 high voltage assembly in 8560 E-series instruments, contain lethal voltages with lethal currents in all areas. Use extreme care when servicing these assemblies. Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before servicing these assemblies. Failure to follow this precaution can represent a shock hazard which may result in personal injury. The voltage potential at A6A1W3, in 8560 E-series instruments, is +9 kV. If the cable must be disconnected, always disconnect it at the CRT with caution! Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument. See procedure 2 in Chapter 3 . Do not discharge the CRT second anode directly to ground, with the A6A1 high voltage cable connected. This can damage the A17 CRT driver assembly. Always discharge through a high resistance, such as a high voltage probe. Always use an isolation transformer when troubleshooting either the A6 power supply or the A6A1 HV module. When using an isolation transformer, connect a jumper between A6TP101 and A6TP301. This connects the circuit common to earth ground. Remove this jumper when the isolation transformer is not used.

634

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section LCD Display (8564EC and 8565EC)

LCD Display (8564EC and 8565EC)

The display section of 8564EC and 8565EC instruments contain the A17 display driver, the A17A1 inverter board, the A18 LCD (liquid crystal display), and the A6 power supply. The A6 power supply is explained in the power supply section which begins on page 590. Figure 13-1 on page 636 illustrates the LCD block diagram. Troubleshooting the LCD Display..................................... page Blank Display ..................................................................... page Dim Display ......................................................................... page Troubleshooting using the VGA port ................................ page Troubleshooting using part substitution .......................... page 637 637 639 639 639

Chapter 13

635

Display/Power Supply Section LCD Display (8564EC and 8565EC)

Figure 13-1

Simplied LCD Block Diagram

Overview of A17 Display Driver Board

The A17 display driver board monitors the 8560 EC-series controller board, copies display instructions to local memory, creates a bitmap from the data, and generates the signals needed to drive the LCD display and a VGA monitor. The display driver consists of a Hitatchi 7707 processor, an FPGA, DRAM, SRAM, a lter circuit, and a video DAC. The FPGA is connected to the address bus, data bus, and the display memory control signals on the controller board. The FPGA monitors the control signals and determines when the Hitatchi 7707 processor writes to display memory. When this occurs, the FPGA makes a duplicate of this information on the display driver board. The other main function of the FPGA is to provide the signals necessary to drive a TFT LCD display and a standard VGA monitor. The processor reads display information received from the controller board, creates a bitmap, and copies the bitmap into SRAM. The FPGA outputs this information to the LCD and VGA displays. The DRAM is used by the processor to run its program. The lter circuit provides the clock signals that are needed to run the display driver board. The video DAC converts the digital color information that goes to the LCD to analog signals; these signals drive the RGB color lines on the VGA port.

636

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section Troubleshooting the LCD Display

Troubleshooting the LCD Display

NOTE

There are no adjustments for intensity or focus of the LCD.

Blank Display
1. If the LED above the front-panel LINE switch is lit, most of the A6 power supply is functioning properly. 2. Carefully check the voltages on the front-panel PROBE POWER jack. Be careful to avoid shorting the pins together. See Figure 13-2 on page 638. 3. Check that the fan is operating. If the PROBE POWER voltages are correct, and the fan is turning, the A6 power supply is probably working properly. 4. If all of the power supply indicators along the outside edge of the A2 controller assembly are lit, the A6 power supply is probably working properly. 5. Connect a VGA monitor to the VGA port on the rear of the instrument. If the display is still blank, suspect the A2 controller, a loose cable, or the display driver. 6. If the LED is not lit, or the fan is not working, or the probe power voltages are not correct, or the power supply indicators on the edge of the A2 controller assembly are not working properly, proceed to the section on troubleshooting the power supply on page 658. 7. Open the left side of the instrument (see Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8562EC) on page 166). Make voltage measurements at pins 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 41, 42, 43, 44, and 45 on J8 of the A2 controller (see Figure 13-3 on page 640). These pins should measure 5V 0.25V. If any of these measurements is out of tolerance suspect the A2 controller board or the power supply. If the voltages for these pins are correct, make the same measurements at the identical pins on J1 of the A17 display driver board. If these measurements are correct, suspect the A18 LCD assembly or the A17A1 inverter board. If these measurements are not correct, suspect the A17 LCD driver or A17A1 inverter board.

Chapter 13

637

Display/Power Supply Section Troubleshooting the LCD Display

Figure 13-2

Probe Power Socket

638

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section Troubleshooting the LCD Display

Dim Display
1. If the display is dim, suspect the backlights, which are inserted into the LCD assembly from the backlight assembly. Always replace both backlights at the same time. To replace the backlights, see page 189 of procedure 2A.

Troubleshooting Using the VGA Port

1. Connect a VGA monitor to the rear VGA port of the instrument (the VGA port is always active and requires no user interaction). 2. Observe the display. If the display on the VGA monitor is working correctly, the problem is probably caused by the LCD, or by a cable problem. Proceed to step 1 in Troubleshooting using part substitution. If the display on the VGA monitor shows the same symptom(s) you have seen on the instruments LCD, the problem is probably caused by the A2 controller board, the display driver, or by a cable problem. Proceed to step 2 in Troubleshooting using part substitution.

Troubleshooting Using Part Substitution

1. Disconnect the power cord, turn the instrument off, and open the left side. Ensure that W60, W61, W62, W63, and W64 are tight. Reconnect the power cord and check the instrument to see whether the problem is corrected. If not, proceed to step 2. 2. Disconnect the power cord and turn the instrument off. Replace W60, the ribbon cable that connects the A2 board to the display driver board. Reconnect the power cord and check the display to see whether the problem is corrected. If not, proceed to step 3. 3. Disconnect the power cord and turn the instrument off. Replace W61, the 10 MHz reference cable that connects the A2 board to the display driver board. Reconnect the power cord and check to see whether the problem is corrected. If not, proceed to step 4. 4. Disconnect the power cord and turn the instrument off. Remove and replace (see procedure 2A on page 180) the A17 display driver board. Reconnect the power cord and check the instrument to see whether the problem is corrected. If not, proceed to step 5. 5. Remove and replace (see procedure 5 on page 202) the A2 controller board. Check to see whether the problem is corrected. If not, proceed to step 6. 6. Disconnect the power cord and turn the instrument off. Remove and replace (see procedure 2A on page 180) the A18 LCD. Reconnect the power cord and check the instrument to see whether the problem is corrected.

Chapter 13

639

Display/Power Supply Section Troubleshooting the LCD Display

Figure 13-3

Location of +5V supply pins on J1 of A17 and J8 of A2

Figure 13-3 shows A2J8 connections on 8560 EC-Series Instruments. Lines 2 5 and 42 44 supply +5V to the two LCD backlights. Lines 1 and 41 supply +5V to the A17A1 Inverter board. Lines 1 6 and 41 44 are identical on A17J1.

640

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section CRT Display (8564E and 8565E )

CRT Display (8564E and 8565E )

The CRT display section contains the A6 power supply, A6A1 HV module, A17 CRT driver, and A18 CRT. The A6 power supply and A6A1 HV module are explained in the section on the power supply which begins on page 590.Figure 13-4 on page 642 illustrates the section block diagram. Troubleshooting Using the TAM .................................. page Blank Display (Using the TAM) ................................... page Blank Display ................................................................ page Blanking Signal............................................................. page Display Distortion ......................................................... page Focus Problems.............................................................. page Intensity Problems ........................................................ page
WARNING

643 645 646 647 648 650 652

The A6 power supply and A6A1 high voltage assemblies contain lethal voltages with lethal currents in all areas. Use extreme care when servicing these assemblies. Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before servicing these assemblies. Failure to follow this precaution can represent a shock hazard which may result in personal injury. The voltage potential at A6A1W3 is +9 kV. If the cable must be disconnected, always disconnect it at the CRT with caution! Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument. See procedure 2 in Chapter 3. Do not discharge the CRT second anode directly to ground, with the A6A1 high voltage cable connected. This can damage the A17 CRT driver assembly. Always discharge through a high resistance, such as a high voltage probe. Always use an isolation transformer when troubleshooting either the A6 power supply or the A6A1 HV module. When using an isolation transformer, connect a jumper between A6TP101 and A6TP301. This connects the circuit common to earth ground. Remove this jumper when the isolation transformer is not used.

Chapter 13

641

Display/Power Supply Section CRT Display (8564E and 8565E )

Figure 13-4

Power Supply and CRT Block Diagram

642

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section Troubleshooting Using the TAM

Troubleshooting Using the TAM

When using automatic fault isolation, the TAM indicates suspected circuits that need to be manually checked. Use Table 13-1 on page 643 to locate the manual procedure. Table 13-2 on page 644 lists assembly test connectors associated with each manual probe troubleshooting test. Figure 13-5 on page 644 illustrates the location of A17 test connectors. Table 13-1 Automatic Fault Isolation References
Suspected Circuit Indicated by Automatic Fault Isolation Check A2 Controller Check All Power Supply Outputs Check Buck Regulator Check Buck Regulator Control Circuitry Check High-Voltage Supplies Check Input Rectier Check Intensity Adjustments Check Kick Start/Bias Circuitry Check Low-Voltage Supplies Manual Procedure to Perform Blanking Signal Dead Power Supply (steps 1-5) Dead Power Supply (steps 13-23) Dead Power Supply (steps 11-21) High Voltage Supplies Dead Power Supply (steps 6-7) Intensity Problems (steps 1-4) Dead Power Supply (steps 8-10) Low Voltage Supplies

Chapter 13

643

Display/Power Supply Section Troubleshooting Using the TAM

Figure 13-5

A17 Test Connector

Table 13-2

TAM Tests versus Test Connectors

Connector A17J4 Manual Probe Troubleshooting Test Revision Constant current Source Intensity input Intensity offset Blanking control 10 V reference test Switch drive test Buffered X &Y DAC outputs X line generator test Y line generator test Intensity offset output Revision X, Y, &Z output offset X output amplier Y output amplier Blanking test Focus DAC test Measured Signal Lines MS5 MS1 MS7 MS7 MS8 MS4 MS3 MS2, MS7 MS6 MS1 MS8 MS1 MS3, MS4, MS7 MS7 MS3 MS4 MS2

A2J201

A2J202

644

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section Troubleshooting Using the TAM

Blank Display (Using the TAM)

Use the following procedure if the instrument display is blank. This procedure substitutes a GPIB printer for the display. 1. Connect the printer to the 8564E or 8565E spectrum analyzer and set the printer address to the value required by the TAM. This is usually 1. 2. All of the power-supply indicator LEDs along the edge of the A2 controller assembly should be lit. 3. The rear panel CRT +110 VDC ON indicator should also be lit. 4. Connect the TAM probe cable to A2J11. 5. Press MODULE, SOFT KEY #3, w, and SOFT KEY #1. (The top soft key is #1.) 6. The yellow LED next to A2J11 should blink approximately ten times. If the LED fails to blink correctly, troubleshoot the digital section of the A2 controller assembly. 7. Move the probe cable to A2J202. Press SOFT KEY #1 and wait 5 seconds. 8. Press SOFT KEY #4. The results should be sent to the printer. 9. Move the probe cable to A2J201, press SOFT KEY #1 and wait 5 seconds. 10.Press SOFT KEY #4. The results will be sent to the printer. 11.If a failure is indicated in any of these tests, the fault lies on the A2 controller assembly. to obtain more information: a. Press the down arrow key one less time than the test number. (For example, press it twice for the third test on the list.) b. Press SOFT KEY #3, then SOFT KEY #4, and when the printout is complete, SOFT KEY #6. 12.If no failures were indicated in testing the A2 controller, move the probe cable to A17J4. 13.Press SOFT KEY #1 and wait 5 seconds. 14.Press SOFT KEY #4. The results will be sent to the printer. 15.If no failure is indicated in the printout, check the high-voltage supplies as described High Voltage Supplies (8564E and 8565E) on page 662.

Chapter 13

645

Display/Power Supply Section Blank Display

Blank Display
1. If the LED above the front panel LINE switch is lit, most of the A6 power supply is functioning properly. 2. Carefully check the voltages on the front panel PROBE POWER jack. Be careful to avoid shorting the pins together. See Figure 13-6 on page 646. 3. Check that the fan is operating. If the PROBE POWER voltages are correct, and the fan is turning, the A6 power supply is probably working properly. 4. If the CRT +110 VDC ON LED on the rear panel is lit, the high-voltage supplies should also be operating. (The high-voltage supplies will be turned off if the HV SHUT_DOWN line is low.) The A6 power supply feeds +5 V to the A2 controller through W1. The A2 assembly distributes this +5 V to the A17 CRT driver through W7. A17 sends +5 V back to A6 as the HV SHUT_DOWN signal on W8. As a result, A2, A17, W1, W7, and W8 must all be in place for the high-voltage supplies to operate. 5. If all of the power supply indicators along the outside edge of the A2 controller assembly are lit, the A6 power supply is probably working properly. Figure 13-6 Probe Power Socket

6. Press FREQUENCY, 1, GHz. 7. Allow the analyzer to warm up for at least 1 minute. 8. While observing the display, press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off. If a green ash appears on the display, the CRT is probably working properly; troubleshoot either the A2 controller or the A17 CRT driver. 9. If a ash does not appear on the display, the A2 controller, A6A1 HV module, A17 CRT driver, or A18V1 CRT might be at fault.

646

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section Blanking Signal

Blanking Signal
1. Connect an oscilloscope probe to A2J202 pin 3. Connect the oscilloscope ground lead to TP3. Set the oscilloscope to the following settings: Sweep time ................................................................ 2 ms/div Vertical scale ............................................................... 1 V/div 2. If a 4 Vp-p signal is not observed, the A2 controller assembly is faulty. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 with the oscilloscope probe on A2J202 pin 14. 4. Set the oscilloscope to the following settings: Sweep time .................................................................. 1s/div Vertical scale ............................................................... 2 V/div 5. Connect the positive probe lead to A2J202 pin 15. This is the blanking output. 6. TTL-level pulses should be observed. If the signal is either always high or always low, the display will be blanked; suspect the A2 controller assembly. 7. If the signals on A2J202 pins 3, 14, and 15 are correct, troubleshoot the A17 CRT driver.

Chapter 13

647

Display/Power Supply Section Display Distortion

Display Distortion
The 8564E and 8565E use a vector display. The graticule lines, traces, and characters are composed of a series of straight lines ("vectors") placed end-to-end. If the vectors do not begin and end at the proper points, the display appears distorted, but in focus. Symptoms range from characters appearing elongated and graticule lines not meeting squarely, to an entirely unreadable display. 1. If the spectrum analyzer is in external frequency reference mode (an "X" is displayed along the left side of the display), ensure that an external 10 MHz reference is supplied. Otherwise the 16 MHz CPU clock will be off-frequency, causing distortion. 2. Use the CRT ADJ PATTERN to check for distortion. Press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, and CRT ADJ PATTERN. If vector distortion (described above) occurs, perform the "Display Adjustment" in Chapter 2 to test the function of the A2 controller assembly. 3. If there is distortion along with slight focus degradation, but the graticule lines meet (not necessarily squarely), the A17 CRT driver, CRT, DDD/TRACE ALIGN adjustments, or cable connections might be at fault. 4. If the A2 controller assembly is not part number 08563-60017, perform the "16 MHz PLL adjustment" in Chapter 2 . If the 16 MHz CPU clock is off-frequency, the display will be distorted. 5. Perform the "Display Adjustment" in Chapter 2 . Isolate the problem to either the X or Y axis by noting the behavior of the adjustments. If the line generator or fast zero-span portion of the adjustment fails, troubleshoot the A2 controller assembly. 6. If the adjustments do not remedy the problem, press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off and place the A17 CRT driver in the service position. 7. Distortion conned to one axis (vertical or horizontal only), indicates a faulty X or Y deection amplier on the A17 assembly. Use the alternate good deection amplier for obtaining typical voltages. (There is enough symmetry in a typical display that the voltages should be similar between these circuits.) 8. Monitor the waveforms at A17TP11 and A17TP14 (or TP12 and TP13). The 50 to 100 Vp-p ac component of the waveforms at the X and X (or Y and Y) outputs should be mirror images of each other. The dc average should be 55 V. 9. The appropriate POSN adjustment (A17R57 or A17R77) should change the dc component of both X and X (or Y and Y) outputs in opposite directions.

648

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section Display Distortion

10.The appropriate GAIN adjustment (A17R55 or A17R75) should change the ac component in both outputs by the same amount. 11.If the display is a single dot, check the base of A17Q18 for 10.3 V 0.3 V. Verify the signals at TP11, TP14, TP12, and TP13. 12.If signals are correct and cables to the CRT are good, suspect the CRT.

Chapter 13

649

Display/Power Supply Section Focus Problems

Focus Problems
Focus problems may be due to a defective A18V1 CRT, the A17 CRT driver (especially the grid level shifter section), or the A2 controller focus control circuitry. Focus problems may also be due to improper adjustments, improper connections, or absence of high voltage. Although A17 grid level shifter (function block D) is the leading cause of A17 focus problems, function blocks C, E, F, and H generally have less effect on focus, but may cause poor focus that is a function of screen position, length of line, or intensity. 1. Connect the positive lead of a DVM to A2J202, pin 2. Connect the negative lead to A2J202 pin 6. 2. Use the knob to change the focus DAC value from 0 to 255. 3. If the DVM reads near 0 Vdc with the focus set to 0, and near 10 Vdc with the focus set to 255, the A2 focus control circuitry is working properly. 4. Perform the "Display Adjustment" in Chapter 2 . Note that A17R34 COARSE FOCUS has the greatest effect on focus. Adjustment A17R93 ASTIG and A17R92 DDD have a lesser effect, and A17R21 Z FOCUS, A17R26 X FOCUS and front panel adjustment (press DISPLAY, MORE 1 OF 2, FOCUS, and turn knob) have less effect on focus. 5. If the focus of some areas of the screen are worse than normal, continue with step 11. If no part of the screen can be brought to sharp focus, continue with step 6. (CRTs have some normal focus variation across their face.) 6. Turn off the analyzer and place A17 in the service position. Connect the ground lead of a high-voltage probe (34111A) to the chassis, and use it with a DVM to measure A17J7(10). 7. The nominal A17J7(10) voltage is 1600 Vdc, but the CRT will function if this voltage is within 200 V of 1600 Vdc. 8. Adjusting A17R34 COARSE FOCUS should vary the A17J7(10) voltage by 150 V. If these voltages are correct, suspect the CRT. 9. Check the A6A1 high voltage module cathode supply output at A17TP16 using a high voltage probe. If the cathode voltage is 2450 V 250 V, check the focus grid level shifter. 10.If the cathode voltage is not correct, check the A6A1 high voltage module and its connections. 11.Connect an oscilloscope probe to A17TP9. This signal corrects the focus for the X position of the CRT beam, and for intensity level. It also provides the front panel focus adjusting voltage.

650

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section Focus Problems

12.Press DISPLAY, MORE 1 OF 2, and FOCUS. While turning the front panel knob, verify the dc level of the signal at TP9 adjusts about 30 Vp-p. 13.Verify that the front panel intensity adjustment, when used with the A17R21 Z FOCUS, changes the peak-to-peak voltage at TP9 by 25 V. Access the intensity adjustment by pressing DISPLAY, INTENSITY, and turning the front panel knob. 14.Set front panel intensity to minimum. Set A17R21 Z FOCUS and A17R26 X FOCUS fully counterclockwise. Verify that the peak-to-peak voltage at TP9 is about 40 Vp-p (due to X-dynamic focus circuit). 15.If circuit operation seems correct, the A18V1 CRT is probably at fault.

Chapter 13

651

Display/Power Supply Section Intensity Problems

Intensity Problems
Intensity problems, or absence of display, can be due to the A17 assembly intensity amplier (function block A), intensity grid level shifter (function block B), CRT (A18V1), interconnections, or lack of proper supplies or inputs to A17. 1. On the 8564E or 8565E spectrum analyzer, press DISPLAY and INTENSITY. 2. Rotate the front panel knob (RPG), and check that the intensity changes from dim, but readable, to bright. 3. If the intensity function does not function properly, troubleshoot the A2 controller assembly. 4. Perform the preliminary and Z-axis portions of the "Display Adjustment" in Chapter 2 . Verify that A17R11 CUTOFF functions properly. If A17R11 CUTOFF does not function properly, place the A17 CRT driver in the service position. 5. Verify that blanking pulses are present at A17TP2 using an oscilloscope. The pulses should be normal TTL levels, approximately 1 s wide and 4 or 7 s apart. If the blanking pulses are not correct, check the BLANKING output of the A2 controller assembly and cable W7. 6. If blanking pulses are present, check A17TP10 with the oscilloscope. The TP10 signal should vary with the front panel intensity adjustment, and be approximately 55 Vp-p maximum. The signal will be composed of both blanking pulses and varying intensity levels for the lines being drawn. If a proper signal is not present at A17TP10, check A17Q1, Q2, CR1, and CR2. If the TP10 signal does not vary with the front panel intensity adjustment, check the signals at A17TP4 and A17TP1. Both signals should vary with the front panel intensity adjustment. The TP4 signal should be up to 4 Vp-p, and the TP1 signal should be up to approximately 12 Vp-p.
WARNING

The A17 CRT Driver contains lethal voltages with lethal currents. Use extreme care when servicing this assembly. Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before servicing this assembly. Failure to follow this precaution can present a shock hazard which may result in personal injury.

652

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section Intensity Problems

NOTE

The following measurements should be made with a high-voltage probe, such as the 34111A. When using the high-voltage probe, connect the ground lead securely to the 8564E or 8565E chassis. 7. Carefully measure the grid voltage at A17J7 pin 6, and the cathode voltage at A17J7 pin 4. The display will work with a cathode voltage of 2450 V 250 V, provided the grid voltage (A17J7 pin 6) is 30 to 100 V more negative than the cathode. A17R11, CUTOFF, should be able to adjust the voltage difference over a 60 V range to account for tube variations, and achieve proper intensity. 8. If the grid and cathode voltages are correct, turn off the 8564E or 8565E spectrum analyzer and check A17CR10 with an ohmmeter. If A17CR10 is good, suspect the A18V1 CRT. 9. If the grid and cathode voltages are too low, turn off the power and disconnect W8 from the base of A18V1 CRT, and recheck the grid and cathode voltages. 10.If the grid and cathode voltages are still too low, refer to "CRT Supply" in this chapter and the "High-Voltage Power Supply Adjustment" procedure in Chapter 2 . 11.If voltages are correct when the tube is disconnected, the CRT is probably defective.

CAUTION

The pins on the A18V1 CRT bend easily. Be careful not to bend pins when connecting W8 to A18V1.

Chapter 13

653

Display/Power Supply Section Power Supply

Power Supply
The power supply section contains the A6 power supply and, in 8564E and 8565E instruments, the A6A1 HV module. Figure 13-7 on page 655 illustrates the power supply block diagram. Table 13-3 on page 656 lists signal versus pin numbers for power cable W1. A6 Power Supply Assembly ............................................. page Dead Power Supply ....................................................... page Line Fuse Blowing ........................................................ page Supply Restarting Every 1.5 Seconds (Kick Start) ..... page Low Voltage Supplies .................................................... page High Voltage Supplies (8564E and 8565E only)........ page CRT Supply Dropping Out (8564E and 8565E only). page Blanking Signal (8564E and 8565E only).................. page Buck Regulator Control ................................................ page DC-DC Converter Control ............................................ page Power Up ....................................................................... page
WARNING

658 658 660 661 661 662 663 663 664 665 665

The A6 power supply in 8560E-series and EC-series instruments, and the A6A1 high voltage assembly in 8560 E-series instruments, contain lethal voltages with lethal currents in all areas. Use extreme care when servicing these assemblies. Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before servicing these assemblies. Failure to follow this precaution can represent a shock hazard which may result in personal injury. The voltage potential at A6A1W3, in 8560 E-series instruments, is +9 kV. If the cable must be disconnected, always disconnect it at the CRT with caution! Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument. See procedure 2 in Chapter 3 . Do not discharge the CRT second anode directly to ground, with the A6A1 high voltage cable connected. This can damage the A17 CRT driver assembly. Always discharge through a high resistance, such as a high voltage probe. Always use an isolation transformer when troubleshooting either the A6 power supply or the A6A1 HV module. When using an isolation transformer, connect a jumper between A6TP101 and A6TP301. This connects the circuit common to earth ground. Remove this jumper when the isolation transformer is not used.

654

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section Power Supply

Figure 13-7

Simplied Power Supply Block Diagram

NOTE

The block diagram in Figure 13-7 shows the power supply in an E-series instrument. The power supply in EC-series instruments is identical except that the CRT and high voltage supplies in an EC-series instrument are inactive, and are not connected to CRT circuitry.

Chapter 13

655

Display/Power Supply Section Power Supply

Table 13-3

W1 Power-Cable Connections
A2J1 A3J1 (pins) (pins) NC NC A GND 3 NC NC A GND 6 NC NC A GND 9 SCAN RAMP 41 10 NC A GND 12 12.6 V 38 13 15 V 14 A GND 15 15 V 16 +15 V 17 A GND 18 +15 V 19 +28 V 20 +28 V 21 PWR UP 29 15 V 23 15 V 24 +15 V 25 +15 V 26 +5 V 27 +5 V 28 +5 V 29 +5 V 30 D GND 20 31 D GND 19 32 A GND 18 33 A GND 17 34 D GND 16 35 D GND 15 36 D GND 14 37 D GND 13 38 +5 V 12 39 +5 V 11 40 +5 V 10 41 +5 V 9 42 +5 V 8 43 +5 V 7 44 +28 V 6 45 LINE 46 TRIGGER * Indicates signal source. Signal A4J1 (pins) 3 6 9 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 A5J1 (pins) 48 45 42 39 37 36 35 34 33 32 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 A6J1(pins) 3* 6* 9* 12* 13* 14* 15* 16* 17* 18* 19* 20* 21* 22* 23* 24* 25* 26* 27* 28* 29* 30* 31* 32* 33* 34* 35* 36* 37* 38* 39* 40* 41* 42* 43* 44* 45* 46* A14J1 (pins) 3 6 9 10* 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 33 34 35 36 37 38 A15J1 (pins) 3 6 9 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 -

656

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section Power Supply

Table 13-3

W1 Power-Cable Connections
Signal A2J1 A3J1 (pins) (pins) +15 V 4 47 +15 V 3 48 15 V 2 49 15 V 1 50 * Indicates signal source. A4J1 (pins) 49 50 A5J1 (pins) A6J1(pins) 47* 48* 49* 50* A14J1 (pins) A15J1 (pins) -

Troubleshooting Using the TAM (8564E and 8565E only)

When using automatic fault isolation, the TAM indicates suspected circuits that need to be manually checked. Use Table 13-4 on page 657 to locate the manual procedure. Table 13-4 Automatic Fault Isolation References
Suspected Circuit Indicated by Automatic Fault Isolation Check A2 Controller Check All Power Supply Outputs Check Buck Regulator Check Buck Regulator Control Circuitry Check High-Voltage Supplies Check Input Rectier Check Intensity Adjustments Check Kick Start/Bias Circuitry Check Low-Voltage Supplies Manual Procedure to Perform Blanking Signal Dead Power Supply (steps 1-5) Dead Power Supply (steps 13-23) Dead Power Supply (steps 11-21) High Voltage Supplies Dead Power Supply (steps 6-7) Intensity Problems (steps 1-4) Dead Power Supply (steps 8-10) Low Voltage Supplies

Chapter 13

657

Display/Power Supply Section A6 Power Supply Assembly

A6 Power Supply Assembly

8564E , 8565E , 8564EC , and 8565EC spectrum analyzers use a switching power supply operating at 40 kHz to supply the low voltages for most of the analyzer hardware. In the 8564E and 8565E , the power supply also provides a 30 kHz switching supply (CRT supply) for the high voltages used by the CRT display used in E-series instruments. The CRT supply will be treated as a separate supply since the remainder of A6 must be operating for the CRT supply to operate. Kick starting occurs when there is a fault either on the power supply or on one of the other assemblies. The power supply will try to start by generating a 200 ms pulse ("kick") every 1.5 seconds. A kick-starting power supply often appears to be dead, but the fan will make one or two revolutions and stop every 1.5 seconds.

Dead Power Supply

1. Use an isolation transformer and connect a jumper between A6TP101 and A6TP301. 2. Connect the negative lead of a DVM to A6TP301. 3. Check TP308 for +5 V. 4. Check TP302 for +15 V. 5. Check TP303 for 15 V. 6. Check TP304 for +28 V. 7. Check TP305 for 12.6 V. 8. Measure the voltage at TP108 to verify the output of the input rectier. The voltage should be between +215 Vdc and +350 Vdc. 9. If it is not within this range, check the rear panel fuse, input rectier, input lter, and the rear panel line voltage selector switch. 10.Measure the voltage at TP206 to verify the output of the kickstart/bias-circuitry. The voltage should be approximately +14 Vdc. Test point 206 is on pin 1 of U203. 11.If there is no voltage at TP206, check TP210 for pulses 200 ms wide with an amplitude of 14.7 V. If there are no pulses present, the kick-start circuitry is probably defective. If the pulses are low in amplitude (about 1 V), Q201 is probably shorted. 12.If there are pulses at TP206, or there are pulses at TP210, but not at TP206, the buck regulator control circuitry is probably faulty. 13.Disconnect the power cord from the 8564E or 8565E spectrum analyzer.

658

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section A6 Power Supply Assembly

14.Connect the positive output of a current-limited dc power supply to the cathode of A6CR201 (TP206) and the ground to A6TP201. 15.Set the current limit of the power supply to about 500 mA and the voltage to 12 Vdc. 16.Make sure a jumper is connected from A6TP101 to A6TP301. This independently powers the buck regulator control circuitry. 17.Connect a jumper from the output of a +12 Vdc power supply to the end of A6R202 physically nearest A6C211. 18.Connect a jumper from +12 Vdc to the end of C207 nearest C209. 19.If the current draw exceeds approximately 50 mA, suspect a short in the buck regulator control circuitry or a shorted CR201. 20.Check TP204 for an 80 kHz sawtooth (4 Vp-p). 21.Check TP203 and TP207 for 40 kHz square (12 Vp-p). If the waveforms at either TP203 or TP207 are bad, one of the FETs in the DC-DC Converter is probably defective. 22.Check TP105 and TP106 for a 12 Vp-p sawtooth waveform that is attened at the bottom. If the waveform is a squarewave, the FET to which the test point is connected has failed or shorted. 23.Check TP202 for 80 kHz pulses (12 Vp-p). 24.Short TP401 to TP102. Check TP103 for a waveform similar to that in Figure 13-8 on page 660. 25.If the waveform at TP202 is correct but the waveform at TP103 is bad, suspect either Q102 or CR106.

Chapter 13

659

Display/Power Supply Section A6 Power Supply Assembly

Figure 13-8

Buck Regulator Waveform

Line Fuse Blowing

1. If the line fuse blows with the LINE switch in the off position, suspect either the input lter or the power switch cable assembly. 2. If the line fuse blows when the 8564E /EC and 8565E /EC spectrum analyzers are turned on, disconnect the power cord and lift the drain of A6Q102 from TP108. If the line fuse still blows, suspect CR102 through CR105. 3. If the fuse is not burned out, check A6TP108 for a voltage of between +215 V and +350 V. 4. If the voltage at TP108 is correct, disconnect the power cord. Wait 60 seconds for the high voltage to discharge. Remove and check A6Q102. 5. If Q102 is shorted, Q103, Q104, CR106, and CR108 are also probably shorted. If Q102 is working properly, measure the resistance between TP102 and TP101 (positive ohmmeter lead to TP102). 6. If the resistance is less than 1 k, suspect either Q103 or Q104 in the DC-DC Converter.

660

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section A6 Power Supply Assembly

Supply Restarting Every 1.5 Seconds (Kick Start)

See function blocks G, H and L of A6 power supply schematic diagram in the component-level information binder. If there is a short on the power supply or on one of the other assemblies, the power supply will attempt to "kick start." (Every 1.5 seconds the supply will attempt to start, but will be shut down by a fault condition.) The kick start and bias circuits provide power for the control circuitry during power-up. The kick start circuitry is an RC oscillator which emits a 200 ms pulse every 1.5 seconds. These pulses switch current from the Input Rectier through Q201 to charge C201. When the power supply is up, a winding on T103 provides power to the control circuitry. This voltage is high enough to keep Q201 turned off. 1. Monitor the waveforms at TP206 and TP208 simultaneously on an oscilloscope. 2. If the signal at TP208 goes high before the signal at TP206 goes low, an overcurrent condition has been detected. Suspect a short in the secondary (output rectier, voltage regulators, or another assembly).

Low Voltage Supplies

1. Connect the negative lead of a DVM to A6TP301. 2. Check A6TP302 for +15 Vdc. 3. Check A6TP303 for 15 Vdc. 4. Check A6TP304 for +28 Vdc. 5. Check A6TP305 for 12.6 Vdc. 6. Check A6TP308 for +5 Vdc. 7. If the voltages measured above are correct but the power supply LEDs on the A2 controller assembly are not lit, check W1. 8. If the voltages are low, disconnect W1 from A6J1 and measure the test point voltages again. Unless a dummy load is connected to the A6 power supply, the voltages should return to their nominal voltages but be unregulated. 9. If the voltages do not return to near their nominal range, the A6 power supply is probably at fault. 10.If the +5 V supply is low, suspect the +5 V regulator or the feedback circuit. To check the feedback circuit, measure the voltage of the +5 V reference (U305 pin 6) and the 5 V references to the voltage regulators (U306B pin 7 and U306D pin 14). 11.Check output of U306A pin 1. If the feedback circuit is working properly, the output of U306A should be near +13 Vdc.

Chapter 13

661

Display/Power Supply Section A6 Power Supply Assembly

12.Check output of U302; its output should be high if the feedback circuit is working properly.

High Voltage Supplies (8564E and 8565E)

1. Press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer off, disconnect the power cord, and remove the power supply shield. 2. Connect the negative lead of a DVM to A6TP401 and positive lead to A6TP405. 3. Press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer on. 4. If the voltage displayed on the DVM is approximately +110 Vdc and the rear panel CRT +110 VDC ON indicator is lit, the A6A1 HV module is probably at fault.
NOTE

Ideally, the DVM should read the voltage written on the label of the A6A1 HV module. If necessary, perform the "High Voltage Power Supply" adjustment in Chapter 2 . 5. If the DVM does not read approximately +110 Vdc, measure the voltage on A6U401 pin 10. This is the HV_SHUT_DOWN signal and should be near +5 Vdc. 6. If HV_SHUT_DOWN is low, suspect a bad connection along W8 between the A6 power supply and the 17 CRT driver. 7. If HV_SHUT_DOWN is correct, connect an oscilloscope to A6TP402. Connect the scope probe negative lead to TP401. Set the oscilloscope to the following settings: Sweep time ............................................................ 10 s/div Vertical scale ......................................................... 10 V/div 8. A nearly-sinusoidal waveform, greater than 30 Vp-p, with an approximately +18 Vdc offset, should be observed. 9. If the waveform is a dc voltage near 0 Vdc with narrow, positive- and negative-going pulses, the A6A1 HV module is faulty. If the waveform is a dc voltage near +18 Vdc with narrow, positive- and negative-going pulses, connect the probe to TP403. 10.If the waveform at TP403 is a sawtooth waveform with a 1.8 V amplitude, the A6A1 HV module is faulty. If the TP403 waveform has pulses similar to those on TP402, the A6 power supply is probably faulty.

662

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section A6 Power Supply Assembly

CRT Supply Dropping Out (8564E and 8565E)

See function block K of A6 power supply schematic diagram in the component-level information binder. The CRT supply is a separate switching supply which provides the +110 Vdc for the A17 CRT driver from a winding on the A6A1 HV module. The CRT supply operates at approximately 30 kHz. The exact frequency is determined by the inductance of the primary winding of A6A1T1 and A6C407. The supply will only operate if the HV_SHUT_DOWN line is high. If the power supply keeps dropping out, there is probably a short on the A17 CRT driver assembly. 1. Disconnect W8 from A6J4. 2. Connect an IC clip to U401 and connect a jumper between U401 pin 10 and TP308 (+5 Vdc). 3. Connect voltmeter to TP405 and press LINE to turn the analyzer on. 4. Check TP405 for a voltage of approximately +110 Vdc. It will probably measure higher since there is no load on the supply. 5. If the voltage at TP405 is correct, suspect a short on A17. If the voltage at TP405 is not correct, check U401 pin 8 for a sawtooth signal. The sawtooth should be at-topped and about 5 Vp-p at a frequency of about 30 kHz. 6. If the sawtooth is not at-topped, suspect U402A and its associated circuitry. 7. If the sawtooth is correct, check the base of Q401 for 30 kHz pulses. 8. If the duty cycle is high, but there is no +110 Vdc, suspect the bridge rectier, CR401 through CR404.

Blanking Signal (8564E and 8565E)

1. Connect an oscilloscope probe to A2J202 pin 3. Connect the oscilloscope ground lead to TP3. Set the oscilloscope to the following settings: Sweep time ................................................................ 2 ms/div Vertical scale .............................................................. 1 V/div 2. If a 4 Vp-p signal is not seen, the A2 controller assembly is faulty. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 with the oscilloscope probe on A2J202 pin 14. 4. Set the oscilloscope to the following settings: Sweep time ................................................................. 1 s/div Vertical scale .............................................................. 2 V/div

Chapter 13

663

Display/Power Supply Section A6 Power Supply Assembly

5. Connect the positive probe lead to A2J202 pin 15. This is the blanking output. 6. TTL-level pulses should be observed. If the signal is either always high or always low, the display will be blanked; suspect the A2 controller assembly. 7. If the signals on A2J202 pins 3, 14, and 15 are correct, troubleshoot the A17 CRT driver.

Buck Regulator Control

See function block H of the A6 power supply schematic diagram in the component-level information binder. The buck regulator control pulse-width modulates the buck regulator and provides a synchronized signal to the DC-DC converter control circuitry. The buck regulator control has two feedback paths. The rst is the output of the buck regulator, which provides coarse regulation. The second is the feedback circuit which samples and compares the +5 Vdc output of the output rectier. U202B and associated circuitry senses the output of the input rectier and will turn off U203 if the voltage at TP108 is less than approximately +170 Vdc. Also, it will not allow U203 to start up until this voltage exceeds +215 Vdc. A low on the output of U202B will also clear the overcurrent latch in the DC-DC converter control circuitry. Thermal shutdown occurs when RT201, mounted on the main heatsink, reaches a temperature of 100 C. When this occurs, the voltage at U203 pin 13 exceeds 0.6 V and inhibits pulses to the buck regulator. R203, R204, U211, and associated circuitry provide feedforward for U203. This makes the loop gain independent of input line voltage and cancels 120 Hz ripple by more than 10 dB. U202C and its associated circuitry permit the power supply to start up at low line voltages at low temperatures. At low line voltages U202C will draw charge away from C206 through R205. This allows the buck regulator to turn on and draw current through the thermistors in the input rectier. This warms up the thermistors, thereby decreasing their resistance and increasing the voltage at TP108. When the voltage is sufciently high at TP108, the output of U202C will open and C206 will be allowed to charge normally. U202A converts the sawtooth at TP204 to a squarewave to drive the DC-DC Converter Control circuitry. The frequency of the sawtooth is determined by the resistance at pin 7 of U203 and the capacitance at pin 8 of U203.

664

Chapter 13

Display/Power Supply Section A6 Power Supply Assembly

DC-DC Converter Control

See function block I of A6 power supply schematic diagram in the component-level information binder. The DC-DC converter control circuitry divides the 80 kHz squarewave from U202A and generates two complementary 40 kHz squarewaves to drive the FETs in the DC-DC converter. Also, U202D and its associated circuitry monitor the voltage across sense resistor R116 in the DC-DC converter. When the current through the FETs in the DC-DC converter exceeds 1.8 A, the voltage across R116 will cause the output of U202D to go high. This sets a latch in U204 which turns off U203.

Power Up
See function block M of the A6 power supply schematic diagram in the component-level information binder. The power up circuitry generates the PWR UP signal, which tells the microprocessor that the supplies are up and stable. PWR UP will go high when the +5 Vdc supply exceeds +4.99 Vdc. PWR UP will go low when this voltage is less than +4.895 Vdc. Once PWR UP is set low, it will stay low for at least 50 ms before going high, even if the +5 Vdc supply exceeds +4.99 Vdc before 50 ms have elapsed.

Chapter 13

665

14

Component-Level Information Packets

671

Component-Level Information Packets Introduction

Introduction
Component-Level Information Packets (CLIPs) contain a parts list, a component-location diagram, and schematic diagrams for selected instrument assemblies. A new CLIP with a new part number is issued whenever an assembly is changed. Updated or replacement CLIPs may be ordered through your local Agilent Technologies Sales or Service Ofce. Use the CLIP part numbers provided in Table 14-1. A single volume CLIP set that contains all repairable assemblies for the 8560 E-series and EC-series is also available. Order this CLIP set by using part number 5967-8582. With the exception of the A2 controller board, the A1A1 keyboard, and the A17 display driver board, the E-series assemblies for which CLIPs have been generated are identical to the same assemblies in EC-series instruments. Each of the CLIPs in the CLIP set can also be ordered individually.
NOTE

CLIPs may be unavailable for recently introduced assemblies.

672

Chapter 14

Component-Level Information Packets Introduction

Table 14-1

CLIPs Available for the 8564E, 8564EC, 8565E, and 8565EC Spectrum Analyzers
Board Assembly A1A1 Keyboard (E-series) A1A1 Keyboard (EC-series only) A2 Controller Assembly (EC-series only) A2 Controller Assembly (E-series only) A3 Interface Assembly (E-series, non-Option 007) A3 Interface Assembly (E-series, Option 007) A3 Interface Assembly (E- and EC-series) A4 Log Amplier/Cal Osc Instrument Serial Prex 3337A and above New Assembly New Assembly Assembly Part Number 08562-60140 08563-60162 08563-90160 CLIP Part Number 08562-90188* 08563-90222* 08563-90224*

3337A through 3741AA 3743A and above 337A through 3515A 3517A through 3610A 3611A and above 3337A through 3515A 3517A through 3610A 3611A and above 3611A and above

08564-60010 08564-90025 08563-60069 08563-60078 08563-60098 08563-60070 08563-60078 08563-60098 08563-60098

08563-90003 08564-90028* 08563-90102 08563-90117 08563-90141 08563-90103 08563-90117 08563-90141 08563-90017*

3337A through 3407A 3410A through 3514A 3515A through 3524A 3728A and above

08563-60050 08563-60074 08563-60076 08563-60103 08563-60023 08563-60123 08563-60023 08563-60123 08564-60008 08564-60028 08564-60031

08563-90082 08563-90090 08563-90119 08563-90166* 08563-90058 08563-90186* 08563-90058 08563-90186* 08564-90004 08564-90032 08564-90039*

A5 IF Filter (8564)

3337A to 3720A00841 3724A00842 and above

A5 IF Filter (8565)

3337A to 3720A00713 3724A00714 and above

A6 Power Supply

3406A through 3721A 3804A through 3835A 3846A and above

Denotes refurbished board assemblies available. Refurbished board assembly part numbers have 9 as the second digit of the sufx. For example, 08563-69032 is the refurbished part number for board assembly 08563-60032. Same as for A15 Option 103 with SIG ID. * Denotes current version of assembly.

Chapter 14

673

Component-Level Information Packets Introduction

Table 14-1

CLIPs Available for the 8564E, 8564EC, 8565E, and 8565EC Spectrum Analyzers
Board Assembly A6A2 Power Supply Regulator Board A14 Frequency Control Instrument Serial Prex 3337A through 3817A 3818A and above 3337A through 3442A 3510A through 3635A 3641A through 3821A 3835A and above A15 RF Board (Option 103) (with SIG ID) 3337A through 3416A 3423A through 3510A 3514A through 3517A 3551A through 3632A 3635A through 3818A 3821A and above A15 RF Board (Option 103) (without SIG ID) 3337A through 3416A 3423A through 3510A 3514A through 3517A 3551A through 3632A 3635A through 3818A 3821A and above A15 RF Board (Standard) (with SIG ID) 3337A through 3416A 3423A through 3510A 3514A through 3517A 3551A through 3632A 3635A through 3818A 3821A and above Assembly Part Number 08564-60009 08564-60030 08564-60007 08564-60014 08564-60020 08564-60029 08563-60045 08563-60055 08563-60082 08563-60085 08563-60092 08563-60133 08563-60043 08563-60055 08563-60082 08563-60085 08563-60092 08563-60133 08563-60046 08563-60056 08563-60083 08563-60086 08563-60093 08563-60134 CLIP Part Number 08564-90006 08564-90034* 08564-60005 08564-60009 08564-60017 08564-90033* 08563-90072 08563-90111 08563-90121 08563-90128 08563-90163 08563-90200* 08563-90070 08563-90111 08563-90121 08563-90128 08563-90163 08563-90200* 08563-90073 08563-90112 08563-90122 08563-90129 08563-90164 08563-90201*

Denotes refurbished board assemblies available. Refurbished board assembly part numbers have 9 as the second digit of the sufx. For example, 08563-69032 is the refurbished part number for board assembly 08563-60032. Same as for A15 Option 103 with SIG ID

674

Chapter 14

Component-Level Information Packets Introduction

Table 14-1

CLIPs Available for the 8564E, 8564EC, 8565E, and 8565EC Spectrum Analyzers
Board Assembly A15 RF Board (Standard) Instrument Serial Prex 3337A through 3416A 3423A through 3510A 3514A through 3517A 3551A through 3632A 3635A through 3820A 3821A and above A16 Fast ADC (Option 007 in E-series instruments only) A17 LCD Driver (EC-series) A17 CRT Driver (E-series) 3337A and above Assembly Part Number 08563-60044 08563-60054 08563-60081 08563-60084 08563-60091 08563-60132 08563-60030 CLIP Part Number 08563-90071 08563-90110 08563-90120 08563-90127 08563-90162 08563-90199* 08563-90076*

New Assembly 3337A through 3432A 3442A through 3623A 3626A through 3738A 3741A and above

08563-60161 08562-60166 08563-60077 08563-60101 08560-60122 08562-60042

08563-90221* 08562-90193 08563-90113 8563-90153 08563-90182* 08562-90115*

A19 GPIB

3337A and above

Denotes refurbished board assemblies available. Refurbished board assembly part numbers have 9 as the second digit of the sufx. For example, 08563-69032 is the refurbished part number for board assembly 08563-60032. * Denotes the current version of assembly.

Same as for A15 Option 103 with SIG ID.

Chapter 14

675

Index

Numerics 1 MHz resolution bandwidth problems, 465 10 kHz and 3 kHz resolution bandwidth problems, 467 10 MHz reference adjustment OCXO, 136 TCXO, 140 10.6925 MHz VCXO troubleshooting, 451 10.7 MHz and 4.8 kHz IF lter troubleshooting, 450 10.7 MHz IF lter troubleshooting, 450 100 MHz oscillator, 537 100 MHz VCXO, 537 16 MHz PLL adjustment, 155 1st LO distribution amplier removal and replacement, 222 1st LO problems, multiband sweeps, 573 1st LO span problems, 572 3 kHz and 10 kHz resolution bandwidth problems, 467 30 kHz resolution bandwidth problems, 466 300 Hz to 3 kHz resolution bandwidth problems, 472 3rd amp/2nd IF align adjustment, 71 4.8 kHz and 10.7 MHz IF lter troubleshooting, 450 4.8 kHz IF lter troubleshooting, 449 600 MHz adjustment, 159 600 MHz oscillator, 542 A A10 YIG-tuned lter/mixer (RYTHM) removal and replacement, A10/A12 RYTHM/SBTX removal and replacement, A11 YTO removal and replacement, A12 BHF-tuned lter/mixer (SBTX) removal and replacement, A13 second converter removal and replacement, A14 and A15 RF assembly removal, 231 A14 and A15 RF assembly replacement, 232 A16 fast adc driver removal and replacement, A17 crt driver

227 227 228 227 230

234

removal and replacement, 234 A2, A3, A4, and A5 removal, 202 replacement, 203 A21 OCXO removal and replacement, 256 A4 limiter phase adjustment, 171 A4 linear amplier failures, 444 A4 linear delity adjustment, 172 A4 log amplier troubleshooting, 443 A4 log delity adjustment, 173 A5 IF assembly problems, 455 A6 power supply removal, 212 replacement, 211, 213 A7 LO multiplier/amplier removal and replacement, 222 A8 low band mixer removal and replacement, 223 A9 input attenuator removal and replacement, 224 abbreviations, 264 access to internal assemblies, 177 accessories, 269 ADC troubleshooting, 400 ADC/interface section, 360 addresses of sales and service ofces, 44 adjustment adjustable components table, 51, 93 factory selected components, 96 related adjustments table, 51, 92 safety considerations, 49, 91 tools, 50, 92 adjustment procedures, 90, 159 10 MHz reference adjustment, OCXO, 136 10 MHz reference adjustment, TCXO, 140 16 MHz PLL adjustment, 155 3rd amp/2nd IF align, 71 600 MHz reference adjustment, 159 cal oscillator amplitude, 116, 164 cal out adjustment, 72 calibrator amplitude adjustment, 134 dc log adjustment, 76 DC log ampliers, 121, 169 demodulator adjustment, 142 display, 102 external mixer amplitude adjustment, 147

external mixer bias adjustment, 145 fast zero span, 69 front end cal, 73 high voltage power supply adjustment, 99 IF amplitude, 75, 116, 164 IF bandpass adjustment, 110 IF bandpass poles, 74 intensity, 106 LOMA adjustments, 68 sampling oscillator, 78 sampling oscillator adjustment, 126 signal ID oscillator adjustment, 151 YTO adjustment, 64, 66, 130 adjustments recommended test equipment, 163 Agilent 8561E/63E options information, 29 Agilent Technologies sales and service ofces, 44 AM/FM demodulator troubleshooting, 448, 479 amplitude adjustments, 116 analog bus drivers troubleshooting, 407 analog bus timing, 408 attenuator, 354 audio amplier troubleshooting, 479 automatic IF adjustment, 437 automatic IF adjustment parameters, 438 B B1 fan removal and replacement, battery caution, 238 removal and replacement, warning, 238 BHF-tuned lter/mixer removal and replacement, blank display, 637 blanking, 492 blanking signal, 647 block diagram description, 351 BT1 battery removal and replacement, C cable color code, 178 cables, 204, 208

237 238 227

238

Index

681

Index

cables, pin out, 319 cal oscillator, 359 amplitude (A4R826) range troubleshooting, 471 low-pass lter troubleshooting, 478 troubleshooting, 469 unlock at start of IF adjust, 470 unlock conditions troubleshooting, 470 cal out adjustment adjustment, 72 CAL OUTPUT, 539, 544 calibration menu, 322 calibrator amplitude adjustment, 134 center frequency, harmonic number, 569 character problem, 499 chassis parts, 279, 288 components adjustable components table, 51, 93 controller block diagram, 517 converter second, 356, 610 third, 356 cover assembly parts, 279, 287 cover removal/replacement, 179 CRT driver, 364 removal, 191 replacement, 197 crt driver removal and replacement, 234 CRT display, 641 CRT, simplied block diagram, 642 CRT, troubleshooting using the TAM, 643 crystal lter adjustments, 114 D dc log adjustment adjustment, 76 DC log amplier adjustments, 121, 169 demodulator adjustment, 142 demodulator troubleshooting, AM/FM, 448 detector/mixer troubleshooting, 453 diagnostic functions, 322 Diagnostic software

troubleshooting A4 cal osc using diagnostic software, 431 troubleshooting A5 section using diagnostic software, 435 diagnostic software RF section, 595 digital signature analysis microprocessor, 490 display adjustment, 102 ASM, 363 jumbled, 494 line variations, 499 problems, 491 display section, 363 E EEROM, 362 removal and replacement, 254 electrostatic discharge, 33 equipment required, 36 error codes 200 to 299, 329 error messages, 326, 327, 350 accessory module error messages 800 to 899, 349 AMPC ram check, 349 amplitude error message 582, 344 automatic IF error messages 400 to 599, 334 battery error message 718, 348 cal unlock error message 499, 339 digital and checksum errors, 346 EEROM checksum error messages 700 to 704, 346 elimination, 327 fractional N PLL error message 337, 331 LOMA leveling loop error messages 338 to 340, 332 microprocessor error message 717, 348 model/option number error messages 719, 720, 348 option modules, 349 programmed ROM error messages 705 to 710, 347 programming errors (100 to 150), 327 RAM check error messages 711 to 716, 348 sampling oscillator error message 335, 331

sampling oscillator error message 355, 333 span accuracy calibration error messages 356 to 361, 333 system error messages 750 to 759, 349 user generated error messages 900 to 999, 350 viewing error messages, 327 YTO loop error message 331, 331 YTO loop error messages 300 to 301, 330 YTO loop error messages 317 to 320, 330 YTO loop settling error messages 351 to 354, 332 ESD requirements, 33 external mixer amplitude adjustment, 147 bias adjustment, 145 F FADC Circuits (Option 007) 8-bit ash ADC, 411 control word, 411 GAINX2, 411 peak/pit detection, 411 RAM, static, 411 video input section, 411 FADC Control Circuits (Option 007) circular address, 411 clock sample, 411 comparator, 411 control registers, 411 control word, 411 counter, 411 CPU, 411 post-trigger counter, 411 reference check, 411 reference generator, 411 trigger, 411 video trigger, 411 fan removal and replacement, 237 fast zero span adjustment, 69 lter adjustment, 110 rmware, 362 rmware-dependent part numbers, 264 atness compensation ampliers, 356 atness control troubleshooting, 389 FM coil, 558

682

Index

Index

fractional N divider, 566 oscillator, 551 phase noise, 576 span problems, 572 troubleshooting, 531 fractional N PLL, 359, 561 unlocked, 560 frequency control (A14) assembly removal, 231 frequency control (A14) assembly replacement, 232 frequency control assembly troubleshooting, 612 frequency control block diagram, 581 frequency counter, 505, 507 frequency counter prescaler/conditioner troubleshooting, 448 frequency-count marker problems, 503, 504 front end cal adjustment, 73 front frame removal, 191 replacement, 197 front frame parts, 283, 293 front frame(EC), assembly, 180 G general information serial number label description, 30 graticule problem, 499 H harmonic number versus center frequency, 569 high and low band problems, 601 high band problems, 600 high voltage power supply adjustment, 99 I IF adjustment, automatic, 438 IF amplier, 356 IF amplitude adjustment, 75 IF amplitude adjustments, 116, 164 IF assembly, 360 IF assembly troubleshooting, 437, 455 IF bandpass adjustment, 110 IF bandpass poles

adjustment, 74 IF lter troubleshooting, 10.7 MHz, 450 IF lter troubleshooting, 4.8 kHz, 449 IF lter troubleshooting, 4.8 kHz and 10.7 MHz, 450 IF lter, 4.8 kHz and 10.7 MHz problems, 450 IF gain uncertainty performance test failures, 441 IF parameters adjusted, 438 IF section, 359 IF section general troubleshooting, 428 IF signature problems, 462 IF signature troubleshooting, 456 input attenuator, 354, 605 removal and replacement, 224 input switch problems, 451 instrument variations, 29 intensity adjustments, 106 intensity problems, 498 interface section, 360 interface strobe troubleshooting, 409 internal assemblies, access to, 177 isolation amplier problems, 453 J jumper write protect/enable, 322 K keyboard problems, 382, 516 L LC lter adjustments, 112 LCD (EC), assembly, 180 LCD, display, 635 LCD, simplied block diagram, 636 LCD, troubleshooting the, 637 limiter phase adjustment, 171 limiter problems, 453 line generator, 491, 495 line switch (E), assembly, 244 line switch (EC), assembly, 183 line switch cable removal, 244 replacement, 250 linear amplier troubleshooting, 444 linear delity adjustment, 124, 172

lines dim, 499 LO distribution amplier, 551 removal and replacement, 222 LO Multiplier/Amplier removal and replacement, 222 LO multiplier/amplier, 354 LO multiplier/amplier adjustments, 68 LO multiplier/amplier troubleshooting, 602 LO span problems, 572, 573 LO switch troubleshooting, 452 Log amplier, 359 log amplier adjustments, 121 detector/mixer troubleshooting, 453 failures, 443 input switch troubleshooting, 451 isolation amplier troubleshooting, 453 limiter troubleshooting, 453 troubleshooting, 443 log expand functions, 361 log expand troubleshooting, 393 log delity adjustment, 124, 173 log gain compensation troubleshooting, 453 log offset compensation troubleshooting, 453 log offset troubleshooting, 393 LOMA, 354 adjustments, 68 removal and replacement, 222 troubleshooting, 602 low and high band problems, 601 low band mixer, 604 removal and replacement, 223 low band mixer (serial prex 3641A), 354 low band problems, 599 low-pass lter troubleshooting, 478 M main chassis parts, 279, 288 main coil, 558 manufacturers code list, 265 marker problems, 503, 504 mechanical parts, 279, 288 mixer amplitude adjustment, 147 mixer bias adjustment, 145 mixer/detector log amplier troubleshooting, 453

Index

683

Index

O OCXO, 585 OCXO adjustment, 136 OCXO removal and replacement, 256 offset lock loop, 358, 547 offset PLL phase noise, 576 option 908, 269 option 909, 269 ordering information, 261 P packaging, 35, 36 packaging part numbers, 36 part ordering, 261 peak detectors troubleshooting, 397 performance test failures troubleshooting, 441 performance tests recommended test equipment, 36, 37 phase locked loops, 534 phase noise fractional N, 576 int/ext reference, 576 locked spans, 575 offset PLL, 576 problems, 575 unlocked spans, 575 YTO, 576 PLL locked at wrong frequency, 534 postscaler, 548, 561 power cable connections, 636 power supply, 654 cover, 243 removal, 212 replacement, 211, 213 section, 363 power supply (E), assembly, 212 power supply (EC), assembly, 209 power supply adjustment, high voltage, 99 power supply warning, 635 power supply, simplied block diagram, 655 prescaler, 548 preselector peaking, 388 probe power socket, 637 R rack slide kit, 269 real time DAC, 388 rear dress panel removal, 239

replacement, 241 rear frame, 295 removal, 239 replacement, 241 rear frame parts, 283 recommended test equipment, 36, 37 reference adjustment 60 MHz, 159 OCXO, 136 TCXO, 140 reference attenuator adjustment, 120 reference designations, 264 reference divide chain, 548 reference PLL, 357 phase noise, 576 unlocked 100 MHz VCXO, 537 unlocked 600 MHz SAWR, 542 required tools, 178 resolution bandwidth 1 MHz problems, 465 3 kHz and 10 kHz problems, 467 30 kHz problems, 466 300 Hz to 3 kHz problems, 472 resolution bandwidth performance test failures, 442 returning instruments for service, 35 RF (A15) assembly removal, 231 RF (A15) assembly replacement, 232 RF assembly troubleshooting, 621 RF block diagram, 584 RF gain DACs, 389 RF parts, 279 RF section, 353 RF section parts, 291 rosenfell detector troubleshooting, 399 RPG problems, 382 RPG, assembly, 201 RYTHM, 354 removal and replacement, 227 S sales and service ofces, 44 sales ofces, 44 sampler, 577 sampler IF, 556, 577 sampler troubleshooting, 532 sampling oscillator, 547, 551 adjustment, 78 sampling oscillator adjustment, 126 SAWR, 542

SBTX, 355 removal and replacement, 227 scale delity performance test failures, 442 scan ramps, 573 second converter, 356, 610 removal and replacement, 230 second IF amplier, 356 serial numbers, 30 service functions, 322 service kit, 32 service kit contents, 32 service menu, 322 service ofces, 44 service tools, 32 shipping shipping container, 35, 36 signal ID oscillator adjustment, 151 SLODA, 551 Software, diagnostic troubleshooting A4 cal osc using diagnostic software, 431 troubleshooting A5 section using diagnostic software, 435 span >20 MHz, 570 2 MHz, 572 2.02 MHz to 20 MHz, 570 span accuracy problems, 568 span problems, 569, 572 multiband sweeps, 573 speaker troubleshooting, 479 state storage problems, 515 step gains troubleshooting, 468 surface acoustic wave resonator, 542 sweep generator, 579 sweep generator troubleshooting, 479 sweep ramp, 573 sweep times, 579 sweeping, 357 span accuracy, 568 YTO, 552 switched barium-tuned mixer, 355 switching LO distribution amplier, 551 synthesizer section, 357, 528 simplied block diagram, 580 troubleshooting, 527 T TCXO adjustment, 140 test equipment, 36

684

Index

Index

test equipment list, 163 test points, 317 third converter, 356 third converter check, 601 third LO driver amplier, 541, 545 tools adjustment, 50, 92 trace storage problems, 515 triggering, 362 triggering problems, 385 troubleshooting programming errors (100 to 150), 327 troubleshooting instrument, 324 troubleshooting, blank CRT, 645 troubleshooting, blank LCD, 637 troubleshooting, blanking signal, 647 troubleshooting, blown line fuse, 660 troubleshooting, CRT focus, 650 troubleshooting, CRT intensity, 652 troubleshooting, dead power supply, 658 troubleshooting, dim LCD, 639 troubleshooting, display distortion, 648 troubleshooting, high voltage supplies, 662 troubleshooting, kickstarting, 661 troubleshooting, low voltage supplies, 661 troubleshooting, the LCD, 637 U unlocked PLL, 535 user generated error messages, 350 V VCO, 562 VCO bias voltages, 565 VCXO troubleshooting, 10.6925 MHz, 451 video circuits troubleshooting, 391 video lter troubleshooting, 395 video functions, 361 video gating problems, 385 video MUX troubleshooting, 394, 454 video offset troubleshooting, 447 voltage tuned oscillator, 562

W W1 power-cable connections, 636 W3 line switch cable removal, 244 replacement, 250 wire assembly cables, 269 write protect/enable jumper, 322 Y YIG-tuned lter/mixer, 354 removal and replacement, 227 YIG-tuned oscillator adjustment, 64, 66, 130 YTO, 355 adjustment, 64, 66, 130 FM coil span problems, 570 main coil span problems, 570 phase noise, 576 removal and replacement, 228 sweeping, 552 troubleshooting, 531 YTO PLL, 358 unlocked, 551 Z zero span problems, 502

Index

685